Service manual

MB Es030

Москва 2002 г.
MODEL RANK PARTCODE PARTDESCR QP\CNF\YR Consumables
TD420 1 7175972 Hd-eide 0.146
TD420 2 7045011 Developer d5 (doos) 0.065 yes
TD420 3 7069008 R photoconductor packed 9 0.041 yes
TD420 4 7083736 Wire,paper guide 0.041
TD420 5 7083737 Rack,rear 0.041
TD420 6 2912651 Cleaning blade cpl 0.033 yes
TD420 7 5584470 Pba,cpu 0.033
TD420 8 2926645 Ntc resistor assy 0.024
TD420 9 5584710 Pba,cpu scanner 0.024
TD420 10 5600401 R Development,unit,oce 96 0.024 yes
TD420 11 7017987 Sheet,weight-assy 0.024
TD420 13 7176292 Hd eide 0.024
TD420 15 1302505 Datacable,5dsub-15dsub 0.016
TD420 16 1302507 Ssr,24v dc 20a 0.016
TD420 17 2954987 Plate, glass-double face 0.016
TD420 18 2999767 Sheet,long 0.016
TD420 19 5584500 Pba.low-volt-sup 0.016
TD420 20 5600437 Printhead assy tds 400 0.016
TD420 21 7094709 Transfer,assy (tds400) 0.016
TD420 24 7137330 Tds400,gb qrm 0.016
TD420 25 1999141 Guide 0.008
TD420 26 2333325 Aandrijfriem 0.008
TD420 27 2373017 Rol 0.008
TD420 28 2912357 Actuator assy 0.008
TD420 29 2912538 Housing,sensor 0.008
TD420 30 2912676 Pulley,timing belt-48 3m 0.008
TD420 31 2934881 Damper, 100w 0.008
TD420 32 2945056 Toner afvalzak 0.008
TD420 33 2945066 Bag,waste-toner 0.008
TD420 34 2999802 Corona wire compleet 0.008 yes
TD420 35 5584481 Pba,high-voltage-supply 0.008
TD420 36 5600348 Cleaning assy 0.008
TD420 37 7005968 Toner doseerunit 0.008
TD420 38 7078399 Sensor,adjusted(9600) 0.008
TD420 39 7083733 Cover,right 0.008
TD420 40 7083734 Cover,left 0.008
TD420 41 7095236 Spice-III assy 0.008
TD420 42 7128983 Actuator,assy 0.008
TD420 43 7208800 Console, universal char. 0.008
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad Fuse and Transfer quality.

Description
Without a dewpreventer under very moistures conditions (17·C/80%RH and 28·C/80%RH) the
fuse quality and the transfer quality are not OK:

With a dewpreventer for roll 1 the fuse quality and the transfer are good.
For roll 2 the moisture content of the paper is higher.
It is recommended to load roll 1 with the most sensitive paper, and roll 2 with specialities or
small sizes.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2402-001 Dew preventer (Optional) 971

18.06.2002 1
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad fusing on leading edge.

Description
When the engine in not used for a long period and the customer environment is cold
and humid,
the first 20 or 30 prints are not fused at the leading edge.

The criteria for the print quality are valid under the following conditions:
The adjustments of the machines are carried out accordingly the procedures in the
documentation.
The condition of the environment is:
Temperature between 20 - 27 degrees Celsius
Relative humidity between 30 - 60 % RH
The print material is according to the Oc· norm.

In the user documentation in Appendix A summary and tables, section Material

sizes there is a note
Attention: Avoid storing paper in rooms where temperature and humidity
are high. Also, avoid dust and direct sunlight. Wrap unused paper in plastic
to prevent it absorbing moisture.

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black stripes in feed direction

Description
Undefined black stripes / spots in feed direction

Tests / Checks:
Too many moisture at the photoconductor
Check if the cover plate assy Z0206-13 is mounted in a correct way.

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Light/dark stripes in paper feed direction (zebra-stripes)

Description
light/dark stripes in the feed direction occur (like zebra-stripes).
A disturbtion of the bitmap occurs.

Tests / Checks:
Check the contacts of the spice-STP cable.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

posibly a distortion in the spice-STP cable, an interruption of the bitmap occurs.

Part Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1302.566 Spice-STP Cable Check 159

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No contrast with copy / digital background with copy photo

mode
Description

Example normal copy: no contrast is

visible.

Example bleuprint copy: no contrast is

visible.

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Example copy Photo mode: digital

background over full copy.

Print quality is normal!

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1102-015 SPU PBA 10PBA03 replace 390

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printed image (partly) out of focus / density difference between

heads.
Description
This problem is visible with high resolution prints, it could be possible that it is not visible with
test print 51, postscript and CAD prints, but that it occurs with RTL prints.

examples:

One or more print heads can be out of focus due to torsion of the print head assembly

Cause:
1) cover of the print head to tight mounted *).
2) print head not well positioned (caused by stiff turning-points).
3) print head blocked by transport security bolt.
4) Engine not in level; torsion in frame.

solutions:

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

1) mount the cover of the print head with some tolerance.

2) take care that the turning-points of the print head run smoothly.
3) take care that the print head is not obstructed by the transport security bolt of the print head.

4) take care that the engine is placed on a leveled floor.

*)
at this moment, the cover of the print head is mounted with shouldered bolts, so the cover has
some tolerance.

Tests / Checks:
Set SDS test 04-1-003 to 11, make test print 51, and examine the K1 Image.
If the print head is a little out of focus, the effect will be most visible with a low light intensity
setting.

Examples

04-1-003=20 14-1-003=11

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scrambled print
Description
Prints are scrambled after powering on the TDS400 and the Power Logic Controller.

After turning on the TDS400 and Power Logic Controller, it could occur that the prints are
scrambled due to wrong initialization of the communication between the TDS400, and the
Power Logic Controller.

Method:
First Switch ON the Power Logic Controller, and when it is awake, switch ON the TDS400.

Workarround:
If the TDS400 was turned on before the Power Logic Controller was awake, and the prints are
scramled, turn the TDS400 OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Background
Description
The image is printed correctly. However, the print shows background over the entire width and
length.

Tests / Checks:
Make a test print with SDS test 51

l Clean Charging unit

If background is still present, check the lifetime of PM parts

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-19 02PBA01 Grid PBA Check 080

0502-90 Developer Check 167
lifetime
0202-01 Charging Assy Check Clean/Repla 049
ce
0502-11 05B1 Sensor DEVTONCONSE Check 189
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001

2202-02 22PBA01 CPU Check Replace 855

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Background on copy
Description
The copy of the scanned original exhibit background.

Tests / Checks:
Make a copy of the test original.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-65 Original glass Clean 321

1002-03 Mirror Clean 363
1002-02 10PBA02 CCD Interface Adj. 390

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black / white stripes (absorber stripes)

Description

Black lines in white areas and white stripes in black areas (scratched image).

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0802-01 Absorber wire Check 291

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black dots
Description
There are black dots on the image of the print.
These dots appear with every rotation of the photoconductor (25 cm).

Note:
Use the Photoconductor Quality Chart (2550-20 ) to determine if the spots are within the
specifications.

Remark:
Small black dots can occur after a new photoconductor is installed.
These small black dots disappear after 50 to 100 A0 prints.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black lines/stripes
Description
There are unwanted black lines and/or stripes on the image of the print in the feed direction.

Grid wires are polluted at one point.

There is more charge on the photoconductor at this point of pollution.
Weak lines and/or stripes of approximately 3mm occur in the feed direction.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-06 Corona wire assy Check 041

18.06.2002 14
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black print
Description
The print engine produces a print which is completely black.
There is no image on the print material.
There is only toner on the print material.
The photoconductor surface is not charged.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-06 Corona wire [ cpl ] Check 041

2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043

18.06.2002 15
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black stripe(s) in feed direction (copy only)

Description
The copy of the scanned original exhibit black stripes in feed direction.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0904-12 White plate Check 324

18.06.2002 16
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Difference in density in grey areas

Description
Some grey areas of the print show a left right difference.
The area (K1) of the SDS test 51shows a difference at the place of the LED Print head
overlaps.
The light output is not the same for each of the LED Print head.

Tests / Checks:
SDS test 51

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 17
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Dirty print
Description
The print image shows dirts (unwanted toner parts).
Reprinting can be seen.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0702-02 Cleaning blade assy Replace 241

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001
0602-07 Transfer Corona wire assy Check 201
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Replace 043
Toner Check 983
Print material Check 981

18.06.2002 18
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Horizontal and vertical alignment are not correct

Description
The horizontal and/or vertical alignment are not correct

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 19
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image out of focus on copy

Description
The copy of the scanned original is not sharp.
The specification 3 lp/mm cannot be seen clearly visible.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0904-12 White original plate Check 324

1002-02 10PBA02 CCD Interface Adj. 390
1002-01 Camera Adj. 361

18.06.2002 20
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image too dark

Description
The image of the print is too dark.
Background can be seen.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-11 05B1 Sensor DEVTONCONSE Check 189

2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

2202-02 22PBA01 CPU Check Replace 855

18.06.2002 21
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Leading edge first print different than the next prints

Description
1. When a new roll is loaded or the roll is changed, the leading edge of the first print is
shorter or longer than the next prints.
2. During multicopy the leading edge at the first print is ca. 5 mm longer and trailing edge is
ca. 3 mm longer.
The rest of the prints are okay. This will happens again after starting a new job.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-57 12B3 PRULEADSE Check 452

2302-04 15Y1 PTRINPCL Replace 574

18.06.2002 22
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Light copy
Description
Ligth copy of the scanned original.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1002-02 10PBA02 CCD Interface Adj. 390

18.06.2002 23
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Light print
Description
The print engine produces a print,but this print shows a (very) light image.
Black image areas are not filled equally.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

0502-11 05B1 Sensor Check 189
0602-07 Corona wire assy Check 201
0602-02 Right block Check 238
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
Toner Check 983
Print material Check 981

18.06.2002 24
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Magnification not 100%

Description
The copy of the scanned original in not exactly reproduced (100% or 1:1), (out of specifications
)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Feed direction SDS

09-1-001
Width and right alignment. SDS
10-7-004

18.06.2002 25
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Optical density too low

Description
The print image has an optical density " OD " which is too low.
Black areas and lines are not filled completely.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-06 Charge corona wire assy Check 041

0602-07 Transfer corona wire assy Check 201
2202-01 22PBA04 High Voltage Check Replace 043

18.06.2002 26
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Poster mode prints have light, dark and black trails.

Description
The quality for prints and copies in normal mode is good.
The quality of prints and copies is poor, if the poster mode is selected.
In poster mode, the light output of each LED Print head differs.
Consequently the prints and copies shows a light, dark or white trail in feed direction.
The LED Print head crossing is clearly visible between the trails.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 27
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Re-printing
Description
The print shows 6 mm tracks. In black areas these black tracks are glossy.
These 6 mm tracks are in the feed direction and always in the same place.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-21 Roll Check 318

18.06.2002 28
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scrambled print after test 54 (R1.1)

Description
After running SDS test 54, the next (normal) print is scrambled.

Workaround R1.1:

Switch off and on the printer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 29
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Toner polution at one side

Description
Toner pollutes the right hand-side of the print.
The print shows dirt of toner. The developer unit loses toner.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-12 07PBA02 Eraser PBA Check 080

18.06.2002 30
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White dots
Description
There are white dots on black areas of the print.
These dots occur with every rotation of the photoconductor (25 cm)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001

18.06.2002 31
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White line
Description
The Line(s) occurs in the feed direction due to a fault in the horizontal alignment of the print
head, pollution of the brush in the developing unit or pollution of the print head
The line occurs due to the horizontal alignment of the print head. The line can be seen in the
change from print head 1/2 or 2/3.
The LED print head is polluted at one point. The photoconductor is not (totally) discharged at
this point. A white line can be seen in images.
The brush of the developing unit is polluted. No toner can be transfered to the photoconductor
at this point.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-01 Developing unit Check 163

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 32
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White print
Description
The print engine produces a print which is completely white.
No image (toner) is transfered to the print material.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-01 Developing unit Check 169
2302-15 Timing belt Check 881
0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001
0402-01 Print head assy Check Replace 121
0102-10 Encoder assy Check Replace 160
SDS
04-1-016

Print 54

18.06.2002 33
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White stripe(s) in feed direction

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0904-12 Original plate Check 324

0902-65 Original glass plate Check 321
2204-01 22 PBA01 CPU Scanner Check Replace 350

18.06.2002 34
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The image is shifted outside the sheet by manual feed and

landscape orientation
Description
When a drawing of "landscape" orientation is printed to manual feed, the image is shifted out of the sheet.
In case of an A1 "landscape" print, the image is shifted out of the print area of the drum.

Work around: Print the drawing with a portrait orientation.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 35
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Frayed cut
Description
The leading and trailing edge of the print material is not cut straight and/or completely.
The edge is frayed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1220-05 Linear knife Check 441

18.06.2002 36
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Manual feed copies missing after error situation. (R1.1)

Description
After solving an error with a manual feed job, the printer does not ask to feed a sheet again at the job recovery.
When the timeout expires the job is deleted.

Workaround R1.1:

Feed the sheet anyway.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 37
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No original feed
Description
The original can not be fed in.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09B1 09-2-001 348
0902-030 Motor assy 09M1 09-6-001 351

0902-034 Step motor control PBA 09-6-001 350

2204-004 22PBA02 Power Supply Check 390
2204-001 22PBA01 CPU PBA Check 390

18.06.2002 38
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original skew
Description
Skew of the original during the scan.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-60 Profile assy Check
0902-65 Original glass plate Check Clean 321

18.06.2002 39
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Roll x empty" message directly followed by "Load roll"

message
Description
The printer displays a "Roll x empty" message directly followed by "Load roll" message.

Signal name: PRFRUNSEx

Fault condition:

Tests / Checks:
l Check for any obstructions an the paper path, if the paper is obstructed between the knife
and the input sensor "15B1" , the paper will be retracted followed by a "Roll x empty"
message directly followed by "Load roll" message.
l Check if the roll is not unwind.
l Check if the paper is not too loose on the core.
l Check if the support bearing on the left backside is blocked.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-121 PRURUNSEx 12-2-009 452

12-2-011

1204-030 Support Bearing Check Replace 480

Roll is unwind Check 990
Paper loose on core Check 990

18.06.2002 40
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Alert! Cover was previously removed (system with monitor)

Description
When the left side cover was removed, the "Alert! Cover was previously removed" appears on
the openings screen when the controller starts.
To remove this message:
1. Restart the controller
"F2 setup" appears on the right top corner of the screen
2. Press F2
3. Type the password to enter the BIOS
4. Scroll to: [System Security / Chassis Intrusion]
5. Set [Chassis Intrusion] to: [enable]
6. Press <Esc>
7. Select [save Changes and Exit]

The controller starts without the alert message on the screen.

18.06.2002 41
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Input too late (error code 12706)

Description
Signal name: PTRSYNSE
Fault condition: The sensor is active too late after the paper is feed from the roll unit.

Error code: 12706 See SDS test 32.1

Tests / Checks:
Check if the paperpath is not blocked

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-079 Paper synchronisation 15-2-003 Replace
sensor, 15B2
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 42
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction Error types (handling)

Description
Error-types do not define the consequence of the error, but the way the error is handled.

The following types can be distinguished:

Abbreviation Name Error-code extension

FE Fatal Error 0
PE Permanent Error 1/2
MRE Machine Recoverable Error 5/6
ORE Operator Recoverable Error 7
OWAR Operator WARning 8
SWAR Service WARning 9

Fatal error (FE)

Permanent error (PE)
Machine recoverable error (MRE)
Operator recoverable error (ORE)
Operator Warnings (OWAR)
Service Warnings (SWAR)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 43
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Is waiting for the controller message (in combination with a

GX150 controller)
Description
The Printer/Scanner shows a "waiting for controller message" .

Tests / Checks:
Open the GX150 controller and check if the SPICE board is well installed.
It is possible that the green plastic bracket is unlocked during transport and that the SPICE
board PCI connector is (partly) unplugged.
Lock the green bracket with a tie-rap.

In new delivered controllers the green bracket is secured with a tie-rap until the real cause is
solved.

18.06.2002 44
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Optimising print quality

Description
Signal name: DEVCONSE
Fault condition: Toner concentration above 3.5% (equals sensor reading of 125).
The tonerconcentration declines at a too steep angle, > 2% / minute.
Norm value: The toner concentration drops below 3.5%.

Toner concentration too low

The moment the toner concentration level is above 3.5% again, printing is not resumed at once.
There is a 30 seconds delay, during which the toner concentration must stay above 3.5%.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-017 Toner concentration sensor 05-9-001 Replace
05B1
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 45
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong characters in Polish and Czech language

Description
Some characters in the Polish and Czech language are displayed (engine and scanner) in the
English language

Tests / Checks:
Check if the SDS setting for the special characters is enabled. See step 7 in installation

18.06.2002 46
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Cutter error ] (error code's 12707, 12708)

Description
Signalname: PRDKNIPOSSER, PRDKNIPOSSEL
Fault condition: Not active within 1250 msec.
Norm value: Active within 1250 msec.

Description:
The display message "Cutter error" occurs:
When the knife sensor at the left hand side (PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1) or the knife sensor at the
right hand side (PRDKNIPOSSER 12B2) is not active within 1250 msec. after the knife motor
(PRDKNIMO 12M3) is started

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSEL, 12B1 12-2-004

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSER, 12B2 12-2-005

1218-032 Cord assy Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 47
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Paper jam roll ] (at the leading edge sensor)

Description
Signalname: PRDLEADSE, PRDRUNSE1 or PRDRUNSE2
Fault condition: PRDLEADSE is active, but no pulses from PRDRUNSE1 or PRDRUNSE2.
PRDLEADSE is not active in time and pulses from PRDRUNSE1 or
PRDRUNSE2
Norm value: PRDLEADSE is active and pulses from PRDRUNSE1 or PRDRUNSE2.

Description:
The error "Paper jam roll" occurs when the print material is detected by the "Leading edge
sensor" 12B3 and the print material is not transported to the engine.
The roll is not running, consequently no pulses from the "Run sensor roll 1 or run sensor roll 2"
12B4 or 12B5.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-057 Leading edge sensor, 12B3 12-2-005 Replace

1206-121 Run sensor roll 1, 12B4 12-2-009 Replace

1206-121 Run sensor roll 2, 12B5 12-2-011 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 48
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Roll retract err ] (error code 12705)

Description
Signal name: PRDLEADSE
Fault condition: The sensor is always active, during switching of the paper roll.

The moment an other roll is neccessarry, the previous one is retracted. The "Leading edge
sensor" 12B3 must detect that the roll is retracted, before the other roll is fed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-057 Leading edge sensor, 12B3 12-2-005 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor upper roll 12M1 12-6-002 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor lower roll 12M2 12-6-003 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 49
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Sheet too short ] (error code 15703)

Description
Signal name: PTRINPSE
Fault condition: Paper Input Sensor (15B1) is switched OFF too early (< 420 mm length)
Norm value: Print material length > 420 mm

Description:
Manual feed is used.
The Paper Input Sensor (15B1) is released too early by the trailing edge of the sheet.
The print material fed in manual is shorter then 420 mm.

A warning "Sheet too short" is displayed for 5 seconds.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-017 Paper Input Sensor 1 15-2-001
(15B1)
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 50
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Awaking controller (R1.1)]

Description
The message "Awaking controller" occurs, in case of no communication between the controller and the printer.
The printer sends an awake command to the Oc· Power Logic controller, during 10 seconds.
If the Oc· Power Logic controller does not react within 10 seconds, then the printer remains waiting for an awake
command from the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Tests / Checks:
l Check the connectors of the Harddisk in the controller.
l Interchange the cable controller / printer and controller / scanner if present.
l Remove the network connector, and check if the message disappears, if this solves the problem, a network
(IP) conflict could be the cause.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2560-017/01 Datacable
8
2002-011 Spice PBA Check Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 51
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

["Connecting" stays in display (R1.2, R1.3) ]

Description
The message "Connecting" occurs, in case of no communication between the controller and the printer.
The printer sends an awake command to the Oc· Power Logic controller, during 10 seconds.
If the Oc· Power Logic controller does not react within 10 seconds, then the printer remains waiting for an awake
command from the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Tests / Checks:
l Check the connectors of the Harddisk in the controller.
l Interchange the cable controller / printer and controller / scanner if present.
l Remove the network connector, and check if the message disappears, if this solves the problem, a network
(IP) conflict could be the cause.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2560-017/01 Datacable
8
2002-011 Spice PBA Check Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 52
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Refill toner ]
Description
Signal name: DEVTONSUPSW = puls of 40 msec during one rotation of the rotor assy.
Fault condition: 2 pulses or less, during 2 successive rotations of the rotor.
Norm value: A minimum of 3 pulses, during 3 successive rotations of the rotor.

Toner supply unit is empty.

The warning "Refill toner" is displayed.
The current job is finished.
No new print jobs are accepted.

Operator action:
Refill the toner supply unit.
Push the correction button on the printer.
The toner supply unit starts to check the toner supply unit is refilled (a minimum of 3 pulses
during 3 successive rotations). The warning "Refill toner" remains if the 3 pulses are not
measured.

Tests / Checks:
Check the function of the toner supply unit.
SDS test: 05-6-003.
The Toner supply motor is active during 10 seconds (3 successive rotations).
A minimum of 3 pulses must be measured or displayed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0504-036 Toner Supply switch 05S1 05-6-003

0504-032 Toner Supply motor 05M1 05-6-003

0504-030 Toner dosage unit Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 53
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Close roll unit ]

Description
The message "Close roll unit" stays even if the roll unit is closed.

Signal name: PRDDOORSW1,2

Fault condition: Open
Norm value: Closed

The error "Roll unit open" occurs when the door or drawer of the roll unit is opened.
12S1(upper) or 12S2 (lower) is open.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1208-022 Door switch roll 1, 12S1 12-2-006

1208-022 Door switch roll 2, 12S2 12-2-010

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 54
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Please wait ]
Description
The message [Please wait] is always displayed after the printer/scanner is turned on.
The printer/scanner get the correct language file from the controller according to the selected
language.
In case of UK English no language file is downloaded. In that case the message stays for only
a few seconds.
It takes about one minute to download the language file to the scanner and 25 seconds for the
printer.

Tests / Checks:
l restart the scanner.
l restart the printer.
l restart the controller.
l If the problem remains, check the controller hardware and install again the software (if
needed).

18.06.2002 55
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong material request in case of manual feed (R1.1)

Description
In case of manual feed with e.g. polyester selected, the printer requests a manual sheet of paper.

Workaround R1.1:

Feed a sheet of the material selected instead of the material asked by the printer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 56
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Org. too long. ]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active longer than 10 minutes (equals 30 mtr.)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 57
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Prepare for run ] message stays in display (R1.1)

Description
In case of feeding an original into the scanner an prepare for run message is send from the scanner to the
controller and from the controller to the printer.
If you remove the original without making a copy the "prepare for run" message stays on the display of the
printer.

Workaround R1.1:

Switch off, and on the printer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 58
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Ready to copy ] in scanner display (R1.1)

Description
If the scanner is switched on while the set memory is full, then the scanner displays wrongly "Ready to copy".
Scanning will not be possible until some set memory has become available.

Workaround R1.1:

Free up some set memory.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 59
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Remove original ]
Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active during scanner setup

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 60
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Install error overview

Description

Installation error Corresponding Message Error Number

4 (ORE) Paper retracted 15702
5 (ORE) Copy too short 15703
6 (ORE) Copy too late 15704
7 (ORE) Speed failure 15705
8 (ORE) Close input flap 15706
9 (ORE) Input flap open 15707
35 (ORE) Knife 1 error 12706
36 (ORE) Knife 2 error 12707
38 (ORE) Input flap open 15701
40 (ORE) Roll x empty 12701
41 (ORE) Roll retract error 12702
42 (ORE) Door open 12703
43 (ORE) Roll init error 12704
44 (ORE) PTRINPSE late 12705
67 (MRE) Installation procedure aborted 22521

18.06.2002 61
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

ORE (Operator Recoverable Error) during installation

Description
In case of an ORE the operator is notified by displaying the "install error" message followed by
a number.
The number correspondents to an ORE according the below mentioned table.

Installation Corresponding ORE Error number

error message
4 Paper retracted 15702
5 Copy too short 15703
6 Copy too late 15704
7 Speed failure 15705
8 Close input flap
9 Input flap open 15707
35 Knife 1 error
36 Knife 2 error
38 Input flap open 15701
40 Roll x empty 12701/12702
41 Roll retract error
42 Door open
43 Roll init error
44 PTRINPSE late

18.06.2002 62
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Incorrect error recovery in case of 2 errors. (R1.1)

Description
In case of more than one error only the second error message is displayed on the LCD.
The moment the second error is solved the error message of the first error appears on the LCD again.

Workaround R1.1:

Switch the printer off and on to clear the error message.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

If the second error is solved, the first will appear in the LCD.

18.06.2002 63
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No Printer display
Description
Switch ON the printer. The display shows nothing.

Tests / Checks:
Check the output voltages of the Low Voltage PBA

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-12 22PBA02 Low voltage PBA Check 856
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
2202-01 22PBA01 CPU PBA Check 855
Wiring Check 879

18.06.2002 64
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

B1 is not part of the automate behavior. (R1.2, R1.3)

Description
Autoroll selection to a B1 roll is not possible.

Workaround:

Print to a specified roll.

18.06.2002 65
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)

Description
The AutoRoll selection mechanism works only for rolls of a width that is part of a specified paper series.
So, if mixed rolls are used only the roll within the selected paperseries is used with AutoRoll.

Workaround:

Print to a specified roll

18.06.2002 66
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Threw an exception error" on the laptop (SDS-Client 4.6.3.0)

Description
The laptop gets an pop up "threw an exception error", this error only occurs if STAR is not
installed.

Solution: Install "mdac" from the R1.3 CD "D:\upgrade\MsDAC\MsDAC.BAT"

18.06.2002 67
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Japanese/Chinese Keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool

Description
The Japanese/Chinese keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool.

Work around: The US international keyboard has to be selected in the CFT tool.

18.06.2002 68
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Notes SDS test 54 fails

Description
For a correct working of the SDS test 54 in Notes, "54 Print the test print 54 to check the
correct working of the print head", the SDS_UI.MDB file should be replaced on the Controller
and the service laptop.

SDS54P.EXE
Create a floppy disk with the needed files:

l Put an empty floppy disk in the laptop disk drive (1.44Mb).

l Right click the SDS54P.EXE icon, and select "launch"
l Type "a:" on the unzip to folder field, and click "unzip"
l The files are extracted to the a: drive.

Upgrade of the SDS_UI.MDB file

l Make a Direct Cable Connection between the laptop and the controller.
l Laptop: Login [Windows] as [service] to have permission's on the harddisk of the
controller.
l Fill in the Host Computer Name to make a connection to the shared folders of the
Host (PLC).
l Activate in the "run" window: [a:\exchange.bat a: <controller name>] to upgrade the
SDS_UI.MDB file on the controller
l Use the explorer to copy the SDS_UI.MDB from the a: drive to <c:\oce\apps\sds\OCE
TDS400 1.2\SDS_UI.MDB> to upgrade the file on the laptop.

This problem is solved in R1.3

18.06.2002 69
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Power management monitor GX100 / GX150

Description
The Bios of the GX100 / GX150 system does not support power management of the monitor.
In order to modify the power management of the monitor within a GX100 / GX150 system, a dos utility has to be
activated.

Procedure:

l Login as service user in the NT logon window on the controller

l Open a DOS Window
l Enter cd c:\tools\gx100\pwrmgnt or cd c:\tools\gx150\pwrmgnt

l Switch off power management of the monitor : enter pwrmgmt 0

l Switch on power management of the monitor : enter pwrmgmt 2

l Reboot the controller to activate the power management setting

18.06.2002 70
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Selfregistration of the Active X components and the SDS server

fails
Description
During an installShield set up of the SDS-Cli·nt, when a Microsoft DLL is not present, Selfregistration of the
Active X components and the SDS server fails.

Workaround:

Select reboot at the end of the set up, and perform set up once again.

18.06.2002 71
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The connection to the controller WEB pages is bad

Description
When the controllers IP address is used in the internet browser, then there is no contact to the
controller created.

The IP address in the web browser is changed between release 1.1 and release 1.2

IP- address
SDS R1.1 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
SDS R1.2 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:8080
PELT WEB XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

To prevent that cached content is displayed (content of previously loaded with the same
IP-address)
the Internet explorer cache should be configured as below:

1) select Tools/Internet Options

2) Select Settings

18.06.2002 72
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3) Select Every visit to the page.

4) OK

18.06.2002 73
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The previous backup.zip file is included in the new backup of

the same day
Description
When a backup is made, a zip file is created in c:\service\visits, when a new backup is made
on the same day, the previous created zip file will be included in the new backup.zip file.
The new zip file will be nested one level deeper each time a new backup is made.
This will not harm the restore, but the transportation time of the backup.zip file to the laptop
will increase.

18.06.2002 74
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Web SDS will not start when [Oc· ViewStation] is active.

Description
Web SDS will not start when Oc· ViewStation is running.

Work around: Close ViewStation before launching SDS on the PLC.

18.06.2002 75
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad connecting SPICE-III cables

Description

Investigation has shown that the problems with the bad connecting cables are due to a not correct
assembled SPICE-III-PBA.
It turned out that the supplier of the SPICE-III PBA's didn't mount the washers between the jackposts
and the plate.
As a result of this the height of the jackpost is not at the same level as the height of the D-sub
connector.
This means that in some cases, it is impossible to lock the fastening screws correctly on to the
jackposts.

Solution:

Place a washer (flat-A 3.2 partnumber 2231007) between the jackpost and the plate. see (RED
arrow).
You have to do this four times!!

Plate

Jackposts

18.06.2002 76
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
What is new in Release 1.3

Answer:
Job Submission

Windows Raster Driver 2

l The driver supports the Czech, Hungarian, Polish and the Japanese language.
See also: Information Bulletin 1009 and 10011.

Windows PostScript Driver

See also: Information Bulletin 1007 and 1008.

Print Exec LT Web

l Advanced job submission, e.g.:
- max. 100 documents
- job and document level setting
l If PELT WEB is activated, but is not installed, a demo page is opened.
The demo page gives information how to order the PELT WEB application.

Job Control
Remote Logic

Queue Manager
l You can change the size the dialog box of the column options and the job properties.

Settings Editor
l Added: Sleep mode timer enable. Default = ON.
See: Key Op. settings / System / Timers
l Added: Rasterisation optimalisation. Default = Quality.
See: Key Op. settings / Jobs / Print / Defaults / Image
This setting defines the sequence of zoom and rasterisation when the colour or
greyscale bitmap images are processed.
Select between: speed and quality.
Speed: The output of bitmap files can be degraded by a coarse halftone screen.
Quality: The output of bitmap files are not degraded. The process time can be longer.
l Removed: Controller panel time out.
See: Key Op. settings / Timers /

Communication
Novell
l Novell 6 is supported.

Controller
Operating System
l NT4 Service Pack 6a is added.

SDS Applications.
l You can use the short-cut keys in the Lotus Notes SDS application.
The pointer must be on the AxtiveX window.
Short-cut keys are e.g.: <Enter>, <Tab>, <Shift-Tab>, <Space bar>, <Arrow keys>.

l Only for the [STAR] application:

Support to backup the SDS_log database in the NUSR mode.
You can backup the SDS_log database and the STAR SDS_log dump in normal user mode.
There is no need to set the controller to the service mode.

l The default value is shown in the value field.

The value range is shown in the information field.

l The SDS test stops when the [Stop] button is pressed in the dialog box.
(The previous name of the [Cancel] button is changed to [Stop] button.)

18.06.2002 77
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l The beep sound is only enabled for the input and the output tests.

TDS400 sytem
l Chinese language.
The simplified Chinese language (MSSONG) is supported in the software applications on the
controller and in the [ Remote Logic ] client applications.
Attention: the displays of the printer and the scanner are in the English language.

18.06.2002 78
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
What is solved in Release 1.2

Answer:

Job submission
Postscript is not plotted in a particular set (only in combination with plot director)

Job control
Scan-to-file
Scan-to-file standard size is not correct
Remote logic
Bad connection from service laptop to applications (QM, SCP, SE, SM)

Job processing
Transformations are cancelled for partial frame
PS 3
Postscript level 3 interpreter crash when printing files containing some Postscript level 2 commands
Raster data format
Uncompressed TIFF files.
Vector data format
Wrong Calcomp parameter detection.

Applications QM, SCP, SE, SM, and viewer.

Queue Manager
Blocked Queue when deleting multiple files at once from the Queue Manager
Scan Manager
Crash with duplicate destinations in Scan Manager
Wrong languages in the Scan Manager.
Destinations missing.
Settings Editor
Printhead Duty Cycle setting not working
Viewer
AutoView sometimes does not work

Power Logic Controller

Queue blocks when a print file contains an error and the error page is switched on.
Configuration set to previous values.
Windows returns the highest IP-address to the adapters as default, if more than one adapter is present.
Internal error on PLC if scan is default

Controller
Controller reboots immediately after starting a Copy job. (no GUI present)
Internal error immediately after starting a Copy or Scan job.
Internal Error in case of standard setting set to default scan to file

Scanner
Unexpected length in case of Scan to File, 200% and standard size A2
Destinations missing
Menu card in wrong language.
Scanner displays wrongly "ready to copy"

Printer
Manual feed copies missing after error situation.
Wrong material request in case of manual feed
Incorrect error recovery in case of 2 errors.
Prepare for run message stays in display
Menu card in wrong language
Scrambled print after test 54

18.06.2002 79
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

SDS Applications.
SDS hangs when switching online/offline mode.

18.06.2002 80
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
What is solved in Release 1.3

Answer:

Job Submission

Autocad
l Partial plot when printed by WRD

Print Exec LT Web

l Scale to media size was disappeared. Scale to media size appears now in Basic and
Advanced mode jobs.
l The PELT client showed the wrong information of the media weight.
Now the paper 64 gr, paper 110 gr, trans 90 gr. are reported correctly in the PELT Web.
l The PELT-client printer status was wrong displayed in case of a paper jam in the printer.

WRD
All operating systems
l Second tab is renamed to "Finishing".
l Graphics tab is moved to the third tab.
This tab contains the accounting.
l The default half toning algorithm is now error diffusion instead of coarse.

Windows NT and 2000

l For Italian, French, Portuguese languages:
Width and length labels are correct displayed in "User defined paper size" and "Custom paper
format".
l The "Greyscale type" and the "Image Settings" controls are moved to the "Graphics" tab.
l All "version" strings (in the About Box from the driver and in the Properties) are correct
translated.
l All setup strings (Danish and German) are displayed correct during the installation steps.

Windows 9x and ME
l The cutting method options are corrected.
The RCF header commands are correct applied.
l All recourses and strings in "User defined paper format" are translated.
l The "Image Settings" tab is removed and the controls are moved to the "Graphics" tab.
l The driver generates now a correct page size instruction (PS) for a landscape print.
l The user defined paper dialog box is now functional when the OS uses the metric
measurement system.
l Japanese font size has been changed to match the Japanese Dialog box sizes.
l The A1 paper format is added in the paper format control, so there is only one B2 format
available in the list.
l Roll selection in the "Paper" tab and the User Id in the "Graphic" tab are now dependent on
the RCF.

PS3
l The given fold length was not accepted.

Job Control
Remote Logic
Queue Manager
l The job names were not cleared when the print process is finished.

Settings Editor
l The PLC blocks when the KOS settings were restored.
l Zoom method 1:1 was disappeared (KO view / Jobs)

System Control Panel

l There was a wrong message in the Dutch language, when the controller was in the "service"
mode.

18.06.2002 81
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Controller application
l Hang up because of increasing memory usage server.exe

Scan Manager
l S2F files were not delivered when the PDF format was selected.
l Scan to file on Novell 5.1 SP2.
l STF files was not fully TIFF 6.0 compliant (for 'Date format' and 'Tags order')
l Default setting of the destinations.
l FTP destination.
The application stopped when "c:" was used in the destination path.
Solution: use the browse button.
l Refresh of the SM was very slow, especially after pressing refresh more than once.
l Change of the default destination stopped the scan manager.

Viewer
l The viewer displayed sometimes the PDF files not correct or gave a wrong resolution
information.
l In GUIless + GUI configurations, the installation was not finished when the CD-ROM drive
opens. After the automatic restart, installation of the viewer is started.
In R1.3 the viewer is installed before the CD-ROM drive opens.

Job processing
Tiff
l Internal error with TIFF files.
l TIFF file: only one line was printed.

Communication
SMB
l It was possible to delete the copy jobs in the QM by SMB.
l SMB could not be disabled.

RAS
l The RAS connection (DCC) with the service laptop supports [ 'oceservice' ] as user name.

FTP
l The welcome page is redirected from user to FTP server.
LPD/LPR
l LPD could not be disabled.

Controller
Hardware
l Some characters were wrong by the Japanese keyboard.

Operating System
l Message: [ PELT is running ] during the start of the controller.
l The Postscript printer was not shared after the installation.
l Short cuts names on the desktop are changed from NGC to PLC .
l The application blocked because of increased memory use by server.exe.
l Memory leak: out of virtual memory appeared.
l Some characters were not correct when the Japanese keyboard was used.
l SMB/LPD could not be disabled

System Software
l Logd.exe blocked due to SDS extensive logging.
White pages, jobs stay in the queue, lost of the scanner-controller communication.
l The given scan length was ignored by the controller.

Printer
Media
l Invalid media request
Question: wenn, roll, manual ??????????????????????????????????? ???
l Wrong media request with best fit & media format available, but not as plain paper.

Scanner

18.06.2002 82
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PDF
l A PDF scan increased the size.
(When an A1 was scanned in the landscape direction, the size of the scanned data is greater
than the values set by the operator).

Folder
l Long plots were not correctly folded.

SDS application
ActiveX component
l The <Enter> key works correct inside an ActiveX box.
l Problems with backup and restore are solved.
When you restore the data, a logfile is generated: c:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt
l SDS 90.3: Optional boards (Centronics, Ethernet board) could not be enabled.
l Dump config (scan length method parameter) were not in accordance with the current
settings.
l The passwords are saved in the backup of the system.

18.06.2002 83
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
I have a different presentation (view) of the Lotus Notes TSM ?

Answer:
l Difference in replication of the TSM: replicate with the server.
l Updat the local view of the TSM: Open the local TSM and push Ctrl-Shift-F9 and the view index
is updated.

18.06.2002 84
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
Restart Lotus Notes after a crash

Answer:
When Lotus Notes crashes, you can not restart Lotus Notes.
You must restart also your laptop.

Faster solution:
1. <ctr-alt-del>
2. Close program window opens
3. Choose Nhldeamn
4. Click on the End Task button
5. Restart Lotus Notes

18.06.2002 85
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Branding issues and TDS range

This page describes the general branding issues around the Oc· TDS range.
Instead of products we will be talking about Systems.

The Oc· TDS400 is the name for the total system consisting of:

l The Oc· TDS400 Scanner including Oc· Image Logic® as image processing technology,
l The Oc· TDS400 Printer,
l The Oc· Power Logic® controller, supporting also Adobe® PostScript® 3™/PDF
l Oc· Remote Logic® application suite for system management and control,
including: Settings Editor, System Control Panel and Queue Manager,
l Oc· Scan Logic® as the premium Scan to file solution.
It includes Oc· Scan Manager and Oc· View Station LT.
l Oc· Print Exec LT and Oc· Print Exec LT Web as job submission solution

Furthermore we have Oc· Adobe® PostScript® 3™/PDF printer drivers to print PostScript 3.

18.06.2002 86
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Codenumbers of additional Service documentation of the Oc·

TDS400 system.
LN Service Manual on CD-ROM

Language Code number

GB 0910420
DE 0910422 (not available yet)
FR 0910423 (not available yet)
IT 0910425 (not available yet)

This CD-ROM contains also the Oc· TDS400 Lotus Notes TSM for the service technician.
Use this CD-ROM to do the initial installation.

Note:
After installation you need to replicate with the local server.
Reader permissions should be organised by the local Lotus Notes administrator.

Oc· TDS400 Installation Manual on CD-ROM

Language Code number

GB only 0912511

The Oc· TDS400 Installation Manual is intended to use by the transporter.

The CD-ROM contains a PDF file with the Installation Manual and the original Word document.
The Word document can be used to locally adapt the Installation Manual to the local requirements.

Ordering CD-ROM: Order the service documentation with the Document Order Form at ITC.

18.06.2002 87
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Codenumbers of additional User documentation of the Oc·

TDS400 system (R1.0).

User Manual ed. 1.0

Language Code number

GB / DE /FR / 7137101
............

This CD-ROM contains also the Oc· TDS400 Remote applications for the Customer.
Note: Do not use this version for the service technician.

QRG Manual ed. 1.0

Connectivity Manual ed.1.0

GB version (only) on User Manual CD-ROM.

Order: Order the additional User documentation in the same way as you order spare parts.

18.06.2002 88
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General overview Oc· Settings Editor (Key Operator mode) R1

This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the Key Operator in
the Oc· Settings editor (KO settings) window on the Oc· Power Logic controller or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the Key Operator can change the settings.

Activate the Oc· Settings editor.

l To view: select View and click on KO settings.
l To change : File, Log in, select Key operator, enter the password and click OK.
(Password: )
For detailed information see Oc· TDS400 User Manual

KO setting menu structure:

Jobs Copy & File

Defaults
Output mode
Checkplot
Number of prints / sets
Custom zoom
Mirror
Original
Feeding
Input mode
Sheet
Remove leading strip
Remove trailing strip
Image
Original type
Background compensation
Exposure
Copy
Layout
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift
Sheet
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Cut length method
Custom cut length
Strips
Add leading strip
Add trailing strip
Image
Mirror
File
Destination
File format
File extension TIFF
File extension CALS
TIFF compression
TIFF organisation
Image
File resolution
Optimization
Original
Scan width method
Custom scan width
Scan length method
Custom scan length method

Jobs Print
Print error page
Defaults
Number of prints / sets
Collate
Default print mode

18.06.2002 89
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Sheet
Auto format
Fit method
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Print cut method
Custom print length
Strips
Remove leading strip
Remove trailing strip
Add leading strip
Add trailing strip
Image
Zoom method
Custom zoom
Rotate
Rotate value
Lay-out
Auto shift
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift

Printer
Automatic roll switch

System
Scan to file password
Telephone number
Localization
Display languages
Date & Time
Measurement unit
Job priorities
Copy priorities
Media
Paper series
Timers
Sleep mode timer
Manual feed time-out
Controller panel time-out
Disk cleanup
Local storage cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time
Unsent folder cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time
Scan spool cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time

Scanner
Settings
Rewind originals
Zoom steps
Reduction step 1-4
Enlargement 1-4
Timers
Panel time-out
Automatic feed time-out

18.06.2002 90
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 91
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General overview Oc· Settings Editor (System Administrator

mode) R1

This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the System
Administrator (SA settings) in the Oc· Settings editor window on the Oc· Power Logic controller
or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the System Administrator can change the
settings.

Activate the Oc· Settings editor.

To view: select View and click on SA settings.
To change : File, Log in, select System administrator, enter the password and click OK.
(Password: ).
For detailed information see Oc· TDS400 User Manual.

SA setting menu structure:

Printer PLDs
Dithering matrix
Poker PDL heap size
Poker min number of vertices in polygons
Poker max number of vertices in polygons
Scale down algorithm
HPGL
Enable
Origin
Select pen
Color merge control
Pen width scaling
HPGL2
Enable HPGL-2
Origin
Select pen 0
Color merge control
Pen priority
PS no clip
Emulation type
Line attributes
Pen width scaling
Calcomp
Enable Calcomp
Step size
Origin
Synchro code
Double synchro
Checksum
End of message
Pen priority
Color merge control
Pen width scaling
Postscript
Enable Postscript
PS level 2 password
Default paper size
PS level 2 heap size
NIRS
Enable NIRS
C4
Enable C4
TIFF
Enable TIFF
Photometry
CALS
Enable CALS
ASCII
Enable ASCII

18.06.2002 92
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

End of line
Line overflow
Font size
Tab size
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Pen width
Page type
Custom page width
Custom page height
Standard page format
Standard page orientation
Pen width scaling
Printer
Pens
Pen width
Pen pattern

System
Scan memory reservation
Controller identification
Host name
Description
Location
Administrator
Set memory reservation
Orange zone threshold
Red zone limit
Connectivity
FTP
Enable FTP
Time-out
Communication mode
PDL selection
LPD
Enable LPD
Communication mode
PDL selection
SMB
Enable SMB
Workgroup name
Communication mode
PDL selection
Novell
Enable Novell
Pserver name
Pserver password
Access mode
File server name
NDS context
Queue poll interval
Connection retry interval
Communication mode
PDL selection
TCP/IP
Domain
DNS
Adapter 1
Enable
Enable DHCP
IP adress
IP mask
Default gateway
Primary WINS Server
Secudary WINS Server
IPX/SPX

18.06.2002 93
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapter 1
Enable
Netbeui
Adapter 1
Enable

18.06.2002 94
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· TDS400 SAC structure

Hereby the Oc· TDS400 SAC structure:

New SAC (implemented with LN TSM version 3.0.2)

1st version SAC structure

18.06.2002 95
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

OPRS structure for the Oc· TDS400

WFPS TDS Product Structure

Modelgroup TDS400

System number xxx

Modelserie Modelserie
Scanner Printer

TD410 TD420

Config type Config type Config type Config type

TDS410 TDS420R1 TDS420R2 TDS420R2S

M-type M-type M-type

M-type
4420 4420 4420
4410
Base printer Base printer Base printer
Scanner
P-Type P-Type P-Type
1 Roll unit 2 Roll Unit 2 Roll unit with
L-Type Q-Type compact stacker
Q-Type
cable Base Controller
Base Controller Q-Type
Option set Base Controller
Option set
L-Types:
L-Types: Option set
Monitor 17”
Monitor 17” L-Types:
Monitor 21”
Monitor 21” Monitor 17”
Centronics
Centronics Monitor 21”
Token Ring
Token Ring Centronics
BNC
BNC Token Ring
Keyboard
Keyboard BNC
Keyboard
L-Type L-Type L-Type
Copy Del. Tray Copy Del. Tray Copy Del. Tray

18.06.2002 96
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the Rx.x installation Oc· TDS400 system

This page gives you a guide how to install the Oc· TDS400 Rx.x system. The system will be
delivered with a:

Print engine:
100% pre-adjusted

Scanner (option):
100% pre-adjusted Scanner

Controller:
100% pre-adjusted

This indicates that the amount of the work during installation at the customer is decreased.

Step 1: Installation of the Oc· Power Logic controller

Installation description of the hardware and the software:

Step 2: Installation of the print engine

Installation description:

Step 3a: Installation of the Copy Output Stacker (optional)

If necessary: how to separate the engine from the stand
Installation description COS:

Step 3b: Installation of the Scanner (optional)

Installation description Scanner:

Step 4: Preparing the print engine

Enable the print system to make prints.
This is done by activating the installation test on the printer panel

Step 5: System software check / upgrade / download

It is possible that by stock reasons, the firmware is not upgraded to the latest version.
Check / upgrade and or download:

Step 6: Configure the TDS 400 system

Gui-less
1. Configure the Network settings via the Printer control panel.
2. Reboot the controller and the printer.

3. Install the Remote Logic aplications on the laptop.

(From the controller CD-ROM or from a separate CD-ROM).
4. Make a Direct Cable connection between the laptop and the Oc· Power Logic controller.
If not excist, install the connection on your laptop .
5. Check date and time. (The time zone is set by M&L Venlo and this setting is NOT possible
with the Settings Editor.)
- Login as Key Operator
- Select the map: Localization
- Select: Date & Time (WINNT takes over the new settings after the restart of the controller.)
6. - Configure the Network settings with the Settings Editor (SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. the network settings (enable/disable protocols, hostname)
(If the TCP/IP addresses are not available, use temporary: 192.168.100 or 101 or
102).
- Configure the TDS400 system with the Setting Editor (KO and SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. queue management, scan destinations

7. REBOOT the controller.

18.06.2002 97
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

With Gui
1. Start the controller in the <service> mode.
2. Check the time zone, the date and the time in the NT Date/Time proprties box.
If you have te change them, then activate the NGC_Down.bat icon, change the settings and
activate the NGC_Up.bat icon.
3. - Configure the Network settings with the Settings Editor (SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. the network settings (enable/disable protocols, hostname)
(If the TCP/IP addresses are not available, use temporary: 192.168.100 or 101 or
102).
- Configure the TDS400 system with the Setting Editor (KO and SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. queue management, scan destinations

4. REBOOT the controller.

Step 7: Configure the installation

At this point you are able to run the NotesSDS from the service laptop or the WebSDS
directly on the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
1. Set the controller in the SDS mode
2. - New installation: do the SDS test 70.1: Installation technician
- Hardware is not pre-adjusted: do the SDS test 70.2: Installation M&L
3. Only for installation in Poland and the Czech Republic
- set the special character set for the Polish and the Czech language for the engine and
the scanner

Step 8: Check / set the print quality for the print engine and the scanner
1. Make a service test print with SDS test 51 to test the print engine
Check the print quality according
2. Make a print from the transparant service test original to test the scanner.
Check the print quality according
3. On customer request:
12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 1
12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 2
15-1-005 Adjust a longer or shorter leading edge length of roll 1,2 and manual

Step 9: Installation of a driver or Oc· application on a customer workstation

Depending on the agreement between the customer and Oc·, software must be installed on the
customer workstation.
Make sure that you do not give away this type of services to the customer for free.
The information how to install the network integration are described in the;

Installing Remote Logic : User manual TDS400

Installing Print Exec Light: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual
Installing Postscript Driver: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual
Installing Raster Driver: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual
Installing AUTOCAD Driver: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual

Step 10: End of the visit

Check the system according the description in maintenance

Close the installation / visit

1. Log and reset all the fault and service counters with SDS test 31
2. Fill out the service report or STAR application.
3. Backup the System data, select [ Standard] with SDS test 71
4. Restart the controller and set the system in normal user mode (anonymous).

18.06.2002 98
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.0 to

R 1.1

The new software consist of:

l Oc· Power Logic controller CD-ROM with R1.1
l CD-ROM with the new drivers
l Diskette with the password for Scan Logic and /or Postscript 3 (optional).
l Scanner Eprom R1.1

Step 1: Backup the system data

Before you start the upgrade, you must backup the parameters of the system.
This saves time during the installation of the new system software.
1. Print the Print Settings on paper.
2. Backup the System data
l Connect your NotesSDS.
l Do the SDS test 71 [ Backup System data ]
l Copy the created directory (c:\service\visits\sub directory with the current date) to a diskette in
the laptop.
l Remove the diskette from the laptop, label it and keep it on a save place.
You need these files later on.

Step 2: Upgrade the NGC controller

Note 1:
If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

Notes 2:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
- The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.1, in the CD-ROM drive
3. Insert the existing installation diskette, Oc· Power Logic R1.0, in the diskette drive.
l Note: Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.
Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor), type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software, see step 3

7. The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
8. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
9. The controller restarts as "anonymous" user.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 3: Upgrade the scanner software

1. Open the right site cover.
2. Replace the EPROM R1.0 by the EPROM R1.1
3. Close the cover.

Step 4: Upgrade the printer engine software

1. Set temperary the next IP ADDRESS: 193.168.100.100 by the operating panel on the printer.
2. Connect your NotesSDS.
3. Do the SDS test 20-1-010 and set the next start of the controller in [ Diagnosis mode ].
(Switch off the controller with the Power ON/OFF button) (never press 2 times!)
4. After the green led is off, switch on the Controller.
5. Download the new software for the print engine:
l Copy the printer software from the controller CD-ROM
?:\upgrade\cventura\oce\apps\sds\swdl\vent_eng_r_1_1.ofp to a diskette on the laptop.

18.06.2002 99
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Download the printer software by the SDS test 73 .

Note:
Read carefully the SDS test description.
Check if the Printer boot version is 1.5.0, otherwise you have to download the printer boot
software wit SDS test 73. Do this seperate from the printer application software

Step 5: Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

1. Restart the controller by the Power ON button (never press 2 times!)

2. Make a Direct Cable connection with the controller.
3. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.
Be shure that the correct xxxx.cfg files are installed in the Remote Logic
4. Restore the correct customer settings:
(The right IP adresses, hostname, passwords are restored.)

l log in as KeyOperator
l load the [ current.kos ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 1.
File \ Open \ current.kos
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

l Check / change Date and Time: by System/Localisation.

Do not restart the controller.

l If scan to file exists:

Change in System the old R1.0 password by the new R1.1 password.

l log in as System Administrator

l load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 1.
File \ Open \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

l If PostScript exists:
Change in Printer/PostScript the old R1.0 password by the new R1.1 password.

5. Close all applications.

6. Connect the controller to the network.
7. Restart the controller by the Power ON button (never press 2 times!)
8. Enable the Postscript option in the System Administrators settings (if applicable).
9. Disconnect the laptop.
10. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare these with the previous one.
11. Rename the password file on the R1.1 password diskette to: [ password.oce ] and copy it to the
installation diskette.

Step 6: End of the visit

l Do the standard check / test according the maintenance procedure

18.06.2002 100
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.1 to

R 1.2.

To upgrade the Oc· TDS400 R1.1 system to the Oc· TDS400 R1.2 system you need the following items
depending of the system configuration:

CDROM NGC CDROM User TDS400 XX Firmpack R1.2 PBA, CPU Extra 128 MB RAM
TDS400 R1.2 Manual Quick Ref. scanner scanner
Manual
Part number 7208990 7137313 7137330 (GB) 7095421 5584710 7078563
Printer only V1.1 o o o
Hybrid system * o o o o o 256 MB RAM is needed
in case of :
V1.1
-Oc· Scan Logic
Hybrid system o o o o or
V1.1 -Print Exec Lt Web
(MOD 02) to be installed.
* : Hybrid system (Printer + scanner)
o : Order these parts to perform the upgrade.

Step 1: Preparation before you can start the upgrade

Step 2: Backup the system data / scan destinations

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic controller hardware / software

Note:
l Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.2, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the upgraded installation diskette, Oc· Power Logic R1.2, in the diskette drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor), type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked
by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software/hardware. (step 4)

The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
8. Reboot the controller.
9. The controller restarts as "anonymous" user and the viewer will be installed.
This takes about 4 minutes. Wait until the disk activity stops.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the scanner software

The scanner software / hardware must be upgraded depending of the system configuration. See the
above table.
1. Open the right site cover.

18.06.2002 101
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

2. Replace the Firmpack R1.1.1 with Firmpack R1.2 and / or scanner PBA, CPU
3. Close the cover.

Step 5: Upgrade the printer engine software

Step 6 : Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

Before you can restore the correct settings:

1. Enter a non-routable IP adress e.g. : 192.168.100.100 via the printer operating panel display.
2. Reboot the controller.

Restore Machine settings

Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.

1. Restore the settings via SDS-test 72

2. Select: Subset <All> / Target <Total>
3. Restore path A:\ 'current date' (back-up diskette in Laptop)
The scan destinations are automatically restored. (if applicable).

If a warning screen appears click <OK>

Restore Customer settings. (The right IP adresses, hostname, passwords are restored.)
1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.

Log in as Service Operator:

l View Key Operator settings
l load the [ current.kos ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ current.kos
Note:
Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

l View System Administrator settings

l load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

2. Close all applications.

3. Shut down the controller by the Power On button and wait until the controller is completely shut
down.
4. Restart the controller by pressing the Power On button again.
5. In case postscript is installed then disable the postscript option, press apply in the settings editor,
enable
postscript option and press apply.
6. Disconnect the laptop.
7. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare these with the previous one.
8. Reboot the system and connect the controller to the network.

Step 7: End of the visit

Make sure that the Internet Explorer 'cache ' is cleared during the log off procedure.
This to be independent of the last visit situation.

l By enabling "Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when browser is closed"

Do this via: Start / Settings / Control Panel / Internet Properties / Advanced / Security

l Do the standard check / test according the maintenance procedure

18.06.2002 102
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 103
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.1 to

R1.3.

To upgrade the Oc· TDS400 R1.1 system to the Oc· TDS400 R1.3 system you need the following items
depending of the system configuration:

CDROM PLC CDROM User CDROM (5.0) Firmpack R1.3 PBA, CPU Extra 128 MB RAM
TDS400 R1.3 Manual Remote Logic scanner scanner
Part number 7209354 7218726 7225649 7095712 5584710 7078563
Printer only V1.1 o o o
Hybrid system * o o o o o 256 MB RAM is needed
in case of :
V1.1
-Oc· Scan Logic
Hybrid system o o o o or
V1.1 -Print Exec Lt Web
(MOD 02) to be installed.
* : Hybrid system (Printer + scanner)
o : Order these parts to perform the upgrade.

Step 1: Preparation before you can start the upgrade

Step 2: Backup the system data / scan destinations

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic controller hardware / software

Note:
l Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.3, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the upgraded installation diskette, Oc· Power Logic R1.3, in the diskette drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor), type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked
by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software/hardware. (step 4)

The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
8. Reboot the controller.
9. The controller restarts as "anonymous" user.
This takes about 2 minutes. Wait until the disk activity stops.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the scanner software

The scanner software / hardware must be upgraded depending of the system configuration. See the
above table.
1. Open the right site cover.
2. Replace the Firmpack R1.1.1 with Firmpack R1.3 and / or scanner PBA, CPU
3. Close the cover.

18.06.2002 104
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Step 5: Upgrade the printer engine software

Step 6 : Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

Before you can restore the correct settings:

1. Enter a non-routable IP adress e.g. : 192.168.100.100 via the printer operating panel display.
2. Reboot the controller.

Restore Machine settings

Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.

1. Restore the settings via SDS-test 72

2. Select: Subset <All> / Target <Total>
3. Restore path A:\ 'current date' (back-up diskette in Laptop)
The scan destinations are automatically restored. (if applicable).

If a 'warning' screen appears click <OK>

l Close SDS- and DCC connection.

Restore Customer settings. (The right IP adresses, hostname, passwords are restored.)
1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.

l Log in as Service Operator:

l View Key Operator settings

l load the [ current.kos ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.kos
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the apply an 'Information'-window pops up. This window shows the contradictions
between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log-file which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

Click <OK>
Do not restart the controller.

l View System Administrator settings

l load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the apply an 'Information'-window pops up. This window shows the contradictions
between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log-file which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

Click <OK>
Do not restart the controller.

2. Close all applications.

3. Shut down the controller by the Power On button and wait until the controller is completely shut
down.
4. Restart the controller by pressing the Power On button again.
5. Disconnect the laptop.
6. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare these with the previous one.
7. Reboot the system.
8. Connect the controller to the network.

18.06.2002 105
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Step 7: End of the visit

Make sure that the Internet Explorer 'cache ' is cleared during the log off procedure.
This to be independent of the last visit situation.

l By enabling "Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when browser is closed"

Do this via: Start / Settings / Control Panel / Internet Properties / Advanced / Security

l Do the standard check / test according the maintenance procedure

18.06.2002 106
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.2 to

R1.3.
You need the following items, depends on the system configuration, to upgrade the Oc· TDS400 R1.2 system to
the Oc· TDS400 R1.3 system:

CD-ROM NGC CD-ROM User CD-ROM (5.0) Firmpack R1.3 Extra 128 MB RAM
TDS400 R1.3 Manual Remote Logic Scanner
Part number 7209354 7218726 7225649 7095712 7078563
Printer only V1.2 yes yes yes
Hybrid system * yes yes yes yes 256 MB RAM is needed
in case of :
V1.2
-Oc· Scan Logic
or
-Print Exec Lt Web
to be installed.
yes : Order these parts to perform the upgrade.

Step 1: Preparation before you can start the upgrade

1. Make sure that the laptop date and controller date are the same, or the backup test will 71 fail.

GUIless
l Print the system settings on paper by the operator panel.
l Check on the print if the date & time is the same as on the laptop.
If needed, adjust the date & time with the [Settings Editor] on the laptop or a remote computer.

With GUI
l Double click on the clock in the right down corner of the screen.
Check and or adjust the date & time.

2. Check the version of the SDS-client and the Remote Logic on the Laptop

To use the R1.3 Notes SDS, you must have installed the latest versions of Remote Logic and
SDS-client on the laptop.
If this is not the case then:

1. Uninstall the SDS-client and / or Remote Logic.

l Remove through: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· TDS400
SDS Client 4.5.7.0 ].
l Remove through: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· TDS400
Remote Logic 3.1].

2. Restart the Laptop!

3. Install the new SDS-client and / or Remote Logic (CD-ROM R1.3)

l SDS-client (4.6.4.0): CD-Drive:\sds_client_setup\sdcclnt.exe
l Remote Logic (5.0): CD-Drive Remote Logic\i386\setup.exe

How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the following document:
Communication set up between Laptop and Controller.

At this point you can run the R1.3 Notes-SDS from the Service Laptop or the Web-SDS directly on
the controller.

Note:
Test the SDS before you do the uograde of the system release.

Step 2: Backup the system data

Before you start the upgrade, you must backup the parameters of the system.
This saves time during the installation of the new system software.

l Connect your Notes-SDS.

18.06.2002 107
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Do the SDS test 71 [ Backup System data ]

l Insert backup diskette in your laptop
l Subset: [ALL]
l Target: [Other dir (SL)]
l Press [Start] and select the path A:\
l Remove the diskette from the laptop, label it and keep it on a save place.
You need these files later.

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic controller software

Note:
l Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission to disconnect.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.3, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the installation diskette R1.2 in the diskette drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: systems with a monitor, type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software/hardware. (step 4)

The installation is unattended, until the controller sounds beeps and the CD-ROM drive
opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
8. Restart the controller.
9. The controller restarts as an "anonymous" user.
This will take some time. Wait until the disk activity stops.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the scanner software

If there is a scanner in the configuration, then upgrade the scanner. See the above table.
1. Open the right site cover.
2. Replace the Firmpack R1.2 EPROM with the Firmpack R1.3 EPROM.
3. Close the cover.

Step 5: Upgrade the printer engine software

1. Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.

2. Do the SDS test 20-1-010 to set the next start of the controller in [ Diagnosis mode ].
3. Close the SDS session and the DCC connection. (Switch off the controller with the Power
ON/OFF button, never press 2 times!)
4. After the green led is turned off, switch on the controller.
5. Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.
6. Download the new software for the print engine:
l Download the printer software by the SDS test 73
l Select: [Select an already on the machine available download file]
l Select: [Preinstalled version Oc· 9450 ref]
l Select [Printer boot 1.7.0] and download the boot software.
(It is advised to do the download one by one).

After the download of the [Printer Boot] software, you must download the [Printer Application]
software.

18.06.2002 108
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select: [Select an already on the machine available download file].

l Select: [Preinstalled version Oc· 9450 ref].
l Select [Printer application 1.3.0] and download the print engine software.
l Close the SDS- and the DCC connection.
l Restart the controller.

Step 6 : Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

Before you can restore the correct settings:

1. Enter a non-routable IP address e.g. : 192.168.100.100 by the printer operator panel
display.
2. Restart the controller.

Restore the machine settings

1. Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.
2. Restore the settings by the SDS-test 72
3. Select: Subset [All] / Target [Total]
4. Restore path A:\ 'current date' (on the backup diskette in the laptop)
The scan destinations are automatically restored. (if applicable).
If a 'warning' screen appears, click <OK>
5. Close the SDS session and the DCC connection.

Restore the Customer settings. (The right IP ADDRESS, host name and passwords are
restored.)
1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.
2. Log in as Service Operator:
3. View the Key Operator settings.
4. Load the [ current.kos ] file from the backup diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.kos
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
5. When the file is loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the "Apply"button is pressed, an 'Information'-window appears. This window shows

the differences between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log file, which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

6. Click <OK>
Do not restart the controller.

7. View the System Administrator settings.

8. Load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
9. When loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the "Apply"button is pressed, an 'Information'-window appears. This window shows

the differences between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log file, which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

10. Click <OK>

Do not restart the controller.

Finish the restore action

1. Close all the applications.
2. Shut down the controller by the Power on/off button and wait until the controller is
completely shut down.
3. Restart the controller by pressing the Power On button.
4. Disconnect the laptop.
5. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare the settings with the previous one.
6. Restart the system.
7. Connect the controller to the network.

18.06.2002 109
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Step 7: End of the visit

Make sure that the Internet Explorer 'cache ' is cleared during the log off procedure.
This to be independent of the last visit situation.

1. Enable the "Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when the browser is closed".
Do this by: Start / Settings / Control Panel / Internet Options / tap Advanced / Security.

2. Do the standard check / test according to the maintenance procedure .

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

SAC Structure:

No SAC levels defined

SAC level 1
SAC level 2
SAC level 3
SAC level 4
Document type installation

Annotation info

Created on: 18-03-2002

By: Wim van Helden/HQ/Oce

Language of TSM database GB

Access level: Published to OpCo & HQ
3500

Published to Opco by
Published to HQ by
Annotation ID Annotation not published to HQ
Annotation ID HQ-GB-2002-0018

ITC Status Annotation not published to HQ

ITC Status: In progress

18.06.2002 110
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Limitations/Known problems release 1.1

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Symptom Classification
Printing
AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct

Area Classification
Job submission
Customer cannot update PS/WRD on the NGC
Printing from Macintosh Os 8.5 and 8.6

Job control
Scan-to-file
Scan-to-file standard size is not correct
Incomplete info when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm lengths

Job processing
Transformations are cancelled for partial frame
PS 3
PostScript level 3 interpreter crash when printing files containing some PostScript level 2 commands

Raster data format

Uncompressed TIFF files.
Vector data format
Wrong Calcomp parameter detection.

Applications QM, SCP, SE, SM, and viewer.

Queue Manager
Blocked Queue when deleting multiple files at once from the Queue Manager
Scan Manager
Crash with duplicate destinations in Scan Manager
Wrong languages in the Scan Manager.
Settings Editor
Printhead Duty Cycle setting not working
Viewer
AutoView sometimes does not work

Power Logic Controller

Configuration set to previous values.
Windows returns the highest IP-address to the adapters as default, if more than one adapter is present.

Scanner
Unexpected length in case of Scan to File, 200% and standard size A2
Destinations missing
Menu card in wrong language.
Scanner displays wrongly "ready to copy"

Printer
No reboot info on Printer panel
Manual feed copies missing after error situation.
Wrong material request in case of manual feed
Incorrect error recovery in case of 2 errors.

18.06.2002 111
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Prepare for run message stays in display

Menu card in wrong language
Scrambled print after test 54

18.06.2002 112
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Limitations/Known problems release 1.2

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:

Symptom classification
Image quality
Registration
Paper path
Finishing
Document handling
Display messages
Error messages
Power & Control
Printing
B1 is not part of the automate behavior. (R1.2)
AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct. (R1.1, R1.2)
Scanning
Accounting
Noise
Other

Area Classification

Job submission
Autocad ADI
Autocas HDI
Autocad LT
Autocad LT HDI
Win raster driver
Roll info not updated in WRD driver. (R1.2)
Customer can not update PS/WRD on the NGC. (R1.1, R1.2)
Win PostScript driver
Customer can not update PS/WRD on the NGC. (R1.1, R1.2)
Mac PostScript driver
Print Exec LT Web
Other
Printer sharename changed after upgrade R1.1 to R1.2
Job control
Remote Control Format
Oc· Job Ticker
Controller applications
System control panel
Settings editor
Queue Manager
Scan manager
Applications crash in case the scan destination path is filled with "c:" for a FTP
destination (R1.2)
Incomplete info when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm lengths. (R1.1, R1.2)

Oc· View LT
Viewer does not work after installation (R1.2)
Remote Logic
System control panel
Settings editor
Queue Manager
Job processing
HPGL

18.06.2002 113
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

HPGL/2
ASCII
Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII not full proof. (R1.2)
Calcomp
Tiff
Cals
Nirs
PostScript level 2
PostScript III
PDF
Communication
LPR/LPD
FTP
SMB
Netware PServer
Centronics
Controller
Interface
Hardware
Operating system
System software
Controller software
Postscript driver is not shared after installation (R1.2) Interpretor is however working.
Engine
01 Photoconductor
02 Charging
04 Print Head
05 Developing
06 Transfer
07 Cleaning/Discharging
08 Fusing
12 Paper Roll Drawers
15 Paper Transport
19 Delivery
22 Power & Control
Print is cutted when switching to SDS mode. (R1.2)
Wrong printer software version shown after downloading the printer software. (R1.2)
No reboot info on Printer panel. (R1.1, R1.2)
23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

Scanner
09 Originals
10 Scanning
11 Image Processing
22 Power & Control
23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

SDS
Win2000 not supported for RAS connection with a WinNT PLC controller (R1.2). Work around:

SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails. (R1.2)

18.06.2002 114
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Limitations/Known problems release 1.3

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:

Limitation / Known problem not followed with a link, do not have corrections available.
Symptom classification
Image quality
Registration
The image is shifted outside the sheet by manual feed and landscape orientation
Paper path
Finishing
Document handling
Display messages
Transparent and Translucent changed in simplified Chinese translation.
Error messages
Power & Control
Printing
B1 is not part of the automatic selection.
AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct.
Scanning
Accounting
Noise
Other
Japanese/Chinese Keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool.

Area Classification

Job submission
Autocad ADI
Autocas HDI
Autocad LT
Autocad LT HDI
Win raster driver
The roll information is not updated in WRD driver.
The customer can not update the PS/WRD driver on the PLC.
Win PostScript driver
The customer can not update the PS/WRD driver on the PLC.
Mac PostScript driver
Print Exec LT Web
PELTWEB R1.2 requires IE 4.0.2 SP2 or above.
Large files can not be submitted in advanced job submition.
The advanced job submission does not operate on Mac and Unix OS.
There is no warning message when PELTWEB is not started on a PLC with less than 256 MB.

The file format is not identified automatically.

PELTWEB only displays the correct Czech, Polish, Hungarian and Japanese if the OS is
configured with the correct fonts.
A job is cancelled when the job composition window is closed or a new job is activated, before
the submission acknowledge message is disappeared.
The job is cancelled when the Submit button (Netscape) is activated two times.
PDF/PS is displayed as supported, but is not available on the controller.
PDF/PS documents are not discarded while they are disabled in the SE.
A wrong message is displayed when at the same time the number of submission sessions are
exceeded.
A wrong message when the spool is full.
The user name not saved if the name includes spaces.
The user name is not recovered in the Japanese language.

18.06.2002 115
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PELTWEB needs a restart of the PLC when the language is changed on the PLC.
Other
The share name of the printer is changed after the upgrade from R1.1 to R1.2 or R1.3
Job control
Remote Control Format
Oc· Job Ticket
Controller applications
System control panel
Settings editor
Not possible to fill the location in the SE with Japanese characters.
Queue Manager
Plots generated by SDS are not printed after a change to NUSR and back to
SDS mode.
Scan manager
Not complete information when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm lengths.
(R1.1, R1.2)
Default NIC addresses (0.0.0.0) causes Scan to File errors.
Not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a change from
English to Japanese in the IME.
File destinations not checked before the delivery of a file.
Files on remote destinations are written over without a message to confirm.

Oc· View LT
Remote Logic
A connection is not possible from Remote Logic if <options-hostname> is ["localhost"]
on the controller.
The [Application launcher] disappears from the screens smaller than 1024x768.
System control panel
Settings editor
Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor.
Not possible to fill the location in the SE with Japanese characters..
Queue Manager
Job processing
Not supported file types sometimes crashes the controller
HPGL
HPGL/2
ASCII
The Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII is not full proof.
Calcomp
Tiff
Cals
Nirs
PostScript level 2
PostScript III
PDF
Communication
LPR/LPD
FTP
SMB
The transmission is lost after a stop of a transmission.
The length of the hostname is limited to 14 characters.
Netware PServer
Centronics
Controller
Interface
Hardware
Operating system
System software
Controller software
Engine
01 Photoconductor
02 Charging
04 Print Head

18.06.2002 116
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

05 Developing
06 Transfer
07 Cleaning/Discharging
08 Fusing
12 Paper Roll Drawers
15 Paper Transport
19 Delivery
22 Power & Control
The print is cut by a change to the SDS mode.
The wrong software version of the printer is shown after the download of the printer software.

No restart information on the printer panel.

23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

Scanner
09 Originals
10 Scanning
11 Image Processing
22 Power & Control
23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

SDS
Win2000 does not support the RAS connection with a WinNT PLC controller. Work around:

The SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails.

SDS cli·nt 4.6.3.0 needs MsDAC installed if the laptop does not run STAR.
WEB-SDS will not start if [Oc· Viewstation] is active.
The previous backup.zip file is included in the new backup of the same day.

18.06.2002 117
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Cleaning liquids

Cleaner A
Application: Antistatic cleaning and maintenance fluid for glass surfaces.
Code numbers: USA: 1068117 and EUR. 1068116
Contents: also silicone oil
Disadvantage: softened toner contaminates originals, rots, belts and pinch rollers
If glass surface is coated, use cleaner O

Cleaner O
Application: Cleaning optical parts, mirrors, lenses and glass platen
Code number: 7991470
Contents: Solution of alcohol and moistening agent (soap)
Finish: Leaves no stripes and no film
Disadvantages: When used on glass platen: surface is dry and original transport problems occur

Cleaner K
Application: General purpose cleaning, rubber belts, rollers
Code numbers: USA 1929023 and EUR. 1929022
Contents:
Disadvantages: Flammable, harmful

Cleaner T
Application: Cleaning fluid for removing toner caked on hot/cold machine parts.
Code numbers: USA 1989750 and EUR. 1989916
Contents: Diethyleneglycol monoethylether acetate
Disadvantages: Never clean the OPC! It affects the surface!
Usage: Apply cleaning fluid on a cloth and polish the parts to be cleaned.
After cleaning, the surface must be polished with a moth moistened with water and
after that with a dry cloth so to be sure that the cleaned surface is dry.
Caution:
Safety: Cleaner T is irritating to the eyes and defats the skin. Wear protection gloves.

Cleaner P
Application: Cleaner for OPC's
Code numbers: USA 1987798 and EUR. 1987994
Contents:

Caution:
Safety: Cleaner P is irritating to the eyes and defats the skin. Wear protection gloves.

Cleaner R
Application: Cleaner for corona wires
Code number: 7991469
Contents: Phosphates (extremely mild Acid)
Disadvantage: Residue from Alkali salts corrodes rubber on silicone belts

18.06.2002 118
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Maintenance procedure Oc· TDS400

Introduction
The maintenance process is necessary to satisfy the customer.
Do this to:
Keep the best print and copy quality;
Decrease the number of repeat calls.

General description of the cleanning liquids

Do the following maintenance procedure every visit.

Tools and materials

The materials to start the maintenance:
Description Codenumber EUR Codenumber USA
Cleaner T 1989.916 1989.750
Cleaner K 1929.022 1929.023
Cleaner O 7991.470 7991.470
Maslin cloth 5630.211 5630.211

The life time of PM parts

The life time of the preventive maintenance parts must pass the life time as indicated in the
table.
Replace the preventive maintenance parts if the print and the copy quality is not best.

Code No Description Estimated lifetime (meters)

7069.008 Photoconductor 20.000
2912.651 Cleaning blade 20.000
2999.818 The charge corona wire assy, or 20.000
the charge corona unit assy
2999.821
2999.802 Transfer and separation corona wire 20.000
assy
7045.011 Developer (= 1bottle) 20.000

Maintenance procedure printer

Check Action Procedure

The print quality Make the service test print 51. How to check the print quality
Check the print quality is in the
specification.
The waste toner bag Replace the waste toner bag when it
is full.
Check if the waste toner bag is
placed correctly.
If toner has leaked, clean the area.
Instruct to the customer about how
to put the bag correctly and when to
replace the bag
The fuser unit Check the absorber wires are free
from toner. Remove the toner.
Use the cleaner T.
Check the output rollers are free
from toner. Remove toner, using
cleaner K

18.06.2002 119
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The charge corona Clean the charge wires and unit. How to clean the charge wires
unit Replace the wire when cleaning has and unit
no result.
Clean the unit.
In case of extreme corrosion of the
frame, replace the unit
The transfer Clean the transfer and sepa-ration How to clean the transfer and
separation unit wire. separation wires, and unit.
Replace the wire when clean-ing
has no effect.
Clean the transfer and separation
unit.
In case of extreme corrosion of the
frame, replace the unit
The LED print heads Clean the LED Print Heads with a
lint-free cloth
The developing unit Replace the developer when print
quality problems are caused by the
developer.
End of life developer
Check the Check the quality of the service test How to clean and polish the
photoconductor print 51 made. photoconductor.
Clean or polish the photoconductor
when print and copy quality
problems are caused by the
photoconductor
The cleaning unit Check the surface of the clean blade
is not damaged

Maintenance procedure scanner

Check Action Procedure

The copy quality Make a copy of the transparent test How to check the copy quality.
original.
Check the copy quality is in
specification
The original table Clean the glass plate and white
plate.
Use cleaner A.
Advice the customer, why to clean
the glass and white plate regularly.
The procedure is described in the
Operator Manual: "Cleaning the
glass platen".
Advise the customer to use the
"Cleaner kit"
Optical path Clean the mirror.
Use a dry maslin cloth.
Check and clean if the lens and
CCD-unit necessary

18.06.2002 120
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Power Logic controller: User Names & Passwords

Note:
If you want to have the login window pop-up, hold down the <shift> key during booting of the
controller.

Users login SDS/Setting QM/SCP Password

Windows NT Editor
Service engineer service Service 675756
Normal user anonymous Anonymous Anonymous [ anonymous ]
Key operator - Key operator Key operator KeyOp
System - System System administrator SysAdm
administrator administrator
Repro operator - - Repro operator ReproOp
For the BIOS 6869767*
System menu on [Arrow left ] [stop] [Arrow right] [stop
printer

* Note:
Use numeric part of the keyboard (right side) to
enter the number

For security reason the customer can change the following passwords:
l Key Operator Password
l System Administrator password
l Repro Operator password.

Use SDS test 94 to view the modified passwords.

18.06.2002 121
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Notes SDS session

Explanation SDS session

The SDS session starts and controls the SDS Session for WebSDS (on the Service Laptop or
Controller) or NotesSDS (on Service laptop).
Within the Notes SDS also a sds_log.mdb file (showing all system SDS settings) can be
viewed.

Note:
A Direct Cable Connection from the laptop to controller can take some time. Please wait.

Settings in SDS session:

Host
The following entries are possible:

l NotesSDS on the service laptop: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. Replace the
address by service to run the NotesSDS.
l WebSDS on the service laptop: The default of the Controller TCP/IP address is shown.
Replace the address by service to run the WebSDS.
l WebSDS on the controller: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. This address is
OK to run the Web SDS. In case the controller is not connected to a network use: localhost.
l In case a sds_log.mdb file must be viewed via NotesSDS, use local as an entry.

Password
The service password is required to access the SDS

Start / Stop
Start / Stop button to start / stop the SDS session.

Note:
Make sure that you always STOP the SDS session before leaving the NotesSDS or WebSDS.

Message
Actual status message of the SDS session.

System information
System type: indication of the used system (in this case Oc· TDS400).

Controller status

NURS mode: while printing / plotting the technician is able to read out machine information e.g.
counters.
It is not possible to change parameters or activate outputs while online.
SDS mode: technician has full access to the system.

Permanent error
Iindication of a permanent error

Remove / test 30
Activate test 30 to reset the permanent error.

18.06.2002 122
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 123
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· TDS400 SDS passwords

Passwords of the Oc· TDS400 system.

18.06.2002 124
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails. (R1.2)

Description
Check if the Laptop date and the controller date are equal, otherwise SDS test 71 fails.

18.06.2002 125
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Tips and (connection) problems laptop LN SDS

Problems
Message in SDS session screen: [ CreateDispatch() failed ].
Message in SDS session screen: [ CreateDispatch() failed ].
Activate the OK button, message: [ SDS server not found ].

Problem:
The SDS on your laptop is not or wrong registered.

Solution:
1. Make a Direct Cable Connection with the controller.
2. Start the Windows Explorer and open the c:\oce\apps\sds map.
3. Activate REG.BAT by double clicking it.
4. Make sure that the file OceSds.ini is in your windows directory ( C:\windows ).
If it is not copy it from c:\oce\apps\sds to c:\windows.
5. Activate SDSserver.exe by double clicking it.
6. Now run Lotus Notes and activate the SDS session. This should now work properly.
7. If you stop Lotus Notes the SDS server can still be active (this time only) and you must stop it
manually.
You can do this by double clicking the icon in the taskbar and then you select shutdown server
in the pop-up window.
8. When this is done once, the next connection will work properly

Solving connection problems

In cases the connection between the Controller and the Service Laptop fails the following items
can be checked successively to check for the cause.

l Check that your hosts file on your Laptop is correctly adapted.

Open the hosts file within your Windows95 directory with Notepad and check that the following
lines are added;
134.188.254.101 laptop
134.188.254.100 service

l Ping to the controller IP address: 134.188.254.100

Ping to the laptop IP address: 134.188.254.101

l Check within the Network Properties of your Laptop that in the Client for Microsoft Networks no
connection is made to a Windows NT Domain and no name is filled in within this field.

l Check the hostname of the controller, no more than 12 characters

l Open a HyperTerminal session with the same settings as defined in the previous chapter
correct settings.
Connect a loop back plug to the COM1 port of the laptop. The plug is available as tool.
(7991.531)
Characters you type should appear on the screen.
If not; your problem is the within the hardware of your Laptop.

l The same action can be done on the Controller.

Before doing this the RAS services should be stopped within the Remote Access Admin
application of the Controller.
Characters you type should appear on the screen.
If not; your problem is the within the hardware of your Controller.

l Connect the cable between the Controller and the Laptop and open the HyperTerminal session
on both sides.
Characters you type on the Laptop should appear on the Controller screen and visa versa.
If not, the problem is within the cable.

l Open the Remote Access Admin application of the Controller.

Open the Port Status window and try to make a connection as described in the previous
chapter.
This window can give you details why the connection failed.

18.06.2002 126
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 127
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

01-29 Function tests overview

Indentification
Every test has its unique number. This number is composed in the following way:

test number = SAC-group + function group + reference

Function tests can be divided into the next groups:

Function group Number

[ Counters ] 0
[ Parameters ] 1
[ Inputs ] 2
[ Outputs ] 4
[ Specials ] 6
[ Adjustments ] 7
[ Consumables ] 8
[ Information ] 9

Definition
[ Counters ]
[ Parameters ]
[ Inputs ]
[ Outputs ]
[ Specials ]
[ Adjustments ]
[ Consumables ]
[ Information ]

All tests are described in corresponding chapters.

18.06.2002 128
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 30 Reset PE ]
Reset permanent error.

You can see a permanent error only in the [ SDS SESSION ] test.
The reset button for a permanent error is also available in [ SDS SESSION ] test.

18.06.2002 129
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service counters ]

Description Log and Reset the fault and the service counters .
Also the counters in the fault history will be updated.

Value

Remarks On of the last steps, before ending SDS session.

18.06.2002 130
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32 Display the last errors (overview) ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

32.1 Display the last errors

32.2 Display the last system errors

32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode (SDS session active)

32.4 Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active)

Remarks

18.06.2002 131
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.1 Display the last errors ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 132
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.2 Display the last system errors ]

Description Display the last system errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 133
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last errors in system mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 134
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.4 Display the last system errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 135
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 34 Display the top 10 error (overview) ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

34.1 Display the top 10 errors

34.2 Display the complete system top 10 errors

34.3 Relative error top 10 (not available yet)

34.4 Releative system error top 10 (not avalable yet)

Remarks

18.06.2002 136
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 34.1 Display the top 10 error ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 137
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 34.2 Display the complete system top 10 error ]

Description Display the complete system top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 138
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 35 Display the recorded errors in CAS-group ]

Description Display the recorded errors in the CAS-group

All logged errors are displayed in CAS-group order, with the items:
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 139
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 36 Display the counters of the consumables ]

Description Display the counters of the consumables

Information presented for each consumable counter:

l Consumable counter number
l Consumable counter name
l The current value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 140
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 37 Display the settings of the parameters ]

Description Display the settings of the parameters

Information presented for each parameter:

l Parameter name
l The current value
l The minimum range value
l The maximum range value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 141
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 38 Display the Service / Marketing counters ]

Description Display the amount of prints, copies and scans made on the system.

Information presented for each parameter:

l Absolute
l Since last visit

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 142
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 45 Print the system settings ]

Description Print the system settings.

The following items are selected and printed:

l The Oc· TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations).

l All BIOS settings
l The hardware configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The software configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The status report of the total system (W NT and Oc· TDS400)

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 143
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 49 Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and the
resolution ]

Description Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and resolution.

The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value

Remarks Selection: roll 1, 2 or manual feed.

18.06.2002 144
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 51 Print the service test print 51 ]

Description Print the service test print 51.

A test print is made to check the print process.
The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value Selection:
l Roll 1
l Roll 2
l Manual feed

Remarks

18.06.2002 145
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 52 Print the Demo Print ]

Description Print the Demo print.

This print contains a drawing of the Oc· TDS400 and an image of the Quick
Referece Card.

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 146
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 54 Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the

print head ]

Description Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the print head

Value This test will disable the connection from Oc· Power Logic controller to the
printhead interface PBA.
The image is generated by the printhead interface PBA.

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 147
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70 Installation Transport employee (or technician) ]

The Oc· TDS400 system (Oc· Power Logic controller, printer and scanner) is complete
adjusted in the production department. All Oc· Power Logic controller optionals are installed. If
some adjustments must be repeated during the installation, than they are enabled in the
installation menu.
The print engine can be delivered:
l With or without developer.
l With or without Compact Output Stacker.
l With adjustments enabled in the installation menu.

The tables shows the adjustments that can be enabled. You can access them by the
installation menu on the operator panel of the Printer (Menu Installation, if the tests are
enabled !!!!!).
Note: the SDS session must be stopped during the Installation test by the transporter.
Or error code "67"appears in the printer display. Solution: .

Print engine is NOT filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
2 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
3 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
4 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

Print engine is filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
2 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
3 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

18.06.2002 148
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1 Installation technician (Overview Printer / Scanner / Oc·

Power Logic controller) ]
The configuration is complete adjusted in the production line.

Do the next test only if:

- you want to check the performance of the configuration
- you want to tune the quality to the customer's demand
- the configuration is not the same as received from the production line (e.g. other scanner or controller or ...)

Remarks:
Next actions must be executed before you start the SDS 70 tests:
1. The developer unit is filled and adjusted (Adjustment procedure new developer) .
2. The adjustment: Trailing edge position between the first and the following prints in a run
3. The adjustment: Paper cut length of the roll 1
4. The adjustment: Leading edge position for the roll 1, 2 and manual feed

Step SDS test Description

1 70.1.1 Printer installation
2 70.1.2 Scanner installation
3 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller installation

18.06.2002 149
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1.1 Printer Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step SDS test Name Adj

1 51 Print the test print
2 15-1-001 Adjust the leading edge position (PTRINSE
15B1)
3 51 Print the test print
4 12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 1 (on request customer)
5 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1
6 51 Print the test print
7 12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 2 (on request customer)
8 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2
9 12-6-43 Print a 841 mm blank print of roll1
10 51 Print the test print manual feed
11 15-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction for
manual feed
12 49 Print the test print for the optical density
13 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity for average line / text
prints
14 04-1-004 Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints

18.06.2002 150
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1.2 Scanner Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician
Step SDS test Description Adjustment
1 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 accuracy in
the feed direction
2 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy
in width direction (1:1)
3 09-1-002 Adjust the start timer of
the scanning
4 09-1-003 Adjust the stop timer of
the scanning
5 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position
original (in 0.1 mm)

18.06.2002 151
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step Test number Name Adjustment

1 90 System configuration
2 91 Serial number
3 93 Set the international paper
standards
4 95 Modification records (Not in
R1)
5 97 Preset the copy counter
6 98 Set the first installation
date

18.06.2002 152
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2 Installation M&L (Overview) ]

The installation procedure for M&L is divided into 3 blocks:

l Printer installation M&L assembling: SDS test 70.2.1

l Printer installation M&L configuration: SDS test 70.2.2

l Scanner installation M&L: SDS test 70.2.3

18.06.2002 153
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2.1 Printer Installation M&L assembling ]

Step SDS test Name Adjustment

1 73 SWDL
2 22-6-001 Initialize non volatile data printer
3 05-1-002 Adjust the sensivity of the developer
sensor (DEVCONSE 05B1)
4 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
5 54 Print the printhead check print
6 49 Testprint process
7 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity normal
8 04-1-004 Adjust the light intensity poster
9 51 Service test print
10 04-1-005 Adjust the light intensity left printhead
11 04-1-007 Adjust trhe light intensity for the right
printhead
12 04-1-008 Horizontal alignment of the left and the
middle printhead
13 04-1-009 Horizontal alignment of the middle and
the right printhead
14 04-1-010 Vertical alignment of the left printhead
15 04-1-012 Vertical alignment of the right printhead
16 51 Service test print
17 15-1-003 Adjust the image position in the width
direction for manual feed
18 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure for new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
19 12-1-053 Enable the Installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3).
(12-7-008)
20 12-1-054 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
21 15-1-004 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position. (15-7-020)
22 91.3 Set the printer serial number

Continue with sds 70.2.2

18.06.2002 154
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2.2 Printer installation M&L configuration ]

Continuation of sds 70.2.1
Step SDS test Name Adjustment
1 12-7-008 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the trailing edge position between the
first and the following prints in a run.
2 12-7-009 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 1
3 12-7-010 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 2
4 51 Service test print
5 15-1-001 Setting the head margin
6 51 Service test print
7 12-1-004 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 1
8 51 Service test print
9 12-1-006 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 2
10 51 Service test print
11 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 1
12 51 Service test print
13 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 2
14 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
15 12-1-053 Disable installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3)
16 12-1-054 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
17 15-1-004 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position (15-7-020)
18 51 Service test print
19 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service
counters.

18.06.2002 155
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2.3 Scanner Installation M&L]

Step SDS test Description Adjustment

1 22-6-021 Initialize non volatile data scanner
2 10-6-002 Maximum exposure level
3 10-7-001 CCD allignment
4 10-7-003 CCD gain
5 10-7-002 CCD focus
6 10-7-001 CCD alignment
7 10-7-004 1:1 width and right alignment

18.06.2002 156
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 71 Backup the system data ]

R1.1

Description Backup the system data.

You can choose between: All, SDS, KOSSAS.

The following actions are performed:

l On the controller PC a new directory is created in the c:\service\visits directory
with the current date (YYYYMMDD) as directory name.
Example: C:\service\visits\20010218.

Depending of the backup choice one or more files are stored in the new
directory:
l The KOS and SAS files.
l The SDS database files.
l An OTS file is generated from the SDS log database. (OTS is a file needed
with the [ STAR ] application).
l A Dumpconfig.txt file. This is an ASCII file.

The service technician must copy the files from the controller to the laptop by
the Direct Cable connection.
Copy the files to a backup diskette which stays with the machine.
(If the files are too large, compress the files with e.g. WinZip).

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test backups the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:

l Standard:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Actual customer settings (current.sas, curent.kos, current.sm,
oce9450dumpconfig.txt, adt.cfg)
l All:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,
Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)
l Settings Editor:
Backup of

18.06.2002 157
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,

Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l SDS:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Accounting:
Backup of
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)

Target:

l Controller only:
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Default dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l The default STAR directory on the service laptop
l Other dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Any directory you can browse on the service laptop

Remarks Execute a Standard backup to Other dir.

Zip this directory on your service laptop to the logfloppy for your system.
Leave this floppy at the system.

18.06.2002 158
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 71/72 Backup / Restore ] of the system software: When to do

it?
General
l The parameters of all the SDS adjustments and settings of the system are stored in the
EEPROM on the CPU pba of the printer engine.
This EEPROM is fixed on the pba with solder.

l The parameters of all the client settings (key operator and system administrator) are stored in
the xxx.kos & xxx.sas files in the controller. E.g. connectivity, passwords and the settings by
the [ Remote Logic ].

l Changes made by the SDS or the operator panel (e.g. installation menu) are stored in the
EEPROM of the printer and then copied to the SDS application in the controller.

l When the system is switched ON, the data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied to
the SDS application in the controller.

l A complete backup on a diskette contains all the system and the client settings.

When to restore the data:

After replacement of the printer CPU pba
The new EEPROM on the CPU pba has the default data.
Restore the system data from the backup diskette.
(Client settings (xxx.kos and xxx.sas) are still on the controller)

After replacement of the printhead assy (PHD + I/O pba)

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
assy.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead assy.
Then all the settings from the printhead I/O pba are stored in the EEPROM of the CPU pba in the
printer.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!
Make the service test print with the SDS 51 to check the light intensity.

After replacement if the prinhead I/O pba

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
I/O pba.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead I/O pba.
Then all the printhead settings in the printer EEPROM are stored in the EEPROM of the printhead
I/O pba.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!

18.06.2002 159
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

After replacement of only the printhead or only the printhead I/O pba from another system.
The flag setting of the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates no new hardware. So, It is not
possible to store new information in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba!
This means that the production adjustments of the printhead quality differs from the existing
printhead.
Only SDS settings, as e.g. light intensity, horizontal and vertical position can be changed.
So: NO copy / print quality guarantee.

After replacement or upgrade of the [ Power Logic Controller ]

After power on, the system data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied (restored) to the
SDS application in the controller.
Restore the client settings: xxx.kos and xxx.sas from the backup diskette

After download of the system software

The system software is downloaded in an other EEPROM.
This EEPROM is placed in a socket.
So there is no need to restore any data!

18.06.2002 160
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 72 Restore the system data ]

R1.1

Description Restore the system data.

You can do it from the diskette / harddrive of your laptop.
1. Activate the SDS test 72.
2. Select [ Subset & Target ].
3. Press the [ Start ] button.
4. In the window: Browse for folder, select the drive and / or folder where the
backup files are stored.
5. The restore function starts automatically. The files are stored in the
c:\service\restore directory of the controller. Then:
- the logdatabase is copied to c:\oce\apps\sds directory.
- the KOS/SAS settings file is copied to the KOS/SAS application directory.
- the parameters logged in the parameters table and the consumables logged
in the Consumables table (in the log database) are sent to the specific targets.

6. Wait till the [ Status ] window indicates: Completed. It take some minutes.
7. If applicable: Restore the xxx.kos and xxx.sas settings in the [ Settings Editor ]
- The [ current.kos ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as K.O, set the view to KO settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as K.O. and save the settings.
- The [ current.sas ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as S.A., set the view to SA settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as S.A. and save the settings.
8. Restart the controller.

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test restores the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:
Target:

Remarks The files for the settings editor (current.kos/sas) and scan manager (current.sm)
have to be opened, applied and saved in these applications before the settings
are loaded by the system.
Open the corresponding application and login as Service Operator.

REBOOT THE CONTROLLER AND SWITCH OFF / ON ALL THE

COMPONENTS.

18.06.2002 161
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 162
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 73 Download DESCRIPTION of the system software ]

The next list gives you a step by step description how to download the system software by SDS test 73.
The data is written in an EEPROM that is put in a socket.

Warning for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

1. Make a Direct Cable Connection between the laptop and the controller.
- Click on <Cancel> in the window: Direct Cable Connection Host.
- Minimize the window: Direct Cable Connection, when you see the text: Connected via Direct
Cable on COM1.
2. Start Lotus Notes and open the TDS400 TSM.
3. Start the SDS session.
4. Select the SDS test 20-1-010 (Select the next NT start method).
Set the test to: [ diagnostic ].
5. Close the SDS session.
6. Restart the [ Oc· Power Logic ] controller.
This disconnects your Direct Cable connection!
7. Wait approximately 3 minutes to make sure that the controller is in the Diagnosis mode,
because there is no monitor.
The printer and scanner display shows: awaking controller.
8. Have the system software on site (R1.0 to R1.1 : only on diskette, see also the warning on the
top).
9. Put the CD-ROM / diskette with the new software in the laptop.
10. Activate the Direct Cable Connection (see the point 1).
11. Start the SDS session.
12. Select the SDS test 73 (Download the system software).
Check on the printer display if the printer is in the download mode. If not, than do it manually
(the three fingers trick)
13. Start the download. You can browse to the directory with the new software xxxxxxx.ofp.
Note 1: if you must download the boot and the application software, then do it one by one.
Never together!
Note 2: if the download of the boot software fails, you have to replace the EPROM / CPU pba..
14. Restart the controller when the download is finished.
15. When the controller is restarted, the printer and the scanner display shows: ready.
16. There is no need to restore any data.

The whole action takes approximately 15 minutes.

18.06.2002 163
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 73 Download the system software (Diagnosis mode only) ]

Only for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

Description For a step by step description, see .

The download of the system software is only possible in the [ Diagnosis mode ] ,
by SDS test 20-1-010 .

Downloading of several kinds of software applications:

These are:
l Printer embedded software upgrades (normal releases and patches)

The following upgrades are not possible with this test:

l Scanner software
l Oc· Power Logic controller Windows NT upgrades
l Oc· Power Logic controller Oc· TDS400 upgrades (normal releases and
patches)

Value

Remarks There is no need to restore any data.

18.06.2002 164
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90 Set the system configuration (overview) ]

Test Name Remark

90 [ SYStem Configuration ] Each system component has his own configuration settings.
These settings can be pre-set in the sub-system NOVRAM or are
automatically determined by the component.
Activating of test 90 initialise each sub-system to find the
configuration settings that are automatically determined.
Before executing this test all components must be switched on.
The configuration of each sub-system can be
viewed/changed/overruled in the following tests:

90.1 Set the printer configuration

90.2 Set the scanner configuration

90.3 Set the controller configuration

18.06.2002 165
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90.1 Set the printer configuration ]

Name Automatically detected

1 Printer yes
2 Number of PRD rolls yes
3 Dew preventor no
4 Copy output stacker yes
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no

18.06.2002 166
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90.2 Set the scanner configuration ]

Name Automatically detected Opt

1 Printer yes present / n
2 Number of PRD rolls yes 1
3 Dew preventor no present / n
4 Copy output stacker yes present / n
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no present / n

18.06.2002 167
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90.3 Set the controller configuration ]

Name Automatically detected by test 90 Opt

- -
1 Set memory size yes ....
2 Centronics PBA no present / n
3 Token ring PBA no present / n
4 Ethernet combo PBA no present / n
5 User Interface present no present / n
6 Controller type yes Oc· Power Logic c

18.06.2002 168
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91 Set the configuration identification and serial numbers

(overview) ]

Test Name Remark

91 [ Configuration identification The system as whole has a certain configurtation identification number dependi
and serial numbers ] installed system components.
The system has a serial number total system which depends on the configuratio
system.
Each system component has his own serial number. These numbers can be pre
sub-system NOVRAM via activating test 91. All numbers are checked for possib
The configuration identification and serial numbers can be viewed / changed / o
the following tests:

91.1 Set the system configuration identification

91.2 System serial numbers

91.3 Printer serial numbers

91.4 Scanner serial numbers

91.5 Controller serial numbers

18.06.2002 169
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.1 Set the system configuration identification ]

18.06.2002 170
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.2 Set the system serial number ]

18.06.2002 171
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.3 Set the printer serial number ]

18.06.2002 172
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.4 Set the scanner serial number ]

18.06.2002 173
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.5 Set the controller serial number ]

Picture

The following item is available:

Item name Options
1 Controller serial number 0398XXXXX

18.06.2002 174
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 93 Set the international paper standards ]

18.06.2002 175
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 94 Display the passwords ]

18.06.2002 176
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95 Display / set the modification records (overview) ]

Each system component has his own modification record.

95.1 Controller modifications

95.2 Printer modifications
95.3 Scanner modifications
95.4 Paper roll drawer modifications
95.5 Compact output Stacker (COS)

18.06.2002 177
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.1 Display / set the controller modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the controller.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the controller.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04

18.06.2002 178
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 179
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.2 Display / set the printer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the printer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the printer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

18.06.2002 180
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 181
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.3 Display / set the scanner modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the scanner.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the scanner.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

18.06.2002 182
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 183
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.4 Display / set the paper roll drawer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the paper roll drawer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the paper roll drawer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

18.06.2002 184
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 185
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.5 Display / set the COS modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the Compact Output Stacker (COS).

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the COS.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03

18.06.2002 186
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 187
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 97 Preset the copy counter and set the counting method ]

18.06.2002 188
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 98 Set the first installation date ]

18.06.2002 189
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Drivers and application software

Oc· ADI driver For AutoCAD 14 Windows 95/98 and NT 3.51/4.0

Oc· HDI driver For AutoCAD 2000 Windows 95/98/2000 and NT 4.0
Oc· Windows driver Windows 95/98/2000 and NT 4.0
PostScript Level 3 drivers For Windows 95/98/2000, NT 4.0 and Macintosh
Oc· Plot Director Job submission software for Windows 95/98 and NT 4.0
(customer trial only)

Note:
Check Oc· in the internet at www.oce.com for the latest drivers.

18.06.2002 190
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PostScript is not plotted in a particular set (only in combination

with Plot Director) (R1.1)
Description
A number of PostScript files in one set , sometimes one of the files is not printed.

Remark:

Plot Director is only for service use.

Resolution:

This problem is solved with R1.2.

18.06.2002 191
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printer sharename changed after upgrade R1.1 to R1.2 or R1.3

Description
After upgrading from R1.1 to R1.2 or R1.3 the printer sharename does not contain a " " (space character)
anymore.

Workarround:

Reinstall all clients or change the portname.

18.06.2002 192
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printing from Macintosh Os 8.5 and 8.6 (R1.1)

Description
When sending several files from Mac to TDS400, Mac may hang up, and a reboot is required.

Workaround:

Print with the driver 8.7 and PrintLib 9.0.

18.06.2002 193
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Print Exec LT 1.0 release notes.

For detailed information regarding Oc· Print Exec LT 1.0 see:

SPS-ES bulletins / Application software / Print Exec LT / Pelt 1.0 / IB 1001: Print Exec LT
1.0.

IB content:

Summary
Introduction of Print Exec LT 1.0 (PELT 1.0 )

Reason

Print Exec LT 1.0 is the first version of the entry level product of the Print Exec Suite.
It offers document submission functionality and is targeted at small sized user groups, up to 15 users,
who want to submit documents to Oce Wide Format Printers.

Description

Print Exec LT 1.0 is a Windows application allowing users of Oce WFPS printers to print archived
files in a very efficient way.
PELT 1.0 provides the following features:
l Job composition
l Full settings editing at job and document level
l Definition of destinations (i.e. virtual printers) with default values for jobs
l Ability to work with up to 30 jobs, allowing for reprint
l Easy to learn and productive user interface
l Support of following Oc· devices (incl. job on hold and accounting attributes):
9600 NGC 2.1/2.2
TDS400
TDS600
TDS800
l Support of following plateforms:
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Millenium
l Support of following languages:
English
French
German
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Dutch
l Information on printer status and jobs in printer queue (via the integration of SCP and QM Remote
Logic applications).
l Reverse order of documents in a job
l Customization of the settings displayed in the document table of the main view
l End-user installable software
l Evaluation mode by default
l Licensed mode protection based on the Mac address of the workstation.
l On-Line Help.

Parts & Tools

l PE LT 1.0 is distributed on a dedicated CD-ROM to be shipped with the 9600, TDS400, TDS600 &
TDS800.

18.06.2002 194
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l PE LT 1.0 will be available on the Oc· WEB on week 106

Instruction

1. Installation instructions

2. Software Activation instructions

3. Access to the Printer Status & the Printer Queue functionnality

Known Problems

Known Problems

Appendices

Appendix 1 : Activation Key Requets Form

Appendix 2 : Example of Request

Appendix 3 : Tips and Tricks

Appendix 4 : Debugging Tools

Appendix 5 : Product & Getting Started Manuals

18.06.2002 195
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Communication with server could not be established" message

Description
In the WEB browser a message "Communication with server could not be established" is
displayed, instaed of the message "Maximum number of print sessions, please try later again".

Work around: Ignore the message and try later again

18.06.2002 196
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Communication with the server was interrupted" message.

Description
The WEB browser shows a message "Communication with the server was interrupted", in case
of a controller spool full condition.

Work around: Try later again.

18.06.2002 197
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Large files can not be submitted in advanced job submition

Description
With the Microsoft Internet explorer the maximum file size which can be submitted is 30 MB
with 256 MB of RAM and 40 MB with 512 MB of RAM due to the memory management of the
Internet Explorer.

Netscape test were successful with job up to 70 MB on a PC with 256 MB of RAM.

18.06.2002 198
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PELTWEB R1.2 requires IE 4.0.2 SP2 or above (R1.3)

Description
If PELTweb R1.2 is used in combination with IE4.0.2 up to SP1, some errors can occur.

On remote PC's PELTweb with IE4.0.2 SP2 or higher should be used.

18.06.2002 199
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The file format is not identified automatically

Description
The file format is not automatically recognized.
Language settings and Pen settings can not be done.

Work around: In order to access language and pen settings the language must be set
manually.

18.06.2002 200
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The user name not saved if the name includes spaces

Description
To prevent that the user has to enter his name, Account ID, and User ID for each job, the
system saves the name (via cookies).
If the first name has a space, only the first word (before the space) is restored.

These cookies are also associated to a specific printer, so if a user connects to a different
printer, the info has to be reentered.

Work around: avoid spaces.

18.06.2002 201
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

There is no warning message when PELTWEB is not started on

a PLC with less than 256 MB
Description
PETLweb requires 256Mb of RAM.

the reason for not starting PELTweb is stored in the file log.txt in the PELTW directory on the
PLC.

18.06.2002 202
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Customer can not update PS/WRD on the PLC. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)
Description
New versions of the PS and WRD driver can only be updated on the PLC in the service account.

Workaround:

Install the driver directly on the client PC of the customer.

So the feature driver downloading is not used.

18.06.2002 203
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Roll info not updated in WRD driver. (R1.2, R1.3)

Description
A change of roll information is not updated automatically in the client part of the WRD driver.

Workaround:

None.

18.06.2002 204
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Customer can not update PS/WRD on the PLC. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)
Description
New versions of the PS and WRD driver can only be updated on the PLC in the service account.

Workaround:

Install the driver directly on the client PC of the customer.

So the feature driver downloading is not used.

18.06.2002 205
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Viewer does not work after installation (R1.2)

Description
The viewer installation is done after the controller installation is ready.
The beep and the CD eject is the message to the service engineer that the installation is ready, however, when
the viewer is part of the system this will be installed after the reboot.
The installation of the viewer is started after 90 seconds, and needs another 90 seconds to complete.
In GUI-less situation this means that after the beep and controller reboot needs a second reboot after 3 minutes.

When the second reboot is done shorter in time, the controller works, but not the viewer.

18.06.2002 206
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Blocked Queue when deleting multiple files at once from the

Queue Manager. (R1.1)
Description
When selecting multiple non-consecutive jobs in Queue Manager an deleting them, sometimes the queue is
blocked.

Workaround R1.1:

Delete files one by one.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 207
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Applications crash in case the scan destination path is filled

with "c:" for a FTP destination (R1.2)
Description
Applications crash in case the scan destination path is filled with "c:" for a FTP destination.

Workaround:

Use a correct naming, or the dropdown button, and select one of the available directories.

18.06.2002 208
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Default NIC addresses (0.0.0.0) causes Scan to File errors

Description
If after a PLC installation no IP-adress is nonfigured all IP adresses are 0.0.0.0, this will cause
delivery errors, even if a local destination is used.

Work Around: configure at least one Network Interface Card with a valid IP-adress (provided
by customer) or use 192.168.100.100 or 192.168.100.101 or 192.100.102

18.06.2002 209
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Delivery errors with Scan Manager / File destinations not

checked before the delivery of a file
Description
The Scan Manager generates "delivery errors" when inaccessible destinations are used.

Cause: File destinations are not checked prior to the delivery of a file.

Work Around: Use existing destinations.

Remark: Never use drive letters and colons in a destination

18.06.2002 210
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Files on remote destinations are written over without a message

to confirm
Description
If the Scan Manager writes a file to a remote destination, it will not ask for confirmation.

Work around: Check for the existing of the file before scanning.

18.06.2002 211
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a

change from English to Japanese in the IME
Description
It is not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a switch from English to
Japanese in the IME.

Work Around: close the Scan Manager, and start it again.

18.06.2002 212
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

AutoView sometimes does not work. (R1.1)

Description
Sometimes in the AutoView mode the scanned files are not shown in the viewer.

Workaround R1.1:

Close the viewer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 213
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Crash with duplicate destinations in Scan Manager (R1.1)

Description
When a duplicate destination is made in Scan Manager, the Scan Manager crashes.

Workaround R1.1:

None. Don't use duplicate destinations.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 214
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Destinations missing. (R1.1)

Description
When the 2nd destination is deleted from a row of 6 destinations, only the first destination is shown.

Workaround R1.1:

Do not create a gap in the destination list.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 215
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Incomplete info when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm

lengths. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)
Description
The scanner allows scanning of a minimum size of 210x210mm.
If a scan is made with setting custom size and the specified size is smaller than an A3 standard format however,
there are some limitations:
l The length is always 420mm.
l The file is only shown in the ScanManager after clicking the "refresh" button.
l The other file information (size, resolution, etc.) is not filled in ScanManager.

Workaround:

None

18.06.2002 216
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scan-to-file standard size is not correct (R1.1)

Description
When making a scan to file with setting standard size, the resulting length is the length of the nearest standard
format corresponding to the related paperseries. (related to PR00-0822)

Workaround R1.1:

Only use formats out of the selected paperserie.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 217
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Unexpected length in case of Scan to File, 200% and standard

size A2. (R1.1)
Description
When making a Scan to File with settings 200% zoom, standard width A2 and standard length A2, the resulting
image is indeed 200% zoomed, but the physical copy is of an A2 lenght while you've expected an A0 lenght.

Workaround R1.1:

Use synchro cut.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 218
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong languages in the Scan Manager. (R1.1)

Description
When the Scan-to-File password is entered (+rebooted) after changing the first and/or second display language
setting in the Settings Editor,
then the Scan Manager will appear in the factory default language.

Workaround 1 R1.1:

First enter the Scan-toFile password and reboot. Then change the display language.

Workaround 2 R1.1:

Change the display language again. Now the Scan Manager will get in sync with the other applications.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 219
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to configure a FTP server on Windows NT 4.0 PC of the

customer

With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
After the installation of the FTP server it has to be configured.

Lets assume on the Power Logic Controller the following (Oc· TDS800) example destination is generated in the
scan manager.

l A user Theo wants to put files on a PC named pc1-tds800.

l His user name to have access to this pc is theo and his password is 1234.
l The scanned files should be named theo001, theo002 etc.

The corresponding destination properties windows in scan manager should be.

In this example the standard Windows NT Internet Service Manager software is used to create the FTP server.

The customer PC has to be set-up in the following way

l Create a directory c:\scans

A user theo has to be added as a valid user for this PC.

l Select User Manager from the Administrative Tools (Common)

18.06.2002 220
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select New User

l Create the new user theo and select OK

18.06.2002 221
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Close the User Manager

The FTP server on the customer PC has to be set-up in the following way;

l Select Internet Service Manager within the Microsoft Peer Web Services (Common)

18.06.2002 222
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Double click your computer name

l Adapt the settings as shown

18.06.2002 223
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Yes after you disabled the Allow only anonymous connections

l Remove the default FTP directory

18.06.2002 224
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Adapt the Home Directory as shown

l Select OK

18.06.2002 225
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Close the Internet Service Manager

l This completes the configuration of the FTP server.

l Do a scan to file to theo to verify the correct setup.

l You should see the file within the scans directory

18.06.2002 226
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 227
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to install a FTP server on a Windows NT 4.0 PC of the

customer
With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
Within Windows NT the FTP server is part of the Internet Service Manager services that is part of the Windows
NT package.

To install the FTP server on a Windows NT environment you have to do the following steps.

l Activate the properties of the Network Neighborhood.

l Select the Services tab.

l Check if Microsoft Peer web server is loaded.
l If this service is not loaded, press the add button.

l Select the Microsoft Peer web server, and click OK

18.06.2002 228
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l As prompted specify the location of the Windows NT source files.

l The Microsoft Peer Web Services Setup is started and activate the OK button.

l Select only the Internet Service Manager and the FTP Service and activate the OK button.

18.06.2002 229
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select OK

l Select Yes

l Select Yes

l The Microsoft Peer Web Services is installed. Press OK.

18.06.2002 230
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Press close

18.06.2002 231
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to configure a FTP server on Windows 2000 PC of the

customer

With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
After the installation of the FTP server it has to be configured.

Lets assume on the Power Logic Controller the following (Oc· TDS800) example destination is generated in the
scan manager.

l A user Theo wants to put files on a PC named pc1-tds800.

l His user name to have access to this pc is theo and his password is 1234.
l The scanned files should be named theo001, theo002 etc.

The corresponding destination properties windows in scan manager should be.

In this example the standard Windows2000 Internet Information Services software is used to configure the FTP
server.

The customer PC has to be set-up in the following way

l Create a directory c:\scans

The user theo has to be added as a valid user for this PC.

l Select Administrative Tools in the Control Panel

18.06.2002 232
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Computer Management

l Select Users of the Local Users and Groups part

18.06.2002 233
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Right-click to add a New user

l Add a user theo

l Select Close

18.06.2002 234
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The FTP server on the customer PC has to be set-up in the following way;

l Select Internet information Manager within the Administrative Tools of the Control Panel

l Right click the Default FTP site and select properties

18.06.2002 235
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Adapt the Security Accounts tab as shown

l Adapt the Home Directory as shown

18.06.2002 236
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select OK

l This completes the configuration of the FTP server.

l Do a scan to file to theo to verify the correct setup.

l You should see the file within the scans directory

18.06.2002 237
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to install a FTP server on a Windows 2000 PC of the

customer

With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
Within Windows 2000 the FTP server is part of the Internet Information Services that is part of the Windows
2000 package.

To install the FTP server on a Windows NT environment you have to do the following steps.

l Select Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel

l Select Add/Remove Windows Components

18.06.2002 238
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Internet Information Services

l Select Next

l As prompted specify the location of the Windows2000 source files.

18.06.2002 239
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Finish

18.06.2002 240
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to configure a FTP server on Windows 9X/ME PC of the

customer
With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
After the installation of the FTP server it has to be configured.

Lets assume on the Power Logic Controller the following (Oc· TDS800) example destination is generated in the
scan manager.

l A user Theo wants to put files on a PC named pc1-tds800.

l His user name to have access to this pc is theo and his password is 1234.
l The scanned files should be named theo001, theo002 etc.

The corresponding destination properties windows in scan manager should be.

In this example TYPSoft software is used to create the FTP server.

The customer PC has to be set-up in the following way

l Create a directory c:\scans

The FTP server on the customer PC has to be set-up in the following way;

l Start the FTP Server.

l Select the Setup FTP tab.
l Adapt the settings as shown.

18.06.2002 241
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select the User Setup tab.

l Adapt the settings as shown.

l This completes the configuration of the FTP server.

l Do a scan to file to theo to verify the correct setup.

l You should see the file within the scans directory

18.06.2002 242
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 243
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to install a FTP server on a Windows 9X/ME PC of the

customer
With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
This software is not available within the standard Windows9X/ME package.
For this functionality you have to use a third party supplier.
In this case we use TYPSoft FTP Server software to create a FTP server.
You can download the latest version at www.multimania.com./typsoft/eng/download.htm.

To install the TYPSoft FTP Server on a Windows 9X/ME environment you have to do the following steps.

l Activate the ftpserver.exe file.

l Select Next

l Select Next

l Select Next

18.06.2002 244
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Install

l Select Finish

18.06.2002 245
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 246
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Scan Logic (optional)

Application Oc· Scan Manager, integrated scanning solution, including Oc· View
Station (LT)
Scan destinations 6 programmable destinations
Scan to controller
Scan to network directory
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Resolution 200, 300, 400 dpi
Data formats Tiff (G3, G4, uncompressed)
CALS type 1
Scan modes Single scan, stream feed productive batch scans
File naming Automatically generate unique file names for each scan
File size extra file compression with FSR (File Scan Reduction) mode on
scanner panel
Check plot To check your scanned file
Viewing View the scans at point of scanning
Oc· Image Logic Optimum scan quality for bad quality originals
Ease of use STF from scanner panel, scan direct to the destination
Requirements 256 Mb on controller and a graphical user interface
Options Oc· View Station, editing software. For use at remote locations

18.06.2002 247
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor

Description
The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor. It is not clear which number is
which adapter.

Work around: Make a print of the settings to see which adapter has which number.

18.06.2002 248
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printhead Duty Cycle setting not working. (R1.1)

Description
When changing the value to adjust the Printhead Duty Cycle from within the Settings Editor it doesn't change the
Duty Cycle at all.

Workaround R1.1:

Adjust from within SDS.

Resolution:

Duty Cycle setting is removed from the Settings Editor in R1.2.

18.06.2002 249
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

A connection is not possible from Remote Logic if

<options-hostname> is ["localhost"] on the controller
Description
If in the <options-hostname> field of the applications on the controller "localhost" is filled in, it is
not possible to connect to the controller from the Remote Applications.

Work Around: Use the correct system name or nothing.

18.06.2002 250
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad connection from service laptop to applications (QM, SCP,

SE, SM) (R1.1)
Description
The service laptop has 2 connectors, the serial port and the ethernet card.
Therefore, the applications have problems connecting to the controller.

Solution

In the applications on the service laptop in the tab "edit/options" the hostname should be set to 134.188.254.101

18.06.2002 251
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The [Application launcher] disappears from the screens smaller

than 1024x768
Description
Description: The application manager is difficult to use on screens smaller than 1024 X
768 (appears outside the screen)

Work around: edit the adt.cfg file (C:\oce\apps\applications\settings\adt.cfg). under section

"[AL]" and replace WindowX and WindowY values by suitable ones. (e.g. X=650 Y=400 for
800 X 600 lower right), Also for Remote Logic, by selecting various Taskbar options windows
can be re-arranged (taskbar - right mouse buttom)

18.06.2002 252
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Hosts table
Overview Hosts table of the laptop

134.188.254.101 laptop
134.188.254.100 service

18.06.2002 253
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation and configuring of Oc· Remote Logic on the laptop

for R1.0 to 1.1
Attention: this description is only valid for the upgrade of R1.0 to 1.1

General

Switch on the laptop.

Logon as [ Service ].
Install the Oc· Remote Logic applications on the laptop from the Oc· TDS400 system CD-ROM
.
Only this version is configured for Direct Cable with serial connection (laptop).

Note:
Do not install the Oc· Remote Logic application form the User Manual CD.
Is configured for remote network connection with TCP/IP (client).

To configure Remote Logic for the laptop, copy the next 3 xxxxx.cfg files to C:/Program
Files/Remote Logic.
(The existing xxx.cfg must be overwritten by the new ones.)
l Right mouse click on icon
l Detach
l Save Attachtment to: C:/Program Files/Remote Logic.

SEDC.cfg SCPDC.cfg QMDC.cfg

Note:
Only the direct cable connection is allowed (make e.g. no other connection to the local
network).

Establish a Direct Cable connection to the Controller. (Setup ).

Start the Oc· Settings Editor (or if needed Queue Manager and System Control Panel).
Log on to the controller (TCP/IP 134.188.254.100).

Passwords: Key Operator / System Administrator / Repro Operator (default)

or SDS test 94 .

18.06.2002 254
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Remote Logic software

Functionality
Queue Manager view status for each job and cancel, hold and restart the
entire job
System Control Panel view status and settings of system components
application
Settings Editor change system settings

18.06.2002 255
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor

Description
The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor. It is not clear which number is
which adapter.

Work around: Make a print of the settings to see which adapter has which number.

18.06.2002 256
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Large plots (complex files / large bitmaps) can not be

transformed.
Description
Large plots (complex files / large bitmaps) can not be transformed.

Solution:

Increase the PDL heap size of PK in the Key Operator Settings (optionally increase the hardware memory)

18.06.2002 257
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Not supported file types sometimes crashes the controller

Description
unsupported filetypes sometimes crashes the controller

Work around: avoid sending unsupported filetypes

18.06.2002 258
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Transformations are cancelled for partial frame. (R1.1)

Description
If plots are processed in partial frame mode (with complex files or raster bigger than 32 MB), transformations can
not be performed.
Partial frame mode will be logged inside the syslog file.

Workaround:

Increase PDL heap size. (PK heap size in the Key Operator Settings).
The system will get slower however.

18.06.2002 259
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII not full proof. (R1.2,

R1.3)
Description
ASCII is not well recognized by the Automatic Language Sensing.

Workaround:

Combine the RCF header which contains the "LG" parameter in the ASCII plot in order to print in ASCII mode.

18.06.2002 260
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong Calcomp parameter detection. (R1.1)

Description
Some Calcomp parameters are badly detected (in combination with Plot Director).

Workaround R1.1:

Sent job unmodified.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 261
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PostScript level 3 interpreter crash when printing files

containing some PostScript level 2 commands (R1.1)
Description
When printing PostScript level 2 files containing specific PostScript level 2 commands (e.g. rotation commands)
the PostScript level 3 interpreter crashes.

Workaround R1.1:

none.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 262
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Uncompressed TIFF files. (R1.1)

Description
Large uncompressed TIFF files are not always printed out.

Workaround R1.1:

None. When possible use only compressed TIFF files.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 263
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The transmission is lost after a stop of a transmission

Description
Transmission lost after abort of a transmis sion.

Work around: establish the connection again.

18.06.2002 264
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 265
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Backup / Restore does not work.

Tests / Checks:
Check if the date/time are equal between the laptop and the Power Logic Controller.

The time is visible in the (remote) settings editor and printed on a "print settings".

The setting can be changed logged in as Key Operator in the KO settings, in the System section.

After the setting is changed, the controller has to be rebooted.

18.06.2002 266
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic LEDs on the Oc· Power Logic controller)

Description
The power indicator LED on the front of the controller sends the diagnostic codes.
That can help you to find and correct a system problem.

Message power LED code Definition Probable Causes

Flash yellow System power supply failure Check Power supply connectors to
CD-ROM drive, Harddisk ....in the
controller
Solid yellow A device on the system board can
be fault or is not correct installed
Solid green and a tone code A problem was detected while the See description tone codes
during POST BIOS was activated
Solid green and no tone code The monitor or the graphics card
and no video during POST can be fault
Solid green and no tone code but An integrated system board device
the system locks up during POST can be fault

18.06.2002 267
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Error codes System Diagnostic Diskette

Description
Below, a list of possible diagnostic error messages is given.
These errors generated by the diagnostic test tool on the System Diagnostic Diskette .
Code Message Action

Diskette Drive Tests

FD641 Read failure Check / replace the diskette

Replace the diskette drive

FD644 Seek failure Replace the diskette drive

FD647 Write failure Check / replace the diskette

Replace the diskette drive

FD648 Change line failure Replace the diskette drive

Hard Disk Drive Tests

HD642 Seek failure Replace the hard disk

HD643 Read failure Replace the hard disk

HD645 Write failure Replace the hard disk

HD655 Controller failure Replace the hard disk

Replace system board

HD659 ECC failure Replace the hard disk

Replace system board

Coprocessor Tests

IC355 Calculation failure Replace the system board

IC356 Duty cycle failure Replace the system board

IC357 Exception failure Replace the system board

Serial Port Tests

IO570 Baute rate failure Replace the system board

IO571 Interrupt failure Replace the system board

IO572 Internal failure Replace the system board

IO573 External failure Replace the system board

Parallel Port Tests

IO574 Data port failure Replace the system board

IO575 External loopback failure If is occurred with loopback then replace

the system board

IO576 External interrupt failure Replace the system board

IO577 Printer test pattern failure Replace the system board

Keyboard Tests

KB727 Keyboard failure Replace the keyboard

Replace the system board

Mouse Tests

MS750 Mouse test failure Replace the mouse

Replace the system board

18.06.2002 268
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

MS752 Mouse buttons (for invoking EDIAG on Replace the mouse

portables) failure Replace the system board

Cache Tests

MY540 Cache controller failure Replace the system board

MY542 Cache memory failure Replace the system board

Memory Tests

MY557 Quick memory test failure Check the memory connections

Replace the memory

MY558 Comprehensive memory test failure Check the memory connections

Replace the memory

System Set Tests

SY543 DMA failure Replace the system board

SY563 Interrupt controller failure Replace the system board

SY565 Speaker failure Check cable, connection

Replace the speaker
Replace the system board

SY556 Real-time clock (RTC) failure Replace the system board

Video Tests

VX615 Video memory failure Replace the system board

VX619 Video controller failure Replace the system board

NIC tests

NI701 Controller failure Replace the system board

NI702 Transmit/receive (loopback) failure If is occurred with loopback then replace

the system board

Miscellaneous Tests

XX999 Reset button, SmartVu, PC-MCIA, Check connections, interface cables.

system timers or thermal control failure Replace the system board

18.06.2002 269
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Error Messages on monitor (configuration with Scan to File)

Description
This section lists (in alphabetical order) system error messages that can appear on the monitor screen. These
messages can help you find the source of a problem. Some of these error messages indicate fatal errors. When
a fatal error occurs, the system cannot restart until an correct hardware change is made.

Message Definition Probable Causes

Address mark not found The BIOS found a fault disk sector Fault diskette / tape drive subsystem
or can not find a special disk sector
or hard disk drive subsystem
(defective system board)
Attachment failed to reply The diskette drive or hard-disk drive Fault interface cable or connector
controller cannot send data to the
connected drive
Bad command or file name The command you entered does not Bad command
exist or is not in the pathname you
indicated
Bad error correction code (ECC) on The diskette drive or hard disk drive Fault diskette / tape drive subsystem
disk read controller detected an uncorrectable or hard disk drive subsystem
read error (defective system board)
Controller has failed The hard disk drive or the connected Fault diskette / tape drive subsystem
controller is defective or hard disk drive subsystem
(defective system board)
Data error The system received unrecoverable Fault diskette, diskette drive, or hard
data-read error from the diskette or disk drive
the hard disk drive
Decreasing available memory Read / write failure during POST One or more fault DIMMs or not
prevents the system to use the correct installed
available memory
Diskette drive 0 seek failure. The diskette / tape drive controller Fault or not correct inserted diskette,
Diskette drive 1 seek failure. can not find defined sector or track wrong configuration settings in the
System Setup program, loose
diskette / tape drive interface cable,
or loose power cable
Diskette read failure The failure occurred while system Fault diskette, fault or not correct
tried to read the diskette connected diskette / tape drive
interface cable, or loose power
cable
Diskette subsystem reset failed The system could not sent the reset Fault diskette / tape drive controller
command to the diskette controller (defective system board)
Diskette write protected Diskette write protect feature Diskette write protected.
activated.
Drive not ready No diskette in the drive. Defective, not formatted, or not
The operation requires a diskette in correct inserted diskette.
the drive before it can continue.
Gate A20 failure The gate A20 of the keyboard Fault keyboard controller (defective
controller does not function correct system board).
One or more DIMMs can be loose.
General failure The operating system cannot run The operating system is damaged or
the command. not correct installed
Hard disk controller failure The hard disk drive does not Incorrect configuration settings in
Hard disk drive read failure initialize. the System Setup program,
Hard disk failure not correct connected hard disk
Hard disk configuration error drive cable,
fault hard disk drive controller
subsystem (defective system
board),
or loose power cable.
Invalid configuration information - The system Setup program contains Wrong configuration settings in the
please run SETUP program wrong system configuration settings. system setup program or fault
battery.
Keyboard clock line failure The system cannot communicate Keyboard cable connector loose or
Keyboard data line failure with the keyboard. not correct connected, defective
Keyboard failure keyboard, or defective keyboard /
Keyboard stuck key failure mouse controller (defective system

18.06.2002 270
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

board).
Keyboard controller failure Keyboard / mouse controller failed. Defective keyboard / mouse
controller (defective system board).
Memory address line failure at During memory test, value read at Fault or not correct installed DIMMs
address, read value expecting value. the address was wrong or defective system board.
Memory data line failure at address,
read value expecting value
Memory double word logic failure at
address, read value expecting value
Memory odd/even logic failure at
address, read value expecting value
Memory write/ read failure at
address, read value expecting value
Memory size in CMOS invalid The amount of memory recorded in Add or remove the memory.
the system configuration information
does not match the memory
installed.
Memory tests terminated by The memory test did not complete. The POST memory test stopped by
keystroke pressing the <Spacebar>.
Run again the test.
No boot device available The computer can not find the Fault diskette, diskette / tape drive
diskette or hard disk drive. subsystem, hard disk drive, hard
disk drive subsystem, or no start
disk in the drive A.
No boot sector on hard-disk drive The configuration settings in the Wrong configuration settings in the
System Setup program wrong, or System Setup program, or no
operating system damaged. operating system on the hard disk
drive.
No timer tick interrupt The timer on system board has a Defective system board.
malfunction
Non-system disk or disk error Diskette in the drive A or hard disk Fault diskette, diskette / tape drive
drive does not have bootable subsystem, or hard disk drive
operating system installed on it. subsystem.
Use an other diskette with the
system information.
Not a boot diskette There is no operating system on Use an other diskette with the
diskette. system information.
Plug and Play Configuration Error The system found a problem in A system resource conflict.
trying to configure one or more Remove the cards and install them
expansion cards. one by one.
Read fault The operating system can not read Fault diskette, diskette / tape drive
Requested sector not found from the diskette or the hard disk subsystem, or hard disk drive
drive. subsystem (defective system
The system can not find a special board).
sector on the disk, or the requested
sector is defective.
Reset failed The operation of the disk reset Not correct connected diskette /
failed. tape drive, hard disk drive interface
cable, or power cable.
Sector not found The operating system cannot find a Defective sectors on diskette or hard
sector on the diskette or hard disk disk drive.
drive.
Seek error The operating system cannot find a Defective diskette or hard disk drive.
special track on the diskette or hard
disk drive.
Shutdown failure System board chip fault Defective system board
Time-of-day clock stopped System battery low. Defective battery or fault chip
(defective system board).
Time-of-day not set The setting of the time or date in the Enter the correct time or date
system configuration information settings, or defective system battery.
does not match the system clock.
Timer chip counter 2 failed The timer circuit on the system Defective system board.
board has a malfunction
Unexpected interrupt in protected The keyboard / mouse controller has Not correct installed DIMMs or fault
mode a malfunction, or one or more keyboard / mouse controller chip
DIMMs are not correct installed (defective system board).

18.06.2002 271
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

WARNING: Dell's Disk Monitoring POST query the EIDE drive for the Wrong or defective drive.
System has detected that drive [0/1] status information. The drive
on the primary/secondary] EIDE detected possible error conditions.
controller is operating outside of
normal specifications. It is advisable
to immediately back up your data
and replace your hard disk drive.
Write fault The operating system can not write Fault diskette or hard disk drive.
Write fault on selected drive to the diskette or hard disk drive.

18.06.2002 272
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scanner default output "File" causes "internal error" on Power

Logic Controller
Description
This problem occurs in Release 1.1.

If "File" is the default output destination in the Oc· Settings Editor, after boot
the zoom ratio of the scanner is 0%.
This will cause an "internal error" in the Power Logic Controller as soon as
the first "Copy Job" is started.

Work around: Before making the first "copy job" adjust the zoom ratio to an allowed value.

18.06.2002 273
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20802 (CTR) INT (DUS) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistant / Missing or corrupted file / Internal error.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Missing or corrupted file Re-install
controller
software
Installation no more Re-install
consistent controller
software
Controller cannot be started Re-install
- Process creation error controller
software
Password given by the user No action
is not correct

18.06.2002 274
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20803 (CTR) INT (DUS) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Internal error / Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Controller protocol not Automatic
respected - Internal error reboot -
(bug) Report
error to
R&D
Bad process state - Internal Automatic
error (bug) reboot -
Report
error to
R&D
Character string longer than Automatic
expected - Internal error reboot -
(bug) Report
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 275
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20804 [CTR] INT (DUS) cat. 4 failure ]

Description
Internal error / System call failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Automatic re-boot of [ NGC Clear
] controller spool
area in
diagnosti
c mode.
OS mechanism failed - Automatic
System call failure -Internal reboot
error
A process died - Internal Automatic
error reboot
Wrong connected position
from connector during
assembly paper roll drawer
/ sheetfeeder

18.06.2002 276
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20805 [CTR] INT (DUS) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running / Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

No more space available in Automatic
RAM to keep the OS reboot of
running the
(Memory allocation failure) system
Memory management Automatic
failure. reboot
(internal error)

18.06.2002 277
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20806 [CTR] INT (DUS) set memory disk failure ]

Description
[ EDI Disk ] failure / Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Set memory disk problem or 20-6-002 Check set
disk not found memory
Cannot use correctly the Automatic
Set Memory reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 278
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20807 [CTR] INT (DUS) spool area failure ]

Description
System call failure / Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

- OS mechanism failed Automatic
- System call failure reboot of
- Spool area failure the
system.
If needed,
re-install
the
controller
software
Problem handling the spool Automatic
on disk reboot.
If
necessary
, check or
change
the spool
disk

18.06.2002 279
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20809 [CTR] INT (FH) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Fatal error: Wrong Re-install
controller set-up the
controller
software

18.06.2002 280
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20810 [CTR] INT (FH) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Controller protocol not Automatic
respected. reboot of
Fatal error (bug) the
system.
Report the
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 281
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20811[CTR] INT (IH) connection channel failure ]

Description
Connection failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Job error: problem with the Check
connection channel. connectio
(Connection failure) n

18.06.2002 282
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20813 [CTR] INT (JH) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Software bug / Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Postscript PDL not Automatic
reachable. reboot of
Fatal error (bug) the
system.
Report the
error to
R&D
Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Wrong the
controller set-up controller
(Fatal error) software

18.06.2002 283
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20814 [CTR] INT (JH) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Software bug : Bad process Automatic
state. reboot of
Fatal error (bug) the
system.
Report the
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 284
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20816 [CTR] INT (JH) plot processing failure ]

Description
Plot analysis required
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Job error: the data was not No action
successfully processed or plot file
analysis
required

18.06.2002 285
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20818 [CTR] INT (JS) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : General the
configuration problem controller
software

18.06.2002 286
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20820 [CTR] INT (JS) cat. 4 failure ]

Description
Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

OS mechanism failed. Automatic
(Internal error) reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 287
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20821 [CTR] INT (JS) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

- Memory allocation failure. Automatic
- No more space available reboot of
in RAM to keep the OS the
running system
(Fatal error)

18.06.2002 288
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20822 [CTR] INT (JS) set memory full failure ]

Description
Set memory full
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Warning: Set memory full in Wait for
the pipeline print
delivery

18.06.2002 289
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20824 [CTR] INT (PDL) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: the
wrong controller set-up controller
software
Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: font the
files cannot be reached controller
software

18.06.2002 290
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20827 [CTR] INT (PK) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Memory allocation failure : Automatic
Fatal error: No more space reboot of
available in RAM to keep the
the OS running system

18.06.2002 291
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20829 [CTR] INT (SIM) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: the
wrong controller set-up controller
software

18.06.2002 292
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20830 [CTR] INT (SIM) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Memory allocation failure : Automatic
Fatal error: No more space reboot of
available in RAM to keep the
the OS running system

18.06.2002 293
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20832 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: the
wrong controller set-up controller
software

18.06.2002 294
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20833 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Software Bug (Fatal error) Automatic
reboot of
the
controller.
Report the
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 295
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20834 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 4 failure ]

Description
Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

OS mechanism failed Automatic
(Internal error) reboot of
the
controller

18.06.2002 296
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20835 [CTR] INT (DUS) SPICE failure ]

Description
[ Spice PBA ] reports an error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2002-011 SPICE board problem : 20-6-001 Reboot
Spice board reports an error the
conttroller
OR
if
necessary
check the
Spice
board

18.06.2002 297
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20836 [CTR] INT (DUS) IDE hard disk failure ]

Description
[ IDE Disk ] failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

IDE Disk failure : Cannot 2-6-002 Check set
start IDE HD drive memory
disk

18.06.2002 298
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20901 [CTR] INT (DUS) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
System call failure (file access) / File system full / [ NGC ] Recource file
failure /
Internal error / Unexpected command from printer to controller (debug)
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Warning: OS mechanism If reboot
failed - System call failure doesn’t
(file access) : File system solve the
full - NGC Resource file problem,
failure. re-install
the
controller
software
Warning (bug): protocol Automatic
error between JS and PH reboot of
the
system
Report
error to
R&D
Warning (bug): protocol None.
error in OCI - Application Report
bug - error to
R&D
warning: problem in No action
generating dump config -
Bug -
Warning: printer console No action
problem - OS calls failed. or Reboot
This is not fatal if
behaviour
becomes
weird

18.06.2002 299
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20902 [CTR] INT (JS) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Internal error Automatic
reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 300
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20903 [CTR] INT (PK) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
Internal warning
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Internal warning : Poker No action
processing problem or manual
restart if
needed
(persisten
t error)
Internal warning : problem No action
on a data file or Check
plot file

18.06.2002 301
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20904 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
[ OS ] problem
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Unclassified problem Automatic
(Mainly OS problems) reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 302
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25001 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR - PRT ]

Description
[ 25001 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR - PRT ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Printer is switched off Instruct
during run. customer
Electrical problem in Printer Solve
problem
0402-001 [ + 5VPHD ] short circuit to 159
frame during RUN
2202-002 [ CPU IO PBA ] defect 850

Printhead 140

18.06.2002 303
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25821 [CTR] Plot action failure ]

Description
Job error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-6-001 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 304
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25822 [CTR] Plot too large failure ]

Description
Plot too large
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 305
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25824 [CTR] Plot file receiving failure ]

Description
Plot failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 306
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25825 [CTR] Plot language inconsistency failure ]

Description
Emulation different between [ ALS ] and [ OJT ] command
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 307
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25826 [CTR] Plot language not enabled failure ]

Description
Plot language not enabled failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Enable postscript option
(has to be bought by the
customer)

18.06.2002 308
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25827 [CTR] Plot language not recognized failure ]

Description
Emulation not recognized
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 309
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25828 [CTR] Plot multi OJT failure ]

Description
[ OJT ] command problem
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (Job 20-1-006 Check
Ticket) as received on
controller
Analyse the Job (Job Check
Ticket) as send on
workstation

18.06.2002 310
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25829 [CTR] Plot split failure ]

Description
[ OJT ] command problem
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 311
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25830 [CTR] Plot too complex failure ]

Description
Plot failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (OJT) as 20-1-006 Check
received on controller
Analyse the Job (OJT) as Check
send on workstation

18.06.2002 312
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25831 [CTR] Plot RCF syntax failure ]

Description
[ RCF ] not supported / remote commands not consistent
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (RCF) as 20-1-006 Check
received on controller
Analyse the Job (RCF) as Check
send on workstation

18.06.2002 313
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25832 [CTR] Plot OJT syntax failure ]

Description
[ OJT ] syntax error / invalid value
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (OJT) as 20-1-006 Check
received on controller
Analyse the Job (OJT) as Check
send on workstation

18.06.2002 314
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25833 [CTR] Option not enabled failure ]

Description
Self test not OK / Option not available
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Correct the problem
indication detected during
the self-test or enable
option

18.06.2002 315
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ POST Beep Codes for Oc· Power Logic controller ]

Description
If the monitor cannot display the error messages during the POST, the system can transmit a group of tones.
These tones help you to identify the problem or can help you identify a fault component or assembly.
The following table lists the tone codes that can be generated during the POST.
Most tone codes indicate a fatal error to prevent the system to complete the start routine until the indicated
condition is corrected.

Beep Error Probable Causes

Code

1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure Defective system board

1-1-3 NVRAM write/read failure Defective system board
1-1-4 BIOS checksum failure Faulty BIOS or defective system board
1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure Defective system board
1-2-2 DMA initialization failure Defective system board
1-2-3 DMA page register write/read failure Defective system board
1-3 Video memory test failure Fault or not correct installed memory
1-3-1 till Main memory not correct identified or Fault or not correct installed DIMM or defective system
2-4-4 used board
1-3-2 There is no Memory installed There is no memory installed, not correct installed or fault
1-3-3 Chip or data line failure in the first 64 KB Fault or not correct installed DIMM
of main memory
1-3-4 Odd/even logic failure in the first 64 KB Fault or not correct installed DIMM
of the main memory
1-4-1 Address line failure in the first 64 KB of Fault or not correct installed DIMM
the main memory
1-4-2 Parity failure in the first 64 KB of the Fault or not correct installed DIMM
main memory
2-1-1 Bit failure in the first 64 KB of the main Fault or not correct installed DIMM
memory
3-1-1 Slave DMA-register failure Defective system board
3-1-2 Master DMA-register failure Defective system board
3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure Defective system board
3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure Defective system board
3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure Defective system board
3-2-4 Keyboard controller test failure Fault keyboard controller (defective system board)
3-3-1 NVRAM power loss Defective system board
3-3-2 NVRAM configuration
3-3-4 Video memory test failure Fault or not correct installed memory
3-4-1 Screen initialization failure Fault video subsystem (defective system board)
3-4-2 Screen retrace failure Fault video subsystem (defective system board)
3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure Fault video subsystem (defective system board)
4-2-1 There is no timer click Defective system board
4-2-2 Shut down failure Defective system board
4-2-3 Gate A20 failure Defective system board
4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in the protected Defective system board
mode
4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh Faulty or improperly seated DIMM
4-3-3 Counter 2 failure in the timer chip Defective system board
4-3-4 The time/day clock is stopped Bad battery or defective system board
4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure Faulty I/O chip (defective system board)
4-4-2 Failure to decompress the code to Defective system board
shadow memory
4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure Fault microprocessor chip or system board
4-4-4 Cache test failure Defective microprocessor or system board

18.06.2002 316
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PCI bus ISA/EIO Floppy drive

HOST bus Primary bus USB
PC87307 I/O
controller UART (RS232)
L2 cach 82371AB
PIIX4 ECP (Par. port)

Key board
µP
430 TX Audio
PCI
ISA slot 1
ISA slot 2
ISA slot 3
128 Mb ISA slot 4
EDO
DIMM Hard disc
BMI IDE
Ultra DMA/33
Hard disc

CD drive

S3 trio 64V2
Display
ROM 2Mb
PCI card connector 1

Spice board
TO PRINTER
TO SCANNE
PCI card connector 2
PCI card connector 3
PCI card connector 4
PCI card connector 5
20-Interface / Controller NGC

18.06.2002 317
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Handling and location of Microsoft Certificate Of Authenticity

(COA).
Since a few months, the Microsoft Certificate Of Authenticity for Windows NT, has been replaced by a sticker.
On normal Personal Computers, this COA sticker has to be affixed to the PC on a visible location.

On a TDS system, the Windows operating system is part of the complete system.
The complete system is registered under the number of the main component (printer on a hybrid system,
scanner on a scanner only system).
Therefore, we need to affix the Microsoft License to the frame of the main component.

The controller itself is not the correct place, since this can be exchanged (spare part) while the total system (and
the license) stays in place.

1. Two types of "Certificate of Authenticity" (COA)

The left certificate was sent during the last few years, and has to stay in the software box that came with the
printer engine.

The right certificate is a small sticker. It comes with the complete system and is included in the software box.
It has to be affixed to the main component of the system at installation time.
The locations are given below.

2. Printer only system / Copier system

The main component in this case is the printer engine (the system serial number is the same as the printer
engine serial number)

In this case the COA-sticker is affixed to the printer engine on the location below

18.06.2002 318
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3. Existing systems with COA on controller.

Some systems were shipped with the COA sticker affixed to the controller.
Since these stickers are hard to remove, we advise you to leave them on the controller, unless this controller
needs to be replaced.

In that case, please remove the sticker carefully (they tear up easily)

18.06.2002 319
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to check / view the images on the set memory disk(s)

You can view the bitmap files as they are present on the set memory disk(s).
The procedure to follow is:

1. Select the command prompt program on the Power Logic Controller service desktop
(Start - Programs - Accessories).
2. Type: cd c:\oce\ngc\tools
3. Type: sm_ls
You see a list of numbers. The highest number is the last made print or copy.
4. To view e.g. print 5:
Type: sm2ras 5
The bitmap file smbitmap5.ras is generated in the directory: c:\oce\ngc\tools.
5. How to view the file:
If the scan to file option is enabled, than use the Oc· View Station viewer on the Power
Logic Controller (double click on the xxx.ras file)
In other cases put the file on your service laptop and view it with another viewer who can
import xxx.ras files.

18.06.2002 320
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to activate a monitor in the configuration.

The TDS400 system is standard without a monitor.
If a system is installed with a monitor, then the monitor is already activated in the
configuration.

If a monitor is installed after the installation of the system, then you must set the User
interface (= the monitor) PRESENT in the sds test 90.3 .
Switch the controller off and on to apply the new settings.

18.06.2002 321
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to create an installation start diskette

An installation diskette is provided with every delivered system. This diskette is used to
install automatically the Oc· Power Logic Controller software.
This installation diskette contains the hardware and the software options of this particular
Oc· Power Logic Controller.
Some of the examples of hardware options are the type of monitor, optional boards.
An example of a software option is the 'Scan To File' option.
Every installation diskette is therefore unique.

1 - Install the diskette configuration tool on your laptop

1. Put the controller CDROM in your laptop.
2. Go with the Explorer to the directory: [ Flop_tools \ Runtime ].
3. Run the program [ setup.exe ]. (Double click on it).
(If the application is a [ zip ] file, unzip it to a temporary directory on the laptop.
Fill in the password 675756 to start the unzip.
4. Go to the temporary directory and indtall the application: run [ setup.exe ]).
5. Agree to the default installation directory
6. Choose the standard / typical installation type when asked.
7. Restart the laptop before you use the diskette configuration tool.

2 - Create a basic installation diskette on your laptop

1. Put an empty diskette in the laptop .
2. Go with the Explorer on the controller CDROM to the directory: [ Flop_tools \ Floppy_image ].
3. Run the program REF_XX_.exe. The XX stands for the current release number of this software.
4. This program formats the destination diskette if it is not completely empty. (Even system files are
not allowed).
5. If the program is finished you get a start diskette.

3- Configure the installation diskette on your laptop with the diskette configuration tool
1. Start the CFT ([ Oc· Configuration Floppy Tools Selector ] via the windows start menu:
Start / Program Files / OceCFT / OceCFT.
2. Select [ "New Floppy" ].
3. Select the tab [ Hardware Options ]:
select the required options and enable them, e.g.:

4. Select the tab [ OS parameters ]:

ProductID: Microsoft NT license numbers (xxxxx-OEM-xxxxx-xxxxx)
KeyBoardLayout: The correct type like US international
TimeZOne: Select your time zone
e.g.:

18.06.2002 322
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

5. Select the tab [ Miscellaneous ]:

the SAP number is left empty.

6. Select [ "Create floppy" ].

7. Label the diskette:
"Installation Disk TDS400 version X.x"
"System serial number tds400xxxxx"

18.06.2002 323
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the Oc· Power Logic controller

Hardware installation of the Oc· Power Logic controller

1. Unpack the controller from the cardboard box.

2. The controller is set according to specifications of the customers order.
Check that the correct option boards are installed according to specifications of the site analysis
form.
1. Find the following items:
- INSTALLATION CD [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] Rx.x
- INSTALLATION DISKETTE [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] Rx..x ????? (The diskette is
special prepared for this system installation)
- [ System Diagnostic Diskette ]
- NEW OCE SPICE CARD + NIC DIAGNOSTIC DISKETTE
3. Find and attach the main supply cable.

Software installation:

First installation:
All software is already installed and set by M&L. The controller is ready!

Next installations:
If by any reason, the controller software must be installed again, do as follow:

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed. The software
installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
- If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. Switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the Installation CDROM, Rx..x in the CDROM drive
3. Insert the Installation diskette, Rx..x in the diskette drive.
1. Note: Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected. Do not remove
the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button.

5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor) type [ setup ] when asked by the
messages on the screen !!
You can use this time to unpack the other devices.
6. The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CDROM drive
opens.
The CDROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CDROM and the installation diskette.
8. Restart the controller. The controller starts as "anonymous" user.
9. The installation is completed.

Warning:
After every installation of the controller software, the controller receives a new identification name.
This is: TDS400-xxxxx where the xxxxx is a random number.
Also when you install again the software after a crash.
To see / read the identification name:
1. print the system settings on paper
2. use the Settings Editor to check (change) the identification name.

18.06.2002 324
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Upgrade software download driver SwdlDriver.dll v2.0.0.8 for

R1.1

For a correct download (especially the boot software) on the TDS400 R1.1 (also for upgrade R1.0 to
R1.1) , you must upgrade the software download application on the harddisk of the controller to the
new 2.0.0.8 version.

Create the software download application files on a diskette

SwdlDriver 2.0.0.8.ex
1. Put a empty diskette in the laptop disk drive.
2. Activate the icon to open the [ Attachment ] window.
3. Activate the [ Launch ] button to open the [ Self-Extractor ] window.
4. Set the [ Unzip to folder ] path to:
a:\
5. Activate the [ Unzip ] button.
The files are extracted to the diskette.

The upgrade of the download driver:

1. Print the configuration settings by the operator panel.
2. Make a Direct Cable connection between the laptop and the controller.
3. Laptop: logon in [ Windows ] as [ service ] to have permission's on the harddisk of the controller.

4. Do SDS test 71 to make a backup of the system data .

5. Close the SDS session.
6. Put the diskette with the software download application files in the diskette drive of the laptop.
7. Activate on the laptop the 'run' window: <Start / Run>.
8. Enter in the 'run' window: [ a:rename.bat a: xxxxxx ] (xxxxxx = the hostname of the controller, see the
print of the configuration settings).

See note 1

9. Restart the controller.

10. Make a new Direct Cable connection.
11. Activate on the laptop the 'run' window: <Start / Run>
12. Enter in the 'run' window: [ a:remove.bat xxxxxx ].
13. Finnish.

Note 1: If the next action is the download of the system software, then:
l Select the SDS test 20-1-010 (Select the next NT start method)
Set the test to: [ diagnosis ]
l Close the SDS session
l Restart the [ Oc· Power Logic ] controller
l Make a new Direct Cable connection.
l Activate on the laptop the 'run' window: <Start / Run>
l Enter in the 'run' window: [ a:remove.bat xxxxxx ].
l Download the system software
1.
Note 2: Screen messages are diplayed on the laptop screen

18.06.2002 325
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER NGC GX100
1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7095.496 --CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7175.972 --HARD DISK, IDE 2
10 1202.274 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 1
11 7095.236 --SPICE-III PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7175.428 - " -JA 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7208.990 -R1.2 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7209.354 -R1.3 REPLACEMENT CD 1
70 7166.872 -BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1

18.06.2002 326
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 327
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER PLC GX150
1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7209.122 --CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7176.292 --HARD DISK, IDE 2
10 7225.630 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 133 MHz -
11 7095.236 --SPICE-III PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7175.428 - " -JA 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7208.990 -R1.2 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7209.354 -R1.3 REPLACEMENT CD 1
71 7166.872 -BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1
72 7095.290 -SPICE III TESTDISK 1

18.06.2002 328
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System BIOS Setup Oc· Power Logic controller (Dell GX100)

While booting, on the first screen and top right corner [ F2=Setup ] is visible. Press F2 to enter the set-up menu
of the DELL BIOS.
For detailed information on setup categories and options, see "Using the System Setup Program" in the online
System User's Guide.
Shown settings are the Oce settings for the PLC R1.2
To remove the Cover openend message: [ Alert! Cover was previously removed ] (if exist during the start up of
the controller), change under: [ System Security / Chassis Intrusion: Detected ] to enable.

Dell Computer Corporation (www.dell.com) - OptiPlex GX100

Intel Celeron : 433 MHz BIOS Version: A04

Level 2 Cach: 128 KB Integrated Service Tag: IRTEK

System Time .................................................................................

System Date ..................................................................................

Diskette A: ...................................................................................... 3.5 inch, 1.44 MB

Diskette B: ...................................................................................... Not Installed
Zip Floppy Support ........................................................................ Disabled

Primary Drive 0 .............................................................................. Hard Drive

Primary Drive 1 .............................................................................. Hard Drive
Secondary Drive 0 ......................................................................... CD-ROM Reader
Secondary Drive 1 ......................................................................... Off

Boot Sequence .............................................................................. <ENTER>

v 1 Diskette Drive A
v 2 Hard Disk Drive C
v 3 IDE CDROM Device

Installed System Memory ........................................................... 256 - MB SDRAM

Reserved Memory ....................................................................... None Reserved
CPU Information ........................................................................... <ENTER>
CPU Speed ................................... Normal
Bus Speed ................................... 66 MHz
Processor ID ............................... 665
Clock Speed ................................. 433 MHz
Cache Size ................................... 128 KB

Integrated Devices ....................................................................... <ENTER>

Network Interface Controller.........On
Mouse Port...................................... On
USB Emulation ............................. Off
Serial Port 1.................................... Auto
Serial Port 2.................................... Auto
Parallel Port.................................... 378h
Parallel Port Mode......................... PS/2

IDE Drive Interface......................... Auto

Diskette Interface........................... Auto
PC speaker..................................... On
Primary Video Controller ............. Auto
Video DAC Snoop...........................Off
PCI IRQ Assignment <ENTER>
System Security ............................................................................ <ENTER>
Password Status.............................Unlocked
System Password...........................Not enabled
Setup Password..............................Enabled (6869767, use num
key-board)
Chassis Intrusion............................Detected / Enabled

Keyboard NumLock ..................................................................... ON

Report Keyboard Errors .............................................................. Report

Auto Power On .............................................................................. Disabled

Remote Wake up ......................................................................... ON

18.06.2002 329
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

AC Power Recovery ..................................................................... Last

ASSET TAG

18.06.2002 330
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Oc· Power Logic controller ] (Dell GX100)

Product specifications
Platform [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] (566 Mhz, Celeron Processor)
with embedded Windows NT
Memory 128 MByte RAM standard, 256 MByte RAM is an upgrade
Disk space High-speed hard disk dedicated to file spooling, and a
high-speed hard disk dedicated to set memory offering 135
A0 storage capacity
File formats HPGL, HPGL2, HPRTL, TIFF 6.0, CALS type 1, NIRS,
EDMICS (C4), CalComp 906/907/951, ASCII
Interfaces Standard: Ethernet 10/100 Mbits/s with RJ45
Optional: Ethernet 10 Mbits/s with BNC and SubD
TokenRing 4/16 Mbits/s
Centronics
Network protocols TCP/IP
NetBEUI (SMB)
IPX/SPX
FTP
Cabinet An option to store the controller
GUI (Optional) A monitor, a keyboard and a mouse to use the applications
on the controller with Scan Logic
Postscript level 3 / PDF Enables you to print the Postscript level 3 files and Portable
(Optional) Document Files (PDF), optional
Functionality Multiple prints: up to 999
Automatic Language Sensing (ALS)
Auto roll selection and switching
Plot manipulation: rotation, autoscaling
File spooling on the controller
Set memory (10,6 Gb) : send once, process once, print
many; capacity to store up to 135 A0s and create identical
sets sorted by page or by set
Concurrent receiving / processing / printing of digital jobs
Screen No
Yes with scan to file

Note:
Switch off the controller once a week (for example at the end of the week).
Otherwise the performance will decrease.

18.06.2002 331
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 332
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-001 Enable / disable, Level 1 or Level 2 trace of the

TDS400 process into log-file ]

Description Enable / disable, Level 1 or Level 2 trace of the TDS400 process into log-file
Location of the log file: C:\oce\ngc\log\diagnostic\module.trc

Value l Level 1: Internal process communication relevant for service are logged
l Level 2: Level 1 information and insight process information relevant to R&D
support.

Remarks Reboot the controller after changing the value.

18.06.2002 333
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-002 The maximum size to trace the Oc· TDS400 log-file (in
byte) ]

Description The maximum size to trace the Oc· TDS400 log-file (in byte)

Value Range: 4,000 ... 1,280,000 byte

Default: 30,000

Remarks If the maximum is reached the log file will be copied to a file ... / module.old

18.06.2002 334
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-006 Enable / disable to trace the input data from the host
into log file ]

Description Enable / disable to trace the input data from the host into log file
(Disable logging or Enable logging)

If multiple print files are sent to the TDS400, these print files are all stored on the
Oc· Power Logic controller, using the name convention inputfile.number

This logfile can be used to check the input data including the received controll
commands (jobticket, rcf).

Value

Remarks Reboot the controller after changing the value.

18.06.2002 335
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-009 Set the maximum size of Windows NT log-file(s) (in

kB) ]

Description Set the maximum size of Windows NT log-file(s) (in kB)

If the maximum size id reached, the new information is added while the oldest
information is removed.

Value Range: 64 ... 4,194,240 Kbyte

Default: 512

Remarks Step sixe 64 Kbyte

18.06.2002 336
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-010 Enable / disable to trace of the WINNT events / errors

into log file(s) ]

Purpose Enable / disable to trace of the WINNT events / errors into log file(s)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 337
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-013 Disable all the tracing / logging tests of the TDS400

controller ]

Purpose Disable all the tracing / logging tests of the TDS400 controller

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 338
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-020 Save the TDS400 configuration into the configuration

log file ]

Purpose Save the TDS400 configuration into the configuration log file
The total TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations,...) os
is stored in a log file.

Check

Remarks The DumpOce9450Config.txt file is stored in ... /OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 339
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-023 Clear the diagnostic area ]

Purpose Clear the Oc· Power Logic controller diagnostic area .

All HW logfiles, Oce9450dumpconfig and functional tracing files.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 340
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-025 Clear the error and the warning log files ]

Purpose Clear the error and the warning log files

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 341
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-031 Clear the set memory and the spool areas

(only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Purpose Clear the set memory and the spool areas

(only in the Diagnosis Mode)
All temporary files, locks and directories are removed from the system.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 342
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-032 Save the total system status of WINNT and TDS400

into the status log file ]

Purpose Save the total system status of WINNT and TDS400 into the status log file .

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 343
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-039 Disable the tests: 20-6-013; 20-6-023; 20-6-025 and

remove all images and temporary files ]

Purpose Disable tests the tests: 20-6-013; 20-6-023; 20-6-025 remove all images and
temporary files.
The system is "clean".

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 344
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-9-001 Display the progress of the job within the controller ]

18.06.2002 345
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Controller reboots immediately after starting a Copy job. (no GUI

present) (R1.1)
Description
When a Copy job is started and Error pages are enabled, the controller starts rebooting (in a continuous loop).

Workaround:

Re-install the controller, and use the error pages only for analyses (never use the scanner if Error Pages is
enabled).

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 346
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Internal error immediately after starting a Copy or Scan job.

(R1.1)
Description
When a Copy or Scan job is started and Error pages are enabled, the controller immediately displays an internal
error.

Workaround:

Disable the error pages.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 347
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Internal Error in case of standard setting set to default scan to

file (1.1)
Description
Standard setting to scan to file causes an internal error on the controller.
The default zoom ratio (on turn on the scanner if scan to file is the default) is defined as 0%, which is causing an
internal error if this zoom ratio is not set to a valid value.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 348
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Postscript driver is not shared after installation (R1.2)

Interpretor is however working.
Description
The Postscript driver is not shared after installation (R1.2) Interpretor is however working.

Workaround:

Change in the Settings Editor the PS3 password and press apply, then change it back to the correct password
and press apply, then reboot the system.

18.06.2002 349
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Queue Manager, Settings Editor, and System Control Panel do

not start automatic on the Power Logic Controller.
Tests / Checks:
Check if the GUI is enabled in SDS test 90.3 , and correct if needed. (reboot is required)

18.06.2002 350
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
How to decrease the sds_log.mdb if the size is too large.

Answer:
Activate the SDS test 31 eight times.
This action clears all the error record history!
(The memory is a shift register with eight positions.)

Note:
The backup action can be done direct to the laptop and zipped.
But still the sds_log. mdb file can be too large.

18.06.2002 351
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 352
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Riser board
How to identify the Riser Board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

1 Auxiliary power indicator

(AUX_LED)
2 PCI expansion slot 5
(PCI5)
3
Wake On LAN (WOL)
4 connector
PCI expansion slot 1
5 (PCI1)
Auxiliary power
connector

Ri s e r b o a rd l o c a t o r. g i f

18.06.2002 353
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board
How to identify the Spice Board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

Engine

Scanner

20 s pi c e Loc ator.c dr

18.06.2002 354
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System board (GX100)

How to identify the System Board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

1 NIC connector
2 Video connector
3 Fan power connector
4 Serial port 2 connector
5 USB connectors (2)
6 Keyboard (upper) and mouse (lower)
connectors
7 Parallel port (upper) and serial port 1
(lower) connectors
8
System board jumper
9
Riser board connector
10
EIDE1 connector
11
EIDE2 connector
12
Diskette/tape-drive connector
13
Auxiliary power indicator
14
DIMM connectors (2)
15
3.3 VDC power connector
16
Control panel connector
17
DC power connector

S ys t e m b o a r d l o c a t o r 1 . g i f
System Board PSWD (Password) Jumper

S ys t e m b o a r d l o c a t o r 2 . g i f
Note: Make sure your system is turned off before you change a jumper setting. Otherwise, damage to your
system or unpredictable results may occur.

The Oc· Power Logic controller is shipped with a PSWD jumper installed, meaning that password features for
this computer system are enabled.
When you remove the jumper, or when you install the jumper on only one of the two pins, the password
features for this computer system are disabled.
Which in practise means that anyone can enter the bios setup without having to enter a password.

System Board Labels

This table lists the labels for connectors and sockets on your system board and gives a brief description of
their functions.

18.06.2002 355
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Connector or socket Description Connector or socket Description

AUX_LED Auxiliary power indicator MONITOR Video connector
B1 Battery socket MOUSE Mouse connector
DIMM_x DIMM socket PANEL Control panel connector
DSKT Diskette/tape drive interface connector PARALLEL Parallel port connector; sometimes
referred to as LPT1
ENET Integrated NIC connector POWER_1 Main power input connector
FAN Microprocessor fan connector POWER_2 3.3-volt V power input connector
IDEn EIDE interface connector RISER Riser board connector
KYBD Keyboard connector SERIALn Serial port connectors
MICROPROCESSOR Microprocessor connector USB USB connectors

18.06.2002 356
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

DIMM's (GX100)
How to identify the DIMM's

Look at the drawing below for the identification

.

DIMM.cdr

18.06.2002 357
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Power Logic controller Main cabinet (GX100)

How to identify the different parts of the Oc· Power Logic controller

1 System Board
2 Power supply
3 5.25 Inch drive slots
(CD-ROM Drive)
4 -Hard disk drive bracket for
SCSI drives (not available)
5 System hard disk (IDE)
6 Expansion card cage
7 Bottom of housing

Inside view without covers M ain cabinet locator 1.gif

1 5.25 Inch drive slots

(CD-ROM drive)
2 -

3 Chassis intrusion switch

4 SCSI Hard disk cable
5 Expansion-card cage
6 Mother board
7 Riser board
8 Padlock ring
9 Security cable slot
10 I/O port and connectors
AC-power input
11
Power supply
12

The tower inside M ain cabinet locator 2.gif

18.06.2002 358
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The tower front M ain cabinet locator 3.gif

Power button Push-button that turns computer on and off.

Power indicator Lights up when the computer is on.
Reset button Initiates a hardware reset. To avoid possible data or file structure corruption, use the reset b
when the system cannot be rebooted with the <Ctrl><Alt><Del> key combination, and close
applications or files if possible.
Hard-disk drive access Lights up when the hard-disk drive is being accessed.
indicator
Diskette-drive access indicator Lights up when the diskette drive is being accessed.

18.06.2002 359
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Back view Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the back view of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

1. AC power connector
2. AC voltage switch
3. Parallel port connector
4. Mouse connector
5. Link integrity indicator
6. Integrated NIC connector
7. Activity indicator
8. Padlock ring
9. Video connector
10. PCI expansion-card slots
11. AGP slot
12. Line-out jack, line-in jack, and microphone jack
13. USB connectors
14. Keyboard connector
15. Diagnostic LEDs
16. Serial port 2 connector
17. Serial port 1 connector

18.06.2002 360
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Front view Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the front view of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

1. Hard drive access indicator

2. Power indicator
3. Power button
4. Front panel door
5. Floppy drive access indicator
6. Removable 3.5-inch drive front panel
7. Removable 5.25-inch drive front panel

View with front panel open

1. Front panel door, with two breakaway hinges

2. Headphone connector
3. USB connectors (2)

Note:
do not use these front connectors for USB keyboards or mice

18.06.2002 361
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 362
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Main Parts Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the inside of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

.. 1. 5.25-inch drive Hard drive

2. 3.5-inch floppy drive
3. Hard drive
4. Internal speaker
5. Chassis intrusion switch
6. System board
7. Expansion card slots
8. I/O ports and connectors
9. AC power connector
10. Power supply
11. Padlock ring
12. Microprocessor and heat sink shroud

18.06.2002 363
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 51536H2 (15 GB)

Maxtor
model 51536H2 (15GB)
model 5T010H1 (10GB)
model 5T020H2 (20GB)

Only jumper J48 (cable select) to be installed

IBM
Model Deskstar IC 35L020AVER07 (20GB)

Place the jumpers on: pin A+b and E+F

Western Digital

18.06.2002 364
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Precautions
Take these Precautionary Measures

Caution:
THIS IS FOR YOUR PERSONAL SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT

Before you start to work on the system, perform the following steps in the sequence listed:

1. Turn off the computer and all peripherals.

2. Disconnect the computer and peripherals from their AC power sources.
3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
4. Wear a wrist grounding strap, and clip it to an unpainted metal surface.
If a wrist grounding strap is not available, touch any unpainted metal surface on the back of the
computer or on the computer chassis.
Warning:
Make sure the computer and peripherals are disconected from their AC power sources.

18.06.2002 365
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Riser board
How to remove the Riser Board

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove the Riser Board

1 Auxiliary power indicator

(AUX_LED)
2 PCI expansion slot 5
(PCI5)
3
Wake On LAN (WOL)
4 connector
PCI expansion slot 1
5 (PCI1)
Auxiliary power
connector

R i s e r b o a r d r e m o va l . g i f
1. Remove the expansion-card cage.
2. Remove the expansion cards installed in the slots.
3. Remove the screws securing the riser board to the expansion-card cage.

18.06.2002 366
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board
How to remove the Spice Board

For this removal please consult the general Expansion board removal .

18.06.2002 367
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board replacement / upgrade

The TDS400 uses 3 types of SPICE III boards:
- SPICE III V0 board (Oc· code 7095097)
- SPICE III V1 board (Oc· code 7095236)
- SPICE III V2 board (Oc· code 7095401)
The code numbers are printed on the board.

The driver for SPICE III V0/V1 is different from the driver for SPICE III V2:
- TDS400 1.1 supports only the driver for SPICE III V0/V1
- TDS400 1.2 supports the drivers for SPICE III V0/V1 and for SPICE III V2

When you replace the board and the version changes between a V0/V1 or V2, you must update the driver.

Release TDS400 v1.1 TDS400 v1.2

Action
Replace V0/V1 with V2 Install the TDS400 v1.2 PLC Update the SPICE driver to V2.
software With GUI: SP3V2up.bat on a diskette
Without GUI: LSP3V2up.bat on the laptop.
Replace V2 with V0/V1 Impossible Update the SPICE driver to V0/V1.
With GUI: SP3V1up.bat on a diskette
Without GUI: LSP3V1up.bat on the laptop.
Replace V2 with V2 Impossible No action
Replace V1 with V0 No action No action
Replace V0 with V1 No action No action

Upgrade instructions
TDS400 with GUI: (Graphical User Interface, that is a Display).

Replace a SPICE III V0 or V1 board by a SPICE III V2 board:

1. Copy the following file (SP3V2up.bat) to a diskette.

2. Switch On the controller with the new SPICE III V2 board.
3. Log in the Controller as [ service / password ].
4. Ignore any internal error, and do not click on any button in the
Internal Error Window.
5. Insert the diskette into the Controller.
6. Open a DOS Command prompt. SP3V2up.bat
7. Type:
A:
SP3V2up.bat
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

Replace a SPICE III V2 board by a SPICE III V0 or V1board:

1. Copy the following file (SP3V1up.bat) to a diskette.

2. Switch On the controller with the new SPICE III V0 or V1board.
3. Log in the Controller as [ service / password ].
4. Ignore any internal error, and do not click on any button in the
Internal Error Window.
5. Insert the diskette into the Controller.
6. Open a DOS Command prompt. SP3V1up.bat
7. Type:
A:
SP3V1up.bat
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

18.06.2002 368
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

TDS400 without GUI (no display)

(The controller must have a hostname, or a new installation of the complete controller software is
needed).
Remark: you can use this method also for a TDS400 with GUI.

Replace a SPICE III V0 or V1 board by a SPICE III V2 board:

1. Connect your laptop with the serial cable to the Power Logic
Controller.
2. Logon under WIN9X on your Laptop as "service / password".
3. Copy the following file LSP3V2up.bat on a diskette or on the local
disk of your laptop.
4. Switch on your controller with the new SPICE III V2 board.
5. Make the connection between your laptop and the Power Logic
LSP3V2up.bat
Controller (Direct Cable connection).
6. Open a MS-DOS prompt window and go to the directory where the
previous file has been copied.
7. Type the following command (the hostname of your controller is
required).
LSP3V2up <hostname_of_your_controller>
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

Replace a SPICE III V2 board by a SPICE III V0 or V1board:

1. Connect your laptop with the serial cable to the Power Logic
Controller.
2. Logon under WIN9X on your Laptop as "service / password".
3. Copy the following file LSP3V1up.bat on a diskette or on the local
disk of your laptop.
4. Switch on your controller with the new SPICE III V0 or V1board.
5. Make the connection between your laptop and the Power Logic
Controller (Direct Cable connection). LSP3V1up.bat
6. Open a MS-DOS prompt window and go to the directory where the
previous file has been copied.
7. Type the following command (the hostname of your controller is
required).
LSP3V1up <hostname_of_your_controller>
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

Tip
If the above described procedure does not work, install completely the controller software (see appropriate
procedure for that)

18.06.2002 369
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Tools short list

This is a short list of the tools you will probably need to carry out the disassemblies:

l Small flat-blade screwdriver

l Wide flat-blade screwdriver
l 1 and 2 mm Phillips screwdriver
l 1/4 Inch nut driver
l Anti-static wristband and mat.

18.06.2002 370
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Control Panel (GX100)

How to remove the Control Panel

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side and the front covers.

How to remove the Control Panel

1 Control panel
2 Control panel connector
3 Intrusion cable
4 connector
Chassis intrusion switch

C o n t r o l p a n e l r e m o va l . g i f
1. Disconnect the control panel cable from the control panel connector on the system board (see "System
Board Labels" for the location of the PANEL connector).
Note the routing of the control panel cable as you remove it from the chassis.
2. Disconnect the the chassis intrusion switch cable connector from the control panel.
3. Remove the mounting screw that secures the control panel to the chassis.
4. Remove the control panel cable.
5. Pull the control panel cable through the opening in the front wall, and carefully remove the cable from the
routing tab in the chassis.
6. Pull out on the control panel to detach it from the chassis.

18.06.2002 371
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

DIMM (GX100)
How to remove/install DIMMs

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove Dimms

How to Install Dimms

18.06.2002 372
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to remove the front cover (GX100)

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove the Front cover

How to install the Front cover

1. Fit the two retaining hooks on the cover into their corresponding slots at the bottom of the mini
tower chassis.
2. Rotate the cover toward the chassis until the tabs on the top of the chassis snap into their slots
on the cover.

Translation Control: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 373
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PCI expansion boards (GX100)

How to remove/install PCI Expansion boards

This is a general procedure to remove and install PCI expansion boards whatever type they are.

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.
4. Remove the expansion card cage

Generic layout of PCI

expansion boards

Expansion card removal 1.gif

How to remove PCI Expansion boards

1. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the board.

2. Remove the screw from the mounting bracket of the board you want to remove.
3. Grasp the board by its outside corners, and ease it out of its connector.
4. If you are removing the board permanently, install a metal filler bracket over the empty board-slot
opening.
5. Replace the computer cover, and reconnect your computer and peripherals to their power sources and
turn them on.

Note: After you remove and replace the cover, the chassis intrusion detector will cause the following
message to be displayed at the next system start-up:
ALERT! Cover was previously removed.

7. To reset the chassis intrusion detector, enter the System Setup program and reset Chassis Intrusion to
Not Detected.

1 Expansion-card cage
2 Card-edge connector
3 Expansion board
4 Riser board
5 Expansion-board
connector

18.06.2002 374
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Expansion card removal 2.gif

How to install PCI Expansion boards

1. Prepare the expansion board for installation, and remove the computer cover.
See the appropriate locators in this TSM for information on configuration of the eventual jumpers.
2. Remove the screw and remove the metal filler bracket that covers the board-slot opening for the
expansion slot you intend to use (see Figure below).
Save the screw to use when installing the expansion board later in this procedure.
3. Insert the expansion board into the expansion-card connector.
If the expansion board is full-length, insert the front end of the board into the corresponding board guide
on the inside front of the chassis as you insert the board into its connector. Insert the board's edge
connector firmly into the expansion-card slot.
4. When the board is firmly seated in the connector, secure the board's mounting bracket to the chassis
with the screw you removed in step 2.
5. Connect any cables that should be attached to the board.
6. Replace the computer cover, and reconnect your computer and peripherals to their power sources and
turn them on.

Note: After you remove and replace the cover, the chassis intrusion detector will cause the following
message to be displayed at the next system start-up:
ALERT! Cover was previously removed.

7. To reset the chassis intrusion detector, enter the System Setup program and reset Chassis
Intrusion to Not Detected.

1 Filler bracket

Expansion card removal 3.gif

18.06.2002 375
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Side cover (GX100)

How to remove/install the Side cover

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.

How to remove the Side cover

1 Release button

C o ve r r e m o va l . g i f

1. Face the left side cover and press the release button, located at the bottom-left corner of the
front bezel (see Figure above).
2. Lift the bottom of the cover, allowing it to pivot up toward you.
3. Disengage the tabs that secure the cover to the top of the chassis, and lift the cover away.

How to install the Side cover

1 Hook
2 Recessed slot

18.06.2002 376
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

C o ve r r e p l a c e m e n t . g i f
1. Face the left side of the computer and hold the cover at a slight angle, as shown in Figure 4.
2. Align the top of the cover with the top of the chassis and insert the hooks on the cover into the
recessed slots on the computer chassis so that the tabs catch the hooks inside the slots.
3. Pivot the cover down toward the bottom of the chassis and into position.
Make sure that the securing hooks at the bottom of the cover click into place.
4. If you are using a padlock to secure your system, reinstall the padlock.

18.06.2002 377
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System board (GX100)

How to remove/install the System board

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove the System board

S ys t e m b o a r d r e m o va l . g i f
1. Place the computer on its side on a flat surface.
2. Disconnect all cables from their connectors at the back of the computer.
3. Remove the expansion-card cage.
4. Unlatch and rotate the power supply until it locks.
5. Disconnect all cables from the system board.
6. Remove the screw that secures the system board to the bottom of the chassis.
7. Slide the system board toward the front of the chassis until it stops.
8. Carefully lift the system board out of the chassis (be sure to lift evenly and not twist the system board).

How to /install the System board

This procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure but keep the following items in mind:
l If you are replacing a system board:
- Remove the DIMMs and the microprocessor/heat sink assembly
- Install them on the replacement board
- Set the jumpers on the new system board so that they are identical to those on the old board
l When you reinstall the system board, before you slide the system board back to lock it in position, push
down near each slot to engage the grounding clip onto its corresponding tab. Push evenly on both sides
of the system board as you slide it into position (do not twist the system board).

18.06.2002 378
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to open and close the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic Controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.

Note:
Do not open the cover if the system is on the edge of a desk or table.
Doing so may cause the system to tip over and fall.
Make sure that the system is situated so that there is at least 30 cm (12 ") of desk- or
table-top for the cover to rest on.
How to open the controller.
How to close the controller.

18.06.2002 379
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Intrusion switch
How the intrusion switch works

The Intrusion switch allows you to detect if someone opened the covers of the Oc· Power Logic
controller.

If the covers where opened you will get an informational message when the Oc· Power Logic
controller is booting telling you that the covers have been open.
The system will display this message untill you go into BIOS SETUP where you can reset the
intrusion switch.
This is a simple precaution to enable you to detect if somebody has actually opened the Oc·
Power Logic controller.

18.06.2002 380
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Power supply
How the Power Supply works

The power supply is used to power all items present in the Oc· Power Logic controller.
It is suited to also power all of the optional parts that can be build into the Oc· Power Logic
controller

It provides 5V, 12V, -12V and -5V DC supply voltages.

18.06.2002 381
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board
How the Spice Board works

The Spice board is a dedicated board created by Oc· for interfacing.

The Spice board has two interfaces incorporated which interface with the scanner and the print engine.

Note: These interfaces should never ever be used for different purposes since this will damage the board.

18.06.2002 382
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-001 Test of the SPICE PBA, image link and control link
(Only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Only in Diagnosis Mode

Use SDS test 20-1-010 (set next NT start method)

Purpose Test of the SPICE PBA, image link and control link

Check Connect the scan input and the printer output of the SPICE PBA (loop back)
together with one of the spice cables.

Result message:
OK: test OK
Failed: Indication of the failed part.

Remarks Information is logged in a logfile spiceHWTest.log under

c:\oce\ngc\log\diagnostic.

18.06.2002 383
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-002 Test of the hard disks of the Set memory ]

SDS test only for R1.1

Purpose Test of the hard disks and the adapters of the Set memory.

Check Adapter: the status of the adapter (OK/Failed) and the number of the failed
adapter is displayed.
Hard disk: the status of the hard disk (OK/Failed) and the disk number of the failed
hard disk is displayed.

Remarks The information is logged in the setMemHwTest.log file in

...../OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 384
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 385
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3Com 3C900 Combo board

How to identify the 3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL PBA

Look at the drawing below for the identification

UTP (RJ45)
Connector

AUI Thick
ethernet
Connector

Coax Thin
ethernet
Connector

3 c o m 3 C9 0 0 L o c a t o r. g i f

18.06.2002 386
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapter number(s) of additional network I/O PBA's

In case additional network I/O PBA's are installed on the Oc· Power Logic controller the adapter numbers
change as follows:

Combination(s) Adapter numbers

of the PBA as
indicated in
Settings editor:

Tip:
System PBA only 1 Only with a monitor
connected to the
controller:
System PBA + 2
3Com 3C900 Combo PBA 1 - Login as [ service ]
- select: Network
Neighborhood
System PBA + 1 - select Properties
Token Ring PBA 2 - select the tab Adapters.
The adapters are
indicated with the same
System PBA + 2 adapter numbers.
3Com 3C900 Combo PBA+ 1
Token Ring PBA 3

18.06.2002 387
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Board locations of the I/O PBA's

Board locations of the PCI boards in the Power Logic Controllers.

Dell Optiplex GX100

Mandatory locations: Slot number
Tokenring IBM 1

Ethernet 3Com Combo 3

Centronics DPP 4
Spice-III 5

Dell Optiplex GX150

Mandatory locations: Slot number
Spice-III 1
Tokenring IBM 2
Ethernet 3Com Combo 3
Centronics DPP 4

18.06.2002 388
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IBM Token-Ring board

How to identify the IBM Token-Ring board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

To k e n r i n g l o c a t o r . g i f

The Leds on the Token-Ring board

18.06.2002 389
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Centronics board can't be enabled in SDS test 90.3 (R1.2)

Description
In R1.2 the centronics board can't be enabled in SDS test 90.3

Work around:

Log in on the Controller as "service".

Make a backup of oce\ngc\etc\pcf\controller.gsm
Open c:\oce\ngc\etc\pcf\controller.gsm
find the section

Centronics board present (disable : 0 enable : 1)

GSM_CENTRONICS_PRESENT 0
and change the "0" in a "1".

Save the file, and restart the controller.

The Centronics board should be installed in slot #4, and the upper connector should be used.

18.06.2002 390
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IBM Token-Ring board

Suspected Parts & Settings:
Diagnostics for the IBM Token-Ring board

Below you'll find the location of the function Leds on the Token-Ring board

To k e n r i n g l e d s . g i f

Explanation of the behaviour of the LEDS.

Amber LED Green LED Description

Slow blink Slow blink The adapter is waiting for initialization
OFF OFF The power is switched off or the adapter is initializing
OFF Blinking The power-on diagnostics finished properly.
The adapter is waiting to be opened by the software.
OFF ON The adaptor is in use and operating properly.
ON OFF The power-on diagnostics failed or there is a problem with the adapter.
Blinking OFF The adapter is closed due to one of the following:
l The adapter open failed
l The adapter detected a wiring error
l The adapter failed the auto-removal test

Blinking ON The adapter has detected beaconning or a hard error

ON ON The adapter failed even before power-on diagnositcs

18.06.2002 391
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 392
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Windows returns the highest IP-address to the adapters as

default, if more than one adapter is present. (R1.1)
Description
If a system contains more than one adapter Windows returns the highest IP address of the adapters as the
default.
To get the different subnets some changes have to be made.

If the controller itself has more than one adapter the following changes have to be made.
l Add in each configuration file the line "HostName=<hostname>" under the [Gen] section.
Use for the <hostname> the machine name (e.g. pc4-mine) or the IP address (e.g. 192.100.100.1)
l Modify the "Server.cfg" file by adding a [Gen] section and the line "HostName=<hostname>. For example

[Gen]
HostName=pc4-mine

For a remote system with more then one adapter the config files for the clients (SEDC.cfg, SCPDC.cfg and
QMDC.cfg) have to be changed as described above.

18.06.2002 393
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3Com 3C900 Combo PBA

How to remove/install the 3com 3c900 Combo card

For this removal please consult the general Expansion board removal section.

Adapter number information in the Settings editor depends on the installed PBA's: see

18.06.2002 394
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Token Ring PBA

How to remove/install the (IBM) Token Ring PBA

For this removal / installation please consult the general Expansion board removal section: see

Adapter number information in the Settings editor depends on the installed PBA's: see

18.06.2002 395
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3Com 3C900 Combo board

Functional description of the 3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL PBA

The 3com combo board is an ethernet based communication board.

The board provides you with extra hardware interface types to be able to connect to the ethernet networks.

This board has interfaces for 10BaseT, 10Base5 and 10Base2 while the main Oc· Power Logic controller
only has 10BaseT.
Its sole purpose therefore is to add electrical interfaces.

18.06.2002 396
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IBM Token-Ring board

Functional description of the IBM Token-Ring board

The IBM Tokenring board is a Token-Ring based communication board.

The board provides you with an extra interface to connect to Token-Ring types of networking.

This board has interfaces for UTP and STP types of Token-Ring networks.
Its sole purpose therefore is to add a different type of networking interface.

18.06.2002 397
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Centronics PBA (Optional)

The Centronics option can be installed on the Oc· TDS400 system.
Code number of the PBA: 5584.487 DPP Dual Parallel Port.

Before you start installing, make sure that you have a correct working system.

1. Install the Centronics interface board in the PCI slot #4 :

1. Turn off the controller.
2. Remove the power cable of the controller
3. Remove the controller cover.
4. Locate the PCI slot #4.
5. Remove the slot's card-mounting bracket.
6. Insert the Centronics PBA in the slot #4 and secure it with the screw.
7. Close the computer cover and reconnect all previously connected cables
8. Connect the Centronics cable into the upper Centronics connector of the board
9. Switch on the controller

2. Configure the controller with Centronics PBA:

1. Enter SDS mode
2. Execute test 90.3 : "Set the Controller Configuration" :
Declare the presence of the Centronics PBA by setting the "Centronics board" field to: "present".
3. Reboot the controller.
4. Enable the Centronics connection within the Settings Editor
Log in as System Administrator within the Settings Editor and view the SA settings.
Set "System" Settings / Connectivity / Centronics / Enable Centronics = Enabled
5. Click on "apply" button to validate the changes.
6. Reboot the controller.

Once the Centronics board is installed and declared, the drivers will be automatically installed and
started.

18.06.2002 398
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-003 Test of the parallel port of the centronics PBA

(Only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Purpose Test of the parallel port of the centronics PBA

(Only in the Diagnosis Mode)

Check Connect a Centronics cable (IEEE 1284) between the input of the Centronics PBA
(Oc· 100) and the Centronics output of the Mother board of the controller.

Remarks TEST OK
Test Failed: dirver error, cable error, unexpected error.

Information logged in the MemHwTest.log file in .../OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 399
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 400
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

help
Description
Error Pages which are printed after an unsuccesfull print job:
If a print job cannot be made succesfully because of memory restrictions and/or buffer overflow
situations, an error page will be printed at the end of the job.
The following messages can be printed and will be stored in the Error Log File (printed on
Dump Config):

Error messages
C0000 Autotest: error DMA external
C0001 Autotest: error DMA internal
C0002 Autotest: error interrupt OO-BUS
C0003 Autotest: error OO-BUS
C0004 Autotest: error RAM
C0005 Autotest: warning RAM
C0006 Autotest: Disk error
C0007 Autotest: Ethernet error
C0008 Autotest: Task suspended during Ready
C0010 Zero Power RAM config READ error
C0011 Zero Power RAM config WRITE error
C0012 Error Log manager error
C0200 Not enough memory
C0201 Full Display List (Decrease percentage of bitmap area)
C0202 Almost Full Display List (Decrease percentage of bitmap area)
C0203 Function not implemented
C0204 Wrong Number of parameters
C0205 Syntax error
C0206 Out of range value
C0207 Semantic error
C0208 Instruction not implemented
C0209 Information not available
C0220 Interpreter creation Failure
C0221 Display list creation Failure

Error Page Contents

[ C0300 initRaster Allocation Failure on normal processing ]
[ initRaster Allocation Failure on the fly mode ]
[ C0301 Not enough me

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 401
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-010 Set the next NT start method, normal or diagnosis

mode ]

Description Set the next NT start method, normal mode or diagnosis mode

Value "normal mode",

"diagnosis mode"

Remarks The next restart after the "diagnosis mode" is set automatically to "normal mode".

Note 1: (not in R1.1)

Faster method to enter the Diagnosis mode:
On the operator panel of the printer:
off line / system / enter the password / diagnostic mode / yes and confirm the selection.
Restart the controller.

Note 2:
How to check if the controller is started in the Diagnosis mode:
- Message in printer and scanner display: waiting for controller
and no Direct Cable conection
- Start SDS session: session starts direct in the SDS mode and not in the NURS mode

18.06.2002 402
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 403
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 1: Do the Basic Checks

Description
Before you do all types of diagnostic tests, you must do some basic checks.
Depending on the current state of the controller, first make a backup.
If the controller is still running, you can backup the system data and copy the files to a diskette.
Next print the system settings on paper.

The Basic Checks are:

l Make data-dump / print-settings

If the controller is running, first make a backup of the system data with the SDS test 71 .
Copy the files from the c:\service\visits\"current date" directory to your laptop or a diskette.
Next print the system settings on paper.
With this information, you can restore the settings.
l Check outside of the controller
If the controller is wet or damaged, you must disconnect immediately the power.
Open the controller and check the internal parts.
l Check the connections and switches
Check if all external cables are correctly connected. Same for the external switch.
l Look and listen
When you switch on the controller, check the start of the hard-disk / fan / poweron LED.
If one of these parts are not function, check the power.
l Check for the error messages / beep codes
During power on, several system tests are activated.
The errors detected during these tests are reported as system error messages or as system
beep codes.
See for the error messages: / for the beep codes: .

If there are no errors detected during these basic checks, you can continue with step 2: do the
hardware diagnostic with the System Diagnostic Diskette .

18.06.2002 404
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 2: System Diagnostic Diskette

Create the [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] System Diagnostic Diskette

If you do the [ Power Logic controller ] tests for the first time, you have to create the diagnostic
diskette.

Diagnostic disc Power Logic Controller (GX100

1. Put a empty diskette in the disk drive.
2. Activate the icon to open the [ Attachment ] window.
3. Activate the [ Launch ] button to open the [ Self-Extractor ] window.
4. Set the [ Unzip to folder ] path to:
a:\
5. Activate the [ Unzip ] button.
The files are extracted to the diskette.
6. Make the diskette bootable:
- right click in the Windows Explorer on the [A] drive, select: / format / copy system files
only (WIN'95 '98)

Diagnostic Procedure
Use the "System Diagnostic Diskette" to check the hardware components of the [ Power Logic
controller ].

Configure the tests

1. Check the diagnostic diskette is write enabled.
2. Insert the diagnostic diskette into the disk drive of the service laptop.
3. Select the file "Config.bat" on the diagnostic diskette with the Windows Explorer:
Right mouse click on the "Config.bat" file and select: Edit.
4. Edit the line in the Config.bat file to select a component of the [ Power Logic controller ]
5. To enable the test: set the value = '1'
To disable the test: set the value = '0'.
6. Check that the correct test are enabled

Indication of the test time

Component check The expected time Necessary tools
set ethernet=0 ( 20 seconds)
set memory=0 ( 3 minutes)
set floppy=0 ( 90 seconds)
set cdrom=0 ( 9 minutes) CD-Rom
set sysdisk_fast=0 ( 3 minutes)
set sysdisk_deep=0 ( 8 minutes)
set setmem_fast=0 ( 3 minutes)
set setmem_deep=0 ( 12 minutes)
set system=0 ( 30 seconds)
set parallel=0 ( 10 seconds)
set serial=0 ( 40 seconds) Loop-back connector (P/N 7991.531)

Procedure to check the Power Logic controller components

1. Insert the diagnostic diskette into the diskette disk drive of the [ Power Logic controller ].
2. Switch ON or restart the controller.
The diagnosis of the selected components starts.
The [ Power Logic controller ] gives a beep after each passed test.
3. Wait until the [ Power Logic controller ] makes a continuous stream of beeps.
4. Remove the diagnostic diskette.
5. Insert the diagnostic diskette into the diskette disk drive of the service laptop.
6. Open the file "result.txt" on the diagnostic diskette to check which tests are passed or
failed.
If the failed test gives a code, see the error code list

Test overview (detailed information):

Ethernet

18.06.2002 405
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Description: The ethernet test uses a standard 3COM DOS-based test diagnostic
to do a group of tests on the internal network interface card (NIC).
Set (config.bat file) set ethernet=1
Time to complete (approx.): 20 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Ethernet: Passed"

Floppy disk drive

Description: The diskette test will run:

1. The seek test
During the seek test, the magnetic head is moved back and
forward between the most exterior cylinders. The moving back to
the middle is slowly (e.g. 1 - 80, 2 -79 ....).
2. The read test
Is limited to the first 10 (or 80) cylinders.
3. The write test
Is limited to the first 10 (or 80) cylinders.
During the write test, the contents of the diskette is not
damaged.
Set (config.bat file) set floppy=1
Time to complete (approx.): 90 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Floppy (Seeking): Passed"
"Floppy (Reading): Passed"
"Floppy (Writing): Passed"

Memory

Description: The memory test does a full test on both the first and second level
cache of the CPU, and the complete true memory address space
available.
Set (config.bat file) set memory=1
Time to complete (approx.): 3 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "Memory: Passed"
"Cache Memory: Passed"

System disk

Description: To check the system disk, you can do two tests:

1. The fast surface scan (basic)
2. The thorough (complete) surface scan
Both tests only do read operations, to prevent that the contents of
the system disk are damaged.
The fast surface scan is limited to the first and last 10% of the
system disk.
In most cases, a fast surface scan is enough to make sure that you
can read at least the partition information.
Normally, the hardware controller of the disk map out each error.
Set (config.bat file) set sysdisk_fast=1
set sysdisk_deep=1
Time to complete (approx.): Fast surface scan, 3 minutes
Thorough surface scan, 8 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "System Disk (Fast Scan): Passed"
"System Disk (Thorough Scan): Passed"

18.06.2002 406
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Set memory disk

Description: This test is equivalent to the system disk test, except that the hard
disk functions as a memory.
Set (config.bat file) set setmem_fast=1
set setmem_deep=1
Time to complete (approx.): Fast scan, 3 minutes.
Thorough scan, 12 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "Set Memory Disk (Fast Scan): Passed"
"Set Memory Disk (Thorough Scan): Passed"

CD-ROM drive

Description: To analyze the internal CD-ROM drive, you need a CD-ROM with at
least 10% data on it.
Except doing an internal diagnostic test, it reads the first 10% of the
CD-ROM in the bay.
Tools: Insert a CD-Rom into the CD-Rom drive.
Set (config.bat file) set cdrom=1
Time to complete (approx.): 9 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "CD-ROM: Passed"

Parallel port

Description: This test includes only an internal diagnostic test.

Set (config.bat file) set parallel=1
Time to complete (approx.): 10 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Parallel: Passed"

Serial port

Description: During the serial test, the diagnostic software will do the:
1. Interrupt test
2. Baud rate test
3. Internal transmission test
4. External transmission test
Tool: Put the loop back connector at the port 1 and / or 2
Set (config.bat file) set serial=1
Time to complete (approx.): 40 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Serial: Passed"

System

Description: The system diagnostic test includes of the following sessions:

1. Co-Processor test
2. CMOS confidence test
3. DMA controller test
4. Timer test
5. Real time clock test

18.06.2002 407
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

6. Interrupt controller test

7. Loudspeaker test
8. PCI bridge test
9. Floating point unit test
Set (config.bat file) set system=1
Time to complete (approx.): 30 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "System: Passed"

18.06.2002 408
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 4: Controller SDS tests in Diagnosis mode

Description
After turned on the power, the [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] automatically starts .
In case of start-up problems (a damaged configuration, problems in the spool area, problems with the
print engine communication), you can start the controller in the Diagnosis Mode.
This mode contains only tests which can not be started during normal mode or which are required to
restore the system settings.

To enter the Diagnosis Mode, do SDS test: Set the next NT start method and restart the controller.
The controller starts only the operating system without a connection with the print engine.

In this Diagnosis Mode you can do the next SDS tests:

l 20-6-031 Clear the set memory and the spool areas

Clears the spool areas. All plotfiles are removed.
Do this if you have damaged plot files or problems with the spool area.

l 20-6-001 Test of the SPICE PBA

Test to check the correct function of the SPICE board.
Yoy cannot do this test in normal mode, because than there is communication between the controller
and the print engine. For that reason is this test only available in the Diagnosis Mode.
The test results are stored in a log file in the diagnostic area of the hard disk.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\spiceHwTest.log ?????

l 20-6-003 Test of the parallel port of the Centronics PBA

Test to check the correct function of the Centronics board.
You cannot start this test on normal mode. For that reason, this test is only available in the Diagnosis
Mode.
The test results are stored in a log file in the diagnostic area of the hard disk.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\centroHwTest.log ?????

If no errors detected during the SDS DIAGNOSIS MODE TESTS, you can continue with step 5: SDS
tests in NORMAL MODE.

18.06.2002 409
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 5: Controller SDS tests in normal mode

Description
Before doing any test, first make a backup of the SYSTEM DATA.
This backup contains all the special customer settings .

With the normal SDS mode, you can do the following controller tests / actions:

l (20-1-001) Enable / disable to trace the TDS400 process into a log file
Enable this option if additional information is needed of the processes inside the controller.
Restart the controller.
You can enable:
1. Level 1: The internal process communication, important for the service.
2. Level 2: Level 1 information and insight process information, important for R&D support.
After the restart, the controller writes additional information into log files (*.trc), they are
stored in the diagnostic area.
If the maximum size is reached, the ‘*.trc’ file is renamed to ‘*.old’.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\*.trc and
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\*.old
l (20-1-002) Set the maximum size to trace in the log files
Set the maximum size of the tracing log files.
The size depends on the problem occurrence and the method used to remove the log files
from the controller.
l (20-1-006) Enable / disable to trace the input data
To get all the bytes at the input channel of the controller, enable this option and restart the
controller.
The input data is stored in the diagnostic area.
The input files are stored with the name: inputfileX.Y, where X = the job number and Y = the
file number inside the job.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\inputfileX.Y
l (20-6-002) Test the hard disk of the set memory and the adapter
The hardware test tests the set memory controller and set memory disks.
The output of this test is written into a log file stored in the diagnostic area.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\setMemHwTest.log
l (20-6-020) Save the configuration into the a log file
To write the system configuration into a log file, select this option.
The contents of the saved configuration is exactly the same as printed on paper with
print-settings.
This log file is stored in the diagnostic area.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\DumpOce9450Config.txt
l (20-6-023) Clear the diagnostic area
To clean the diagnostic area, select this option.
All the log files, stored in the diagnostic area are removed from the controller.
l (20-6-025) Clear the error and the warning log files
To clean the system log files, select this option.
The so-called syslog files are cleaned.

If no errors detected during the SDS NORMAL MODE TESTS, you can continue with step 6:
re-installing the software.

18.06.2002 410
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 6: Install again the software of the Power Logic

controller

Description

Preparation
Install again the software if the problem still exist after done all the described diagnostic tests
This will be the last possible action what you must do before before you replace the controller or
controller parts.

To install again the controller software, you need the following parts:

l Oc· TDS400 CDROM

l Oc· TDS400 start diskette
l Data dump diskette, with a backup of the system data
l Print-settings

If the controller still runs, first make a backup of the system data with the SDS test 71 and copy
the files in the c:\service\visits\"current date" directory to a diskette. Print the print setting with the
system parameters on paper. With this information, you can restore the customer settings.

Install again the software

See the installation chapter of the controller how to install again the software.

Restore the backup system data

l Restore the controller backup system data with the SDS test 72
l Restart the controller. After restart, all Key operator / SYstem administrator settings of the
controller should be correct.
l Check the TCP/IP network settings.
l Check that the system operates correctly and finish the installation chapter of the controller.

If the problem still exists, than replace the compleet controlle.

18.06.2002 411
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Configuration set to previous values. (R1.1)

Description
If configuration files (GSM files) get corrupted the backup of the previous correct configuration files will be
copied.
This is mainly visible when PostScript is disappeared out of the configuration, It is also logged inside the syslog
files.

Workaround R1.1:

This problem mainly occurs due to a reboot.

Therefore it is recommended to shut-down from System Control Panel after changing settings in Settings Editor
which need a reboot.

Improvement R1.2:

In R1.1 if the configuration files were corrupted, the default factory files were copied, in R1.2 the settings of the
last good configuration will be used.

18.06.2002 412
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to use the special icons on the Oc· Power Logic Controller
desktop

If you switch on the Oc· Power Logic Controller and you log in as user [ service ].
l You see a normal MicroSoft windows NT desktop
l You see the Oc· applications
l You see the normal NT icons
l Together with the NT icons there are several special Oc· icons.

These special Oc· icons are described below.

Note: An error window opens when you use these icons. Select Yes and continue.

Ngc_down.bat:
l Stops the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller. The Oc· applications disappear
from the screen.
l The SDS will not function in this state.
l After this operation, the system is a "clean" NT workstation.

Ngc_up.bat:
l Starts the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
l The Oc· Power Logic Controller operates again in normal mode.

Note: When you activate the [ "Ngc_down" ] and [ "Ngc_up" ] icons in following sequence, it
has the same result as a restart of the Controller.

Simulate Printer.bat:
l Stops the software rtelated to the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
l It restarts the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller in a speciala state.
l It simulates the real printer as if it where actually attached to the controller.
The files printed to the Oc· Power Logic Controller appear in the QUEUE-manager and then
disappear after a few seconds.
l The System Control Panel shows that the printer is turned off.

Real Printer.bat:
l Stops the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
l It restarts the software related tio the Oc· Power Logic Controller in the normal printer mode
state.
l The System Control Panel shows now the correct printer state.

NGC Diag Mode.bat

l Is used to put the system in the special diagnostic mode.
l In this mode you download the printer software.
l Wait untill the message indicate: [ Start OCI in minimal ModeController Started ].

NGC Normal Mode.bat

l Is used to put the system back from the previous diagnostic mode to the normal operating
mode.

SYSLOG:
l Displays the contents of the C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\SYSLOG directory.
l These files contain detailed log information of the Controller processes.
l You can check the contents of the log file.
Double-click the file when you are asked which application to use with this file, select Notepad
or Wordpad

DIAGNOSTIC:
l Displays the contents of the C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\DIAGNOSTIC directory.
l These files contain detailed log information of several SDS tests.
l You can check the contents of the log file.
Double-click on the file when you are sked which application to use with this file, select
Notepad or Wordpad.

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 413
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 414
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The installation start diskette

What this installation diskette is used for.

The installation diskette is used to start the (re-)installation of the the software on the Oc·
Power Logic Controller.
Please keep in mind that the installation diskette is different between any number of machines
with the same version of software.
There are differences because of different software and or hardware options that are used by
this specific customer.

Please check the document how to create an installation start diskette in the section
installation .

What is on the installation diskette

l Microsoft NT license number.

l The drivers to have access to the CR-ROM drive.
l A batch file that enables again the installation diskette when it was used before.
l When ordered, the passwords for PostScript and Scan to File

18.06.2002 415
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The Oc· Power Logic controller internal processes

Process steps Oc· Power Logic controller

The process steps of the Oc· Power Logic controller controller can be split into 3 layers:
l Job Handling layer
l Machine handling layer
l Interface layer

The job handling layer

The Input Handler [IH]

The Input Handler [IH] takes care of the following actions:

l Connection Management
- ftp
- smb
- Novell
- Centronics
l Split data into Jobs (data and Job tickets)
- hard boundaries of network
- RCF / OJT
l Burster
- Decode headers (RCF / OJT)
- Add default ticket if no (or not all) information is available
l Spooling data into the spool area
l Inform the Job Server about new jobs

Spool area

The spool area is de IDE System Disk.

Print Pipeline

The Print Pipeline task care of the following actions:

l Creates data from the spooler

l Processes the data
Poker DLL (HPGL, HPGL2, NIRS TIFF, CALLS, CALCOMP)
l Transformation
Scaling
Rotation
l Interpretation
Display list (internal representation of the file
Rasterization (generating a bitmap)
Bitmap into set memory

Set Memory

The Set Memory uses the the IDE disk. It uses its own Oc· file system

18.06.2002 416
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Job Server [JS]

Engine Handler [EH]

Page Handler [PH]

The functions of the Page Handler [PH] are :

18.06.2002 417
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Get bitmaps out of the set memory

l Scheduling of delivering (which bitmap)
l Size of the bitmap
- To decide which roll to use (automatic roll selection)
l Attribute for delivering
- folding
- types of folding
- leading edge
- trailing edge
l Send data to the engine (Speed 2.5 MB/s)

User Interaction handler

l Display
l Feedback to the user
l Replaced by OCI in R2

System Control Handler

l SDS test management

- printer, scanner, controller
l System state handling
- Start-up, On-line, Off-line, Shut-down and Restart
l Act as an Input Handler for internal jobs
- Demo plot, dump configuration, printer test pages ....
l Setting editing
- For service [SDS] and Key Operator [KOS]

Settings Database

l Stores the settings in ASCII files

OCI (Oc· Controller Interface)

Goal of this interface:

l Standard public programmers interface for the outside world
l 2 way communication

Main functionality
l Inquiry: configuration and status
l Management: Configuration Update
l Feedback: System notification

Clients
l Queue Manager
l System Control Panel
l KOS/SAS applications
l Local / remote 3 rd party applications

18.06.2002 418
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Menu card in wrong language. (R1.1)

Description
When changing the display language for the scanner, the menu card is still printed in the original language.

Workaround:

Change the localisation setting for language in the Settings Editor accordingly.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 419
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the scanner

Note: If the scanner is installed to an already existing configuration, then all the units must have the same
firmware version.
See: system software check / upgrade / download

Remove the scanner from the pallet

1. Cut the transport bands and remove the cardboard box (if applicable).
Note: Cardboard box is not for all countries.
2. Remove the plastic bag.
3. Cut and remove the 4 strips.
Remember the 2 strip hooks at the front cover.
4. Remove the 2 boxes and the quality check print of M&L.
5. Turn the wheels in the rolling direction.
6. Remove the 8 transport nuts (key 17) and bolts.
7. Remove the 4 square blocks from the transverse planks.
8. Put the two removed transverse planks on one side of the pallet. Connect the self-adhesive material.
9. Move the scanner careful from the pallet.

Installation of the scanner

1. Remove the transport security screws at both sides of the top section (see label).
2. Open the top section.
3. Remove the foam from the scan window.
4. Remove the left and right hand side cover of the stand (Loosen 2 x 2 screws).
5. Remove the cartboard protection at both sides of the scan lamp.
6. Connect the connectors to the scan lamp. (check the position of the notch !!).
7. Install the side covers.
8. Remove the front assembly screw inside the Operator panel.
9. Connect the cable bundle to the Operator Panel PBA.
10. Install the right side Operator panel (2 screws).
11. Remove the front assembly screw inside the left side panel.
12. Install the left side cover (2 screws).
13. Close the top section.
14. Place the feet covers over the wheel supports.
15. Connect the main supply power cable.
16. Connect the data cable to the Controller.

18.06.2002 420
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Conversion 220 / 110V Scanner

The only difference is a connector positioning on a PBA.

All the software settings can be made either in US or European settings.

For conversion between 220 and 110 V:

Connector W1 on 22PBA02:
220V = W1 - TB1
110V = W1 - TB2
Drawing: see the drawing of the Mixed power supply 22PBA02 in adjustment

18.06.2002 421
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scanner
Product specifications
Model Free-standing console
Technology CCD, Oc· Image Logic real-time image processing
hardware
Speed 3 linear metres per minute or approximately 2 A0s per
minute
Original feed Face down, right aligned
Automatic feed off/on
Rewind original to front off/on
Originals 210 - 914 mm
Original width: 210 - 1020 mm
Original length:150 mm - 15 m
Maximum thickness 1 mm
Exposure control Automatic, manual fine adjustment
Special modes Lines & Text, Photo, Blueprint
Media selection Manual selection of roll 1 or 2 or manual feed
Reproduction scale Zoom: 25 % - 400 % (adjustable in 1 % programmed fixed
steps)
Scan to file zoom: 50 % - 200 %
Input mode Single sheet
Set (sets processing/set collation)
Other operating Concurrent scanning and printing
Functions Multi-copy mode: 1-99 copies (scan once print many)
Pre-programming of next job
Programmable default settings
Standard cut, synchro cut
Scan to file (option)
Leading and trailing strip adjustment (remove 400 mm, add
400 mm)
Image editing Image mirroring
Dimensions 1330 mm (W) x 1103 mm (H) x 613 mm (D)
Weight 63 Kg

18.06.2002 422
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scan to file quality specifications of the Oc· TDS400 scanner.

Criteria

Scan to file specifications for 1:1.

Tools

l Test original DE transparent code number 0831.381

Summery of the specifications:

Weak / thin line reproduction

Resolution
1:1 accuracy

Parameter Unit Target Minimu Maximu Area Tools Adjust

m m ment
1:1
accuracy
250 x 250 mm +/- 2 test
mm mm original
DE
transpar
ent
< A0 / E % +/- 0.2 test
size % original
DE
transpar
ent
< 3 meters % +/- 1 % test
original
DE
transpar
ent

Image position (registration)

Parameter Unit Target Minimu Maximu Area Tools Adjust

m m ment
Position of
the image
- Leading mm +/- 2 test
edge mm original
DE
transpar
ent
- Trailing mm +/- 2 test
edge mm original
DE
transpar
ent
- Side edge mm +/- 2 test
mm original
DE

18.06.2002 423
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

transpar
ent

Skewing of the copy

Parameter Unit Target Minimu Maximu Area Tools Adjust

m m ment
Skewing of mm 2 mm test
the copy original
(up to E DE
size) transpar
ent

18.06.2002 424
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction in 0.1 mm

Purpose
To adjust the image length on the copy to 1:1 with the image length on the original

Before you begin

l Set the zoom to 100%
l Set the leading and trailing edge to 0 mm.

Drawing

1.0

0 Max.
+/- 3,5 mm

Check
1. The pint quality of the printer must be OK
2. Select the A0 (36") roll width.
3. Feed the transparent test original in portrait direction and make a copy.
4. Wait approximately 15 minutes.
5. Match the original with the copy along the line Xe of the original and Xh of the copy. (Xe - Xh =
700 mm.)
6. Measure the difference in the length in mm.
7. Specification: The maximum average difference must be between +/- 0.5 %.
(is +/- 3.5 mm.)

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 09-1-001
2. If the image length on the copy is too long: Decrease the indicated value, maximum = -100
If the image length on the copy is too short: Increase the indicated value, maximum = +100
10 points is about 1,5 mm

Attention: the paper length varies with the changed image length

18.06.2002 425
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the leading edge on the copy in 0.1 mm

Purpose
To adjust the leading edge on the copy to 1:1 with the leading edge on the original.

Before you begin

l Set the zoom to 100%
l Set the leading and trailing edge to 0 mm

Check
1. The print quality of the printer must be OK.
2. Make a copy of the transparent test original (landscape).
3. Put the test original on the copy. Match the leading edge of the original with the copy.
4. Measure the difference between the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy.
5. Specification: +/- 4 mm

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 09-1-002
2. Add the measured difference to the value which is already set.
Leading edge too long: Increase the value, maximum = +100
Leading edge too short: Decrease the value, maximum = -100
10 points is about 1 mm

18.06.2002 426
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the trailing edge on the copy in 0.1 mm

Purpose
To adjust the trailing edge on the copy to 1:1 with the trailing edge on the original.

Before you begin

l Set the zoom to 100%
l Set the leading and trailing edge to 0 mm

Check
1. The print quality of the printer must be OK
2. Make a copy of the transparent test original (landscape).
3. Put the test original on the copy. Match the trailing edge of the original with the copy.
4. Measure the difference between the trailing edge of the original and the trailing edge of the
copy.
5. Specification: +/- 4 mm

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 09-1-003
2. Add the measured difference to the value which is already set.
Trailing edge too long: Increase the value, maximum = +100
Trailing edge too short: Decrease the value, maximum = -100
10 points ia about 1mm

18.06.2002 427
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 09 Originals
Fill in instructions

321 Glass plate

322 Feed rollers
323 Scanner lamp
324 White original plate

348 Switch (ORGSE)

349 Sensor (EXPSE)
350 PBA's
351 Motor

358 Mechanical connections

359 Electrical connections
360 Others original handling

18.06.2002 428
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[9701 Remove original]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active during scanner setup

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 429
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[9702 Original too long]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active longer than 10 minutes (equals 30 mtr.)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 430
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[9703 Stop key pressed]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: stop key pressed while ORGSE is activated
Operator message: [remove original]

18.06.2002 431
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Top section of the original handling

Procedure to remove
1. Remove the top covers from the scanner stand at the left and right side (loosen 2 screws and
remove 2 screws).
2. Remove at one side the screw and turning point from the top section.
3. Remove the top section, by moving it simultaneously to the front and upwards.
4. Place it always on a flat table.

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 432
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original present sensor (09B1)

1. Remove the glass plate.
2. Remove at the right side one screw from the front original guide plate.
3. Remove at the left side one screw and the bush from the front original guide plate.
4. Remove carefully the front original guide plate by moving to the rear and upwards.
Note: Do not damage the mirror.
5. Remove the present sensor.

18.06.2002 433
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Glass plate
1. Remove the top section of the original handling.
2. Loosen at the left and right side 2 screws from the side covers from the stand.
3. Remove the side covers from the stand.
4. Loosen at the left and right side 2 screws from the original output guide plate.
5. Push the original output guide plate to the rear.
6. Remove the glass plate.

Note: during assembling:

Place the glass plate with the slant side upwards.

18.06.2002 434
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original Motor (09M1)

1. Remove the left cover from the

scanner stand (2 screws).
2. Unhook the spring.
3. Loosen the gear belt tensioner
plate (3 screws).
4. Remove the drive belt from the
motor.
5. Disconnect connector 0901X2 Spring
from the motor PBA.
6. Loosen the 3 taptites from the
motor frame plate.
7. Remove the motor frame plate
with the motor.

Tensioner
plate

Motor
plate

Note: during assembling:

1. Check if both belts are correct guided around the wheels.
2. Both belts are tighted by the same tensioner plate.

18.06.2002 435
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01
X2
+5V_STB
1 1
GND 09B
2 2 Orig
ORGSE
3 3 Sen

Step Motor Control

09PBA01
X1 X2
ORGSMCLK OA
9 4 1
ORGSMENA NOA 09M
10 5 2
ORGSMDIR OB M Orig
11 6 3 Moto
NOB
4
+24V
1
GND
3
+5V
2

IPU
10PBA03
+5V
X4
+5V
3 X7

X4
22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (scanner)

09-Original handling

18.06.2002 436
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original handling

The original present sensor 09B1 (ORGPRESE) detects if an original is present.

After a certain time delay to ensure proper alignment against the first pinch, the original feed
motor 09M1 (ORGMO) starts turning and the original is fed for a short time. When the
scanning process starts, the original is transported to the rear and is exposed, until the original
sensor 09B1 is released.
The necessary time to transport the original to the front is now calculated and the original
moves again to the front.

09B1 scan direction

original feed
motor control
09M1
ORGSE

09PBA01

scanner controller

When the original arrives at the front, the rear is still in the pinch and the original sensor 09B1
is still activated. When more copies have to be made, this cycle is repeated.

ORGPRESE
The timing of the original present sensor is used for:
l to start / stop the moment of the scanning
l original length measurement
l to start and stop the original transport motor
l measurement delay on leading and trailing edge to detect holes in a filing strip.

ORGMO
The original transport motor is used for:
l start and stop the original transport
l magnfication and reduction of the image in length direction.
The motor drives slower or faster

18.06.2002 437
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 438
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 1
1 2945.213 -SUPPORT BEARING 2
4 7048.560 -ROLLER 2
5 2954.996 -PLAIN BEARING 4
6 2912.357 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
ORGSE, 09B1
10 2954.985 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
27 2912.685 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 72T 2
30 2912.693 -MOTOR ASSY 1
09M1
32 2954.947 -MOTOR PLATE 1
34 5583.901 -MOTOR CONTROL PBA 1
09PBA01
35 2668.036 -GROMMET 3
36 2912.699 -BUSH 2
42 2912.717 -WAVE WASHER 2
43 1006.269 -RING 2
50 2954.988 -TENSIONER ASSY 1
53 2954.950 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 69T 1
55 2333.097 -TIMING BELT 1680 1
56 2333.057 -TIMING BELT 880 1
58 3851.105 -TENSION SPRING 1
60 2977.120 -PROFILE ASSY 1
61 2926.733 -BUSH 2
63 2954.981 -PROFILE 1
64 2999.842 -BUSH 2
65 2954.987 -GLASS PLATE 1

18.06.2002 439
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 2
2 7083.721 -PROFILE 1
7 2912.387 -PIN 2
8 2912.383 -PIN 2
12 2954.949 -ORIGINAL PLATE 1
13 2955.000 -SUPPORT 7
18 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 14
19 2912.338 -LEAF SPRING 7
20 2912.337 -SHAFT 14

18.06.2002 440
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-0-001 Error Counters ]

18.06.2002 441
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction (in
0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 442
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-1-002 Adjust the leading edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 443
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-1-003 Adjust the trailing edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the trailing edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 444
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-2-001 Check of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE

09B1) ]

Condition No original: Original not present.

Original available: Original present

Action Feed original or sheet

Check

18.06.2002 445
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-6-001 Activate the original motor (ORGMO 09M1) ]

Purpose Activate the original motor (ORGMO 09M1)

Check Transport: transport the original

Rewind: rewind the original

Remarks

18.06.2002 446
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-6-002 Activate the movement of the original ]

Purpose Check of the orignal transport in the scanner

Check Insert an original.

Activate the SDS test: The original is transported into the scanner and rewind.
The cycle will be repeated till the test is stopped.

Remarks

18.06.2002 447
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-9-001 Display the length of the last original (in 0.1 mm) ]

Purpose Display the length of the last original (in 0.1 mm)

Check Feed an original.

Original length: ..... in 0.1 mm

Remarks

18.06.2002 448
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

1 Adjustment procedure scanner

Do the following adjustments on a stand alone scanner.

Adjustment tools needed are:

l Diabolo's, placed under the left top panel of the scanner
l Focus test tool 2x, code number 2999.738

Adjustment procedure:
Note: Most of the scanner adjustments will influence each other.
So complete all the adjustments from where you start and carry them out in order.

1. Maximum exposure level

2. CCD alignment (position CCD with the scan line, diabolo)
3. CCD Gain (exposure level)
4. CCD focus
5. 1:1 width and right alignment
6. Make a test copy from the transparent service original, to check the copy quality.

18.06.2002 449
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the maximum exposure level

Purpose

To adjust the lamp supply to the correct light output of the exposure lamp.

Light output too high: decreases the life time of the lamp
Light output too low: bad copy quality / higher background

Note:
The adjustment is done at the time that the exposure lamp generates the maximum light output
(see the figure) and is measured by the EXPOSE sensor.

When to do
After replacement of the exposure lamp, [ Mixed Power Supply ] and or sensor.

Drawing

Correction
Start the adjustment with a cold lamp (SCALA).
1. Keep the top cover in closed position.
2. Connect a voltmeter (DC range) between the test points EXPSE (TB5) and GND
(TB7) on the
[ Mixed power supply ] 22PBA02.
3. Put the jumper J6 into the [ adjustment position ] (= lowest position).
4. Switch on the scanner.
5. Switch on the exposure lamp (SDS test 10-6-002)

18.06.2002 450
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

6. Measure the voltage and adjust the potentiometer R133 to keep the voltage
continuous at
9.0 V ± 0.1 V during the increase.
7. Stop the adjustment when the voltage decreases!!
8. Switch off the scanner.
9. Remove the voltmeter and put the jumper on the [ Mixed Power Supply ] 22PBA02
back into its normal position.

18.06.2002 451
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment (Position of the

CCD with the scan line)

Purpose
This adjustment puts the CCD in the position:
l parallel and
l on the scan line, in the horizontal plane.

Problem on pixel level: (1 pixel in the width direction (200 DPI) = 0.127mm)
l Slant position: a square will be a parallelogram
l Displaced: shadows next to thick lines with the transparent originals,
over exposed with the shiny opaque originals.

Drawing

diabolo scan line scan line diabolo

(correct) (wrong)

Check

1. Place the 2 diabolo test tools over the exposure glass.

2. Close the original cover.
3. Do SDS test 10-7-001.
4. Specification: The measured value (in pixels) for the left and right diabolo must be:
MINIMAL (is between 75 - 85 pixels.)

Correction
1. Open the covers of the CCD unit at the rear side.
2. Do the SDS test 10-7-001.
Note: If the camera assy is replaced, measure if the plate -C- is parallel to the frame.
Adjust with the bolts A and B until there is any value on the screen.
Do not adjust 1 side completely, but adjust both sides with small moves.
3. Adjust the position of the CCD with the screw A and / or B, until the screen indicates
that the value for both sides is within the specifications.
4. Deactivate the SDS test.
5. Remove the 2 diabolo test tools.
6. Do the next adjustment of the procedure list: the CCD gain

A C B

18.06.2002 452
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the CCD Gain (Exposure level)

Purpose
To adjust the amplification factor of the analogue electronics of both (even / uneven)
CCD channels to the same greystep value of 225, after the reflected light from the
white original guide plate is measured.
l Setting too low: every grey step above the setting will be blank
l Setting too high: the circuit will be overloaded if the measurement of an original,
more white than the white original guide plate, is higher than 256.

Check
1. Close the original cover.
2. Do the SDS test 10-7-003.
3. Specification: the Greystep value for the odd and even CCD channels is 225 +/-2.
Difference between odd and even: maximum 4.

Correction
1. Remove the rear cover over the CCD unit.
2. Adjust with the potentiometer R35 on the CCD PBA, until the LED [ ODD ]
flashes.
3. Adjust with the potentiometer R35 on the CCD PBA, until 225 (+2 or -2) is
indicated on the screen.
4. Adjust with the potentiometer R48 on the CCD PBA, until the LED [ EVEN ]
flashes.
5. Adjust with the potentiometer R48 on the CCD PBA, until 225 (+2 or -2) is
indicated on the screen.
6. Do the next adjustment of the procedure list: the CCD focus

R48 R35

EVEN ODD

Translation Control: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 453
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus

Purpose
To adjust the focus on the left and right side.
The CCD unit is set to the same and correct distance to the lens at the left and right
side.

Check
1. Make a copy from the service test original.
2. Specification: The 2.6 line pattern must be clearly visible.

Correction
1. Open the original cover.
2. Put the focus test tool (code no. 2999.738) on the exposure glass and against the
left and right side frame.
3. Close the original cover.
4. Remove the covers of the CCD assy.
5. Do the SDS test 10-7-002
Note: (The CCD reads the contrast between the black and white lines.)
The adjustment screw -C- is for the right hand side focus! (see the figure)
The adjustment screw -D- is for the left hand side focus! (see the figure)

6. Rotate the adjustment screws until the value on the screen indicates the highest
value
(empirical value is approximately 40, see also the graphic figure).
Warning:
Value <5 indicates: white section is measured (wrong position test chart)
Value >50 indicates: no reflection of test chart.
7. Leave the SDS test and remove the focus test tools.
8. Do the next adjustment of the procedure list: 1:1 width and right alignment

Adjustment figure

Graphic figure

18.06.2002 454
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right alignment

Note1: This adjustment changes both:
the adjustment parameters: 1:1 width and the right alignment!
Note 2: Check in the key operator mode if the calibration factor is on 100 %.

Purpose
1. To adjust the correct 1:1 in the width direction.
2. To adjust the optical ‘0’-line for the left side of the original (right alignment).

Check 1: 1:1 width adjustment

1. Make a 1:1 copy of the service test original in the arrow direction.
2. Put the original over the copy with the width measure line Xe and Xh on top of each
other.
3. Specification: the width difference must be between + / - 3.5 mm (<0.5%).

Check 2: Right alignment (correct ‘0’ line)

1. Measure the distance from the original and from the previous made copy between the
left hand side image and the left hand side border.
2. Specification: the difference must be within + / - 4mm.

Correction: 1:1 width and right alignment

1. Open the original cover
2. Put the 2 diabolo's over the exposure glass.
3. Close the original cover.
4. Do the SDS test 10-7-004.
5. The software calculates the correction factor for the correct width (1:1) and for the
correct right alignment ('0'-line). These values are stored automatically in the memory .
6. Stop the SDS test.
7. Remove the two diabolo's.

Manual fine tuning

You can read and change both parameters.

1:1 width: SDS test 10-1-003

Image width is too small: increase the value, maximum = +100
Image width is too wide: decrease the value, maxumum = -100
10 points is about 1 mm.

Right alignment: SDS test 10-1-002

To shift the image position to the left side: increase the value, maximum = +300
To shift the image position to the right side: decrease the value, maximum = -150
10 points is about 1 mm

Translation Control: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 455
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 10 Scanning
Fill in instructions

361 Camera
362 Cable scanner-printer
363 Mirror

390 PBA's

398 Mechanical connections

399 Electrical connections
400 Others scanner

18.06.2002 456
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[10501 Error (Scanner lamp not active after switching on)]

Description
Signalname: EXPACT
Fault condition: EXPACT signals Lamp not on
Norm value: EXPACT must detect Lamp on in 2 seconds
Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1002-018 Lamp 10E1 Check replace 323

2202-004 POWER SUPPLY PBA 1 Check replace 350

22PBA02
electrical connections Check 359

18.06.2002 457
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[10502 Error (Scaner lamp is active before switching on)]

Description
Signalname: EXPACT
Fault condition: EXPACT signals lamp on before it is switched on.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1002-018 Lamp 10E1 Check replace 323

2202-004 POWER SUPPLY PBA 1 Check replace 350

22PBA02
electrical connections Check 359

18.06.2002 458
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CCD / lens cleaning

For CCD and / or lens cleaning, following disassemblies are necessary:

1. Remove the rear cover over the CCD assy, 2 screws.

2. Loosen 14 screws from the protection plate, and remove the plate.
3. Disconnect all 3 connectors from the CCD PBA.
4. Remove the PBA, 2 screws
5. Remove the black block over the lens (2 taptites).

Cleaning is now possible, use an airbrush.

If necessary, remove the diaphragm from the lens.

Caution: Do not change the position of the lens!

18.06.2002 459
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CCD unit

Disassembling
Assembling
l When placing a new CCD Interface PBA, first check if the
jumper X4 is placed between pin 2 and 3 (see figure below)

l Make copies from the service test original and check the copy
quality.

18.06.2002 460
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the exposure lamp

Procedure to remove
1. Remove both side covers from the stand, loosen 2x 2 screws.
2. Push the plastic position fingers aside.
3. Loosen the lamp connectors on both sides.
4. Slide the lamp out the scanner, left or right side.

Procedure to install

When you install the exposure lamp make sure that:

l the exposure window points upward.
l the plastic position fingers fits in the notch of the lamp connectors.

The identification mark can be at the left or right-hand side

identification
mark

exposure window front

18.06.2002 461
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O Low Voltage Supply (scanner) Exposure Sensor

22PBA01 22PBA02 10PBA04
X1 X1 X3 X1
EXPACT EXPSEIN
1 1 5 1
EXPPWM GND
2 2 6 2
EXPFIL +12V
3 3 7 3 +12V

X4
L2
1
L1
2
L4
3 10E1
L3 Scan Lamp
4

10-Scanner / Exposure control

18.06.2002 462
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General
The aim of the scanner function is to convert the information of the
original into a digital form.

The following different functions are in the scanner:

l the original transport (see function 09 original handling)

l the light path
l scanning
l the one line CCD.
l data processing

The power supply 10PBA07 combines a low voltage power supply and an exposure control.

Original path SCALA CCD Lens

Mirror Light path

18.06.2002 463
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The light path

The light path exposes the original and transfers the light to the CCD
units.
The light path consists of:

l exposure lamp SCALA

l reflector (also by the gauge roller when using transparent originals)
l exposure glass
l mirror
l lens
l light sensor EXPSE

Figure

Gauge roller CCD Lens

914.4 m m (36")

Detail A

EXPSE Reflector Light path Exposure

lamp

Exposure lamp
The exposure lamp (SCALA) is a fluorescent lamp of 50W.
The lamp has an exposure window, which must be positioned to the
reflector and gauge roller.
The glow spiral of the lamp is switched on by the SCAFIL signal to
extend the life time of the exposure lamp.
The exposure lamp is switched on when the original has activated the
original present sensor (ORGPRESE).
When the scanner is switched to 'sleep mode', the exposure lamp is
switched off.

Light from the exposure lamp is projected directly and by one reflector
against the original. The original is transported between the turning
gauge roller and the exposure glass and is exposed. The amount of
reflected light depends on the kind of information on the original.
White areas on the original will reflect light, dark areas will reflect no
light. Grey areas will reflect less light than white areas.
The reflected light is transported via the mirror on the bottom of the
scanner, through the lens to the CCD unit.

18.06.2002 464
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Exposure sensor (EXPSE)

The exposure sensor (EXPSE) checks the lamp on / off switching and
the value of the light output. The value of the amount of light drops about
20 % of the maximum value when the lamp is warm. This 80 % light
output level is stable.

18.06.2002 465
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The scanner lamp

The exposure lamp is a 50 W fluorescent lamp. The light output of the
lamp is regulated. The EXPSE sensor detects the light output of the
scanner lamp.

Block diagram:

Lamp
Ballast

EXPFIL

EXPPWM
22PBA02
+ 12 V / GND
EXPACT
EXPSEIN EXPSE

Mixed Power
Supply

l The EXPFIL signals starts the pre-heaters of the lamp. The

pre-heaters are on until the scanner lamp is switched off.
l The EXPPWM switches the lamp on and off. The SCALAPWM
signal is also the demanded light level and is set on 80%. It is a
puls width modulation signal.
l The EXPSEIN signal is the analog output signal of the EXPSE
sensor. The value of this signal is related to the actual amount of
light of the scanner lamp.
l The EXPACT signal is a feedback signal that indicates the control
if the scanner lamp is switched on or off.

Timing diagram:
EXPOSURE
LEVEL
80 %

EXPFIL

EXPPWM
time

Scanner lamp adjustment

The scanner lamp must have a certain light output. This amount of light
is de-rived from its maximal light output, because this point is a limit.
To create the 100% light output during the adjustment of the scanner
lamp con-trol circuit, the feedback signal of the optical sensor
(EXPSEIN) is disabled from the control loop. This is done by means of a
jumper.

18.06.2002 466
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

EXPPWM Exp. lamp

jumper output

testpoint
EXPSE

EXPSEIN
EXPSE
10PBA4

If the jumper is in the adjust position the EXPPWM signal is held low (=
100% duty-cycle) and the power supply will supply the lamp with the
maxi-mum power.
The light level of the lamp will rise until it reaches 100% light out-put at
the optimal lamp temperature.
During the rise the signal of EXPSE (at the testpoint) must be kept at a
constant level of 9.0 V. This is done by means of the potentiometer (see
adjustment: ‘Maximum exposure level’ :
After the adjustment the jumper must be re-positioned in the original
position.

18.06.2002 467
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CCD unit
The Charged Coupled Device (CCD) converts the detected
light amount into an analogue voltage. The value of the
analogue voltage is related to the light amount.

The TDS400 uses a reduced type CCD. The actual image is

projected on 1 CCD device via an optical system with a mirror
and a lens.

The CCD has 7500 pixels. Only 7200 pixels are used to scan
the maximum original size of 914.4 mm (36”). The even and
odd pixels have separate command and data channels.
The CCD is mounted on the CCD Console PBA.

The interface is used in more scanners. To set the jumper X4

on the 10PBA02 , see assembling CCD unit.
The scanning resolution is 200 dots/inch (dpi).
One pixel is approx. 0.13 mm.
The resolution is enhanced by software to 600 dpi for the
print head.

All data of the original is directly transported via the Image

Processing PBA to the SPICE board in the PLC controller.
The figure below shows the used PBAs and the direction of
the data flow.
The Image processing PBA is described in chapter 11 Image
processing.

CCD CCD
CCD Console interface
10 PBA 1 10 PBA 2

Image
Processing To SPICE
10PBA3 board
PLC
Console
CPU
22PBA01

Scanner

18.06.2002 468
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Data processing

Block diagram data path

The data path block diagram describes the various data steps on the
CCD Console 10PBA1.
Figure data path

Offset compensation
Every CCD cell generates a DC voltage, independently of light, which is
not needed. The offset compensation compensates all pixels for this DC
level.
Note: . The offset compensation is carried out just after the machine is
switched on.

Multiplexing
To reduce the amount of electrical connections and to gain higher
performance the data of the 2 CCD channels is multiplexed.

Adjustable amplifier
The amplifier amplifies the analogue voltage to the optimum input range
for the ADC. In this way the total range of the ADC is used. The
adjustable am-plifier is needed to compensate system tolerances of the
driver on the CCD PBA. The setting of the adjustable amplifier is based
on the CCD information from the gauge roller. This is done during
scanner calibration, after switching on the machine.

A/D converter
The A/D converter (Analog Digital converter) converts the analog voltage
into an 8 bit digital signal.

CCD Interface 10PBA2

The interface function takes care of the transmission from and to the
Image Processing PBA, where the image processing takes place (see
chapter 11).

18.06.2002 469
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scanning
The scanning function is a part of the total image data processing, which
en-sures a good copy quality for most types of originals.
Nearly independent of the quality of the original e.g. opaque or
transparent, the output quality should be at a high level.

The total image processing functions take place on the following PBAs:

Scanner
PLC Controller Engine

CCD CCD
CCD Console Interface
10PBA1 10PBA2

SPICE PLC
PBA soft- Print- Print-
ware head head
Image I/O
processing
Console CPU 10PBA4
22PBA02

This chapter describes only the scanning part, which is up to the Image
processing PBA.

Scan start moment

The scanning of the original must start on the leading edge of the
original.
This moment depends of:
l original transport moment / position
l original speed (magnification factor)
l leading edge setting

Scan stop moment

The scanning of the original must stop on the trailing edge of the
original.
This moment depends of:
l deactivating of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE)
l trailing edge setting

18.06.2002 470
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Mixed Power Supply

The mixed power supply is used for:
+ 24V / + 12 V and +5V supply (only in RUN mode)
+ 5 V in STAND-BY mode

Block diagram:

Mains filter
Mains switc h
Engine

Exp.
La mp
ON in
Stand-b y Ballast la mp
m ode + 5V
stand -by
SUPON

+ 24 V
ON Ballast c ontrol EXPSEIN
in + 5V EXPPWM
RUN EXPFIL
m ode + 12 V EXPACT

The Mixed Power Supply is supplied by the line voltage of the engine.
It generates the low voltage power supply and the high frequency lamp
ballast.
By the logic signal ~SUPON~ the scanner can be switched between the
RUN mode and the STAND-BY mode.
The input voltage of the power supply is not from the engine, but from a
socket outlet on the wall.

18.06.2002 471
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SCANNING
1 5600.421 -CAMERA ASSY 1
10PBA01, CCD CONSOLE
2 5584.468 --CCD INTERFACE PBA 1
10PBA02
3 2954.942 -MIRROR 1
13 2944.810 -LAMP HOLDER 1
15 2912.376 -LAMP CONNECTOR 2
18 2912.379 -LAMP 1
10E1
19 5583.781 -EXPOSURE SENSOR PBA 1
10PBA04
20 2954.948 -SENSOR HOLDER 1
21 2926.714 -SNAP RIVET 4
40 1989.346 -BRACKET 3
50 2977.129 -CLAMP 3
52 2977.131 -RING 1
53 2977.130 -STUD 2
54 2977.141 -SET BALL SCREW 4

18.06.2002 472
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 473
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-001 Set the lamp time out after the last original (in
seconds) ]

Description Set the lamp time out after the last original (in seconds)

Value Range: 60 ... 600

Default: 60 (seconds)

Remarks

18.06.2002 474
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position original - copy (in 0.1 mm)
]

Description Adjust the "0"-line position original - copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -150 ... 300

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustsment procedure: 1:! width and right alignment

18.06.2002 475
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy in the width direction (1:1)

(in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the image accuracy in the width direction (1:1) (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure: 1:1 width and right allignment

18.06.2002 476
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-004 Adjust the light level of the exposure lamp (in steps of
5 %) ]

Description Adjust the light level of the exposure lamp (in steps of 5 %)

Value Range: 50 ... 60

Default: 55

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 477
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-2-001 Check of the exposure sensor (SCAEXPOSE

10PBA04) ]

Condition Check the function of the exposure sensor (SCAEXPOSE 10PBA04)

Action

Check Check the function of the sensor with a flash light.

18.06.2002 478
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-6-002 Check the functioning of the exposure lamp (SCALA

10E1) ]

Purpose Check the functioning of the exposure lamp (SCALA 10E1)

Check Lamp on: light output is placed at 100%

Remarks

18.06.2002 479
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-001 Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment

Value Allignment right: 100 ... 1100 (pixels)

Normal value: 600
Allignment left: 6400 - 7400 (pixels)
Normal value: 6900

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD alignment

18.06.2002 480
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-002 Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus

Value Search area right: between 580 - 620 CCD's

Search area left: between 6880 ... 6920 CCD's

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD focus

18.06.2002 481
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-003 Adjustment procedure of the CCD maximum exposure

level ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD maximum exposure level

Value

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD gain

18.06.2002 482
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-004 Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right

alignment ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right alignment

Value

Remarks Adjustment procedure: 1:1 and right alignment

18.06.2002 483
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O IPU CCD I/O CCD

22PBA01 10PBA03 10PBA02 10P
X4 X5 X3 X2 X3
RING MUX
INTERFACE A/D CONVERTER

X4 X1 X6
+5V +5V
19 19 1 1
+5V - CCD CONTROL GND
20 20 - NUC
4 2
X1
- ABC
- ZOOM +5V
3
- FILTER +5V_SENSE
- ERROR DIFFUSION 2
GND
X7 5
X9
X4 SPU CONTROLLER
INTERFACE NGC

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (scanner) 22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (scanner)

10-Scanner / Image processing

18.06.2002 484
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General
The aim of the image processing function is to create:
l a good copy quality
l a retention function
l an editing function.
l a zoom function
l a scan to file with Scan Station

The image processing function is a part of the total data processing,

which takes care of a good copy quality for most types of originals.
Nearly independent to the quality of the original e.g. opaque or
transparent, the output quality should be at a high level.

The total image processing functions take place on the following PBAs:
Scanner
PLC Controller Engine

CCD CCD
CCD Console Interface
10PBA1 10PBA2

SPICE PLC
PBA soft- Print- Print-
ware head head
Image I/O
processing
Console CPU 10PBA4
22PBA02

This chapter describes the image processing part, which is handled by the
Image Processing board 10PBA4.

18.06.2002 485
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image processing 10PBA04

The image processing is A PBA, containing digital hardware that
implements algorithms to transform the output of the CCD into a good
quality half-toned bitmap.
The data flow through the Image processing PBA is in serial order,
meaning that it is actually a pipeline of modules, each implementing part
of the desired functionality.

Image Processing Modules:

PLC
Controller

Zoom
Output adaptor

ABC
Half toning

Blue print
Framing
Uneveness PP_LUT
compensation

Filtering
Input adaptor Image
Processing
10PBA04
CCD 10PBA02

Input adaptor
This is the hardware that reads the CCD-output.
It controls also the CCD.

Uneveness compensation, Blue print, Framing

Unevenness compensation:
The unevenness compensation compensates for:
l differences in light output of the exposure lamp over the total width,
l tolerances in the reflected light of the gauge roller,
l variation in pixel sensitivity of the CCDs.

Note: The unevenness compensation (for each pixel) is automatically

done at every introduction of each original into the scanner.
The unevenness compensation acts as follows:
The exposure lamp is switched on, the original motor is active and the
gauge roller is turning. The light of the exposure lamp is reflected by the
white gauge roller and is detected by each pixel of the CCD. The
measured digital value for each pixel should have a grey step value of
225.
If the value is lower e.g. 200 or higher e.g. 230, a compensation value is
calculated.

The compensation value is multiplied with the actual pixel value (e.g.
150) during the scan of the original. The compensation value stays the
same until a new original is entered.

Blue print
Included in this module is also the possibility to invert pixel data. This is
needed for the blue print operation.

Framing
Included in this module is also the possibility to calculate which CCD
LED's should be switched to have a framing at the left and right side of
the copy.

18.06.2002 486
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

ABC (Automatic Background Compensation)

The ABC measures the background level of the original and will subtract
this level from the grey-level bitmap. In this way the grey-level of the
background is eliminated, thus turned to white.
The principe of the ABC is that for every scan line the background level
for that line is estimated and this value is related to the background level
from the past, in order to determine the new background level.
This means that from the beginning of the leading edge of the original,
the print background can change very fast depending the information on
the original (the leading edge can be: filing strip, diazo type original,
posters).
How more lines are scanned and measured, the value of the
background will be more stable and the background will be
compensated by the same level.
Note: If the background level compensation on the print is fluctuating too
much, switch off the ABC to receive a print with the same background
level as the original.

Zoom
The zoom module is used to reduce and enlarge (25% ... 400 %) the
input image in the width (scan) direction.
Also the resolution in scan direction is enhanced from 200dpi to 600dpi.
(Reduction and enlargement in the length direction is done by changing
the speed of the original motor.)

Filtering
Filters are used to enhance the contrast level of the bitmap. The result is
that the image quality is improved. Weak lines or areas (low contrast)
(see line A and area C) are emphasised in normal mode. The result for
area C is a visible darker border around the surface. Normal information
(B) is kept at the same level and is not affected.
Also for enlargments >200%, every other scan line is discarded to
minimise the amount of RAM memory. After the enlargment calculation ,
the 400 dots/inch is set back by interpolation.
The output after filtering is 8 bit/pixel.

input

optical
density
A B C

background level 1 scanline

output

optical
density

background level
1 scanline

PP LUT
The PP LUT is a look-up table which is only used for grey and lines mode or photomode.

Scale Y
During the filtering by enlargments >200%, every other scan line was discarded.
Scale Y tries to reconstruct the lost lines by means of interpolation.

Halftoning
This module converts the 8-bit greuscale pixels into a 1-bit black/white bitmap.
The module contains three different halftoning methods:
1. error diffusion, this is the normally used

18.06.2002 487
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

2. dithering, applied when postermode is selected

3. file size optmalisation. This mode is a combibation of error diffusion and thresholding, to be used for
scan-to-file when the scanned images will be compressed and stored.
This mode yields smaller compressed files at the expense of a little image quality.

Normal mode
If the grey value is below a certain minimum value, it is
converted into a black pixel on the copy.
If the grey value is above a certain maximum value, it is
converted into a white pixel on the copy.
If the grey value is between the minimum and maximum value,
the error dif-fusion has to decide if the pixel becomes white or
black.
In this case also the information (grey value) of the pixel in the
previous line and the pixel beside the pixel are used for the
judgement whether the pixel becomes white or black. The
judgement also results in the prevention of Moir· effects.

Lighter / Darker button (+7 / -7):

The lighter /darker button function is also incorporated in the
error diffusion function. The lighter/darker button changes only
the position (value) of the maximum value. More or less (+7/-7)
grey values are changed into white pixels.
Pixel +7 0 -7

White

Black
min. max.
255
value value
e.g 80 e.g.190

grey value

Dark mode
If the operator selects the dark mode the maximum value is
reduced from 190 to e.g. 160. The influence on the copy is that
weak information or background is changed into white pixels
and a smaller range (between min. and max. value) of grey
scales on the copy.
+7 -7
Pixel

White

Blac k
m in. m ax. 255
value value
e.g 80 e.g 160
grey value

Photo mode
If the operator selects Photo mode the minimum value is
changed from 80 to e.g. 50. The influence on the copy is a
smaller dark pixel range and a larger range for grey values on
the copy.

18.06.2002 488
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Pixel +7 -7

White

Bla ck
m in. m a x. 255
va lue va lue
e.g 50 e.g. 190
grey value

Output adapter
This module coverts the image data accordance with the SPICE-protocol and sent it to the controller.

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 489
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

IMAGE PROCESSING
15 5584.743 -SPU PBA 1
10PBA03

18.06.2002 490
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 11-6-001 Check of the control bus between CPU-IO and the

IMAGE- PROC PBA ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Check of the control bus between CPU-IO and the IMAGE- PROC PBA of the
scanner

Check Image PROC OK

Image PROC NOT OK

Remarks

18.06.2002 491
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 22 Power & Control

Fill in instructions

841 Operating panel

843 Line filters
845 Fuses
846 Copy counters
848 Switches
849 Sensors
855 PBA/EPROM's
856 Power supply unit
878 Mechanical connections
879 Electrical connections
880 Others Control

18.06.2002 492
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22522 Error (Printer illegal language file)]

Description
Error condition: Illegal printer language file installed on the controller.

The printer will display the error message, and use the onboard English language file.
The correct printer language files should be installed.

18.06.2002 493
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22540 Error (EEPROM settings out of range)]

Description
EEPROM settings out of range

Error occurs in case one of the variables during power up of the scanner is out of range.

Operator action:
1. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 494
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22541 Error (Too many EEPROM variables defined)]

Description
Too many EEPROM variables defined.

Error uccurs in case variables to be stored in EEPROM exeeds 64 (during power up of the
scanner).

18.06.2002 495
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22542 Error (Scanner communication broken)]

Description
Connection between scanner and NGC broken.

Error uccurs in case there is no communication between the scanner and the NGC (checked
every 10 seconds).

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2204-001 CPU PBA 22PBA01 855

1102-015 SPU PBA 10PBA03 390

electrical connections Check 359

18.06.2002 496
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22543 Error (Scanner transmit buffer too small)]

Description
Transmit buffer too small: communication with controller broken or frozen.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 497
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22544 Error (Scanner transmit buffer overshoot)]

Description
Transmit overshoot buffer too small: scanner tried to send a command which is too big.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 498
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22545 Error (Scanner recieve buffer too small)]

Description
Recieve buffer too small: scanner is not accepting data fast enough.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON

18.06.2002 499
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22546 Error (Scanner Uart parity error)]

Description
UART reported parity error: unreliable communication link.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 500
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22547 Error (Scanner Uart buffer overflow)]

Description
UART reported buffer overflow.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 501
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22548 Error (Scanner Uart framing error)]

Description
UART reported framing error.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 502
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22549 Error (Scanner illegal language file)]

Description
Error condition: Illegal scanner language file installed on the controller.

The scanner will display the error message, and use the onboard English language file.
The correct scanner language files should be installed.

18.06.2002 503
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IPU CPU I/O Console

10PBA03 22PBA01 22PBA03
X5 X4 X3 X1
+5V +5V_STB
1 1 1 1
GND GND
2 2
+24V CONPANINP
3 3
GND CONPANOUT
26 26 4 4
CONPANCLK
5 5
Low Voltage Supply (scanner) CONPANENA
6 6
22PBA02 +5V
µP 7 7
X3 X1 CONPANSTB
EXPACT 8 8
1 1
EXPPWM
2 2
EXPFIL
3 3
SUPON
4 4
+5V_STB
11 5
GND
10 6

10-Scanner / CPU I/O

18.06.2002 504
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Low Voltage Supply (scanner)

22S1 22PBA02
ON/OFF Switch
X5 F3 X1
L
1 1

LOAD
F6 4AS

LINE
N
2 3
4AS
100V or 4 2
120/230V 3 X6
T1
100V 10T1
X3
115V +5V_STB
+5V 12
10F1
100V 11 22PBA
4AS
X2
+5V_SENSE
1
T2
120/230V
+5V
2 10PBA
GND
3

Control X3
PWM +24V
+24V
9 09PBA
12
8
6
+12V
+12V 7

X4
L2
1
T5
Ballast / L1
X9 2
Control Ballast
PWM L4
Control 3
L3
X2 4 EXPOS
X3 CONTR
EXPPWM
2
EXPFIL
3
EXPSEIN
5

EXPACT
1

SUPON
4 22PBA

10-Scanner / Low Voltage Supply

18.06.2002 505
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O (scanner) Console

22PBA01 22PBA03

IPU CCD I/O CCD Console

10PBA03 10PBA02 10PBA01

TO SPICE-BUS
CONTROLLER NGC

Low Voltage Supply

(scanner)
22PBA02

09B1

10E1 Exposure Sensor

10PBA04

10-Scanner / Main diagram

18.06.2002 506
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Main Diagram Oc· TDS400 Scanner (overview)

Scanner Main diagram

scanner.tif

18.06.2002 507
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

POWER & CONTROL, SCANNER
1 5584.597 -CPU PBA, UPTO MOD.02 1
22PBA01
5584.710 -CPU PBA, FROM MOD.02 1
22PBA01
2 7208.822 -FIRMPACK, UPTO MOD.02 1
7095.309 -FIRMPACK, FROM MOD.02 1
7095.421 -FIRMPACK, FROM MOD.03 1
7095.712 -FIRMPACK, FROM MOD.05 1
4 5583.786 -POWER SUPPLY PBA 1
22PBA02
7 1201.774 -MAINS INLET CONNECTOR 1
9 1202.042 -MANUAL SWITCH 1
22S1
12 1201.854 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE, 230V 1
1301.782 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE, 115V 1
16 7128.968 -SUPPORT PLATE 1
18 1989.346 -BRACKET 1
19 7095.113 -PROTECTION PLATE 1
23 2977.111 -SHIELDING PLATE 1
25 2977.114 -SHIELDING COVER 1
40 7018.018 -TRANSFORMER ASSY 100-115V 1
22T1
40L 1300.396 --FUSE 4A, SLOW 1
42 7018.023 -BRACKET, UPPER 1
43 7018.022 -BRACKET, LOWER 1
50 7208.800 -CONSOLE, UNIVERSAL CHAR. 1
22PBA03
7128.909 -CONSOLE, KATAKANA CHAR. 1
22PBA03
51 7094.088 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, NL 1
7094.089 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, GB 1
7094.090 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, DE 1
7094.091 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, FR 1

18.06.2002 508
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

7094.092 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, IT 1

7094.093 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, SE 1
7094.094 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, DK 1
7094.095 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, NO 1
7094.096 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, ES 1
7094.097 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, US 1
7094.098 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, PT 1
7094.099 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, FI 1
7094.100 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, PL 1
7094.101 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, HU 1
7095.325 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, JP 1

18.06.2002 509
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-0-001 Error counters of the scanner ]

18.06.2002 510
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-002 Display the software release number of the scanner ]

Description Display the software release number of the scanner firmpack.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 511
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-021 Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the scanner ]

Purpose Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the scanner.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 512
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-024 Turn ON the scanner into sleep mode ]

Purpose Turn ON the scanner into sleep mode

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 513
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 23 Drive
Fill in instructions

881 Timing belt

882 Gears
883 Tensioner
884 Bearings
910 PBA-s
911 Motors
912 Clutches
918 Mechanical connections
919 Electrical connections
920 Others Drive

18.06.2002 514
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 25 Customer / Environment

Fill in instructions

Customer
961 No fault on arrival
962 Incorrect operation
963 Original
964 Exaggerated demands
970 Others Customer

Environment
971 Humidity/temperature
972 Main power supply
980 Others Environment

Consumables
981 Paper
982 Specialties
983 Toner
990 Others Consumables

Installation
991 Packing
992 Covers
999 Machine is okay

18.06.2002 515
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BUNDLES OVERVIEW
1 2945.204 -BUNDLE 10W01 1
2 2975.926 -BUNDLE 10W02 1
3 2975.927 -BUNDLE 10W03 1
4 2945.205 -BUNDLE 10W05 1
5 2945.206 -BUNDLE 10W06 1
6 7018.017 -BUNDLE 10W07 1
7 1302.505 -DATACABLE 4M 1
8 1302.506 -DATACABLE 8M 1

18.06.2002 516
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME & COVERING
1 7083.693 -ORIGINAL TABLE 1
2 7128.997 -RIGHT COVER 1
3 7128.996 -LEFT COVER 1
4 7083.738 -REAR COVER 2
11 7128.957 -COVER, FOOT 4
12 7128.961 -TURN WHEEL 4
14 7083.722 -COVER 1
15 2954.972 -PLATE 2
16 7070.671 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 2
18 7168.909 -NAME PLATE 1
20 7095.084 -PLATE 1
22 7083.726 -RACK 6
23 2977.117 -BRACKET 1

18.06.2002 517
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to separate the engine from the stand

Necessary tool: socket screwdriver 7 mm.

1. Open the paper roll drawer.

2. Remove the bolt and the ring between the stand and the engine at the left and right front side .
3. Remove the vertical bolt between the stand and the engine at the left and right rear side.
4. Loosen the 2 screws from the connector at the left rear side.
Remove the connector and the earth wire.

<--- earth wire

<--- connector

5. ATTENTION: the input guide plate at the front is lower then the base plate of the engine.
No weight is allowed on the guide plate when the engine is placed on a table or on the floor.
6. Lift the engine from the stand with 2 persons.
Put the engine on a table, pay attention to the guide plate (see: ATTENTION)

Assembling.
Note: fasten the bolt and the ring at the front side before you fasten the bolts at the rear side.

1.

1.

18.06.2002 518
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the printer

Note: If the printer is installed to an already existing configuration, then all the units must have the same
firmware version.
See: system software check / upgrade / download

Remove the printer from the pallet

Installation of the printer

1. Roll the printer ot the required position.

2. Remove the transport tapes and foam pieces.
3. Remove the two sets of 5 metal guides (not delivered in cas the COS is available).
4. Remove the left and right transsport security bolt (10 mm) from the inside of the stand (the middle bolt).
5. Open the paper roll drawer (PRD) and remove at the left and right side the white plastic transport security
rings.
6. Remove the rubber transport security bands from the paper roll holders.
7. Remove the test print.
8. Rear side: remove the power asupply cable and at the left and right side the locking plates.
9. Open the left engine cover (knurled screw).
10. Remove the waste toner bag.
11. Remove the black plastic cover, 2 screws.
12. Cut the long cable tie and remove it. Remove the black screw, this is the third screw for the plastic cover.
13. Open the fuser unit and remove the protection material at the left and right side.
14. Remove the transport security bolt of the print head (PHD).
15. Open the right engine cover, 3 screws.
16. Remove the transport security bolt of the print head (PHD).
17. Cut and remove the long cable tie.
18. Remove the top cover over the print head
- remove 2 screws at the front side
- loosen 2 screws at the rear side.
- open the Paper Roll drawer.
- pull the side covers towards you to unlock the top cover
- remove the top cover
19. Remove the 2 foam blocks.
20. Turn the print head upwards.
21. Open the developer unit cover and check if the unit is filled or not filled with the developer.

Engine deliverd with developer:

22. Close the developer cover and the print head.
23. Continue with action point 25.

Engine delivered without developer:

24. Shake the developer bottle well and divide the developer powder equal in the developer unit.
25. Close the developer cover and the print head.

26. Install the top cover over the print head.

27. Close the fuser unit.
28. Install at the left side the black plastic cover over the toner supply unit.
29. Put the waste toner bag.
30. Fill the toner supply pot.
31. Water level. The printer must not be installed under torsion.
Check with the water level on the frame behind the left and right door.
32. Adjust the water level with the feed at the front side.
33. Close the left engine cover.
34. Close the Paper Roll Drawer.
35. Close the right engine cover, 3 screws.
36. Place the feet covers over the wheel supports.

Engine without the compact output stacker (COS):

37. Install at the rear side the 2 long plastic copy guides, left and right side.
38. Install at the rear side the 3 short plastic copy guides, in the middle.

Engine with the compact output stacker (COS):

39. Install the compact output stacker (COS)

40. Remove the cable bundle for the laptop inside the right hand stand.

18.06.2002 519
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

41. Connect the bundle with the connector behind the printer door.
42. Install left and right the side covers of the stand.
43. Connect the main supply power cable.
44. Connect the data cable to the Controller.

18.06.2002 520
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Conversion 220 / 110V, 50 / 60Hz Printer

There are only differences in the parts, all the software settings can be made either in US or European settings.

The following differences in the parts are:

Oc· TDS400 Printer 120V 60Hz Oc· TDS400 Printer 230V 60Hz
Code No Qty Description Code No Qty Description
1201.237 1 Capacitor 5UF 400V 1201.240 1 Capacitor 10UF 400V
1201.863 1 Connection cable 1201.864 2 Connection cable
1201.955 2 Circuit breaker 20A 1201.868 1 Circuit breaker 10A
2268.002 1 Strain relief 2912.703 1 Strain relief
7094.808 1 Bundle, 22W05 7094.713 1 Bundle, 22W04
2912.698 1 Motor, 115V-AC cpl 2912.463 1 Motor, 230V-AC cpl
2926.762 1 Switch, interlock-2x2P
7094.898 1 label, Power Marking 7094.896 1 label, Power Marking

For conversion between 50Hz and 60Hz you need also the next items:
Partslist Z-2300 Qty
28 2912.676 TIMING BELT PULLEY 230V 50Hz 48T 1
28A 2912.677 TIMING BELT PULLEY 115-230V 60Hz 40T 1
31 2912.678 TIMING BELT PULLEY 230V 50Hz 30T 1
31A 2912.679 TIMING BELT PULLEY 115-230V 60Hz 25T 1

Please take also attention to the adjustment between 110V and 230V:

Tension of the main drive belt

The tension of the main drive belt is determined by a tensioner. The position of this tensioner is referred to the
configuration. (50 Hz or 60 Hz.).

60 Hz 50 Hz

18.06.2002 521
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Copy material sizes

Note:

- Avoid storing paper in rooms where temperature and humidity are high.
Also, avoid dust and direct sunlight. Wrap unused paper in plastic to prevent it absorbing
moisture.
DIN range
Width [mm] Length [mm]
A3 297 420
A2 420 594
A1 594 841
A0 841 1189

8,5 inch range

Width [inch] Length [inch]
11 inch / B 11 17
17 inch / C 17 22
22 inch / D 22 34
34 inch / E 34 44

9 inch range
Width [inch] Length [inch]
12 inch / B+ 12 18
18 Inch / C+ 18 24
24 inch / D+ 24 36
36 inch / E+ 36 48

Other formats
Width Length
30 inch 30 inch 12 inch
B1 carto 700 mm 1000 mm
B1(DIN) 707 mm 1000 mm
B2 carto 500 mm 700 mm
B2 (DIN) 500 mm 707 mm

18.06.2002 522
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Copy material types

Plain paper 75 to 110 g/m 2

Transparent paper 80 to 110 g/m 2
Translucent 60 g/m 2
Vellum 16 - 20 lbs
Polyester film 3.5 or 4.5 mil
Special Coloured paper, etc.

Width: Minimum 297 mm Maxinmum 914 mm

Length: Minimum 420 mm Maximum 15 m

18.06.2002 523
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printer (General)
Product specifications
Technology Electrophotography (LED head) with organic
photo-conductor (OPC) drum and closed toner system
Toner B5 Toner
Developer D5 Developer
Resolution 600 dpi
Speed 3 linear meters p/min. or approx. 2A0's p/min.
Media sources 1 or 2 roll unit and manual feed
Output sizes From A3 to A0, a maximum of 15 meters long
Media types Plain, translucent, transparent, recycled, fluorescent and
coloured papers; films and vellum
Output reception Standard Integrated Receiving Tray (IRT)
Warm up time None
Dimensions 1352 mm (W) x 1250 mm (H) x 899mm (D) including
integrated receiving tray
Weight Model with 1 roll : 175 kg
Model with 2 rolls :185 kg

18.06.2002 524
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Print quality specifications of the Oc· TDS400 printer.

Criteria

Tools

Summery of the specifications:

Image density
Image quality
Image position (registration)

For detailed information see

l Image density specifications

l Image quality specifications
l Image position specifications

18.06.2002 525
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image density specifications (detailed).

Detailed image density specifications of the printer:

The maximum density

The maximum density in high blackness mode

The difference in maximum density

The difference in maximum density of small areas

18.06.2002 526
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image quality specifications (detailed).

Detailed image quality specifications of the printer

Resolution

The connection errors of the LED print head

The synchronisation

The fixation of the toner on plain paper 75 gr./m·

The 1:1 accuracy

Poor print quality

Loss of information

18.06.2002 527
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image position specifications (detailed).

Detailed image position (registration) specifications of the printer:

Position of the image

The difference of the print length in a run

Straightness of cutting

Rectangular cutting

Skewing

18.06.2002 528
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the tension of the photoconductor

drive belt

Drawing
bolt A bolt D
main motor 23M1

bolt B bolt C

Correction
1. Remove the high voltage PBA
2. Loosen the bolts A, B, C, and D.
3. Release the tension from the main drive belt.
4. The tension of the photoconductor drive belt is determined by the weight of the main motor
23M1.
5. Tight the bolt A and then the bolts B, C and D.
6. Install the high voltage PBA.

18.06.2002 529
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS 01 Photoconductor
Fill in instructions

001 Photoconductor
002 Earth spring
038 Mechanical connections
039 Electrical connections
040 Others Photoconductor

18.06.2002 530
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the Photoconductor (drum)

Before you begin

Remove the developer unit .

Note: Do not expose the photoconductor (drum) too long to the environment light.

Procedure to remove
1. Open the print head.
2. Remove the photoconductor (drum) drive belt.
3. Disconnect the connector 04X01 of the encoder 04B1
4. Remove (slide) the drive pulley with the encoder from the photoconductor (drum) shaft.
5. Slide the photoconductor (drum) to the front and position it in the groove.

Procedure to install
When you install a new photoconductor (drum), do the following tests:
l Reset the consumable counter, SDS test 01-8-001, life time of the photoconductor
l the SDS test 51, the service test print to check the print quality
l Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints

18.06.2002 531
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the photoconductor

The photoconductor of the Oc· TDS400 is a photoconductor with an organic photoconductive layer.
The photoconductor is the center of the process.

The photoconductor includes:

Transport layer Generation layer Adhesion layer Aluminium drum

The photoconductor diameter is 80 mm, the circumference is 251.3 mm.

By mechanical wear the quality of the photoconductor decreases. After every 1000 length meter the wear of the
photoconductor is compensated by 2% extra light of the print head.

Photoconductor key figures and attention points:

1. lifetime min. 21,000 lm (68900 lf)

2. Stock: temperature: 10 - 35 °C (50°F - 95°F)
no condensation on the photoconductor
the environment air must be dry and clean
never expose to corrosive gasses, for example NH3
3. photoconductor (drum)
handling: expose to sunlight: never
expose to TL-tube: < 5 min., so use the protection sheet.

Attention: Hands: never touch with bare hands, clean with a dry tissue
Body: Skin particles, hair: never on the photoconductor,
it will affect the surface of the photoconductor surface.

18.06.2002 532
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The process
The process steps are:

Developing roller Photoconductor Printhead Charge Post-exposure

(drum)

Transfer Separation Cleaning

Short explanation of the process

The photoconductor is charged even and negatively up to -670 volt.
After charging the photoconductor (drum) is image exposed.
At the exposed places the photoconductor is discharged to approximately -200 volt. On the photoconductor
(drum) exists now a latent image of the original or plot.
The latent image is developed by black toner and is now visible on the photoconductor (drum).
The toner image is electrically transferred onto the copy material, which is transported against the
photoconductor (drum).
Separation of the copy material from the photoconductor (drum) is done by electrically neutralising of the copy
material.
The toner image on the copy material is fixed by heat of the fuser.
The residual toner on the photoconductor (drum) is cleaned off by a cleaning blade.
The residual charge on the photoconductor (drum) is neutralised by light of a led array.
The photoconductor (drum) is after one turn neutral and can be used for the next cycle.

Voltage Neutral Exposure voltage Bias voltage Contrast voltage

photoconductor (Optical Density)
(drum)

18.06.2002 533
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Charge on drum Toner on drum Total charge

18.06.2002 534
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to clean and polish the photoconductor

Warning:
Do not smoke during cleaning or polishing the photoconductor.
Dispose the cotton wool and gloves according to your local laws and regulations.
Wash your hands completely after the cleaning operation.

The tools and materials

Required materials to clean and polish the photoconductor.

Description Codenumber EUR Codenumber USA

Lintfree cloth (Maslin) 5630.211 5630.211
Cotton wool 9714.529 9714.529
Cleaner K 1929.022 1929.023
Cleaner P 1987.994 1987.798
Disposable gloves 2831.001 2831.001
Plastic bags (20) 9714.529 9714.529

How to clean the photoconductor

1. Put the photoconductor in the cleaning position.

2. Take a dry and clean maslin cloth.
3. Remove the loose toner from the photoconductor.
4. Apply the cleaner K to a clean maslin cloth.
5. Remove joined toner from the photoconductor.
6. Apply cleaner K to a clean maslin cloth .
7. Clean the surface of the photoconductor.
8. Wait 1 minute.
9. Make sure that the cleaner K has evaporated completely.
10. Install the photoconductor and units.
11. Make a test print.
Note:
It is possible that the spot that you clean is lighter in darker area's.
This occurrence disappears after 10 - 25 prints.

How to polish the photoconductor

1. Put the photoconductor in the cleaning position.

2. First execute the procedure "How to clean the photoconductor".
3. Apply cleaner P to a dry and clean piece cotton wool.
4. Polish the edges of the photoconductor.
5. Apply cleaner P to a new dry and clean piece cotton wool.
6. Polish the surface of the photoconductor.
7. Rotate slowly the photoconductor.
8. Make a circular polish movement at the surface.
9. Take a dry and clean piece cotton wool.
10. Rub the surface.
11. Rotate slowly the photoconductor.
12. Make a circular polish movement at the surface.
13. Take a dry and clean piece cotton wool until the new piece remains clean.
14. The surface must be clean and shiny.
15. Start the procedure "How to clean the photoconductor".

Note:
First prints have low density.
This occurrence disappears after 10 - 25 prints.

18.06.2002 535
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PHOTOCONDUCTOR
1 7069.008 -PACKED PHOTOCONDUCTOR 1
2 7045.269 -LEAF SPRING 1
3 7095.264 -GEAR 1
4 2912.554 -SPRING HOUSING 1
5 1037.688 -EARTH WIRE 1
6 2962.860 -RESISTOR ASSY, 100K 1
R1
10 7128.906 -ROTARY ENCODER 1
12 7128.913 -MOUNTING STRIP 1
14 7128.914 -SPACER 1

18.06.2002 536
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 01-8-001 Display / set the life time of the photoconductor (in

linear meters)]

Description Display / Reset the life time of the photoconductor in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 537
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 02 Charging
Fill in instructions

041 Corona wire

042 Grid wire
043 High voltage PBA
046 Ozone filters
047 Fan
049 Charging unit
078 Mechanical connections
079 Electrical connections
080 Others Charging

18.06.2002 538
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black lines/stripes
Description
There are unwanted black lines and/or stripes on the image of the print in the feed direction.

Grid wires are polluted at one point. There is more charge on the photoconductor at this point
of pollution.
Weak lines and/or stripes of approximately 3mm occur in the feed direction.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Corona wire assy Check

18.06.2002 539
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Smell of ozone
Description
During printing a strong smell of ozone can be observed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0204-5 22M1 Fan assy 22-4-001 047

0204-7 Ozone filter Replace 046

18.06.2002 540
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the charge corona unit

Note: When you put the protection cover in its oprating position, do not bend the 2 ridges.

Procedure to remove
Procedure to install

18.06.2002 541
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Replace the charge corona wire

Procedure
1. Remove the charge corona unit from the machine and put it on a flat table .
2. Remove at the rear side the plastic cover strip.
3. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the unit.
4. Clean the corona housing with a towel moistened with water, Never use RBS or cleaner K.
5. Remove the corona wire from the cardboard packing material. Do not bend the wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was scrolled.
6. Left side: put the O-ring over the pin and put the bead in the space.
7. Right side: put the bead in the space and attach the spring on the hook.
8. Clean the wire. Use a Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
9. Dry the grid wire with a cloth.
10. Replace the plastic cover strip.

Note:
When you install a new corona wire, do the following tests:
l the SDS test 02-8-001, reset the consumable counter for the life time of the charge corona
wire .
l the SDS test 51, the service test print to check the print quality.
l Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints .

Notes:

18.06.2002 542
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O High Voltage Supply Grid Voltage

22PBA01 22PBA04 02PBA01
X2 X1 T4 X2
+24V
1 1 PRE HV 1
GND REGULATOR OUTPUT
2 2
X3 X2 X5 CHGHV
CHGSUPEN
5 1

GND
X1
CURRENT CONTROL Charge unit 1

22X01
02X6
22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

02-Charge

18.06.2002 543
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the Charging function

Charging is the first step in the electro-photographic process.
The aim of this function is to charge the OPC drum negative till the desired level of -670 V by 3 mtr/min.
The unit consists of:

Housing Corona wire

Grid wire (15x) Post-exposure Gridvoltage PBA

PBA 02PBA01
The corona wire thickness is 80 mm and is regulated to a constant current of 1000 uA total. This will give appr.
-6kV negative.
35 uA is used to charge the photoconductor (drum).
The 15 grid wires are made from stainless steel and the thickness is 0,15 mm.
They are supplied with a constant voltage of appr. - 660 volt negative by a resistor network on pba 02PBA01
gridvoltage.
Grid and housing are kept under the same constant voltage.

Working

When the charge corona is activated, the charge current (electrons) flow through the grid to the photoconductor
(drum) and partly to the metal housing.
So long there is a potential difference between the photoconductor (drum) and the grid, charge current flows to
the photoconductor (drum) and charges the photoconductor (drum).
The current flow to the photoconductor (drum) decreases because the potential difference between grid and the
photoconductor (drum) decreases, till both are in balance.

Post-exposure

To achieve a equal and desired charged photoconductor (drum), the photoconductor (drum) must be neutral
before the charging starts.
Post-exposure is done by the light of a led bar just before the corona unit.
Mechanical neutral (rest toner of previous copy) is done by a scraper.

Ozone

Over the full width of the machine a ozone filter is build under the photoconductor (drum). The filters are placed
in a plastic box and the air is sucked from the machine inside into the box by fan CONFAN.
The lifetime of the filters is machine lifetime.

Cleaning

Clean housing and grid with water, never with RBS or cleaner K (toner dissolves in alcohol and can left behind
as pollution).
Clean the corona wire with water.
Cleaning Procedure see.....

18.06.2002 544
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to clean the charge wires and unit

Tools and materials

Required materials to clean the charge corona wire and unit, see

Description
Maslin cloth
Tweezers
Water
How to clean the charge wires and unit
1. If extreme corrosion of the frame, replace the charge unit.
2. Remove the covers of the end blocks.
3. Clean the unit, do not use any solvent.
4. Apply water to a small piece of clean maslin cloth.
5. Use the tweezers, clean the charge and the grid wires, and frame.
6. Take a dry and clean piece of clean maslin cloth and dry the charge and the grid wires,
and frame.
7. Put the covers on the end blocks.

Note:
Corrosion is removed easily with water.

18.06.2002 545
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

AIR SUPPLY, SECTION 1
1 7048.518 -SUCTION BOX ASSY 1
2 2926.727 --CLAMP 1
3 2926.728 --CLAMP 1
4 2944.945 --CLAMP 8
5 2926.707 --FAN ASSY 24V 1
6 2926.714 --SNAP RIVET 4
7 2926.715 --FILTER 2

18.06.2002 546
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

AIR SUPPLY, SECTION 2
8 2926.705 -GUIDE PLATE 1
9 2945.093 -GUIDE PLATE 1
13 7095.083 -COVER PLATE ASSY 1
15 2912.644 -PICK PAWL 1
18 2912.434 -BRACKET, RH 1
19 2912.435 -BRACKET, LH 1
20 2945.094 -PROFILE ASSY 1
21 2926.733 -BUSH 1
22 2926.731 -SEAL PLATE 2
23 1828.054 -SEALING STRIP 2
42 2945.073 -HOUSING, FRONT 8
43 2945.074 -HOUSING, REAR 2
44 2945.075 -GUIDE WHEEL 10

18.06.2002 547
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CHARGING UNIT
1 2999.821 -CHARGING ASSY 1
6 2999.818 --CORONA-WIRE ASSY 1
8 2912.615 --LID 1
10 2912.620 -PRESSURE BLOCK 2
11 3861.198 -COMPRESSION SPRING 2
12 5583.883 -ERASER PBA 3
02PBA02
13 2912.622 -BUSH 9
19 5583.923 -GRID PBA 1
02PBA01
20 2999.822 -BUSH 2

18.06.2002 548
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 549
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 02-6-001 Activate the charge unit HV-power supply (CHSUPEN

22PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developing unit to prevent system polution.

Purpose To check the correct function of the charging (22PBA04 - CHGHV).

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP5

CHGSUP ON: 0,9 to 1,1V DC

Remarks Active functions during this test:

DRIMORL ON
CHGSUPEN ON
CHGERA ON
CONFAN ON
CONBIAS ON

18.06.2002 550
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 02-8-001 Display / set the life time of the charge corona wire (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the charge corona wire in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 551
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 02-8-002 Display / set the life time of the charge corona unit (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the charge corona unit in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks Grid wires are not replaced by the technician. Only the compleet unit.

18.06.2002 552
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints

Purpose
To select the amount of light to get the correct saturation and optimal resolution for the print
head.
As result, the optical density and the resolution is correct.

Check
1. Use roll paper 75 gr/m2 with a minimum width of 841 mm (34").
2. Activate the SDS test 49: Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints .
On the print 19 blocks are printed with increased optical density.
Every step is indicated with a number, from 4 to 76 (duty cycle step).
3. Check the blocks and the line pairs.
4. Specification, check the middle column
l The optical density must be 1.2 (Use the Agfa greyscale)
l The block must be a correct square and equal black
l The three line patterns at the side of the block must have an open structure (you
must see 6 line pairs)
5. Select the number at the side of the block with the correct specifications.
A number in between two blocks is possible.

Correction
1. Activate the SDS test 04-1-003
2. Enter the selected number in the SDS test.

Note:
To adjust the light intensity of the left and / or the right side of the print head, go to

18.06.2002 553
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the light intensity for the left and right side print head
Purpose
To select the amount of light to have the same saturation and resolution as the middle print
head.
As result, the optical density is correct.

Before you begin

1. The adjustment of the middle print head must be correct.

Check
1. Use roll paper 75 gr/m2 with a minimum width of 841 mm (34").
2. Activate the SDS test 51 (Service test print)
3. Check the optical density in the wide line K3 and
the line pattern in the wide line K1.
4. Specification: must be the same as for the middle print head.

Correction
1. Activate the SDS test: Adjust the light intensity for the left or right print head unit
04-1-005 Left print head unit
04-1-007 Right side print head unit
2. Correction:
Increase the value: higher optical density (= darker)
Decrease the value: lower optical density (= lighter)

18.06.2002 554
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints (poster mode)
Purpose
To add additional toner on the prints.
Special for the prints with grey and black areas (for example posters).

Before you begin

l Make sure that the amount of light for average line / text prints mode is correct.

Warning
The operator can select for additional dark copies: Poster mode ON or OFF.
ALL the next copies (no prints) are made with these settings!!

Check
1. Select Poster mode ON.
2. Make a copy or a print with a solid black area.
3. Check with the Agfa grey scale the density of the solid black area
4. Specification:
l The optimal density for the Poster mode is 1.3.
l The block must be a correct square and equal black

Correction
1. Activate the SDS test 04-1-004
2. Enter a higher or lower value in the SDS test:
Increase the value: higher optical density (= darker)
Decrease the value: lower optical density (= lighter)
Note:
The default value of this adjustment is approximately 30% higher than the adjustment of the
normal text / line mode.

Warning:
Note: If the value of the poster mode is too high, it will result in a too low resolution, more toner
use and a very high risk of carrier development.

18.06.2002 555
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the vertical and horzontal alignment of the print head

Purpose
To align the image output of the three print heads, in horizontal and vertical direction.

Check
1. Make a print from the SDS test 51.
2. Check the horizontal and vertical lines for displacement.
3. Specification: No displacement in horizontal and vertical direction.

1
correct line

2
PHD1 line too high
PHD3 line too low

3
PHD1 line too far to the left (gap)
PHD3 line too far to the left (overlap)

Correction
Vertical adjustment, see the line 2: PHD1 too high, PHD 3 to low.
l Move the print head 1 vertical: do the SDS test 04-1-010
Move the print head 3 vertical: do the SDS test 04-1-012
(Move the print head 2 vertical: do the SDS test 04-1-011 )
l To move the line upwards: decrease the value
To move the line downwards: increase the value
Note:
Print head 1 and 3 are aligned in the factory to the standard position of print head 2.
If the adjustment of the horizontal position of the print head 1 and / or 3 is not possible, you can
adjust the print head 2).

Horizontal adjustment, see the line 3: PHD1 too far to the left (gap), PHD 3 too far to the left
(overlap).
l Move the print head 1 horizontal: do the SDS test 04-1-008
To move the line to the right side: decrease the value
To move the line to the left side: increase the value
l To move the print head 3 horizontal: do the SDS test 04-1-009
To move the line to the right side: increase the value
To move the line to the left side: decrease the value
l 30 points is about 1 mm shift

18.06.2002 556
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 04 Print Head

Fill in instructions

121 Printhead
122 PBA 's
158 Mechanical connections
159 Electrical connections
160 Others Exposure

18.06.2002 557
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[4501 - (Print head test tool error)]

Description
Fault condition: Printhead test tool sequece went not correct.

Possible cause: Printhead not correctly adjusted in printhead tool (M&L).

Operator actions: Switch the printer Off and On for restart.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-001 PRINTHEAD ASSY, PACKED replace

121

18.06.2002 558
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[4502 - (Print head not correct)]

Description
Signal name: PHD
Fault condition: The PBA of the print head is broken.
There is no connection between the printer CPU and the print head
interface.
Print head failed to pass the print head tool (M&L).
Norm value: -
Description:

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-025 PHD inteface PBA, 04-9-002
04PBA04
0802-051 Bundle

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 559
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[4503]
Description
Error occurs in case of printhead interface is broken, or connection between printer CPU and
printhead interface is broken.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 replace 122

0402-025 PHD INTERFACE PBA 1 replace
04PBA04, PHD I/O 855
electrical connections check
159

18.06.2002 560
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

4502
Description
Error occurs in case of:,
Printhead interface is broken.
Connection between CPU and printhead is broken.
Printhead testtool sequence went not correct .

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-025 PHD INTERFACE PBA1 SDS replace 122

04PBA04,PHD I/O 04-9-002
2202-002 CPU PBA 1 22PBA01 replace
855
2560 Bundle Check
159

18.06.2002 561
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove / replace the Print Head or I/O pba

Note: Make sure that the print head unit and the cables do not touch the photoconductor.

Procedure to remove the PHD

1. Open the fuser.
2. Remove the top cover, 4 screws.
3. Remove the cover over the PBA on top of the print head unit, 3 screws.
4. Remove the 5 connectors: Cn0404X1, 2, 9, 10 and 04X1.
5. Loosen the earth wire.
6. Remove the pin at the right side, 1 clip and 1 screw.
7. Remove the print head unit.

Procedure to install the PHD

There is no description.

Note:
Make sure that after assembly, the print head is aligned to the right and cannot move in the
horizontal direction (stopped by the clip)

Procedure to remove / replace the I/O pba

There is no description

Note: The CCD data of the PHD is stored in the EPROM.

Restore of the printhead parameters, see description SDS 71/72 Backup / Restore, when to do it

I/O pba:
No restore action.

PHD:
NEVER REPLACE ONLY THE PHD, REPLACE ALWAYS THE PHD ASSY !! (PHD + I/O pba)

PHD + I/O pba:

No restore action.

18.06.2002 562
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01
X10 04X1
GND -T
13 1 04R1
PHDNTC Printhead NTC
14 2

PHD I/O
04PBA04
X6 X10 X1
PHDINTINP +5V
1 1 1 4
GND_S GND 04B1
2 2 2 1 Photoco
PHDINTOUT GND Speed E
3 3 3 3
GND_S Sensor
4 4 4
PHDINTCLK PHOSPENCSE_A
5 5 5
GND_S
6 6
PHDINTEN0
7 7 04PHD(L)01
GND_S
8 8 X3 X1
PHDINTEN1
9 9

RFI
22PBA06
X5 X1 X2 X2 X4 X2

04PHD(R)03 04PHD(M)02
X1 X8 X5 X1

X2 X7 X6 X2

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

04-Print Head

18.06.2002 563
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General Printhead

The print head discharges the photoconductor with the aid of light from LEDs.
The Oc· TDS400 is a "black writing" printer.
This means that light from the LEDs is used to discharge the photoconductor (photoconductor)
where black is needed on the copy.
In general the percentage black on a copy is approximately 5%.
This means that the LEDs are ON during 5% of the copy.
The printing resolution of the TDS400 is 600 x 600 dpi.

Note:
After every 1000 length meter the wear of the photoconductor is compensated by 2% extra
light of the print head.

3 Staggerd print heads are used to cover the whole width of the maximum paper seize 36"-
914.4 mm.
To print 600 dpi, 21.600 LED's are used.

Fig. Layout
Fig. Crossview

18.06.2002 564
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Lay-out of the print heads

horizontal
vertical
alignment alignment
PH 2
PH 1

left
margin PH 1 PH 2 PH 3

18.06.2002 565
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PICO module
From Release 1.2

Pixel Compensation (PICO).

The quality of the LED's in the print head are not the same.
The light output of each LED is compensated by the PICO module.
The compensation values are set by the manufactory of the print head and stored in a EEPROM inside
the print head assembly.
The compensation data is unique to the print head.
PICO functionality improves the copy quality of solid black areas on copies and prints.
It will not improve the copy quality of line drawings and the copy and prints with a lot of text.
PICO increases also the lifetime of the print head.

18.06.2002 566
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The operation of the encoder

Purpose:
The encoder improves the print quality when the speed of the photoconductor changes.
It prevents for the frequency patterns and vertical alignment errors.

The encoder is installed on the shaft of the photoconductor and measures the speed of the
rotation.
The encoder generates the speed signals which are passed to the print head interface pba.
The PHD interface calculates the line frequency of the print head LED's.

Result: the line frequency of the LED's follow the speed differences of the photoconductor.

18.06.2002 567
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The print head interface 04PBA06

Interfacing
Compensation for overlapping
Compensation for vertical and horizontal print head alignment errors
Compensation for different light outputs between print heads
Compensation for a wrong 1:1 projection due to speed tolerances of the printer engine
Print head quality test

18.06.2002 568
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PRINTHEAD
1 5600.437 -PRINTHEAD ASSY, PACKED 1
25 5584.714 -PHD INTERFACE PBA 1
04PBA04, PHD I/O
38 7094.677 -NTC ASSY 1
PHDNTC, 04R1

18.06.2002 569
[ 04-0-001 Error counters ]
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints ]

Description Light intensity setting of the printhead LEDs for line / text prints.
Display / Set

Value Range: 10 ... 168

Default: 36

Remarks Adjustment description

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-004 Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints

(poster mode) ]

Description Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints (poster mode)

Value Range: 4 ... 40

Default: 12

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-005 Adjust the light intensity of the left print head unit ]

Description Adjust the light intensity of the left print head unit

Value Range: 50 ... 200

Default: 100

Remarks Adjustment description

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-007 Adjust the light intensity of the right print head unit ]

Description Adjust the light intensity of the right print head unit

Value Range: 50 ... 200

Default: 100

Remarks Adjustment description

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-008 Adjust the horizontal alignment of the left and middle

print head ]

Description Adjust the alignment between the left and middle print head.
The left print head (PHD1) is shifted.

Value Range: 1 ... 510

Default: 1
30 points is about 1mm shift

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-009 Adjust the horizontal alignment of the right and

middle print head ]

Description Adjust the horizontal alignment between the right and middle print head.
The right side print head is shifted.

Value Range: 1 ... 123

Default: 1
30 points is about 1mm shift

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-010 Adjust the vertical alignment of the left print head ]

Description Adjust the vertical alignment of the print head

Value Range; 0 ... 126

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-011 Adjust the vertical alignment of the middle print head ]

Description Adjust the vertical alignment of the middle print head

Value Range: 0 ... 510

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-012 Adjust the vertical alignment of the right print head ]

Description Adjust the vertical alignment of the right print head

Value Range: 0 ... 126

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-016 Enable / disable the encoder in combination with test

54 ]

Description Enable / disable the encoder in combination with test print 54

Value 0 = disable
1 = enable

Remarks The settings are not stored in the eeprom.

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-017 Enable / disable Pico ]

Description Enable / disable the Pico

Value disable
enable
Default: enable

Remarks Compensation light output for every LED.

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-1-018 Display the firmpack version of the Printhead interface

]

Description Display the current software version of the Printhead interface

Value as a version number e.g. 1,2,3

Remarks

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-9-001 Display the temperatuur of the print head NTC

(PHDNTC 04R1) in 0.1 ·C ]

Description Display the temperature and elapsed time of the print head NTC (PHDNTC 04R1) in 0.1 ·C

Value Cold printer: e.g 210 in 0.1 ·C

In RUN mode:

Remarks Test active during a run of 3 (test) prints. Result is displayed.

18.06.2002 14
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-9-002 Display the print head assembly status ]

Description Display the print head assembly status

Value LVL_ PHD_ASSEMBLY_INSTALLED : Correct installed printhead interface.

LVL_PHD_BLANK: Print head interface PBA installed without adjustment.
LVL_PHD_ADJUSTMENT_SUCCESFUL: Print head successfull passed the print head tool
LVL_PHD_ADJUSTMENT_FAILED: Print head failed to pass the print head tool
LVL_PHD_ADJUSTMENT_STARTED: Print head enters the tool but the adjustment procedure is n
finished.

Remarks

18.06.2002 15
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 04-9-003 Display the contents of the print head FPGA status

register of the last print ]

Description Display the contents of the print head FPGA status register of the last print.

Value LVL_PRINTHEAD_OK:
LVL_PRINTHEAD_ERROR:

Remarks In case no print is made after switching on the printer the FPGA status word
should be 83.
In casea print is made the FPGA status word should be 87.

18.06.2002 16
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure for new developer DEVTONCONSE 05B1

Purpose
To adjust the set point of the sensor DEVTONCONSE for the developer
mixture.
To adjust the sensitivity of the developer sensor DEVTONCONSE.
To set the life time of the developer on '0' linear meters.
Only with the correct adjustments you have the correct print quality
parameters.
Note:
Run this test only with new developer!

When to do
Do the adjustment :
l during the installation of the TDS400, if the system is transported without
developer.
l after replacement of the developer

Before you begin

Only during installation of the TDS400 or after replacement of a new developer unit or sensor:

1. Activate the SDS test 05-1-002 (Adjust the sensitivity of the developer sensor) .
2. Check if the value is the same as indicated.on the label on the frame plate of the developing
unit on the drive side.
If there is no value indicated, enter the default value of "300".

Correction
1. Fill the developer unit with new developer
2. Activate the SDS test 05-7-001.
The test is started and takes approximately 4 minutes.
The drive motor DRIMO 23M1 is activated, the developer is divided equal in the developer
unit.
3. The software calculates the set point DEVTONCONSESP.
If the software presents a calculated value, then push the <next/select> button to confirm.
This can be several times.
4. Automatically the test stops when the set point voltage is correct.
The calculated value is stored as a parameter.
You can read and set this parameter by SDS test 05-1-001 .

Warning: Never change the value of the setpoint DEVTONCONSESP!!

18.06.2002 17
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 05 Developing
Fill in instructions

163 Magnet roller

166 Gears
167 Developer
168 Toner supply unit
169 Developer unit
189 Sensors
190 High voltage PBA
191 Motor
198 Mechanical connections
199 Electrical connections
200 Others Developing

18.06.2002 18
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Developing Unit
Developing unit

toner supply toner dosage developing unit

tube unit

DEVTONSW DEVTONMO DEVBIASHV DEVTONCONSE DEVCLEANHV

DEVTONSW
Detects the presence of toner in the supply unit.

DEVTONMO
This motor adds toner to the developing unit.

DEVTONCONSE
The sensor checks the toner concentration in the developing unit.

DEVCLEANHV
Connection for a voltage of -400 V supplied to the developing unit sleeve cleaner, (also on the housing).

DEVBIASHV
Connection for a voltage of -550 V for the developing bias.

18.06.2002 19
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[5501 Error (Toner sensor error)]

Description
Signal name: DEVCONSE
Fault condition: The output of DEVCONSE > 4.0 V or DEVCONSE < 0.5 V.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-011 DEVCONSE Check 189
0502-090 Developer Check replace 167
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Check replace 855

18.06.2002 20
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[5502 Error (Severe toner pollution)]

Description
Signal name: DEVCONSE
Fault condition:

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-011 DEVCONSE Check 189
0502-090 Developer Check replace 167
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Check replace 855

18.06.2002 21
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[5503 Bias supply error of the developer]

Description
Signal name: CONBIASACT
Fault condition: CONBIASACT isn't active however CONBIAS is

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Actio

2202-001 HIGH-VOLTAGE PBA 22PBA04 check connections repla

0502-001 DEVELOPING UNIT check for shortcut

0102-001 PHOTOCONDUCTOR check for grounding shortcut

18.06.2002 22
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[5504 Conditioning]
Description
Signal name: DEVCONSE
Fault condition: The toner concentration drops below the 1.75% limit (=2.775V).

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-011 DEVCONSE Check 189
0502-090 Developer Check replace 167
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Check replace 855

18.06.2002 23
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Carrier particles in the machine

Description
Carrier particles are found in the machine.
When the transfer/separation unit is removed, carrier particles are found at on one side of the
transfer/separation unit.

Carrier particles can be developed (moved from developing brush to the photoconductor) when
the ratio between iron and toner particles at the developing brush are not correct.

Carrier particles in the machine can be caused by:

l An incorrect toner sensor voltage;
l Too much toner is attracted to the photoconductor surface, because prints are made with
covers open.

Warning: All covers must be closed during printing

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-11 05B1 Sensor DEVTONCONSE Check 189

0502-90 Developer D5 Check Replace 167

0502-01 Developing unit Check Replace 169

18.06.2002 24
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

High toner usage

Description
Waste toner bag is full after the use of one bottle of toner.

Tests / Checks:
After a run open the paper feed table.
Look to the photoconductor surface.
No toner must be visible.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-19 02PBA01 Grid PBA 080

18.06.2002 25
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Conditioning ]
Description
Signal name: DEVCONSEA
Fault condition:
Norm value:

18.06.2002 26
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Install the developer unit

Procedure to install

in line developer unit

frame fixing screw photoconductor

(drum) flange

1. Slide the developing unit in line with the frame.

2. Attach the screws by hand at the left and right hand side.
3. Make sure that there is no clearance at the right hand side between:
- the photoconductor (drum) flange and the frame
- the developer unit and the photoconductor (drum) flange
4. Tighten the screw at the right hand side.

5. Make sure that there is no clearance at the left hand side between:
- the photoconductor (drum) flange and the frame
- the developer unit and the photoconductor (drum) flange
6. Tighten the screw at the left hand side.

7. Check by hand that there is no clearance between the developer unit and the
photoconductor (drum).
8. Connect the toner concentration sensor 05B1.
9. Install the toner dosage unit, first push the supply tube into the developer unit.
10. Connect the connector 05X1 (toner supply motor 05M1).

11. Connect the bias connector with the developer unit.

12. Connect the clean HV connector with the developer unit.
13. Install the black plastic cover at the left (3 screws).
14. Install the waste toner bag.
15. Install the top cover (4 screws).

16. Close the paper feed table.

17. Close the side cover at the right (3 screws).
18. Lift the protection cover between process and fuser unit and turn it to the front (put it
in the groove).
Note: Be careful, do not damage the 2 ridges.
19. Tighten the 2 screws from the protection cover.
20. Close the fuser unit.
21. Close the side cover at the left.

18.06.2002 27
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the developer unit

Drawing

in line developer unit

frame fixing screw photoconductor

(drum) flange

Procedure to remove
Procedure to install

pressure block

spring

18.06.2002 28
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Replace the developer

Procedure to remove
1. Remove the developer unit

Remove the old developer.

1. Put the developer unit on A0 sheets.
2. Open the top lid and remove it.
3. Turn the developer unit until the developer roller points up. Then turn the unit to the
front until the developer falls out the unit.
4. Turn the developer roller to drain the developer unit.
5. Dispose of the developer according to local rules.
6. Remove the remaining developer with a vacuum cleaner.
7. Clean the complete unit with the vacuum cleaner.
8. Do not touch the cleaning flap of the toner concentration sensor DEVTONCONSE
05B1.

Procedure to install
1. Install the developer unit
Do not close the print head and the top cover.

Fill with new developer

1. Open the top cover of the developer unit.
2. Shake one bottle of developer.
3. Fill the developer unit with the developer from the bottle.
4. Close the top cover of the developer unit.

5. Close the print head.

6. Install the front top cover and fasten it with the screws.
7. Close the side covers.
8. Do the adjustment procedure for new developer 05-7-001

18.06.2002 29
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O High Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA04
CLEANHV
X4
T3
X2 X2
+24V PRE HV DEVELOPER UNIT
1 1
REGULATOR OUTPUT
GND -550V
2 2
X3 X1 X4 BIASHV
DEVSUPEN
6 2
-400V
GND VOLTAGE CONTROL

22X01

X9
GND
6 1
DEVCONSEA
8 3 05B1
+24V Developer Concentration Sensor
5 4
DEVCONSP Fe
7 5

X7 05X1 05X2
+5V 05S1
19 4 2 Toner Supply Switch
DEVSUPSW
20 3 1
X4
+24V
13 1
M 05M1
Toner Supply Motor
DEVSUPMO
14 2

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

05-Developer

18.06.2002 30
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Binary toner (B5)

For the Oc· TDS400 a binary toner (B5) is used. This means that the developer consists of a toner and a carrier.

The carriers tasks are:

l Charging the toner particles with static electricity (tribo-electricity)
l Transport the toner from the toner reservoir to the photoconductor (drum)

The toner is made from an organic resin and contains black dye. The toner is not conducting electricity
(insulator).
Picture
Toner particles

This picture shows some toner particles.

The toner particles have an average size of 10
micrometer.
The picture is made with an electron-microscope with
an enlargement factor of 3000x.

The carrier is made from a metal (iron) which is sensitive to magnetism.

When toner and carrier are mixed and stirred both the toner and the carrier will acquire electrostatic charge and
they will stick to each other.
The toner is charged negative and the carrier positive. So the toner is sensitive to an electrical field.

Picture
Carrier particle with toner

This picture shows a carrier particle with some toner

particles in a state when they are electrostatic
charged.
Due to the electrostatic charge the toner particles stick
to the carrier.
The carrier particles have an average size of 100
micrometer.
The picture is made with an electron-microscope.

18.06.2002 31
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The developing roller in the Oc· TDS400 is made magnetic, and it therefore attracts the metal carrier particles.
When the developing roller rotates, the carrier (with the attached toner particles) move with it.
Picture
Magnetic developing roller attracts carrier

Magnetic force and electrical field.

The magnetic field of the developing roller holds the

carrier to the developing roller surface.
The toner particles stick to the carrier due to
N electrostatic charge.

18.06.2002 32
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Carrier developing
Carrier developing happens when the contrast tension is too high between the developer roller and the
photoconductor (drum).
When the e-field is stronger than the magnetic field the carrier is moved to the photoconductor (drum).

This is a list of possibilities that carrier is developed to the photoconductor (drum) / copy.

1. Too low bias (main reason!)

2. Too low toner concentration in developer unit

3. Low photoconductor (drum) charge

scorotron defect
covers open
big black area's

4. High photoconductor (drum) charge

backing scorotron disconnected

18.06.2002 33
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Developer unit
The aim of the developer unit is:
l Charge the toner particles tribo-electric
l Transport the charged toner particles to the photoconductor (drum).

The developer unit consists of:

Toner supply Developer roller

spiral with magnets

Toner Mix spiral rollers Doctor blade Sleeve cleaner Photoconductor

concentration (drum)
sensor

During installation the developer unit is filled with 1 bottle developer (1750 gr.) and the toner concentration
sensor DEVTONCONSE is adjusted.
The developer unit is driven by the main drive motor DRIMO.
By the mix spirals,
l the toner is well mixed with the carrier to charge tribo-electric
l new added toner is well mixed with the developer before it is used to develop the image on the
photoconductor (drum)
l Decreasing of the toner concentration by developing black area's on one spot is not possible. The
developer is continuously transported through the unit around a partition. This means also that the whole
mixture stays homogeneous over the whole length of the developer roller.

The doctor blade is not adjustable

The developer unit is isolated from the machine.
Maximal temperature is 35 °C (95°F), to prevent that the toner starts clumping.

18.06.2002 34
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General
In this sub section of functional descriptions next items are descript:

General is this description

Binary toner explanation of binary toner
The developer function explanation of developing
Toner reservoir and dosing explanation of toner buffer control and dosing in the developer
Developer unit explanation of the developer unit
Toner concentration control explanation of the different concentration levels
Sleeve cleaner explanation of cleaning toner of the surface of the developer roller
Carrier developing explanation and possible causes

18.06.2002 35
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Sleeve cleaner
The aim of the sleeve cleaner is to clean the surface of the developer roller.
Otherwise the bias voltage changes what can result in background on the copy.

The function consists of:

l Sleeve cleaner
-450 Volt CLEANHV

ATTENTION: this -450 voltage is also on the metal housing of the unit !!

Developer roller

Doctor blade Sleeve cleaner Photoconductor

(drum)

Explanation:
In the process of the black writing the white surface of the print background is about 93-95%.
In these big area the electric field forces the negative toner particles to the developer roller.
The very small toner particles will adhere as a shield around the developer roller on which the carrier particles
are positioned by the magnetic field.
This extra negative toner layer (e.g. -35V) increases the bias tension (-600V) up to -635V !
This decreases the potential difference between the developer roller and the photoconductor (drum),
what increases the possibility of developing the photoconductor (drum) so background on the copy.

The sleeve cleaner is a strip of metal (easy to magnetise) and connected to -450 volt CLEANHV.
By the potential difference of the bias (-600V) and the sleeve cleaner (-450V) the toner around the sleeve is
developed to the clean sleeve strip.
Toner around the carrier particles remain because the field strength between carrier and toner is too strong.
The strip is cleaned by the developer on the magnetic roller.

18.06.2002 36
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The developing function

After charging and exposing, developing is the third step in the
electrophotographic process.
Fig. prodevel: The
developing function.
-CHGHV Direction of
electromagnetic force The charging function
charges the light
-700V sensitive layer of the
photoconductor (drum)
-200V to -670 negative volt
(ASV).
N
N N
On area's where the
N
S
S S S
S
N
printed image must be
black, the

N
-600V

S
N

N
photoconductor (drum)

S
-BIASHV
N

N
S

S
N
is exposed by the
S

N
S
S
exposing function of the

S
N
N

printhead.
S

S
N

N
The voltage on these
places are less negative
(-200 volt).
These exposed area's
are also the area's
where we want toner.

To achieve that the

toner is attracted to the
photoconductor (drum)
we make use of a bias
voltage (BIASHV =
-600V) on the
developing roller.
When the bias voltage
is high enough, the
electromagnetic force
(directed from the
developing roller to the
photoconductor (drum),
will force toner to the
photoconductor (drum)
in the exposed area's.
Voltage developing
roller: -600V,
voltage exposed
photoconductor (drum):
-200V.

In unexposed area's
(-670V), the
electromagnetic field is
opposite because the
charge on the
photoconductor (drum)
more negative as the
bias voltage.
So at these area's no
toner will be attracted.
There is a voltage drop between the test point TP1 on the high voltage supply 22PBA04 and the developing
roller in the developing unit.
The voltage on the TP1 of the high voltage supply 22PBA04 is -600 V DC ± 4V.
The voltage on the magnet roller in the developing unit is between -535 V DC and -550 V DC.

18.06.2002 37
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Toner concentration
Mixing of toner and carrier is one of the tasks of the developing unit.
The mixing process works in such a way that there is a constant flow of developer alongside the developing
roller.
This prevents a local shortage of toner on the developing roller.
The demanded quality of the developing function can only be guaranteed if the toner concentration (density of
the toner) is within certain limits.
This is regulated by the toner concentration regulator.

2.25 V On/Off Toner-concentration-regulator.

toner
dosing The toner concentration sensor DEVCONSE (05B1) in the
developing unit measures the toner concentration by means of
induction. When the toner concentration decreases, the toner
V_sensor concentration sensor sees relatively more carrier and V_sensor
increases.
toner When V_sensor gets higher than 2.25 V the toner supply motor
sensor DEVTONMO is activated and toner is added.
The reference 2.25 V is a factory determined voltage which
guarantees a correct developer mix.
When the toner concentration is correct (V_sensor < 2.25 V) the
toner dosing system stops.

After every turn of the mix roller in the developer unit the toner concentration sensor DEVCONSE is cleaned by
a magnet and the developer concentration is measured.

There are 4 different situations, to know:

1. Normal dosing
2. Optimising print quality
3. Developer pollution
4. Severe developer pollution

1. Normal dosing
2. Optimising print quality
3. Developer pollution
4. Severe developer pollution

TDS400 area coverage versus productivity

If prints have an average image coverage up to 25%, the toner

concentration can be maintained.

Above an average image coverage of 25%, it might be possible that

the TDS400 cannot maintain the toner concentration during the run.
Consequently the Oc· TDS400 will finish the print, stops the run and
supply toner until the toner concentration value is within the normal
range.
The Oc· TDS400 operator panel indicates "Optimising Print
Quality".

If the print has an average image coverage of more than 30%, an

error might occur. Too much toner is removed form the toner brush.
Consequently the sensor value (DEVCONSE) indicates an error.
The print is interrupted, print head, charge supply and developer
supply are switched off.
In extraordinary situations a permanent error occurs, causing a
machine stop (service call).

Remark.
Be aware that if a solid black area on the print is wider than 300 mm,
the average image coverage exceeds the 30%. If the average
image coverage is high the following occurs:
l Productivity will be less, because the machine interrupts the
print, stops the print and starts "Optimising Print Quality".
l Print quality. The OD density might decrease. The first part of
the print has a normal OD. The last part might have a

18.06.2002 38
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

decreased OD. Depending of the length of the print.

914 mm

300 mm

B
L
A
C
K

18.06.2002 39
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Toner supply
When the toner level in the developer unit is low, the toner supply motor DEVTONMO (05M1) feeds toner.
During toner dosing, the toner supply switch DEVTONSW (05S1) detects if there is still sufficient toner in the
reservoir.

Toner Drive Toner supply.

Feed motor
Toner
Developing unit 23M1
The toner supply switch DEVTONSW is a
sup. Unit
Reed switch inside the toner feed unit. When
motor
05M1
the toner supply motor DEVTONMO rotates, a
flap inside the toner feed unit also rotates.
Toner
sensor
A magnet is mounted on this flap.
DRIMO When there is sufficient toner, the flap is
05B1
Dev. sup. moved upwards by the resistance of the toner.
Switch 22PBA03
05S1
In that case the magnet does not energise the
Driver
toner supply switch DEVTONSW.

DEVTONMO DEVTONSW DEVTONCONSE When the toner level gets low, the flap falls
down because there is no more toner to resist
it.
22PBA01
CPU / IO The magnet then energises the Toner supply
switch and DEVTONMO supplies toner.
If the toner supply switch is activated 3 times
then the
“add toner” message appears.

After every turn of the mix roller in the developer unit the toner concentration sensor DEVTONCONSE (05B1) is
cleaned by a magnet and measures the toner concentration.
If the concentration level is low, the toner supply motor is activated for 2 seconds (needs to detect toner high /
low level in the reservoir).
At the end of the 2 seconds the new mixture is measured, the toner supply motor stops or turns again 2
seconds.

Note: The toner supply motor turns only when the main drive motor (DRIMO) is activated.
Note: 1 bottle toner is 450 gr.
Note: Each dosing is about 0,25 gr.

Crossview

18.06.2002 40
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DEVELOPING UNIT
1 5600.401 -DEVELOPING UNIT 1
10 2912.538 --SENSOR HOUSING 1
11 7078.399 --ADJUSTED SENSOR 1
DEVTONCONSE, 05B1
12 2912.542 --GEAR 25/15T 2
13 7078.317 --GEAR 27T 1
15 2912.547 --GEAR 25T 1
17 2912.549 --CONNECTION PLATE 1
69 3314.009 --RING 3
80 2978.043 --CAP 1
90 7045.011 -DEVELOPER D5 1

18.06.2002 41
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 42
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

TONER DOSAGE UNIT
30 7005.968 -TONERDOSAGE UNIT 1
32 1933.256 --DC MOTOR 1
DEVTONSUPMO, 05M1
33 2912.321 --22W03 BUNDLE 1
34 2912.683 --GEAR 48T 1
35 2912.598 --SHAFT 1
36 2912.592 --MAGNETIC SWITCH 1
DEVTONSUPSW, 05S1
37 2944.852 --GROMMET 1

18.06.2002 43
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 44
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-1-001 Adjust the set-point of the developer mixture (in mV) ]

Description Show the reference value (in Volt) for the developer mixture.

Value Range: 0 ... 15.000

Default: 8.000

Remarks 1. The set-point value of the sensor is adjusted by the factory.

2. The value is adjusted in service by SDS test 05-7-001: adjustment new developer

18.06.2002 45
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-1-002 Adjust the sensivity of the developer sensor

(DEVCONSE 05B1) (in mV) ]

Description Shows the sensitivity value (mV) of the toner sensor.

Value Range: 100 ... 1000

Default: 300

Remarks 1. The sensitivity value of the sensor is adjusted by the factory.

2. The value is adjusted in service by SDS test 05-7-001: adjustment new developer

18.06.2002 46
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-1-004 Enable / disable in the Installation test: Adjustment

procedure new developer ]

Description Enable / disable the Installation test: Adjustment procedure new developer.
If enabled the test 05-7-001 is activated during the installation.

Value Disable
Enable

Remarks The parameter is set automatically to 'disabled' after the installation test is
activated.

18.06.2002 47
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-2-001 Check the toner level switch of the supply unit

(DEVTONSUPSW 05S1) ]

Warning: Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developer unit to prevent the system for
pollution.

Condition Toner unit is full.

SDS message: toner present

Action Place a (strong) magnet against the outside of the [ reed ] switch

Check Check the SDS message: toner not present

18.06.2002 48
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-4-001 Activate the HV-power supply for the bias and the
clean unit (DEVSUPEN 22PBA04) ]

Purpose To check the correct function of the: (22PBA04)

l bias high voltage BIASHV
l cleaning high voltage CLEANHV

Check On 22PBA04:
DEVBIASHV TP2 to TP1: -600V DC
DEVCLEHV TP2 to TB2: -460V DC

Remarks Check DEVBIASHV on the developer roller.

Check DEVCLEHV on the developer unit.

18.06.2002 49
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-6-001 Recover the too low toner level of the developer ]

Caution
During the test, the following functions are active: charge, developer, drive, ozone exhaust fan .

Purpose Recover the toner concentration while no prints are made.

The toner is supplied when it is necessary. This is measured by the [ Toner
concentration sensor ] (DEVCONSE 05B1).

Check Check the toner concentration by the print quality. Use the test print 51.

Remarks The control timing is the same like a normal print run.
The test automatically stops after 10 minutes.
After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

18.06.2002 50
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-6-002 Recover the developer layer equal in the developer

unit ]

Warning
Before you start the test, check first the correct function of the charging supply (CHGSUPEN)
and the bias supply (DEVSUPEN).
During the test, the toner concentration limits are not checked.
There are no errors / warnings reported.

Caution
During the test, the following functions are activated:
charge, drive, developer unit, ozone fan.

Purpose Divide the developer equal in the developer unit while no prints are made and no
toner is supplied.

Check Open the top cover of the developer unit and check if the developer is divided
equal in the whole unit.

Remarks The control timing is the same like a normal print run.
The test automatically stops after 10 minutes.
After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

18.06.2002 51
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-6-003 Activate the toner supply motor (DEVTONSUPMO

05M1) ]

Purpose Check in the toner reservoir the operating of:

- the toner supply motor DEVTONSUPMO (05M1) and
- the toner supply switch DEVSUPSW (05S1)

Check Check:
- if the supply motor runs
- if the supply switch indicates information
- [ toner present ]
- [ toner not present ]

Remarks The test automatically stops after 10 seconds.

18.06.2002 52
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer ]

Warning
Only run the test with new developer.

Caution
During the test, the following functions are active: charge, drive, developer, ozone exhaust
fan.

Purpose To set the concentration set-point for the concentration sensor (DEVCONSE
05B1) for new developer.

Check No check

Action Conform the description: adjustment new developer

Remarks The test takes about 4 minutes.

After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

This test is also part of the installation test.

18.06.2002 53
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-8-001 Display / set the life time of the developer (in linear
meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the developer in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks The developer installation will automatically set this value to 0.

18.06.2002 54
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 05-9-001 Display the values of the toner sensor (DEVCONSE

05B1) ]

Description
Display the values of:
the set-point of the developer concentration sensor DEVCONSE 05B1.
the sensitivity value of the toner concentration sensor DEVTONSE 05B1

Display
DEVCONSP
DEVCONSE (in mV)
Elapsed time

Remark
The test automatically stops after 10 minutes.
After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

18.06.2002 55
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 06 Transfer
Fill in instructions

201 Corona wire

203 High voltage PBA
204 Guide wire/fingers
205 Block R/L
206 Transfer unit
230 PBA-s
238 Mechanical connections
239 Electrical connections
240 Others Transfer

18.06.2002 56
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the transfer / separaration unit

Note: Make sure that you do not damage the [ PTRINSE ] and the photoconductor (drum).

Procedure
1. Open the right side cover (3 screws).
2. Disconnect at the right side the transfer and separation corona connectors.
3. Open the paper roll drawer.
4. Move the supports of the manual sheet feed table to the front and lower the table.
5. Lift the transfer and separation unit and remove the unit over the paper feed table toward the
front.

18.06.2002 57
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Replace the transfer corona wire

Procedure
1. Remove the transfer/separation unit from the machine , and put it on a flat table.
2. Remove at the left and right side the plastic covers.
3. Remove the 9 paper guides (4 pointing to the front left and 5 pointing to the front right).
4. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the unit
5. Clean the corona housing with a towel moistened with water (no RBS or cleaner K).
6. Remove the corona wire from the cardboard packing material. Do not bend the wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was scrolled.
7. Left side: put the O-ring over the pen and put the bead in the space.
8. Right side: put the bead in the space and attach the spring on the hook.
9. Clean the wire. Use a piece of Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
10. Dry the wire with a cloth.

Note:
When you install a new corona wire, do the following tests:
l the SDS test 06-8-001, reset the consumable counter for the life time of the transfer corona
wire
l the SDS test 51, the service test print to check the print quality.

18.06.2002 58
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O High Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA04
X2 X2 T2
+24V
1 1 PRE HV
GND REGULATOR OUTPUT
2 2
X3 X1
TRASUPEN TRAHV
7 3 TRANSFER UNIT
X3
GND
CURRENT CONTROL
22X8
22X01

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

06-Transfer

18.06.2002 59
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the transfer function

Transfer is the fourth step in the electrophotographic process.
The function of transfer is to transfer the image from the photoconductor (drum), which consists of isolated
negatively charged toner, electrically to the copy material.
Transfer and separation wires are mounted in one housing.
The function consists of:

Paper Transport Paper Photoconductor Guide fingers Pick-off pawls

Input Pinch (drum)

Transfer corona Separation corona

The transfer corona charges the copy material positively while the photoconductor (drum) is charged negatively.
The difference in polarity attracts the copy material to the photoconductor (drum).
When the electrical field between the paper and the toner is stronger than the attraction force between the
photoconductor (drum) and the toner, the toner particles move to the paper.
Not all toner is transferred to the paper. Some toner (10%) remains on the photoconductor (drum). This toner is
removed with a cleaning blade.

The transfer voltage is controlled by a constant current of 600 uA total.

The transfer current to the photoconductor (drum) is between 35 - 50 uA.

The wire thickness is 80 mm.

Ozone
Over the full width of the machine a ozone filter is build under the photoconductor (drum). The filters are placed
in a plastic box and the air is sucked from the machine inside into the box by fan CONFAN.
The lifetime of the filters is machine lifetime.

18.06.2002 60
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 61
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to clean the transfer and separation wires and unit

Tools and materials

Required materials to clean the transfer and separation corona wire and unit.

Description Codenumber EUR Codenumber USA

Maslin cloth
Tweezers
Water

How to clean the charge wires and unit

1. If extreme corrosion of the frame, replace the charge unit.
2. Remove the covers of the end blocks.
3. Clean the unit, do not use any solvent.
4. Apply water to a small piece of clean maslin cloth.
5. Use the tweezers, clean the charge and the grid wires, and frame.
6. Take a dry and clean piece of clean maslin cloth and dry the charge and the grid wires,
and frame.
7. Put the covers on the end blocks.

Note:
Corrosion is removed easily with water.

18.06.2002 62
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

TRANSFER
1 7094.709 -TRANSFER ASSY 1
2 2926.846 --BLOCK,RH 1
3 2926.847 --BLOCK,LH 1
4 2999.727 --LID 2
7 2999.802 --CORONA WIRE ASSY 2
8 2912.639 --PAPER GUIDE, RH 5
9 2912.640 --PAPER-GUIDE, LH 4

18.06.2002 63
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 06-6-001 Activate the HV-power supply of the transfer unit

(TRASUPEN 22PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the magnet roller gear of the developer unit to prevent toner polution.
Turn it also a 3/4 revolution clockwise.

Purpose To check the correct function of the transfer (22PBA04 - TRAHV)

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP4

TRASUP ON: -0,65 to -0,4V DC

Remarks Active functions during this test:

TRASUPEN ON (after 3 sec. and beeper on)
PTRSEPSUPEN ON (after 3.3 sec.)
CHGERA ON
DRIMORL ON
CONFAN ON

18.06.2002 64
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 06-8-001 Display / set the life time of the transfer corona wire
(in linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the lifetime of the transfer corona wire in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 65
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 07 Cleaning / Discharge

Fill in instructions

241 Cleaning blade

243 Seals
244 Waste toner bag
245 Gear
278 Mechanical connections
280 Others Cleaning

18.06.2002 66
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Cleaning unit seals

Bend the cleaning unit seals at 8 positions to get a condition as indicated.

18.06.2002 67
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the cleaning unit and cleaning blade

Before you begin

l Remove the photoconductor (drum).

Note:
Close the 2 holes in the air suction box, to prevent that the springs fall in the box..

Procedure to remove
Procedure to install

18.06.2002 68
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O Discharge Unit

22PBA01 07PBA02
X4 X1
+24V
11 2
DCH
12 1

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

07-Discharge

18.06.2002 69
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the Cleaning function

Cleaning is the seventh step in the electrophotographic process.

Mechanical cleaning

The residual toner on the photoconductor (drum) after transfer is removed mechanically by a scraper blade and
transported via a transport spring to waste toner bag.
Lifetime: the clean blade is replaced together with the photoconductor (drum).

Post-exposure

After the removal of the toner the image formed ASV pattern will still remain on the photoconductor (drum).
This charge is removed by the light of red LEDs.
These LEDs are placed on three PBAs, each contain 32 LEDs.
The LED bars are mounted on the scorotron unit.

The photoconductor (drum) is now clean and neutral and ready for the next copy cycle.

18.06.2002 70
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CLEANING
1 5600.348 -CLEANING ASSY 1
2 2912.651 --CLEANING BLADE ASSY 1
3 2185.028 --SHOULDER SCREW 1
9 7048.538 --SHAFT, SPRING ASSY 1
10 2912.667 --GEAR 22T 1
11 2912.669 --SEAL PLATE ASSY 2
12 2944.946 -TENSION SPRING 2
14 2945.066 -WASTE TONER BAG 1

18.06.2002 71
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 07-4-001 Activate the led's of the discharge unit (DCH

07PBA02) ]

Purpose To check the led's of the discharge function (DCH 07PBA02)

Condition -

Check Visual check

18.06.2002 72
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 07-8-001 Display / set the life time of the cleaning blade (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the lifetime of the cleaning blade in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 73
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 08 Fusing
Fill in instructions

281 Heater unit

282 Absorber unit
287 Feed plate
288 Fans
290 NTC
291 Guide wires
310 Switches
311 Sensor
312 PBA-s
313 Fan(s)
318 Mechanical connections
319 Electrical connections
320 Others Fusing

18.06.2002 74
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Fuser unit

Electrical components

FIXNTC
[ NTC1,2,3,4,5 ] mounted against the fuser elements.
The middle [ FIXNTC3 ] regulates the temperature.
Switching the absorber fans.

[ FIXNTC6 ] is mounted against the reflector.

Switches the cooling fan of the output roller.

All NTC's are involved in the temperature safety circuit.

Heaters
Front heater 08E1
Rear heater 08E2

Fuser door switch

Rear fuser interlock 08S1

FIXFANL/R
Airfans 08M1/08M2 left and right on the top of the absorber box.
Cooling high temperature of the fuser elements.

FIXFANL FIXNTC 6 FIXFANR FUSSAFSW

08S1(S2)

18.06.2002 75
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Heather Rear PTROUTSE Heather Front FIXNTC

08E2 08E1

18.06.2002 76
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8501 Error (Temperature setpoint not reached within its

timeout)]
Description
Temperature setpoint not reached within its timeout.

error uccurs in case NTC3 does not measure 200·C within 25 sec after switching on the fuser.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-001 Heater assy Check replace 281
0804-003 NTC Resistor 290

18.06.2002 77
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8502 Error (NTC3 does not measure a temperature of 100·C

within 10 seconds after switching on the fuser)]
Description
Error occurs in case of NTC3 does not measure a temperature of 100·C within 10 seconds
after switching on the fuser.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Fuser get warm

all temperature sensors are defect, or unconnected.

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC Resistor Check 290

Fuser stays cold

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-001 Heater assy Check replace 281
Electrical connections Check 319
2202-058 Solid state relay Check replace 880

18.06.2002 78
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8503 Error (NTC 1-5 measures a temperature greater than 330·

and the difference with the lowest is less than 30·C)]
Description
Error occurs in case NTC 1-5 measures a temperature greater than 330· and the difference
with the lowest is less than 30·C.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

print material stuck in the Check remove 320
fuser.
2202-058 solid state relay Check replace 880

18.06.2002 79
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8504 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC1 left too low)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC1
Fault condition: NTC1 < (NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius) OR
NTC1 > (NTC3 +40 ·Celcius) OR
At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC1 > 40 ·Celcius
Norm value: -

Description:
Define the NTC with the highest temperature as NTC(max)

The error code 8504 occurs:

1. NTC1 < (NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius) OR
2. NTC1 > (NTC3 +40 ·Celcius) OR
3. At the end of a print NTC(max) - 1) > 40 ·Celcius

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Make a print on a large (e.g. 914 mm) paperroll and a small (e.g. 297 mm) paperroll.

1. Disconnect NTC1.
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If the resistance is broken, replace the
NTC resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC Left, 08R1 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan left, 08M1 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 80
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8505 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC2 middle left too low)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC2
Fault condition: NTC2 < (NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius) OR
NTC2 > (NTC3 +40 ·Celcius) OR
At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC2 >40 ·Celcius
Norm value: -

Description:
Define the NTC with the highest temperature as NTC(max)
The error code 8505 occurs:
1. NTC2 < (NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius) OR
2. NTC2 > (NTC3+ 40 ·Celcius) OR
3. At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC2 >40 ·Celcius

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Make a print on a large (e.g. 914 mm) paperroll and a small (e.g. 297 mm) paperroll.
1. Disconnect NTC2.
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If the resistance is broken, replace
the resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC middle left, 08R2 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan left, 08M1 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 81
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8506 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC3 Control middle too low)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC3
Fault condition: Temperature NTC3 too low
Norm value: -

Description:
The error code 8506 occurs:
1) NTC3 is defect OR
2) NTC3 is not connected

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Test this with a width of 914 mm and 297 mm (large and small sizes).

1. Disconnect NTC3
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance, If the resistance is broken, replace
the resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC control middle, 08R3 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan left, 08M1 08-4-001 313

0802-051 Fuser fan right, 08M2 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 82
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8507 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC4 middle right too low)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC4
Fault condition: NTC4 < NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius OR
NTC4 > (NTC3 + 40 ·Celcius) OR
At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC4 > 40 ·Celcius
Norm value: -

Description:
Define the NTC with the highest temperature as NTC(max)
The error code 8507 occurs:
1. NTC4 < NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius OR
2. NTC4 > (NTC3 + 40 ·Celcius) OR
3. At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC4 > 40 ·Celcius.

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Make a print on a large (e.g. 914 mm) paperroll and a small (e.g. 297 mm) paperroll.
1. Disconnect NTC4
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If the resistance is broken,
replace the resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC middle right, 08R4 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan right, 08M2 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 83
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8508 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC5 right too low)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC5
Fault condition: NTC5 < NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius OR
NTC5 > (NTC3 + 40 ·Celcius) OR
At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC5 > 40 ·Celcius
Norm value: -

Description:
Define the NTC with the highest temperature as NTC(max)
The error code 8505 occurs:
1) NTC5 < NTC3 - 80 ·Celcius OR
2) NTC5 > (NTC3 + 40 ·Celcius) OR
3) At the end of a print NTC(max) - NTC5 > 40 ·Celcius

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Make a print on a large (e.g. 914 mm) paperroll and a small (e.g. 297 mm) paperroll.
1. Disconnect NTC5.
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If the resistance is broken, replace
the resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC Right, 08R5 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan right, 08M2 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 84
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8509 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC1 left too high)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC1
Fault condition: Temperature NTC1 too high
Norm value: -

Description:

The error code 8509 occurs:

1) NTC is defect
2) NTC has a ground shortcut
3) coating of heater elements worn.

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Test this with a width of 914 mm and 297 mm (large and small sizes).
1. Disconnect NTC1
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If a short-circuit is measured (0
Ohm), replace the resistor

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC Left, 08R1 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan left, 08M1 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

0804-001 Heater assy Replace 281

18.06.2002 85
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8511 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC3 control middle too

high)]
Description
Signal name: FIXNTC3
Fault condition: Temperature NTC3 too high
Norm value: -

Description:
The error code 8511 occurs:
1) NTC is defect
2) NTC has a ground shortcut

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Test this with a width of 914 mm and 297 mm (large and small sizes).

1. Disconnect NTC3
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If a short-circuit is measured (0
Ohm), replace the resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC control middle, 08R3 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan left, 08M1 08-4-001 313

0802-051 Fuser fan right, 08M2 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 86
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8513 Error (Temperature of fuser NTC5 right too high)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC5
Fault condition: Temperature NTC5 too high
Norm value: -

Description:
The error code 8513 occurs:
1) NTC is defect
2) NTC has a ground shortcut
3) coating of heater elements worn.

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS Information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 during a print.
Test this with a width of 914 mm and 297 mm (large and small sizes).

1. Disconnect NTC5
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If a short-circuit is measured (0
Ohm), replace the resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-003 NTC Right, 08R5 08-9-001 290

0802-051 Fuser fan right, 08M2 08-4-001 313

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

0804-001 Heater assy Replace 281

18.06.2002 87
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8514 Error (Temperature NTC absorber is too low)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC6
Fault condition: Temperature reflector FIXNTC6 is <6 °C (43°F) after 10 seconds

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS information test 08-9-001
Monitor the temperature of NTC6 during a print.

1. Disconnect NTC6
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If the resistance is broken, replace
the NTC resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0802-037 NTC Left, 08R1 08-9-001 290

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 88
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[8515 Error (Temperature NTC absorber is too high)]

Description
Signal name: FIXNTC6
Fault condition: Temperature reflector FIXNTC6 is >200 °C (392°F)

Tests / Checks:
Use SDS information test 08-9-001.
Monitor the temperature of NTC6 during a print.

1. Disconnect NTC6
2. Connect a multimeter to measure the NTC resistance. If a short-circuit is measured (0
Ohm), replace the NTC resistor.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0802-037 NTC absorber 08-9-001 290

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 89
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[85XX repeatedly: after exchange of the NTC]

Description
The detection of the NTC errors is based on the largest deviation towards the Average temperature, it
is possible that an error is caused by large differences in several NTC's due to several reasons (e.g.
draught, worn coating of heater elements).

How the error is defined by the engine:

1. Find the NTC's with the highest and lowest temperature.

SDS Test: 08-9-001

2. Determine the average temperature of the five NTC's.

3. Determine the difference between the highest temperature and the average temperature
(dT_Pos) and determine the difference between the lowest temperature and the average
temperature (dT_neg).

4. If (dT_pos > dT_neg) THEN an error report is generated that the NTC with the highest
temperature is defect (8509, 8510, 8511, 8512 or 8513)

ELSE an error report is generated that the NTC with the lowest temperature is
defect (8504, 8505, 8506, 8507 or 8508).

18.06.2002 90
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the absorber fuser unit

Procedure
1. Remove the rear plate. Loosen 5 screws, remove 2 screws.
2. Open the left cover.
3. Open the fuser section.
4. Remove the top cover of the absorber (4 screws).
5. Disconnect the connectors 08X6 NTC absorber), 08X7 and 08X8 (fans) and remove the
bundle out the absorber.
6. Disconnect the earth wire (1 screw).
7. Disconnect the manual lever, 1screw and 1 special O-ring.
8. Remove the E-clip of the turning point. (right hand side).
9. Remove the absorber.

18.06.2002 91
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the fuser heater unit

Caution: When you close the safety relay 08S1 of the fuser (USA also the safety switch 08S2), the power
supply is connected to the heaters.

Procedure
1. Open the left side cover.
2. Remove the waste toner bag.
3. Remove the black plastic cover (3 screws).
4. Open the right side cover (3 screws).
5. Disconnect at the right side the 4 connectors from the fuser heater elements.
6. Remove the rear cover, loosen 5 screws and remove 2 screws.
7. Disconnect the 5 NTC connectors 08X1-5.
8. Open the fuser unit.
9. Remove the manual lever, 1 screw and 1 special O-ring.
10. Remove at the right and at the left side 1 screw from the heater unit.
11. Remove the 2 caps from the left and right side of the fuser unit.
12. Lift the fuser unit out the print engine.

18.06.2002 92
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01 COM POWER DISTRIBUTION 08S1
08S3 Fuser Safety Switch
SSR L"
X9 08E1
3
+24V
+ ~
MAINS CONNECTION L' Fuser
Front
FIXHESSR
4 - ~ 08E2
Fuser
Rear
X10 08X1 08T1
GND -T Line C
1 1 08R1
FIXNTC1 Fuser NTC1 Left
2 2
230V Configuration
08X2
GND -T
3 1 08R2
FIXNTC2 Fuser NTC2 Middle Left 08S1
4 2 Fuser Safety Switch Rear
08X3
GND -T
5 1 08R3
FIXNTC3 Fuser NTC3 Control Middle 08E2
6 2 Fuser
Rear
08X4
GND -T
7 1 08R4
FIXNTC4 Fuser NTC4 Middle Right 08E1
8 2 Fuser
Front
08X5 08S2
GND -T Fuser Safety Switch Front
9 1 08R5
FIXNTC5 Fuser NTC5 Right
10 2 08T1
Line C
08X6
GND -T
11 1 08R6
FIXNTC6 Fuser NTC6 Absorber
110/115V Configuration
12 2
X4 08X7
+24V
3 1
M 08M1
Fuser Fan Left
FIXFANL
4 2
08X8
+24V
1 1
M 08M2
Fuser Fan Right
FIXFANR
2 2

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

08-Fuser

18.06.2002 93
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction of the Fusing function

Fusing is the sixth step in the electrophotographic process.

General
In the Oc· TDS400, fusing is achieved by heat and radiation.
To get a correct fusing, the temperature of the fuser elements are very high (over 320 °C 608°F).
At this high temperature, fumes can evaporate out of the paper.
Sometimes it is possible that you can smell these fumes.
Assure the customer that these fumes are harmless and that they are not ozone fumes.

Paper Fuser fan Absorber Output roller Fuser output pinch

Transport roller Heater elements Output sensor

Paper

The paper is transported by the roller of the intermediate transport and by the output rollers.
The distance over the fuser is about 270 mm (10.6").
Paper jam is detected by the output sensor PTROUTSE.

The copy material is heated from the underside and when the machine is warm also from the environment.
The colder paper absorbs heat needed to fuse the toner. The toner starts melting already at 40 °C (104 °F)
and is fused at 52 °C (125 °F).
The copy material temperature over the fusing elements will reach 100 °C (212 °F).
The fixing temperature for the different copy material is set automatically.

Fuser

The inside of the fuser box is isolated and covered with a reflector.
2 heater elements, each have 6 strips, are mounted:
220V: serial
115V: parallel
24 Ohm
2400 Watt
The fuser is covered with a grid to protect that the copy material drops inside.

Temperature measurement.

The temperature is measured by 5 NTC's, spread over the whole width of the fuser elements.
They are positioned so that an A4 copy always is detected.
All the NTC's are involved with the temperature protection.
The fuser temperature is controlled by the middle NTC (FIXNTC3). It regulates the duty cycle of the SSR.
The set temperature is set automatically and differs between the several types of copy material and between
a "cold" and "warm" machine, e.g.:

18.06.2002 94
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

paper 75 gr. - cold machine - 300 °C (... °F)

paper 75 gr. - warm machine - 280 °C (... °F)
polyester 3.5 mil - cold machine - 250 °C (... °F)
"Cold" or "warm machine" is detected by the NTC (FIXNTC6) which is mounted on the reflector.

l The copy material absorbs heat, this means that outside the paper seize the temperature increases. To much
difference is checked by the other NTC's. When the difference in temperature is outside the specifications, a
safety circuit is activated.
l Temperature increase between two copies (no heat absorption) will result in problems on the leading edge of
the next copy. Therefore the temperature set point is lowered temporarily and then increased by a certain
number of °C/second, back till the temperature set point

The absorber

The absorber is a box above the fuser.

Aim:
l The aim is to prevent loss of heat and carry off superfluous of heat.

Function
l Temperature isolation for fast warming up
l Fire security by carry off superfluous of heat
l Cooling down the fuser elements outside the paper size where there is no heat absorption by the paper
The temperature is much more equal over the length of the fuser elements.
l Contribution to the fuse process, especially when the machine is just switched on ("cold"), temperature can be
up to 120 °C (248 °F).

Construction
l The bottom side is closed with a black painted foil.
l The top side is covered with isolation.
l 2 air fans (FIXFANR and FIXFANL) are mounted on the left and right top side. They are switch on when the
NTC's of the fuser elements measures a to high temperature.
l This happens at the side of the copy material where the heat is absorbed by the foil.
For paper:
Switch on: Temp. NTC1 and 5 > NTC 3 + 15
Switch off: Temp. NTC1 and 5 < NTC 3 + 10
l The upper output roller is hollow and a fan (PTROUTFAN) cools down the roller shaft and the roller wheels.
l The output sensor (PTROUTSE) with a pulse disk near the output rollers detects the leading edge and
transport speed of the copy material. If something is wrong, the fuser is deactivated.

Safety Precautions

To prevent the overheating of the paper in the fuser, several precautions have been taken:
The temperature in the fuser is kept as low as possible. Paper burns spontaneously at a temperature of 425 °C
(797°F) and when lighted it burns at a temperature of 375 °C (707°F). The temperature of the heaters will never
exceed 350 °C (662°F).

Passive precautions
l An absorber is used. When small-format paper is used, only a small amount of the heat is absorbed by the
paper. So the temperature at the sides will rise. When the temperature difference of the NTC's FIXNTC1,2,4,or
5 compared to FIXNTC3 is more then 330 °C (626°F), the absorber cooling is switched on. The cooling is
achieved with the fuser fan FIXFANL at the left and the fuser fan FIXFANR at the right. There is also a natural
air flow at the rear of the fuser.
l Protection gauze above the heaters. This gauze prevents large paper clippings from reaching the heaters
(small clippings are harmless).
l Reliable paper path.

Active protections
l The paper output sensor PTROUTSE, Error 15504.
When the paper does not reach the paper output sensor in time or no sensor pulses are detected.
l NTC's in the fuser and reflector.
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,4 or 5 is >50 °C (122°F) then FIXNTC3, Error 08520/21.
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 is >345 °C (653°F) Error 08507/11
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 is >350 °C (662°F) hardware protection Error 08001/05.

During warming up, a certain temperature is expected after a certain time. This is controlled:
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 difference is >50 °C (122°F) and the temperature of 3 NTC's are over
the average of the 5 NTC's after 10 seconds, Error 08507/11

18.06.2002 95
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,3,4 or 5 difference is >80 °C (176°F) and the temperature of 3 NTC's are below
the average of the 5 NTC's after 10 seconds, Error 08513/17.
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,4 or 5 is <50 °C (122°F) then FIXNTC3 after 25 seconds, Error 08519.
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,4 or 5 is <100 °C (212°F) after 10 seconds, Error 08001/05.
Temperature fuser FIXNTC1,2,4 and 5 is <100 °C (212°F) after 10 seconds Error 25716.
Temperature reflector FIXNTC6 is <6 °C (43°F) after 10 seconds Error 08006.
Temperature reflector FIXNTC6 is >200 °C (392°F) and < 350 °C (662 °F) Error 08006.

l Software protections
Some protections are called: "Software protection". The safety relay 1 on pba 22PBA03 is deactivated, the
fuser is switched off and an error message is presented on the screen. The restart of the fuser can be activated
by the operator.
l Hardware protections
Some protections are called: "Hardware protection". The safety relay 1 on pba 22PBA03 is deactivated, the
fuser is switched off and an error message is presented on the screen. The restart is only possible by switching
off and on the machine.

18.06.2002 96
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ABSORBER
1 5600.360 - ABSORBER ASSY 1
37 2912.745 --NTC RESISTOR 1
FUSNTC6, 08R6
41 2912.731 --ADAPTOR 2
47 2912.762 --RING 1
48 2912.746 --PLATE 1
49 1055.243 --KNOB 1
51 2912.736 --FAN ASSY 24V 2
FUSFANL, 08M1
FUSFANR, 08M2
53 2945.239 --FRONT PLATE 1
55 2912.738 --LEAF SPRING 4
57 2912.739 --SHAFT 2
58 2912.740 --SHAFT 2
59 2912.742 --ROLL 10
60 2912.741 --ROLL BEARING 10
62 2912.743 --BUSH 2
63 7095.122 --REAR PLATE 1
66 2912.757 --INSULATION 1
68 2912.763 --GUIDE 8

18.06.2002 97
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 98
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

HEATER
1 7048.693 -HEATER ASSY 1
08E1, 08E2
3 2926.645 --NTC RESISTOR 5
FIXNTC1, 08R1
FIXNTC2, 08R2
FIXNTC3, 08R3
FIXNTC4, 08R4
FIXNTC5, 08R5
14 2944.923 -SIDE REFLECTOR 2
21 7048.558 -ROLLER ASSY 1
21L 2944.889 --O-RING 1
22 2945.213 -SUPPORT BEARING 1
23 2912.384 -PLAIN BEARING 2
26 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 1
PTROUTSE, 15B3
27 2912.755 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
31 7070.671 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 2

18.06.2002 99
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 08-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 100
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 08-4-001 Activate the left and right fuser fans (FUSFANL/R

08M1/2) ]

Purpose To check the left and right fuser fan (FUSFANL/R)

FIXFANL/R ON/OFF

Condition -

Check Visual check

18.06.2002 101
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 08-6-001 Activate the front and rear fuser heaters (FUSHEF/R

08E1/2) ]

Purpose To check the front and rear fuser heater (FUSHEF/R).

Check Indication of the NTC1 ... 5 and NTCREFL in ·C

Remarks The test stops after 1 min.

18.06.2002 102
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 08-9-001 Display the values of the fuser NTC 1-5,

absorber NTC 6 (FUSNTC1-6 08R1-6) (in 0.1 ·C) ]

Purpose Display the value of the fuser NTC 1... 5 and NTCREFL in in 0.1 ·C

Check Indication of the NTC1 ... 5 and NTCREFL in 0.1 ·C

Remarks Make a run of copies.

18.06.2002 103
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the cutting lenght for prints longer than A0

Purpose
To prevent for too long, too short or too slant cuts by paper length longer than A0.

Before you begin

The trailing edge cut for the paper shorter than A0 must be correct.

Check
1. Use a full roll of plain paper 75 grs/m2 (20 lbs) with a minimum width of 841 mm (33.
2. Make several prints longer than A0.
3. Check the print.
Specification: trailing edge cut not slant
paper length correct.
Note: if the adjustment is correct, then the bulge fingers are in the horizontal position.
Open the top cover of the paper drawer to see the bulge fingers position.

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 12-1-050, Adjust the bulge for the prints longer than A0
Increase the value: the horizontal position of the bulge fingers is lower.
Decrease the value: the horizontal position of the bulge fingers is higher.

18.06.2002 104
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the paper roll empty detection

Purpose
The correct adjustment prevents for wrong roll empty messages.

Correction

1. Loosen the bolt 1 and the bolt 2 (tightened by hand).

2. Push the bracket in the indicated direction.
3. Tighten the bolt 1 and the bolt 2.
4. Turn the roller to check a complete revolution of the sensor wheel.
5. When the sensor wheel slides, increase the pressure.
6. When the sensor wheel turns irregularly, decrease the pressure so that there is no deformation
on the inner side of the 'O'-ring.

bolt 1 (rotation point)

O-ring
sensor
wheel
bracket

apply pressure in
this direction

roller
bolt 2

18.06.2002 105
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the closed position of the paper roll

drawer
Purpose
The correct adjustment prevents for paper jams between the paper roll drawer and the input
guide plates of the printer.

When to do
When the stand and the printer engine were separated.

Correction

1. Make sure that adjustment: 'The paper input guide of the printer' is correct.
2. Remove the front cover and the side covers from the roll unit (6 screws).
3. Loosen the screws between the drawer and the rails, at the left and right side (6 screws).
4. Pull the drawer out, until the screws touch the end of the slotted holes.
5. Tighten the two front screws (at the left and right side).
6. Push in the drawer completely.
7. Loosen the two front screws (at the left and right side).

4.5 +1/-0 mm

8. Push the drawer inside until the distance is as indicated in the figure.
9. Tighten the two front screws (at the left and right side).
10. Pull out the drawer.
11. Tighten the other 4 screws.

18.06.2002 106
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the image position in the width

direction for roll 1 or roll 2 (in 0.1 mm)
Attention: this test is also accessible via Settings Editor application.

Purpose
To shift the image in horizontal position between the left and right hand side of the paper
borders.

Before you begin

Be sure that the position of the paper rolls on the spindle are correctly positionned.

Check
1. Make the service test print with the SDS test 51 from roll 1 or 2.
2. Read the last value of the ruler lines on the left side of the print.
3. Specification: +3 / -3 calculated from the "0' ruler line.

Correction
1. Enter the result :
Roll 1: SDS test 12-1-003
Roll 2: SDS test 12-1-041
Decreased value: the image moves to the right side.
Increased value: the image moves to the left side.

18.06.2002 107
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure straight cut paper roll

Purpose
To create a straight cut of the leading edge of the paper rolls 1 and 2.

Check
1. Make a test print from the SDS test 51
2. Check the ruler lines at the trailing edge of the print.
3. Specification: difference between the left and the right side: 1mm

Correction

l Loosen the 2x M4 nuts of the transport bracket on both sides inside the stand.

l Loosen the black bolt -A- on both sides.

l Measure the difference between the left and

the right side in mm.
l Left side paper too long:
move left side level upwards and the right
side level downwards.
Number of mm is also the number of holes.
l Fix the black bolts.
l Close the paper drawer and fix the transport
brackets.

18.06.2002 108
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure trailing edge position between the first

and the following prints in a run
Installation:
1. The procedure can be part of the installation test of the TDS400.
2. To enable the adjustment in the installation test: do the SDS test 12-1-053.
3. The test automatically starts during the installation test.
4. When finished, this test is disabled in the installation test.

Service:
1. Activate the test by SDS test 12-7-008 .
2. The adjustment result is written in the SDS test 12-1-001. . You can read and change the value.

Purpose
To adjust the trailing edge position for the first print, when the paper is started and
PRDLEADSE is free.
This condition exists when
l placing a new paper roll
l the paper roll is retracted
The adjustment set the distance between PRDLEADSE 12B3 and the knife.

When to do
l During installation of the TDS400.
l After replacement of the PRDLEADSE

Action
1. Put a new (approx. 175 mtr) paper roll A0 (36") in the paper drawer. Leading edge
visible in the slot hole.
2. Activate the SDS test 12-7-008 .
3. The test makes two blank prints.
4. The trailing edge position is calculated and stored in the SDS test 12-1-001

18.06.2002 109
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 12 Paper Roll Drawers

Fill in instructions

441 Roll knife cutter

442 Paper spools
443 Feed rollers
444 Dew preventers
451 Switches
452 Sensors
453 PBA's
454 Motors
478 Mechanical connections
479 Electrical connections
480 Others Paper Roll Feed

18.06.2002 110
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Roll unit configuration not correct.

Description
A two rolls unit is recognized as an one roll unit or a one roll unit is recognized as a two rolls
unit.

Tests / Checks:
Check the configuration jumper on the PRD driver PBA on the backside of the roll unit

18.06.2002 111
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12501 Error (Knife reaches left side too quick)]

Description
Knife reaches left side too quick.
(PRUKNISE1 is active within 200 msec after switching on the knife motor)

18.06.2002 112
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12502 Error (Knife reaches right side too quick)]

Description
Knife reaches right side too quick.
(PRUKNISE2 is active within 200 msec after switching on the knife motor).

18.06.2002 113
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12702 Roll 2 empty]

Description
Signal name: PRFRUNSE2
Fault condition:

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-121 PRURUNSE2 12-2-011 452

1204-030 support bearring Check replace 480

roll is unwind Check 990
paper loose on core Check 990

18.06.2002 114
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12703 Paper jam roll]

Description
Signal name: LEADSE
Fault condition: The moment an other roll is used the previous one is retracted.
After some time LEADSE still detects print-material of the retracting roll.
Norm value: Closed

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-057 Leading edge sensor, 12B3 12-2-005 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor upper roll 12M1 12-6-002 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor lower roll 12M2 12-6-003 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 115
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12704 Roll unit open]

Description
Signal name: PRDDOORSW1,2
Fault condition: Open during printing
Norm value: Closed

The error "Roll unit open" occurs when the door or drawer of the roll unit is opened during printing. 12S1(upper)
or 12S2 (lower) is open.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1208-022 Door switch roll 1, 12S1 12-2-006

1208-022 Door switch roll 2, 12S2 12-2-010

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 116
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12705 Paper jam roll]

Description
Signal name: LEADSE
Fault condition: The sensor is always active, during switching of the paper roll.

The moment an other roll is neccessarry, the previous one is retracted.

The "Leading edge sensor" 12B3 must detect that the roll is retracted, before the other roll is fed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-057 Leading edge sensor, 12B3 12-2-005 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor upper roll 12M1 12-6-002 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor lower roll 12M2 12-6-003 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 117
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12706 Paper jam roll]

Description
Signal name: PTRINPSE
Fault condition: The moment the print-material is fed from the roll unit it must enter the
printer and activate PTRINPSE, within a certain timeout.
Norm value: Closed

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-017 ACTUATOR ASSY 15-2-001 Replace
PTRINPSE, 15B1

1202-046 Drive motor upper roll 12M1 12-6-002 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor lower roll 12M2 12-6-003 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 118
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12707 Cutter error]

Description
Signalname: PRDKNIPOSSER, PRDKNIPOSSEL
Fault condition: Not active within 1250 msec.
Norm value: Active within 1250 msec.

Description:
The display message "Cutter error" occurs:
When the knife sensor at the left hand side (PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1) or the knife sensor at the
right hand side (PRDKNIPOSSER 12B2) is not active within 1250 msec. after the knife motor
(PRDKNIMO 12M3) is started

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSEL, 12B1 12-2-004

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSER, 12B2 12-2-005

1218-032 Cord assy Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 119
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[12708 Cutter error]

Description
Signalname: PRDKNIPOSSER, PRDKNIPOSSEL
Fault condition: Not active within 1250 msec.
Norm value: Active within 1250 msec.

Description:
The display message "Cutter error" occurs:
When the knife sensor at the left hand side (PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1) or the knife sensor at the
right hand side (PRDKNIPOSSER 12B2) is not active within 1250 msec. after the knife motor
(PRDKNIMO 12M3) is started

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSEL, 12B1 12-2-004

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSER, 12B2 12-2-005

1218-032 Cord assy Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 120
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Roll 1 empty ] 12701

Description
Signal name: PRFRUNSE1
Fault condition:

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-121 PRURUNSE1 12-2-009 452

1204-030 support bearring Check replace 480

roll is unwind Check 990
paper loose on core Check 990

18.06.2002 121
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Install the PBA 12PBA01

Warning:
Install procedure
When you replace the roll unit control PBA 12PBA01 in a 1 roll unit configuration, then put the
jumpers
- between X6 pins 1-2 and pins 3-4,
- and the jumper between X7 pin 2-3 on the new PBA.

18.06.2002 122
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The circular knife.

Procedure

1. Open the paper roll drawer.

2. Remove one of the 2 side covers (2 black screws, 1x lower outside, 1x upper inside ) with the
upper front cover (no screws) from the roll unit.
3. Remove the second side cover.
4. Remove the knife unit cover (4 screws).
Note:
2x 2 screws are adjustment screws for the cover position. Mark the position of the brackets.

5. Move the circular knife to the left side.

6. Remove the bracket with the pulley (2 screws).
7. Remove the O-cord from the pulley.
8. Release one side of the O-cord from the knife unit.
9. Remove the knife unit and release the other side of the O-cord from the knife unit.
10. Replace the knife (1 screw).

Note: When remounting the knife unit, lift the circular knife on top of the linear knife.

18.06.2002 123
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Optional

12S3 12R1
ON/OFF Switch
+
L
N
E

12X8 12X9

Supply Cord 12W06

12-Paper roll drawer/ Dew preventor

18.06.2002 124
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O PRD Driver

22PBA01 12PBA01

X8 12X18 X1
PRUKNIMOEN1
7 7 7 X3 +
1
M 12M3
Knife Mo
2
PRUKNIMOEN2 -
9 9 9

+24V +5V

SAFETY CIRCUIT

X1 X3
+5VSB_S +5V / 1
23 23 23 19 1
PRUKNISE1 PRFKNISE1 12B1
17 17 17 22 2 Knife Po
GND5V
18 3 Sensor L

+5V / 1
13 1
PRUKNISE2 PRFKNISE2 12B2
18 18 18 16 2 Knife Po
GND5V
12 3 Sensor R

12X4 12X5

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

12-Paper roll drawer / Knife

18.06.2002 125
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Low Voltage Supply

(printer) CPU I/O (printer) PRD Driver
22PBA02 22PBA01 12PBA01
12B1
MAINS
12B2 Knife

M 12M3

12B4
Roll empty
detection
12B5
Dew preventor
MAINS 12R1
M 12M1

M 12M2 Transport

12B3

12S1
Safety
12S2 circuit
12-Paper roll drawer / Main diagram

18.06.2002 126
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O PRD Driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
X8 12X18 X1 X3
+5VSB_S +5VSB_S
23 23 23 20 1
PRURUNSE1 PRFRUNSE1 12B4
19 19 19 24 2 Run Sen
GND5V
21 3 Roll1

X6
+5VSB_S
6 1
PRURUNSE2 PRFRUNSE2 12B5
20 20 20 7 2 Run Sen
GND5V
5 3 Roll2

12X4 12X5
Option 2 Roll Unit
22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

12-Paper roll drawer/ Roll empty detection

18.06.2002 127
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O PRD Driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
Option 2 Roll Unit If not con
X8 12X18 X1 X6 place jum
+24V_S DOORSW2 X6 : 1 - 2 a
3 3 3 1

DOORSW2 12S2
2 Door Switc
GND_S DOORSW2
22 22 22 3 Roll2
PRUDOORSW2 DOORSW2
16 16 16 4
X3
GND_S DOORSW1
24 24 24 8

PRUDOORSW1 DOORSW1 12S1

13 13 13 7 Door Switc
DOORSW1
4 Roll1
PRUREMEN DOORSW1
2 2 2 3
K5
Safety Relay
+24V_S
5 5 5 X7
2 If Option 2 Roll Unit is NOT
GND_S + DC / DC connected place jumper X7 :
14 14 14 CONVERTER 3
GND_S
8 8 8
GND_S
6 6 6

V1
12X4 12X3 +24V +5V +5V
X8
- KNIFE
- EMPTY DETECTION
12X5
- TRANSPORT

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

12-Paper roll drawer/ Safety circuit

18.06.2002 128
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O PRD Driver

22PBA01 12PBA01
X4 12X1
OA1
1 1
NOA1 12M
X8 12X18 X1 2 2
PRUFEDMOCLK NOA2 M Feed
10 10 10 7 3 Roll
OA2
6 4

PRUFEDMODIR OB1 12X6

11 11 11 3
NOB1
4 12X2
NOB2
9 9
PRUFEDMOEN OB2 12M
12 12 12 8 8
M Feed
7 Roll2
+5V +24V
6

SAFETY 12X7
CIRCUIT
Option 2 Roll Unit

+24V K3 K4

X1
PRUFEDMORE
4 4 4 X3
+5VSB_S +5VSB_S
23 23 23 14 1
PRULEADSE PRULEADSE 12B
15 15 15 23 3 Lead
GND_S
17 2 Sen

12X4 12X5

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

12-Paper roll drawer/ Transport

18.06.2002 129
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The knife

The knife motor 12M3 moves a circular knife over a linear knife from left to right and vice versa.

The knife sensor left 12B1and the knife sensor right 12B2 are used to detect if the circular
knife is in the left or in the right position.
These sensors are also used to brake the speed of the knife motor 12M3.
When during a cut one of the sensors is activated, the direction of the knife motor 12M3 is
reversed or short-circuited.
At the time of initialization, the circular knife is moved to the right until the knife sensor right
12B2 becomes active.
A correct cut can only be guarenteed when at the moment of cutting the paper does not move
at the knife position.
At the same time the paper still has to be fed into the basic machine.
Therefore a bulge has to be created between the knife and the paperfeed pinch of the basic
machine.

Cord Carriage plate Circular knife Linear knife Knife support

profile

Knife motor Knife position

sensor left/right

18.06.2002 130
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction

paper feed pinch of the basic machine

M
12M
12B1 12B2

12B3

12S1

12B4 12PBA01
M
12M1
12S2

12B5
M
12M2

The paper roll unit is divided into 5 sections:

l Transport (information about the paper transport, lead sensor 12B3, drive motor upper roll
12M1, drive motor lower roll 12M2)
l Drawer (information about door switch upper roll 12S1 and door switch lower roll 12S2
l Paper empty detection (information about upper roll empty sensor 12B4 and lower roll empty
sensor 12B5)
l Knife (information about the knife unit, knife motor 12M3, knife sensor left 12B1, knife sensor
right 12B2)
l 12PBA01 (information about roll unit control PBA 12PBA01) The Oc· TDS400 is available in a
1 roll or a 2 rollconfiguration.

18.06.2002 131
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Description roll unit control PBA 12PBA01

The roll unit control PBA 12PBA01 is used to communicate with the basic machine and to
control the operation of the roll unit. The 24V supply for the roll unit and the 5V supply for the
operation of the roll unit control PBA 12PBA01 are supplied by the basic machine. The 5V
supply for the rest of the roll unit is generated by the roll unit control PBA 12PBA01 by means
of a DC/DC convertor.
LED V1 indicates if the 5 V is present.

l An optional dew preventer can be connected.

Note: It is advisable to switch on the dew preventer when the relative humidity is higher than
65%.

* In the case of a 1 roll configuration,

- X6 pins 1-2 and pins 3-4 and
-X7 pins 2-3
are bridged by jumpers.

18.06.2002 132
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, CUTTING UNIT, SECTION 1
10 2955.048 -O-RING 7
11 2955.036 -CARRIAGE PLATE 1
12 2944.668 -RUNNING WHEEL 6
13 2955.041 -SPRING PLATE 2
14 2955.079 -TORSION SPRING 2
15 2955.040 -O-WHEEL 1
16 2955.047 -O-RING 1
17 2955.039 -PIN 1
18 7174.783 -CIRCULAR KNIFE 1
19 2944.677 -HOLDER 1
20 2944.682 -COMPRESSION SPRING 1
21 1037.235 -WASHER 1
22 1014.555 -STOP 2
23 2955.050 -ACTUATOR PLATE 1
24 2944.625 -MOTOR BRACKET 1
25 1933.175 -DC MOTOR 1
PRDKNIMO, 12M3
27 2944.619 -ROUND BELT PULLEY 1
28 2944.622 -PULLEY BRACKET 1
29 2944.621 -ROUND BELT PULLEY 1
30 2351.007 -BALL BEARING 1
31 2965.230 -BEARING SUPPORT 1
32 2944.669 -CORD ASSY 1

18.06.2002 133
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, CUTTING UNIT, SECTION 2
2 7129.399 -FRAME PLATE 1
3 7129.400 -FRAME PLATE 1
4 2955.046 -KNIFE SUPPORT PROFILE 1
5 7174.784 -LINEAR KNIFE 1
6 7048.554 -KNIFE PLATE 1
7 2944.665 -PAPERCLAMP PLATE 1
8 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR 2
PRDKNIPOSSEL, 12B1
PRDKNIPOSSER, 12B2
9 2955.044 -GUIDE PROFILE 1
13 7129.382 -PIN 2
33 2944.846 -PLATE 2

18.06.2002 134
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 135
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 1
5 2944.635 -PLATE, LOWER 1
31 2944.592 -DRIVE SHAFT, 1 ROLL 1
2944.592 -DRIVE SHAFT, 2 ROLLS 2
33 1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING, 1 ROLL 1
1033.513 -BEARING HOUSING, 2 ROLLS 2
34 1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING, 1 ROLL 1
1033.514 -BEARING HOUSING, 2 ROLLS 2
35 2351.008 -BALL BEARING, 1 ROLL 2
2351.008 -BALL BEARING, 2 ROLLS 4
37 2912.685 -TIMING BELT PULLEY, 1 ROLL 1
2912.685 -TIMING BELT PULLEY, 2 ROLLS 2
44 2944.593 -PLATE, MOTOR, 1 ROLL 1
2944.593 -PLATE, MOTOR, 2 ROLLS 2
46 2912.693 -DC STEP MOTOR, 1 ROLL 1
PRDFEDMO1, 12M1
2912.693 -DC STEP MOTOR, 2 ROLLS 2
PRDFEDMO1, 12M1, PRDFEDMO2, 12M2
47 2912.699 -BUSH, 1 ROLL 2
2912.699 -BUSH, 2 ROLLS 4
48 2668.036 -GROMMET, 1 ROLL 4
2668.036 -GROMMET, 2 ROLLS 8
50 3851.115 -SPRING, 1 ROLL 1
3851.115 -SPRING, 2 ROLLS 2
52 2333.064 -TIMING BELT, 1 ROLL 1
2333.064 -TIMING BELT, 2 ROLLS 2
136 3313.035 -RING, 1 ROLL 1
3313.035 -RING, 2 ROLLS 2

18.06.2002 136
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 2
7 2944.628 -PLATE, UPPER 1
12 2944.626 -PLATE, FRONT, 1 ROLL 1
2944.728 -PLATE, FRONT, 2 ROLLS 1
39 2944.586 -ROLLER SHAFT, 1 ROLL 1
2944.586 -ROLLER SHAFT, 2 ROLLS 2
40 2944.757 -ROLL ASSY, 1 ROLL 2
2944.757 -ROLL ASSY, 2 ROLLS 4
43 2944.584 -SPRING, 1 ROLL 2
2944.584 -SPRING, 2 ROLLS 4
53 2944.633 -SENSOR PLATE 1
57 2934.610 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PRDLEADSE, 12B3

18.06.2002 137
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 3
28 2981.660 -ROLL BLOCK CATCH, 1 ROLL 2
2981.660 -ROLL BLOCK CATCH, 2 ROLLS 4
30 2373.017 -BEARING, 1 ROLL 4
2373.017 -BEARING, 2 ROLLS 8
31 2231.012 -WASHER 2
73 7094.389 -ROLL HOLDER ASSY, 1 ROLL 1
7094.389 -ROLL HOLDER ASSY, 2 ROLLS 2
73L 7094.387 --KNOB, 1 ROLL 1
7094.387 --KNOB, 2 ROLLS 2
119 2912.750 -PULSE DISK, 1 ROLL 1
2912.750 -PULSE DISK, 2 ROLLS 2
120 2912.751 -O-RING, 1 ROLL 1
2912.751 -O-RING, 2 ROLLS 2
121 1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR, 1 ROLL 1
PRDRUNSE1, 12B4
1201.226 -OPTO SENSOR, 2 ROLLS 2
PRDRUNSE2, 12B5
123 2944.807 -BRACKET, 1 ROLL 1
2944.807 -BRACKET, 2 ROLLS 2
134 2944.808 -PIN, 1 ROLL 1
2944.808 -PIN, 2 ROLLS 2

18.06.2002 138
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 4
1 7129.396 -FRAME PLATE, 1 ROLL 1
7129.394 -FRAME PLATE, 2 ROLLS 1
2 7129.395 -FRAME PLATE, 1 ROLL 1
7129.393 -FRAME PLATE, 2 ROLLS 1
3 7166.068 -PLATE 1
8 2944.703 -BRACKET 6
10 2944.704 -POSITION BLOCK 2
21 2944.806 -BRACKET, 1 ROLL 1
2944.806 -BRACKET, 2 ROLLS 2
22 1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH, 1 ROLL 1
PRDDOORSW1, 12S1
1988.048 -MANUAL SWITCH, 2 ROLLS 2
PRDDOORSW, 12S1, 12S2
24 7129.397 -BRACKET 1
26 7129.398 -BRACKET 1
33 7094.728 -RAIL ASSY 1
38 7094.729 -RAIL ASSY 1
51 5584.614 -POWER I/O PBA 1
12PBA01
52 2646.225 -PBA FASTENER 1
59 7129.386 -SHAFT 1
71 2944.700 -ELECTRO DOOR 1
115 1037.688 -EARTH WIRE 1
135 2236.032 -SPACER, 1 ROLL 1
2236.032 -SPACER, 2 ROLLS 2
219 2944.630 -SWITCH PLATE 1
221 2955.124 -PROTECTION PLATE 1
331 2945.013 -ECCENTRIC 2
372 7129.381 -BUSH 2
379 7129.379 -PLATE EXCENTER, RIGHT 1
380 7129.380 -PLATE EXCENTER, LEFT 1

18.06.2002 139
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 140
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER ROLL DRAWER, SECTION 5
64 2912.387 -PIN 2
181 2944.627 -PLATE ASSY, 2 ROLLS 1
183 7166.057 -PLATE, 2 ROLLS 1
302 7129.387 -COVER ASSY 1
310 7129.383 -COVER, 1 ROLL 1
315 7129.404 -COVER 1
316 2944.805 -BRACKET 2
320 7129.405 -COVER 1
330 7094.382 -COVER ASSY 1
333 1994.909 -CARBON BRUSH 2
350 7166.061 -BRACKET, 2 ROLLS 1
351 7166.062 -BRACKET, 2 ROLLS 1
360 7129.390 -DOOR ASSY, 2 ROLLS 1
363 2981.650 -BUSH, 2 ROLLS 2
390 7166.064 -BRACKET, LEFT, 1 ROLL 1
391 7166.063 -BRACKET, RIGHT, 1 ROLL 1
392 7166.066 -BRACKET 2

18.06.2002 141
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-0-002 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 142
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-001 Installation test: Adjust the leading edge position of

roll 1 and roll 2
(in 0.1 mm)]

Description Adjust the leading edge position of roll 1 and 2 (in 0.1 mm) during the installation
of the TDS400.

Value Range: -100 ... 0

Default: 0

Remarks This test is part of the installation test.

Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 143
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1 (in 0.1
mm) ]

Description Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Increased value: the image moves to the left.

Decreased value: the image moves to the right.

Remarks Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 144
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-004 Adjust the cutting length for a new (approx. 175mtr.)

roll 1 (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 1(in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -1000 ... +1000

Default: -120 (in 0.1 mm)
Increase value: paper length shorter
Decease value: paper length longer

Remarks Start with a new roll. The tolerances for a used roll are always decreasing.

18.06.2002 145
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-006 Adjust the cutting length for a new (approx. 175mtr.)

roll 2 (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 2 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -1000 ... +1000

Default: -120
Increase value: paper length shorter
Decease value: paper length longer

Remarks Start with a new roll. The tolerances for a used roll are always decreasing.

18.06.2002 146
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2 (in 0.1
mm) ]

Description Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 147
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-050 Adjust the cutting length for prints longer than A0 (in
0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the cutting length for prints longer than A0 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: 0 ... 38

Default: 19

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 148
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 1

(on request customer) (in mm)

Description Adjust the cutting length for prints longer than A0 (in mm)

Value Range: -10 ... + 10

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 149
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 2

(on request customer) (in mm) ]

Description Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 2 (on request customer) (in
mm)

Value Range: -10 ... + 10

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 150
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-053 Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment

procedure leading edge position for the roll 1 and roll 2
(PRDLEADSE 12B3) ]

Description Enable / disable in the Installation test: Adjustment procedure leading edge
position for the roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3).

Value

Remarks The test 12-7-008 is also part of the installation test.

18.06.2002 151
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-1-054 Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment

procedure of the paper cut length roll 1 ]

Description Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment procedure of the paper cut
length roll 1

Value

Remarks Test 12-7-009 is also part of the installation test.

18.06.2002 152
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-003 Check of the knife sensor at the right hand side

(PRDKNIPOSSER 12B3) ]

Description Check of the knife sensor at the right hand side (PRDKNIPOSSER 12B3)

Value Active: knife stopped at the right hand side.

Not active: knife stopped at the left hand side.

Remarks

18.06.2002 153
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-004 Check of the knife sensor at the left hand side

PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1) ]

Description Check of the knife sensor at the left hand side (PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1)

Value Active: knife stopped at the left hand side.

Not active: knife stopped at the right hand side.

Remarks

18.06.2002 154
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-005 Check of the lead sensor (PRDLEADSE 12B3) ]

Description Check of the lead sensor (PRDLEADSE 12B3)

Value Paper present: sensor activated.

Paper not present: sensor not activated.

Remarks

18.06.2002 155
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-006 Check of the door switch of the roll unit

(PRDDOORSW1 12S1) ]

Description Check of the door switch of the (upper) roll unit (PRDDOORSW1 12S1)

Value Door closed

Door open

Remarks

18.06.2002 156
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-009 Check of the paper roll 1 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE1

12B4) ]

Description Check of the paper roll 1 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE1 12B4)

Value Pulsdisk in the upper roll unit.

Active: upper roll not empty

Not active: upper roll empty

Remarks

18.06.2002 157
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-010 Check of the lower door switch of the roll unit

(PRDDOORSW2 12S2) ]

Description Check of the door switch of the (lower) roll unit (PRDDOORSW2 12S2)

Value Door closed

Door open

Remarks

18.06.2002 158
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-2-011 Check of the paper roll 2 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE2

12B5) ]

Description Check of the paper roll 2 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE2 12B5)

Value Pulsdisk in the lower roll unit.

Active: lower roll not empty

Not active: lower roll empty

Remarks

18.06.2002 159
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-6-001 Activate the knife motor (PRDKNIMO 12M3) ]

Purpose Activate the knife motor (PRDKNIMO 12M3)

Check Test active: knife transported to the other side of the roll unit.
As the knife sensor is activated the test is stopped.

Remarks

18.06.2002 160
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-6-002 Activate the paper feed motor of roll 1 (PRDFEDMO1

12M1)]

Purpose Activate the paper feed motor of roll 1 (PRDFEDMO1 12M1)

Check Functional test of the upper feed motor.

Options:
- Forward normal mode
- Backward normal mode

Remarks

18.06.2002 161
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-6-042 Activate the paper feed motor of roll 2 (PRDFEDMO2

12M2) ]

Purpose Activate the paper feed motor of roll 2 (PRDFEDMO2 12M2)

Check Functional test of the lower feed motor.

Options:
- Forward normal mode
- Backward normal mode

Remarks

18.06.2002 162
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-6-043 Cut a 841 mm sheet of roll 1 ]

Purpose Cut a 841 mm sheet of roll 1

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 163
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-7-008 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of the trailing

edge position between the first and the following prints in a run

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between the first and the
following prints in a run.
Only when the paper is started and PDRLEADSE 12B3 is free.

Value The value is stored in the SDS test 12-1-001

Remarks This test is also part of the installation test.

Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 164
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1 ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1

Value

Remarks This test is part of the Transporter installation test.

18.06.2002 165
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-7-010 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 2 ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 2

Value

Remarks Also used for the transporter

18.06.2002 166
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-9-001 Display the length of the last print (in 0.1 mm) ]

Purpose Display the length of the last print (in 0.1 mm)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 167
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 12-9-003 Display the measured time to cut the last print

material (in msec) ]

Purpose Display the measured time to cut the last print material (in msec)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 168
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the image position in the width direction for manual feed
(in 0.1 mm)
Attention: this test is also accessible via Settings Editor application.

Purpose
To shift the image in horizontal position between the left and right hand side of the paper
borders.

Check
1. Make a testprint with the SDS test 51 from the manual feed.
2. Check on the print the ruler lines at the right hand-side P4
3. Specification: +3 / -3 mm from the zero line.

Correction
1. Measure the difference between the left and right hand in mm X 10.
2. Enter the result in the SDS test 15-1-003
Increase the value: image shifts to the left side.
Decrease the value: image shifts to the right side.

18.06.2002 169
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the paper input guide of the printer

Purpose
To prevent for the paper jams between the paper input guides of the printer.

Check
Correction
1. Loosen the bolts and move the plate until the distance is as indicated.
2. Tighten the bolts.

bolt

8.5 ± 0.5 mm plate

18.06.2002 170
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure leading edge position for the roll 1, roll 2

and manual feed
Purpose
To correct the position of the leading edge.
The adjustment set the timing of PTRSYNSE 15B2

Check
1. Make the service test print with the SDS test 51
from the roll 1, roll 2 and the manual feed.
2. Read the last values of the ruler lines on the leading edge of the prints.
3. Specification: +3 / -3 mm from the zero line.

Correction
1. Select SDS test 15-1-001.
2. Enter the measured difference.
Increased value: the leading edge is shorter.
Decreased value: the leading edge is longer.
A value of 10 is approximately 1mm.

Note:
The default value was calculated during the installation test.

18.06.2002 171
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the upper paper guide plate position

Purpose
The correct position of the upper paper guide prevents for the paper jam.

Before you begin

Make sure that:
l The photoconductor is installed correctly.
l The transfer/separation unit is installed.
l The paper input cover is closed.

Drawing

A B C D E

1.
F G H I J

Check
l No check

Correction
1. Loosen the screws (2x).
2. Slide the upper paper guide plate toward the photoconductor, until it touches the flanges of the
photoconductor on both sides.
Make sure that the transfer/separation unit is not pushed down.
3. Tighten the screws (2x).

18.06.2002 172
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 15 Paper Transport

Fill in instructions

561 Separation corona wire

562 High voltage PBA
564 Feed rollers
569 Pick off pawl
570 Switches
571 Sensors
574 Clutches
598 Mechanical connections
599 Electrical connections
600 Others Paper Transport

18.06.2002 173
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15701 Sensor not free, remove paper]

Description
Signal name: PTRINPSE1.
Fault condition: PTRINPSE active during printer startup.
Norm value: PTRINPSE not active during printer startup.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-017 PTRINPSE 15-2-001 571

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 15-2-001 571

18.06.2002 174
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15702 Print-material removed]

Description
Signal name: PTRINPSE
Fault condition: PTRINPSE became inactive the moment the print process is started

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-017 PTRINPSE 15-2-001 571

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 15-2-001 571

18.06.2002 175
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15703 Paper too short]

Description
Signal name: PTRINPSE
Fault condition: Paper Input Sensor (15B1) is switched OFF too early (< 420 mm length)
Norm value: Print material length > 420 mm

Description:
Manual feed is used.
The Paper Input Sensor (15B1) is released too early by the trailing edge of the sheet.
The print material fed in manual is shorter then 420 mm.

A warning "Sheet too short" is displayed for 5 seconds.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-017 Paper Input Sensor 1 15-2-001
(15B1)
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 176
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15704 Paper jam ]

Description
Signal name: PTROUTSE
Fault condition: Error occurs in case paper detected at output is too late.
Norm value: PTROUTSE should detect paper 8400 millisec after the print process is
started.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-026 PTROUTSE 15-2-005 571

0804-021L O-ring Check 600

18.06.2002 177
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15705 Paper jam]

Description
Signal name: PTROUTSE
Fault condition: Error uccurs in case detected paper speed at output is too low.
Norm value: every 54 millisec a pulse is expected.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-026 PTROUTSE 15-2-005 571

0804-021L O-ring Check 600

18.06.2002 178
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15706 Feed table open]

Description
Signal name: PTRFLAPSW
Fault condition: PTRFLAPSW is active during standby.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-007 Paper flap switch, 15S1 15-2-003 Check/Re 570
place
2202-002 22PBA001CPU PBA Check Replace 855
Electrical contacts Check 599

18.06.2002 179
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[15707 Feed table open]

Description
Signal name: PTRFLAPSW
Fault condition: Occurs in case of PTRFLAPSW is active

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-007 PTRFLAPSE Check 570
2202-002 22PBA001CPU PBA Check Replace 855

18.06.2002 180
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the manual sheet feed table

Procedure to remove
1. Open the left and right covers.
2. Open the drawer.
3. Remove the guide plate (Z-1505-32) (2 screws).
4. Remove the two pins (Z-1505-22) and the two caps (Z-1505-12).
5. Remove the left and right side plates (Z-1505 18 and 19)
6. Lower the paper feed table.
7. Remove the transfer / separation corona unit.
8. Remove the black plastic cover.
9. Remove the toner dosage unit.
10. Loosen the earth wire (Z-1505-15) behind the toner dosage unit and push this wire
through the hole.
11. Remove the black screws just under the cleaning unit at the left and at the right side.
12. Take the paper feed table, lift the rear side a little bit and move it a little bit.
13. Loosen the connector of the paper sensor and remove the paper feed table.

Procedure to re-install

1. Place the paer feed table over the pins.

2. Make sure that the slotted holes at the rear of the frames are over the pins.
3. Make sure that the lower paper guide plate is spring loaded against the heater
assembly. Press with your fingers at the left and at the right.
4. Make sure that you can lower the table completely, otherwise the switch plate (Z-1505-30)
is not in the hole of the bottom plate.
5. Adjust the guide plate (Z-1505-32) See Paper feed .

18.06.2002 181
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the tranfer / separaration unit

Note: Make sure that you do not damage the [ PTRINSE ] and the photoconductor (drum).

Procedure
1. Open the right side cover (3 screws).
2. Disconnect at the right side the transfer and separation corona connectors.
3. Open the paper roll drawer.
4. Move the supports of the manual sheet feed table to the front and lower the table.
5. Lift the transfer and separation unit and remove the unit over the paper feed table toward the
front.

18.06.2002 182
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Replace the Separation corona wire

Procedure
1. Remove the transfer/separation unit from the machine , and put it on a flat table.
2. Remove at the left and right side the plastic covers.
3. Remove the 9 paper guides (4 pointing to the front left and 5 pointing to the front right).
4. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the unit
5. Clean the corona housing with a towel moistened with water (no RBS or cleaner K).
6. Remove the corona wire from the cardboard packing material. Do not bend the wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was scrolled.
7. Left side: put the O-ring over the pen and put the bead in the space.
8. Right side: put the bead in the space and attach the spring on the hook.
9. Clean the wire. Use a piece of Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
10. Dry the wire with a cloth.

Note:
When you install a new corona wire, do the following tests:
l the SDS test 15-8-001,
reset the consumable counter for the life time of the separation corona wire
l the SDS test 51, the service test print to check the print quality.

18.06.2002 183
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Low Voltage Supply

(printer) CPU I/O (printer) High Voltage Supply
22PBA02 22PBA01 22PBA04

MAINS SEPARATION U

15B1

15B2

15B3

15S1

15Y1
15-Paper transport / Main diagram

18.06.2002 184
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01
X7 15X1
+5V
5 1 1
GND 15B2
6 2 2 Synchronisation Sensor
PTRSYNSE
4 3 3

+5V
9 4 1
GND 15B1
8 5 2 Input Sensor
PTRINSE
7 6 3

+5V
11 1
PTROUTSE 15B3
10 2 Paper Output Sensor
GND
12 3

15S1
+5V Deflector Switch
17
PTRDEFSW
18
X4
+24V
9 15Y1
PTRINPCL Paper Input Clutch
10

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

15-Paper transport / Sensors

18.06.2002 185
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O High Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA04
X2 X2
+24V
1 1
T1
GND
2 2 PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
X3 X1
PTRSEPSUPEN
8 4
SEPHV
GND X3
SEPARATION

VOLTAGE CONTROL
22X01 22X9

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

15-Paper transport / Separation

18.06.2002 186
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the Separation function

Separating is the fifth step in the electrophotographic process.

The negative charged photoconductor (drum) attracts the positive charged copy material.
By this attraction the copy material will try to follow the outline of the photoconductor (drum).
To prevent this there is a separation function to neutralise the charged copy material.
The stiffness of the copy material separates it from the photoconductor (drum).
This function consists of:

Paper Transport Paper Photoconductor Guide fingers Pick-off pawls

Input Pinch (drum)

Transfer corona Separation corona

Separation is achieved by one corona wire which is supplied with a negative -350V DC offset voltage on which is
superimposed a AC voltage 11.8 kV peak-peak, 500 Hz.
The AC component is most effective during the period that the polarity is opposite of the rest charges to be
removed, in this way positive and negative rest charges can be removed.
By the negative DC offset voltage, the negative working area is bigger then the positive area.
In this way the positive copy material and the positive (transfer outside the paper format) photoconductor (drum)
area are neutralised.
Vibration of the separation wire are dimmed by two beads at the ends of the wire.

To increase the print quality for only paper materials till the trailing edge e.g. posters, the separation corona is
switched off 50 mm before the trailing edge of the paper.
By this the effective force of transfer increases and the paper follows the photoconductor (drum) for a longer
time.
In this way there is a better transfer quality and so the print quality increases.
Using other type of material (e.g. polyester and vellum) the separation corona is not switched off.

After the trailing edge of the copy material the separation corona is switch on again, to neutralise the last part of

18.06.2002 187
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

the positive transfer charge on the photoconductor (drum).

The small difference of the charge on the photoconductor (drum) is not visible on the copy.

Bad separation:
l A pick off pawl is mounted against the photoconductor (drum) to prevent paper jams at the cleaning blade
area or jams in the scorotron.
l On top of the separation unit guide fingers are mounted to prevent that the copy material enters the unit.

The wire thickness is 80 mm.

18.06.2002 188
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Paper input
The paper input sensor 15B1 detects if paper is present. After a certain time delay to ensure proper
alignment against
the first pinch, the paper input clutch 15Y1 is energized and the main motor 23M1 drives the paper input
rollers.
When the synchronisation sensor 15B2 is activated, the paper input clutch 15Y1 is de-energized and the
paper stops.
The paper is now in the first pinch. When the fuser temperature is correct, the image and paper are
synchronised,
the paper transport continues. As soon as the paper input sensor 15B1 is released, the next sheet can be
fed in.

PTRINSE 15B1
- paper detection for manual feed
- paperjam from the roll
- paper length measurement
- counter click

PTRSYNSE 15B2
- Synchronisation leading edge
- is used for some automatic paper adjustments
during installation

PTRINPCL 15Y1
- stop the paper transport for alignment against
the input pinch
- start the paper transport to the photoconductor

PTRDEFSW 15S1
- Input flap safety switch, activated when the input
guide plate is lowered.

PTR

Manual feed 15Y1 Photoconduc-

Bulge levers table Paper tor (drum)
Transport
Input Pinch

15B1
Paper

18.06.2002 189
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Transport
Input Sensor

18.06.2002 190
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Paper output

The paper is transported by means of the paper input rollers and the paper output rollers. The
paper output sensor 15B3 is located near the paper output rollers. This sensor checks the
paper transport and timing. The sensor wheel of the paper output sensor 15B3 is driven by the
paper. When there is no paper, the sensor wheel does not rotate and therefore no pulses are
generated.

18.06.2002 191
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 192
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 1
7 1034.197 -BUTTON SWITCH 1
PTRFLAPSW, 15S1
14 2912.356 -PLATE 4
15 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 8
16 2912.362 -SHAFT 4
17 2912.357 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PTRINPSE, 15B1
19 2912.360 -SHAFT 1
20 2912.471 -CAP 2
23 7083.750 -HANDLE 2
24 2945.085 -LEAF SPRING 2
30 2912.565 -SHAFT 2
32 7083.723 -SIDE PLATE 1
35 7083.724 -SIDE PLATE 1
50 2944.608 -LEVER SHAFT 1
52 2955.093 -SIDE PLATE 2
54 2955.100 -PIN 2
55 2944.601 -BLOUSE LEVER 8
56 2944.604 -POST PLATE 1
57 2955.092 -BUSH 2
62 2944.748 -BUSH 2
66 2955.084 -PAPER GUIDE 1
68 2944.719 -GUIDE PLATE 1
70 7048.691 -PAPERFEED ASSY 1
71 2955.086 -SWITCH PLATE 1
79 7128.983 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
PTRSYNSE, 15B2
80 7048.673 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
81 7094.707 -BUNDLE 1
83 7048.674 -SPRING PLATE 1

18.06.2002 193
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 194
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PAPER TRANSPORT, SECTION 2
1 7094.708 -GUIDE PLATE 1
3 2912.346 -PAPER ROLLER 1
4 2912.387 -PIN 2
6 2912.396 -PLAIN BEARING 2
28 1828.012 -DRAUGHT STRIP 1
65 7083.688 -PAPERFEED TABLE 1
73 7048.597 -BRACKET 2
78 2945.176 -PIN 2

18.06.2002 195
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-0-002 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 196
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-1-001 Adjust the leading edge position (PTRSYNSE 15B2)

for the roll1, roll 2 and manual feed (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge position (PTRSYNSE 15B2) for the roll 1, roll 2 and
manual feed (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -340 ... 260

Default: 0 ( x 0.1 mm)

Remarks Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 197
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction, for the manual
feed (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the image in the width direction, for the manual feed (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0 ( x 0.1 mm)

Remarks

18.06.2002 198
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-1-004 Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment of

the leading edge position (PTRSYNSE 15B2)]

Description Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment of the leading edge position.

Value The calculated value is stored in the SDS test 15-1-001

Remarks This test is set to "disable" after the installation test is activated.
This test is part of the installation test.
Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 199
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-1-005 Adjust the leading edge position (on request

customer) (in mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge position (on request customer) (in mm)

Value Range: 0 ... 10

Default: 0

Remarks This adjustment has no influence on the test prints made by SDS.

18.06.2002 200
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-2-001 Check the paper input sensor (PTRINSE 15B1) ]

Condition Paper present: sensor activated.

Paper not present: sensor not activated

Action Feed copy material

Check

18.06.2002 201
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-2-003 Check the switch of the manual feed table

(PTRDEFSW 15S1) ]

Condition Check the switch of the manual feed table (PTRDEFSW 15S1)

Active: manual feed table in the lower position.

Not active: manual feed table not in the lower position.

Action Lower the manual feed table.

Check

18.06.2002 202
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-2-004 Check the synchronisation sensor (PTRSYNSE 15B2) ]

Condition Check the synchronisation sensor (PTRSYNSE 15B2)

Paper present: sensor detects copy material.

Paper not present: sensor detects no copy material.

Action

Check

18.06.2002 203
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-2-005 Check the paper output sensor of the fuser

(PTROUTSE 15B3) ]

Condition Check the paper output sensor of the fuser (PTROUTSE 15B3)

Paper present: sensor detects copy material.

Paper not present: sensor detects no copy material.

Action

Check

18.06.2002 204
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-4-001 Check the clutch of the syncronisation roller

(PTRSYNCL 15Y1) ]

Purpose Check the clutch of the syncronisation roller (PTRSYNCL 15Y1)

Condition l -

Check l -

18.06.2002 205
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-6-001 Activate the HV power supply of the separation unit

(PTRSEPSUPEN 12PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developing unit to prevent system polution.
Turn it a 1/2 revolution counter clockwise.

Purpose To check the correct function of the separation (22PBA04 - PTRSEPHV).

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP3

PTRSEPSUPEN ON: 0,65 to 0,9V rms

Remarks Active functions during this test:

PTRSEPSUPEN ON
DRIMORL ON
CHGERA ON
CONFAN ON

18.06.2002 206
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 15-8-001 Display / set the life time of the separation corona wire
(in linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the lifetime of the separation corona wire in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 9,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 207
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[19501 Check deposit]

Description
Signal name: PTRDEPSE
Norm value: PTRDEPSE must become active and inactive within 10 seconds after
switching on the compact output stacker motor.

Possible cause: The Compact Output Stacker (COS) is too full.

Motor of the Compact Output Stacker defect.
Sensor of the Compact Output Stacker is defect.
Print material error in the Compact Output Stacker.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1922-035 DC MOTOR 24V 19-4-001
DELFLAPMO, 19M1
1922-024 OPTICAL SENSOR 19-2-001
DELFLAPSE, 19B1

18.06.2002 208
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 19-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 209
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 210
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY DELIVERY TRAY, OCE 965, SECTION 1
1 7045.436 -UPPER PLATE ASSY 1
2 7045.437 -TRAY ASSY 1
3 1988.096 -STOP 2
6 7016.874 -REAR FRAME 1
7 7045.444 -TUBE 1
8 2994.560 -BUSH 4
10 7016.722 -TURN WHEEL 2
11 7016.871 -FRONT FRAME 1
13 1989.606 -BLOCK 2
14 1989.649 -BRACKET 2
15 1989.497 -GUIDE GUIDE 2
16 2944.796 -STOP 2
17 7045.443 -FRAME 1
21 7016.605 -BAR PLATE 2
25 7016.838 -CASTOR 2
29 7016.875 -PLUG 4

18.06.2002 211
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY DELIVERY TRAY, OCE 965, SECTION 2
1 7045.438 -FRAME REAR 1
2 7045.439 -FRONT FRAME 1
4 2981.698 -PLATE 1
5 2986.893 -GUIDE PLATE 1
7 1201.227 -OPTO SENSOR 3
15 2981.701 -ROLLER ASSY 1
16 1989.912 -BEARING HOUSING 1
17 1988.604 -BEARING HOUSING 1
18 2351.029 -BALL BEARING 2
20 1995.368 -TIMING PULLEY 1
22 1069.468 -GEAR 35T 2
25 2986.812 -SHAFT ASSY 1
26 1020.441 -BEARING HOUSING 1
27 1047.945 -BEARING HOUSING 1
28 1023.614 -BALL BEARING 2
30 2930.019 -DC MOTOR 1
31 1062.576 -TIMINGBELT PULLEY 1
32 2998.584 -MOTOR PLATE 1
36 2333.342 -TIMING BELT 1
37 1933.865 -TAB BRACKET 2
38 1995.764 -ANTISTATIC BRUSH 2
39 7070.671 -BRUSH-DISCHARGE 2
46 7170.720 -BUNDLE, 19W01 1
65 2912.699 -BUSH 2
66 2668.036 -GROMMET 4
67 3311.024 -RING 2
85 3761.016 -ROUND NUT 4

18.06.2002 212
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY DELIVERY TRAY, OCE 965, SECTION 3
3 7045.442 -TUBE ASSY 1
6 1987.375 -FAN ASSY 2
41 7045.441 -REAR COVER 2
47 7170.640 -CRU PBA 1
49 2646.222 -PBA FASTENER 5
51 7093.662 -FINGER ASSY 1
53 1302.287 -SOCKET 1
54 1302.288 -FUSE DRAWER 1
58 7016.819 -BUNDLE, 19W02 1
69 1300.366 -FUSE-300MA F 6.3X32 2
72 7008.934 -FAN GUARD 2
83 7045.440 -COVER 1
90 2998.681 -ABSORBER PLATE 1
91 2986.892 -ABSORBER PLATE 1

18.06.2002 213
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Copy delivery tray

Model Wheeled delivery tray with blower unit

Capacity Up to 150 sheets (media type dependent) from A4 to A0
Types of media Plain paper,
transparent paper,
film,
vellum,
polyester and translucent
Dimensions 1170 mm (W) x 1090 mm (H) x 1440 mm (D) with tray fully extended
Weight 35,5 kg

18.06.2002 214
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01
Optional delivery u
X7 19X1
+5VSB_S
3 1 1
DELFLAPPOSSE 19B1
1 2 2 Delivery Flap
GND_S
2 3 3 Position Sensor

X4
+24V_S
7 4
M 19M1
Delivery Flap Motor
DELFLAPMO
8 5

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

19-Delivery / Copy output stacker

18.06.2002 215
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General

The Copy Output Stacker (COS) is an option for the Oc· TDS400.
It offers a high stacking capability of prints and copies on a minimal floor space.

18.06.2002 216
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the Compact Output Stacker COS

1. Open the cardboard box and remove all parts.
Note: In the plastic bags are more parts than necessary. Because in pre-installed machines the parts are
installed already.
2. Open the paper roll drawer of the print engine.
3. Place the stacker unit in the print engine.
4. Lock the stacker unit at the left and right side with 2x combi bolts M4 x 12.
5. Connect the cable bundle from the stacker unit with the print engine connector xxxxx?????
Print engine connector is at the left side of the bottom cover.
6. Secure the cable bundle with the cable tie to the print engine.
Use a M4 nut and ring.
7. Connect the earthwire from the stacker unit with the earth connector of the print engine stand.
8. Install the plastic guides on the hinge plate:
the 2 long strips on the outside
the 3 short strips on the inside.
9. Place the hinge plate with the plastic guides inside the COS.
10. Install the protection cover with two tap tites.
11. Install the painted cover plate with 2 combi bolts M4 x 12.
12. Place the two side covers in the long frame holes and lock the covers with 2 x 1 bolt M4 x 8.
13. Install the 4 plastic strips to the rear plate of the print engine.

14. Place the 5 long receiving guides in the lowest rear cover.
15. Place the 5 short receiving guides in the upper rear cover.

18.06.2002 217
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 218
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY OUTPUT STACKER, SECTION 1
7 2999.784 -LEVER ASSY 1
12 2999.751 -CAM 1
13 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 2
22 3775.071 -BEARING HOUSING 1
24 1201.226 -OPTICAL SENSOR 1
DELFLAPSE, 19B1
33 2999.757 -MOTOR PLATE 1
35 1933.256 -DC MOTOR 24V 1
DELFLAPMO, 19M1
37 2999.777 -GEAR FLANGE 1
39 2999.778 -GEAR 42T 1
53 2999.794 -RING 1
56 7017.928 -CLAMP BLOCK 1
57 4652.051 -PLATE 1
60 7017.929 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
76 7017.977 -SENSOR PLATE 1
104 7048.619 -SHAFT 1

18.06.2002 219
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

COPY OUTPUT STACKER, SECTION 2
1 7083.732 -REAR PLATE 1
13 2351.008 -BALL BEARING 1
18 2999.797 -LEFT FRAME PLATE ASSY 1
19 7083.753 -RIGHT FRAME PLATE ASSY 1
21 3775.072 -BEARING HOUSING 1
25 7083.736 -PAPER GUIDE 5
26 7083.746 -REAR COVER 1
28 2999.766 -PAPER GUIDE PLATE 1
30 2999.767 -LONG SHEET 2
31 2999.780 -COVER PLATE 1
41 2999.782 -MOTOR SHIELDING 1
43 7083.733 -RIGHT COVER 1
44 7083.734 -LEFT COVER 1
46 7048.639 -RECEIVING PLATE ASSY 1
48 7083.737 -REAR RACK 5
49 7083.747 -PLATE 1
51 7095.248 -GUARD SHEET 3
57 4652.051 -PLATE 1
59 7048.585 -PLATE ASSY 1
62 2944.766 -RIVET 8
63 7017.933 -SHEET 4
64 2944.766 -RIVET 6
65 7017.953 -HINGE PLATE 1
66 7017.954 -PLATE 1
70 7017.967 -SCREW 2
71 7017.987 -WEIGHT SHEET ASSY 3
77 7048.590 -RIGHT SHAFT PLATE 1
79 7048.591 -LEFT SHAFT PLATE 1
84 2926.766 -CLOSED BUSHING 4
85 7017.984 -TIE PLATE 1
87 7018.049 -GUIDE STRIP 2
98 2912.474 -WASHER 6

18.06.2002 220
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 221
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Copy Output Stacker (optional)

Configuration COS only in a 2 rolls engine

Model The dispositioner that delivers copies and prints on the front-side of the
machine.
Capacity 40 to 75 sheets depending on the material.

18.06.2002 222
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 19-2-001 Check the flap sensor of the compact output stacker

(DELFLAPPOSSE 19B1) ]

Condition Check the flap sensor of the compact output stacker (DELFLAPPOSSE 19B1)

Active: No original: Flap in the home position.

Not active: Flap no in the home position

Action

Check

18.06.2002 223
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 19-4-001 Activate the flap motor of the compact output stacker

(DELFLAPMO 19M1) ]

Purpose To check the flap motor of the Copy Output Stacker (DELFLAPMO 19M1)
l DELFLAPMO ON/OFF

Condition l -

Check l Visual check if motor is active / not active

18.06.2002 224
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 22 Power & Control

Fill in instructions

841 Operating panel

843 Line filters
845 Fuses
846 Copy counters
848 Switches
849 Sensors
855 PBA/EPROM's
856 Power supply unit
878 Mechanical connections
879 Electrical connections
880 Others Control

18.06.2002 225
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The components of the High Voltage Supply; 22PBA04

Drawing

The function of the components

Component Function Value

TB2 DEVCLEHV -460V DC test point
TP1 DEVBIASHV -600 V DC test point
TB1 BIASHV wire
TP2 GND (ground) 0V test point
TP3 PTRSEPHV 0,65 to 0,9 V rms test point
TP4 TRAHV -0,65 to -0,4 V DC test point
TP5 CHGHV 0.9 to 1,1 V DC test point
2201X1-X2 connectors

18.06.2002 226
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black squares on Printer display after boot.

Description
The engine does not boot in normal mode.

Tests / Checks:
Press buttons 1,2 and 3 simultaniously, and turn on the engine, if the boot firmware is present,
the engine will boot in software download mode.
the application software has to be downloaded.

If the engine doesn't boot in software download mode, the CPU PBA has to be replaced.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 855

18.06.2002 227
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Menu card in wrong language. (R1.1)

Description
When changing the display language for the printer, the menu card is still printed in the original language.

Workaround R1.1:

Change the localisation setting for language in the Settings Editor accordingly.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 228
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No reboot info on Printer panel. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)

Description
When a setting is made on the printer panel that needs a reboot of the controller, the operator is not informed
about this on the display.
If, for example, the network settings are changed and the operator switches the printer back to on-line mode he
is not informed that he needs to reboot the controller.

Workaround:

Always reboot the controller after changing settings on the printer panel that are in the "configuration" branch of
the menu tree.

18.06.2002 229
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Print is cutted when switching to SDS mode. (R1.2, R1.3)

Description
Switching to SDS-mode in SDS when the printer is printing a page stops the printing immediatly (cuts the paper).
The current page will not be completed first, but this page will be finished after switching back to normal mode
again.
(no page is lost)

18.06.2002 230
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong printer software version shown after downloading the

printer software. (R1.2, R1.3)
Description
The wrong printer software version is shown after downloading new printer software, when the test is started
again.

Resolution:

Reboot the controller in normal mode to get the correct version numbers.

18.06.2002 231
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22501 Error (Safety relay went down because of an power

supply failure)]
Description
Safety relay went down because of an power supply failure.

Error condition: During a period of 1 second, no MAINSYNC pulses are seen however the safety
relay is switched on.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-058 solid state relay Check replace 880

0804-003 NTC resistor Check replace 290

2202-012 Low Voltage Supply Check replace 856

2202-002 CPU-PBA 22PBA01 replace 855

18.06.2002 232
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22502 Error (Safety relay defect)]

Description
Error occurs in case during 500 msec MAINSYNC pulses are seen however the safety relay
isn't switched on.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON.

Known Problems:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-012 LOW-VOLT PBA1 LVSUP, check replace
22PBA02

18.06.2002 233
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22503 Error (Printer software controller stack overflow)]

Description
This error occurs in case of a Printer software controller stack overflow.
The Printer should be cleared, and Switched Off an On.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-01 22PBA04 High Voltage Replace 855

2202-02 22PBA01 CPU_Control Check Replace 855

18.06.2002 234
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22504]
Description
Copy counter defect or not connected.
Error occurs, in case copy counter gives no feedback after switching on.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-006 COUNTER 1 Check replace
CONCOPCNT, 22Y1
electrical connections Check

18.06.2002 235
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22505 Error (Copy counter defect)]

Description
Copy counter defect or not connected.
Error occurs, in case there is a feedback signal from the copy counter before switching on.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-006 COUNTER 1 Check replace
CONCOPCNT, 22Y1
electrical connections Check

18.06.2002 236
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22507 Error (EEPROM values out of range)]

Description
EEPROM values out of range

Operator actions:
1. Clear the printer.
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON
3. Check the SDS-settings

18.06.2002 237
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22508 Error (Unknown message ID recieved from the

controller)]
Description
Unknown message ID recieved from the controller.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON
3. Check the SDS-settings.

18.06.2002 238
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22509 Error (Unknown message ID recieved from the

controller)]
Description
Unknown message ID recieved from the controller.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON
3. Check the SDS-settings

18.06.2002 239
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22510 Error (Unknown message ID recieved from the

controller)]
Description
Unknown message ID recieved from thecontroller.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON
3. Check the SDS-settings

18.06.2002 240
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22511 Error (Printer communication broken)]

Description
Communication with controller broken.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller", the controller has to be reset. If resetting the
Controller does not solve the problem, check the Controller for faults, or the CPU PBA of the
printer.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace 855

18.06.2002 241
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22512 Error (Printer transmit buffer too small)]

Description
Transmit buffer too smal: communication with controller broken or frozen.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller" the controller has to be reset.

18.06.2002 242
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22513 Error (Printer transmit buffer overshoot)]

Description
Transmit overshoot buffer too small: printer tried to send a command which is too big.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller" the controller has to be reset.

18.06.2002 243
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22514 Error (Printer recieve buffer too small)]

Description
recieve buffer too small: printer is not accepting data fast enough.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller" the controller has to be reset.

18.06.2002 244
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22515 Error (Printer Uart parity error)]

Description
UART reported parity error: unreliable communication link.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON
3. Check Spice cable.

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller" the controller has to be reset.

18.06.2002 245
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22516 Error (Printer Uart buffer overflow)]

Description
UART reported buffer overflow.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller" the controller has to be reset.

18.06.2002 246
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22517 Error (Printer Uart framing error)]

Description
UART reported framing error.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the Printer
2. Switch the printer OFF and ON

Remarks:
If the printer displays "awaking controller" the controller has to be reset.

18.06.2002 247
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22518 Error (Printer too many EEPROM variables)]

Description
too many EEPROM variables defined

error occurs in case variables to be stored in EEPROM exeeds 128 (checked during power up
of the printer).

18.06.2002 248
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22519 - (Printer hardware watchdog)]

Description
Possible cause: Engine software crashed

Operator actions:
l Clear the paperpath.
l Switch the engine OFF and ON for restart.

Remarks: Most likely the engine controller software program must be

reloaded.

18.06.2002 249
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22520 - (Printer software watchdog)]

Description
Possible cause: Engine software crashed

Operator actions:
l Clear the paperpath.
l Switch the engine OFF and ON for restart.

Remarks: Most likely the engine controller software program must be

reloaded.

18.06.2002 250
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22521 Install error (67)]

Description
Possible cause: The installation procedure is aborted and restarted without
restarting the printer and controller.

Error condition: There is a request from the printer to the Power Logic Controller to
start a SDS-session, needed to perform the printer
installation procedure. The Power Logic Controller however denies
this request.

Operator actions:
l Restart the controller.
l Switch the engine OFF and ON for restart.

18.06.2002 251
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22522 Printer illegal language file]

Description
Error condition: Illegal printer language file installed on the controller.

The printer will display the error message, and use the onboard English language file.
The correct printer language files should be installed.

18.06.2002 252
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU pba replacement

A new CPU pba is delivered with in the EPROM:
l the boot software present
l the application software not present

After the installation of the pba, download the application software and check the boot software version.
If necessary, download also the boot software.

Warning only for R1.1:

For a correct download (especially the boot software), you must upgrade the download application
on the harddisk of the controller. See .

The action list:

1. Print the configuration settings by the operator panel.

2. Make a connection between the laptop and the controller.
3. Laptop: logon in [ Windows ] as [ service ] to have permission's on the harddisk of the controller.
4. Do SDS test 71 to make a backup of the system data .

5. Do SDS test 20-1-010: Set the next NT start method in the diagnosis mode .
6. Close the SDS session and the Direct cable connection.
7. Restart the controller. It starts now in the diagnosis mode.
8. Make a connection between the laptop and the controller. Logon as [ service ]!

9. Replace the CPU pba.

- Switch ON the printer.
- Message on the printer display: Waiting for standby....
- The ON-line led blinks.
10. Have the system software file on a diskette.
- Do the SDS test 73: Download the system software .
- For a complete description, see .
- First download the Application software.
- Stop the SDS test 73.
- Download the boot software, if applicable.
11. Close the SDS session and the Direct cable connection.
12. Restart the controller and the printer.

13. Make a connection between the laptop and the controller. Logon as [ service ]!
14. Do SDS test 72 to restore the printer data from the backup diskette .
Restore only the system data [ Subset = SDS, Target = Total ].
(see description backup and restore, when to do it ).
15. Close the SDS session and the Direct cable connection.
16. Restart the controller and the printer.

18.06.2002 253
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System software check / upgrade / download

Procedure to check the firmware version.

Printer:
Switch On the printer while you press at the same time: the on line button + left scroll button + stop
button.
The download software window appears.
You can scroll with the <previous and next/select> buttons through the display to check the firmware and
the boot software version.
The current software version is shown.
(2 nd possibility: SDS 22-1-001 for the firmware version and 22-1-006 for the boot software version).

Scanner:
The scanner has no switch code to show the software version.
l SDS 22-1-002 for the firmware version (there is no boot software in the scanner).
l Check the information on the label of the EPROM.

Procedure to upgrade the firmware.

Printer:
SDS test 73
Note: Read carefully the SDS test description.

Scanner:
Change the EPROM behind the right hand cover.

18.06.2002 254
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O Control Panel

22PBA01 22PBA03
X5 X1
+5VSB_S
11 1
GND_S
12 2
CONPANINP
13 3
CONPANOUT
14 4
CONPANCLK
15 5
CONPANEN
16 6

X4 22X10
+24V_S
15 1 22Y1
COPCNT Copy Counter
16 2
22X6
+24V_S
5 1
M 22M1
Ozon Fan
OZFAN
6 2
X11

Absorber/frame
08X9 08X10

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

22-Power & Control / Control

18.06.2002 255
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O RFI

22PBA01 22PBA06
X5 X1 X3
INTCNTRL_TDXN
1 1 1
INTCNTRL_RTSN
2 2
3
INTCNTRL_RXDN
3
CONTROLLER
INTCNTRL_CTSN NGC
4 4
GND_S
5 5 15

GND_S
6
TXD
7
RTS
8 LAPTOP
RXD
9
CTS
10

X12
+24V_S
1
GND_S
2
CCINT
3
CCIR/E COPY CONTROL INTERFACE
4
CCISIZE
5
CCIEN
6

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

22-Power & Control / Data

18.06.2002 256
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O High Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA04
X2 X2 T4
+24V_S
11 1 PRE HV
GND_S REGULATOR OUTPUT
12 2
X3 X1
CHGSUPEN CHGHV
8 3 CHARGE UNIT

CURRENT CONTROL

T3
PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
DEVSUPEN CLEANHV
7 4
BIASHV DEVELOPER UNIT

VOLTAGE CONTROL

T2
PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
TRASUPEN
9 5
TRAHV
TRANSFER UNIT

CURRENT CONTROL

T1
PRE HV
REGULATOR OUTPUT
PTRSEPSUPEN
10 6
SEPHV
GND
SEPARATION UNIT

VOLTAGE CONTROL
22X1

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

22-Power & Control / High voltage supply

18.06.2002 257
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

RFI CPU I/O (printer) Control Panel

22PBA06 22PBA01 22PBA03
TO SPICE-BUS
CONTROLLER
NGC

LAPTOP
COPY CONTR
PHD I/O INTERFACE
04PBA04 High Voltage Supply
22PBA04

CHARGE UNIT

DEVELOPER U

TRANSFER UN
Low Voltage Supply
(printer)
22PBA02 SEPARATION

22Y1

M 22M1
23M1 M
Discharge
07PBA02

MAINS

22-Power & Control / Main diagram

18.06.2002 258
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

L'
FUSER
22S1 22Q1/2 22Z1 120/230V or
ON/OFF Switch Circuit Breaker Noise Filter
100V
L L' L"
POWER

LOAD
LINE
N N' N" DISTRIBUTION
E

12X11 120/230V
22X1

Supply Cord 22W01

100V 22T1
115V
22F1
100V
4AS

22-Power & Control / Mains connection

18.06.2002 259
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Low Voltage Supply (printer) PHD

22PBA02 04P
Note X3
+5VPHD_S
F7 and F9 are 1
GND_S
Non-replacable fuses 3
+5VPHDSENSE
5
GND_S
4
+5VPHD_S
Low 2

Voltage
22X01 GND CPU
Power 22P
COM
FUSER Supply
X2
+5VSB_S
L' 1
F1
L" X1 LVSUPEN
MAINS 3.15A
2
CONNECTION N" NO
X4
GND_ELV
X5 4
F3
+24V_ELV
22X16 22X11 4 3
L" 2.5A
1 1 1
F5
N" K1 CONSARCH
3 3 3 Safety 2
2.5A Relay CONSARL
2 2 1

Laptop (option)
F7 X2
3.15A GND_S
5
+24V_SELV
Zero Cross 4
08X15 22X13 K2
Detection Main
L" " Motor DRIMORL
5 Relay 6
DRIVE N" " MAINSSYNC
6 3
F9
3.15A

22-Power & Control / Power distribution

18.06.2002 260
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Main Diagram Oc· TDS400 Printer (overview)

Printer Main diagram

TDS400main.tif

18.06.2002 261
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Main Diagram Oc· TDS400 Roll unit (overview)

Roll unit Main diagram

roll unit.tif

18.06.2002 262
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

POWER & CONTROL, PRINTER
1 5584.481 -HIGH-VOLTAGE PBA 1
22PBA04
2 5584.470 -CPU PBA 1
22PBA01
7095.279 --FLASH EPROM 1
4 5583.919 -RFI PBA 1
22PBA06
6 7127.918 -COUNTER 1
CONCOPCNT, 22Y1
7 2926.772 -RFI FILTER 1
22Z1
8 2977.974 -LINE CHOKE 1
8T1
10 2912.506 -BUSH 6
11 2912.430 -BRACKET 1
12 5584.500 -LOW-VOLT PBA 1
LVSUP, 22PBA02
1201.052 --FUSE 2.5A SLOW 1
1202.422 --FUSE 3.15A SLOW 1
13 2926.758 -PBA GUIDE 4
20 2926.762 -INTERLOCK-2X2P SWITCH, 230V 50/60HZ 1
2926.762 -INTERLOCK-2X2P SWITCH, 115V 60HZ 2
08S1, 08S2
21 1201.864 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE, 230V 50/60Hz 1
1201.863 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE, 115V 60Hz 1
22W01
22 2912.703 -STRAIN RELIEF, 230V 50/60Hz 1
2268.002 -STRAIN RELIEF, 115V 60Hz 1
26 1202.042 -MANUEL SWITCH 1
22S1
27 1201.868 -1P CIRCUIT BREAKER 2
1201.955 -1P CIRCUIT BREAKER 2
22Q1, 22Q2

18.06.2002 263
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

31 2955.032 -STUD 1
40 7208.799 -CONSOLE, UNIVERSAL CHAR. 1
22PBA03
7095.098 -CONSOLE, KATAKANA CHAR. 1
22PBA03
41 7166.706 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, NL 1
7166.360 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, GB 1
7166.708 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, DE 1
7166.709 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, FR 1
7166.710 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, IT 1
7166.711 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, SE 1
7166.712 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, DK 1
7166.713 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, NO 1
7166.714 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, ES 1
7166.715 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, US 1
7166.716 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, PT 1
7166.717 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, FI 1
7166.718 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, PL 1
7166.719 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, HU 1
7166.720 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, CZ 1
7095.324 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, JP 1
50 7018.018 -TRANSFORMER ASSY 100/115V 1
22T1
1300.396 --FUSE 4A, SLOW 1
58 1302.507 -SSR 24V DC 20A 1
FUSHESSR, 08S3

18.06.2002 264
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-0-001 Error counters of the printer ]

18.06.2002 265
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-001 Display the software release number of the printer ]

Description Display the software release number of the printer firmpack.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 266
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-006 Display the release number of the boot software of the

printer ]

Description Display the release number of the boot software of the printer
Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 267
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-046 Display the release number of the controller software ]

Description Display the release number of the controller software.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 999999

Remarks

18.06.2002 268
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-050 Display / set the printer display for languages with a

special character set ]

From R1.2
Set the SDS test to '1' to display the Polish and de Czech language on the operator display.

Description Display / set the printer display to include the special character set for the Polish
and the Czech language.

Value Range: 0 or 1
Default: 0
0 = universal font
1 = universal font with the special character set for the Polish and the Czech
language.

Remarks For R1.1: no SDS test is available and the old panel display can not present the
special character set.
For R1.2: only the new display in the operator panel can display the special
character set. See the partslist.

18.06.2002 269
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-051 Display / set the scanner display for languages with a

special character set ]

From R1.2
Set the SDS test to '1' to display the Polish and de Czech language on the operator display.

Description Display / set the scanner display to include the special character set for the
Polish and the Czech language.

Value Range: 0 or 1
Default: 0
0 = universal font or Japanese language
1 = universal font with the special character set for the Polish and the Czech
language.

Remarks For R1.1: no SDS test is available and the old panel display can not present the
special character set.
For R1.2: only the new display in the operator panel can display the special
character set. See the partslist.

18.06.2002 270
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-4-001 Activate the ozone fan (OZFAN 22M1) ]

Purpose To check the ozone fan (OZFAN 22M1)

l CONFAN ON/OFF

Condition l -

Check l Visual check if fan is active / not active

18.06.2002 271
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-4-002 Activate the safety releay (MAINSYNC 22PBA02) ]

Purpose To check the safety releay (MAINSYNC 22PBA02)

l CONSARL ON/OFF

Condition l -

Check l Visual check if relay active / not active

18.06.2002 272
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-001 Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the printer ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the printer.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 273
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-006 Activate the copy counter ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Activate the copy counter (22Y1)

Check The counter makes one pulse.

Visual check of the counter.

Remarks The test uses an input line on the board to check if the counter is connected.

18.06.2002 274
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-007 Switch ON the low voltage supply (22PBA02) ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Switch ON the low voltage power supply (22PBA02)

Check Measue the output voltages:

Remarks

18.06.2002 275
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-8-001 Display / set the total amount of material processed by

the printer (in linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the total amount of material processed by the printer in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Remarks Activated in SDS test 97

18.06.2002 276
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-9-002 Display the power supply frequency (in 0,1 Hz) ]

Purpose Display the power supply frequency (in 0,1 Hz)

The frequency is measured on the CPU IO PBA of the printer by the CONMAINSII
interupt.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 277
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 23 Drive
Fill in instructions

881 Timing belt

882 Gears
883 Tensioner
884 Bearings
910 PBA-s
911 Motors
912 Clutches
918 Mechanical connections
919 Electrical connections
920 Others Drive

18.06.2002 278
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the main motor 23M1

Before you begin

l Remove the fuser unit

Procedure to remove
1. Disconnect the connectors from the main motor 23M1.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the high voltage supply 22PBA04.
3. Disconnect the connector from the paper input clutch 15Y1.
4. Remove the high voltage supply 22PBA04.
5. Release the tension of the main drive belt.
6. Remove the tooth belt pulleys from the main motor 23M1 (circlip).
7. Remove the paper feed table
8. Remove the main motor 23M1 (4 screws).

Procedure to install
Note:
When you install the main motor, first adjust the tension of the photoconductor drive belt before you
install the high voltage supply 22PBA04

Place the paper feed table

18.06.2002 279
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Tension of the main drive belt

Introduction
l The position of this tensioner is referred to the configuration. (50 Hz or 60 Hz.).

Drawing

The correct position selects also the correct tension of the main drive belt.

60 Hz 50 Hz

18.06.2002 280
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O Low Voltage Supply

22PBA01 22PBA02
X1 X2
Note
F1
+5VSB_S X1 L" F7 and F9 are
1 1 Low 3.15A
MAINS
LVSUPEN NO N" CONNECTION Non-replacable f
2 2 Voltage
X4 Power
GND_ELV
3 4 Supply
+24V_ELV 230V
6 3 23C1 23M1
Capacitor Drive Moto
X9 BROWN
CONSARCH K1 23X1
2 2 Safety BLACK M
CONSARL 2 1~
1 1 Relay
RED
1
F7 Zero
3.15A Cross
X1 X2
GND_S Detection
100/115V
5 5 23T1
23X1
+24V_SELV K2 115V
4 4 X5 23X1 2
Main 23F1
Motor L" "
X3 5 2 100V
Relay 4AS
DRIMORL N" "
4 6 6 1 1
100V only
F9
3.15A
MAINSSYNC
3 3 2 23C1 23M1
Capacitor Drive Moto
BROWN
BLACK M
1~
RED

23-Drive

18.06.2002 281
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DRIVE
2 2912.689 -BRACKET 1
3 2912.694 -GEAR/PULLEY ASSY 1
4 7024.023 -CLUTCH 1
PTRINPCL, 15Y1
5 2254.027 -SPLIT PIN 1
6 2912.686 -ROLL 2
11 2333.301 -TIMING BELT 1176 1
15 2333.215 -TIMING BELT 513 1
16 2912.686 -ROLL 2
17 2912.687 -BUSH 1
20 2912.688 -BRACKET 1
21 3851.141 -TENSION SPRING 1
22 2912.681 -GEAR 30T 1
23 2912.682 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 1
25 2912.683 -GEAR 48T 1
27 2912.463 -MOTOR, 230V 1
2912.698 -MOTOR, 115V 1
DIRMO, 23M1
28 2912.676 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 48T 1
2912.677 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 40T 1
31 2912.678 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 3OT 1
2912.679 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 25T 1
32 1201.240 -CAPACITOR 10UF 400V 230V 50/60Hz 1
1201.237 -CAPACITOR 5UF 400V 115V 60Hz 1
23C1
40 2933.960 -BUFFER 1

18.06.2002 282
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 23-6-001 Activate the drive motor (DRIMO 23M1) ]

Warning
Activating the Main Drive Motor too long can cause OPC pollution.

Purpose Activate the drive motor (DRIMO 23M1)

(Test stops after 1 minute)

Check Visual check of the motor

Remarks

18.06.2002 283
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CABINET
1 7032.767 -CABINET ASSY 1
2 7032.849 -PLATE 1
3 7032.856 -BUSH 2
4 7016.722 -TURN WHEEL 4
5 7032.960 -CILINDER LOCK 1
6 7032.835 -HOOK 1
8 7032.855 -MAGNET 2
11 1016.963 -STRAIN RELIEF 3
12 7032.867 -GRID 1

18.06.2002 284
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

DEW PREVENTER, OCE 7037
1 5799.607 -DEW PREVENTER, 230V 1
5799.608 -DEW PREVENTER, 100/115V 1
2 2945.087 --DEW PREVENTER ASSY 230V 1
12R1
7208.940 --DEW PREVENTER ASSY 100/115V 1
12R1
7 1201.864 --CABLE, 230V 1
1302.014 --CABLE, 100/115V 1
12W06
9 1202.042 --MANUAL SWITCH 1
12S3
10 2912.703 --STRAIN RELIEF, 230V 1
2268.002 --STRAIN RELIEF, 100/115V 1
18 2944.773 --BOX 1

18.06.2002 285
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 25 Customer / Environment

Fill in instructions

Customer
961 No fault on arrival
962 Incorrect operation
963 Original
964 Exaggerated demands
970 Others Customer

Environment
971 Humidity/temperature
972 Main power supply
980 Others Environment

Consumables
981 Paper
982 Specialties
983 Toner
990 Others Consumables

Installation
991 Packing
992 Covers
999 Machine is okay

18.06.2002 286
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BUNDLES OVERVIEW
1 7094.702 -BUNDLE 04W05 1
2 7094.703 -BUNDLE 04W06 1
3 7094.704 -BUNDLE 04W07 1
4 7094.705 -BUNDLE 04W08 1
5 7166.069 -BUNDLE 12W01 1
6 2944.738 -BUNDLE 12W03 1
7 7129.401 -BUNDLE 12W04 1
8 2926.823 -BUNDLE 12W05 1
9 7170.720 -BUNDLE 19W01 1
10 7094.681 -BUNDLE 22W02 1
11 7094.713 -BUNDLE 22W04 1
12 7094.808 -BUNDLE 22W05 1
13 7094.809 -BUNDLE 22W09 1
14 7094.707 -BUNDLE 22W010 1
15 7094.926 -BUNDLE 22W011 1
16 7094.943 -BUNDLE 22W012 1
17 1302.505 -DATACABLE 4M 1
18 1302.506 -DATACABLE 8M 1
19 1202.417 -SERVICE CABLE 4M 9DSUB 1
20 1202.418 -SERVICE CABLE 8M 9DSUB 1
21 1202.440 -CABLE, MAINS, LAPTOP 1

18.06.2002 287
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 288
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME & COVERING
1 7128.912 -FRAME ASSY 1
2 7048.553 -LEFT PLATE 1
4 7128.985 -RIGHT PLATE 1
10 2926.766 -CLOSED BUSHING 2
11 1201.473 -BUSHING 2
12 2926.649 -BRACKET 1
26 7128.953 -PLATE 1
48 2945.097 -HINGE BRACKET 2
50 2945.098 -HINGE BRACKET 2
52 2912.412 -PIN 4
55 7048.686 -GUARDING PLATE 1
57 2912.474 -WASHER 2
60 7083.702 -ORIGINAL PLATE 1
61 7083.703 -FORMING COVER 3
66 2912.469 -INSIDE COVER 1
70 7083.698 -LEFT COVER 1
71 2912.507 -KNOB 1
72 7168.909 -NAME PLATE, OCE TDS400 1
75 7094.980 -RIGHT COVER 1
85 7083.706 -GUARDING COVER 1
86 7083.707 -GUARDING COVER 1
92 2912.513 -SCREW 2
100 7095.092 -TOP COVER 1
102 7048.698 -GUARDING PLATE 1
103 2926.849 -CLAMPING SPRING 2
106 7018.048 -GUARDING SHEET 1
107 7018.047 -CLAMP PLATE 1
108 2944.766 -RIVET 5
157 7095.165 -STRIP, CLAMP SAFETY 1

18.06.2002 289
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 290
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

STAND
1 7048.663 -SUPPORT ASSY 1
1L 7128.950 -CASTOR 2
1M 7128.998 -CASTOR, ADJUSTABLE 2
2 7048.662 -SUPPORT ASSY 1
4 7048.640 -CONNECTION PLATE 1
6 7048.638 -SLIDE PLATE 1
8 2912.474 -WASHER 6
14 1091.400 -RING 2
15 7094.378 -STRIP 1
16 7048.661 -SIDE PLATE 1
17 7094.381 -REAR RACK 3
7094.716 -REAR RACK, ONLY WITH COPY OUTPUT STACKER 5
18 7094.356 -REAR RACK 2
19 2944.753 -SHEET 4
20 2944.766 -RIVET 8
21 7128.954 -ADJUSTMENT BLOCK 2
24 7128.969 -COVER 4
25 7048.661 -SIDE PLATE 1
27 7094.379 -STRIP 1
33 7094.989 -CONNECTION PLATE 1
40 7128.994 -STUD 2
41 7094.987 -EXCENTER CLAMP 2
42 7128.993 -STUD 1
44 3851.141 -SPRING 1

18.06.2002 291
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

TOOLS
1 0831.381 -TESTCHART DE TRANSPARENT 1
2 7991.238 -AGFA GREY SCALE 1
3 1068.117 -CLEANER A ASSY USA 1
4 1055.452 -CLEANER O ASSY 1
5 1055.449 -CLEANER R ASSY 1
6 1929.023 -CLEANER K ASSY 1
7 0109.180 -PHOTOCONDUCTOR REPORTING CARD 1
8 0109.631 -LOGBOOK 1
10 0109.279 -LOGBOOK CARD 1
11 2954.946 -CALIBRATION PLATE, SCANNER 2
12 1989.916 -CLEANER T: GB, ES, PT, NO, SE, FI 1
13 1989.750 -CLEANER T: US 1
14 1990.072 -CLEANER T: GB, NL, DE, DK, FR, IT 1
15 5631.219 -CONDUCTIVE GREASE 1
16 1068.104 -CLEANER A 1
17 2999.738 -CALIBRATION CARD, SCANNER 1
20 7991.557 -PHOTOCONDUCTOR QUALITY CHART 1
21 7991.585 -CABLE SET LAPTOP NULL-MODEM 1
22 7991.533 -ETH.10 BASE-T CROSS OVER (3MTR) 1
23 7991.255 -MASSLIN TOWELS 1
56 7991.550 -AEROSOL CAN LIGHT GREY 310 1
57 7991.551 -AEROSOL CAN DARK GREY 311 1
58 7991.552 -AEROSOL CAN DARK BLUE 313 1
59 7991.553 -PAINTSTICK LIGHT GREY 310 1
60 7991.554 -PAINTSTICK DARK GREY 311 1
61 7991.555 -PAINTSTICK DARK BLUE 313 1
64 7991.519 -PLCC EXTRACTION TOOL 1
71 7094.760 -DIAGNOSTIC DISK SPICE III 1
72 1202.417 -DATACABLE, 9DSUB-9DSUB 4m 1
73 1202.418 -DATACABLE, 9DSUB-9DSUB 8m 1

18.06.2002 292
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 293
 Notes SDS session

Explanation SDS session

The SDS session starts and controls the SDS Session for WebSDS (on the Service Laptop or
Controller) or NotesSDS (on Service laptop).
Within the Notes SDS also a sds_log.mdb file (showing all system SDS settings) can be
viewed.

Note:
A Direct Cable Connection from the laptop to controller can take some time. Please wait.

Settings in SDS session:

Host
The following entries are possible:

l NotesSDS on the service laptop: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. Replace the
address by service to run the NotesSDS.
l WebSDS on the service laptop: The default of the Controller TCP/IP address is shown.
Replace the address by service to run the WebSDS.
l WebSDS on the controller: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. This address is
OK to run the Web SDS. In case the controller is not connected to a network use: localhost.
l In case a sds_log.mdb file must be viewed via NotesSDS, use local as an entry.

Password
The service password is required to access the SDS

Start / Stop
Start / Stop button to start / stop the SDS session.

Note:
Make sure that you always STOP the SDS session before leaving the NotesSDS or WebSDS.

Message
Actual status message of the SDS session.

System information
System type: indication of the used system (in this case Oc· TDS400).

Controller status

NURS mode: while printing / plotting the technician is able to read out machine information e.g.
counters.
It is not possible to change parameters or activate outputs while online.
SDS mode: technician has full access to the system.

Permanent error
Iindication of a permanent error

Remove / test 30
Activate test 30 to reset the permanent error.
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

Oc· TDS400 SDS passwords

Passwords of the Oc· TDS400 system.

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails. (R1.2)

Description
Check if the Laptop date and the controller date are equal, otherwise SDS test 71 fails.

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

Tips and (connection) problems laptop LN SDS

Problems
Message in SDS session screen: [ CreateDispatch() failed ].
Message in SDS session screen: [ CreateDispatch() failed ].
Activate the OK button, message: [ SDS server not found ].

Problem:
The SDS on your laptop is not or wrong registered.

Solution:
1. Make a Direct Cable Connection with the controller.
2. Start the Windows Explorer and open the c:\oce\apps\sds map.
3. Activate REG.BAT by double clicking it.
4. Make sure that the file OceSds.ini is in your windows directory ( C:\windows ).
If it is not copy it from c:\oce\apps\sds to c:\windows.
5. Activate SDSserver.exe by double clicking it.
6. Now run Lotus Notes and activate the SDS session. This should now work properly.
7. If you stop Lotus Notes the SDS server can still be active (this time only) and you must stop it
manually.
You can do this by double clicking the icon in the taskbar and then you select shutdown server
in the pop-up window.
8. When this is done once, the next connection will work properly

Solving connection problems

In cases the connection between the Controller and the Service Laptop fails the following items
can be checked successively to check for the cause.

l Check that your hosts file on your Laptop is correctly adapted.

Open the hosts file within your Windows95 directory with Notepad and check that the following
lines are added;
134.188.254.101 laptop
134.188.254.100 service

l Ping to the controller IP address: 134.188.254.100

Ping to the laptop IP address: 134.188.254.101

l Check within the Network Properties of your Laptop that in the Client for Microsoft Networks no
connection is made to a Windows NT Domain and no name is filled in within this field.

l Check the hostname of the controller, no more than 12 characters

l Open a HyperTerminal session with the same settings as defined in the previous chapter
correct settings.
Connect a loop back plug to the COM1 port of the laptop. The plug is available as tool.
(7991.531)
Characters you type should appear on the screen.
If not; your problem is the within the hardware of your Laptop.

l The same action can be done on the Controller.

Before doing this the RAS services should be stopped within the Remote Access Admin
application of the Controller.
Characters you type should appear on the screen.
If not; your problem is the within the hardware of your Controller.

l Connect the cable between the Controller and the Laptop and open the HyperTerminal session
on both sides.
Characters you type on the Laptop should appear on the Controller screen and visa versa.
If not, the problem is within the cable.

l Open the Remote Access Admin application of the Controller.

Open the Port Status window and try to make a connection as described in the previous
chapter.
This window can give you details why the connection failed.

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

01-29 Function tests overview

Indentification
Every test has its unique number. This number is composed in the following way:

test number = SAC-group + function group + reference

Function tests can be divided into the next groups:

Function group Number

[ Counters ] 0
[ Parameters ] 1
[ Inputs ] 2
[ Outputs ] 4
[ Specials ] 6
[ Adjustments ] 7
[ Consumables ] 8
[ Information ] 9

Definition
[ Counters ]
[ Parameters ]
[ Inputs ]
[ Outputs ]
[ Specials ]
[ Adjustments ]
[ Consumables ]
[ Information ]

All tests are described in corresponding chapters.

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 30 Reset PE ]
Reset permanent error.

You can see a permanent error only in the [ SDS SESSION ] test.
The reset button for a permanent error is also available in [ SDS SESSION ] test.

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service counters ]

Description Log and Reset the fault and the service counters .
Also the counters in the fault history will be updated.

Value

Remarks On of the last steps, before ending SDS session.

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 32 Display the last errors (overview) ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

32.1 Display the last errors

32.2 Display the last system errors

32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode (SDS session active)

32.4 Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active)

Remarks

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 32.1 Display the last errors ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 32.2 Display the last system errors ]

Description Display the last system errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last errors in system mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 32.4 Display the last system errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 14
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 34 Display the top 10 error (overview) ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

34.1 Display the top 10 errors

34.2 Display the complete system top 10 errors

34.3 Relative error top 10 (not available yet)

34.4 Releative system error top 10 (not avalable yet)

Remarks

18.06.2002 15
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 34.1 Display the top 10 error ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 16
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 34.2 Display the complete system top 10 error ]

Description Display the complete system top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 17
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 35 Display the recorded errors in CAS-group ]

Description Display the recorded errors in the CAS-group

All logged errors are displayed in CAS-group order, with the items:
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 18
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 36 Display the counters of the consumables ]

Description Display the counters of the consumables

Information presented for each consumable counter:

l Consumable counter number
l Consumable counter name
l The current value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 19
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 37 Display the settings of the parameters ]

Description Display the settings of the parameters

Information presented for each parameter:

l Parameter name
l The current value
l The minimum range value
l The maximum range value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 20
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 38 Display the Service / Marketing counters ]

Description Display the amount of prints, copies and scans made on the system.

Information presented for each parameter:

l Absolute
l Since last visit

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 21
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 45 Print the system settings ]

Description Print the system settings.

The following items are selected and printed:

l The Oc· TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations).

l All BIOS settings
l The hardware configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The software configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The status report of the total system (W NT and Oc· TDS400)

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 22
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 49 Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and the
resolution ]

Description Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and resolution.

The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value

Remarks Selection: roll 1, 2 or manual feed.

18.06.2002 23
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 51 Print the service test print 51 ]

Description Print the service test print 51.

A test print is made to check the print process.
The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value Selection:
l Roll 1
l Roll 2
l Manual feed

Remarks

18.06.2002 24
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 52 Print the Demo Print ]

Description Print the Demo print.

This print contains a drawing of the Oc· TDS400 and an image of the Quick
Referece Card.

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 25
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 54 Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the

print head ]

Description Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the print head

Value This test will disable the connection from Oc· Power Logic controller to the
printhead interface PBA.
The image is generated by the printhead interface PBA.

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 26
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70 Installation Transport employee (or technician) ]

The Oc· TDS400 system (Oc· Power Logic controller, printer and scanner) is complete
adjusted in the production department. All Oc· Power Logic controller optionals are installed. If
some adjustments must be repeated during the installation, than they are enabled in the
installation menu.
The print engine can be delivered:
l With or without developer.
l With or without Compact Output Stacker.
l With adjustments enabled in the installation menu.

The tables shows the adjustments that can be enabled. You can access them by the
installation menu on the operator panel of the Printer (Menu Installation, if the tests are
enabled !!!!!).
Note: the SDS session must be stopped during the Installation test by the transporter.
Or error code "67"appears in the printer display. Solution: .

Print engine is NOT filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
2 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
3 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
4 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

Print engine is filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
2 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
3 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

18.06.2002 27
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.1 Installation technician (Overview Printer / Scanner / Oc·

Power Logic controller) ]
The configuration is complete adjusted in the production line.

Do the next test only if:

- you want to check the performance of the configuration
- you want to tune the quality to the customer's demand
- the configuration is not the same as received from the production line (e.g. other scanner or controller or ...)

Remarks:
Next actions must be executed before you start the SDS 70 tests:
1. The developer unit is filled and adjusted (Adjustment procedure new developer) .
2. The adjustment: Trailing edge position between the first and the following prints in a run
3. The adjustment: Paper cut length of the roll 1
4. The adjustment: Leading edge position for the roll 1, 2 and manual feed

Step SDS test Description

1 70.1.1 Printer installation
2 70.1.2 Scanner installation
3 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller installation

18.06.2002 28
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.1.1 Printer Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step SDS test Name Adj

1 51 Print the test print
2 15-1-001 Adjust the leading edge position (PTRINSE
15B1)
3 51 Print the test print
4 12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 1 (on request customer)
5 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1
6 51 Print the test print
7 12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 2 (on request customer)
8 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2
9 12-6-43 Print a 841 mm blank print of roll1
10 51 Print the test print manual feed
11 15-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction for
manual feed
12 49 Print the test print for the optical density
13 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity for average line / text
prints
14 04-1-004 Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints

18.06.2002 29
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.1.2 Scanner Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician
Step SDS test Description Adjustment
1 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 accuracy in
the feed direction
2 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy
in width direction (1:1)
3 09-1-002 Adjust the start timer of
the scanning
4 09-1-003 Adjust the stop timer of
the scanning
5 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position
original (in 0.1 mm)

18.06.2002 30
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step Test number Name Adjustment

1 90 System configuration
2 91 Serial number
3 93 Set the international paper
standards
4 95 Modification records (Not in
R1)
5 97 Preset the copy counter
6 98 Set the first installation
date

18.06.2002 31
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.2 Installation M&L (Overview) ]

The installation procedure for M&L is divided into 3 blocks:

l Printer installation M&L assembling: SDS test 70.2.1

l Printer installation M&L configuration: SDS test 70.2.2

l Scanner installation M&L: SDS test 70.2.3

18.06.2002 32
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.2.1 Printer Installation M&L assembling ]

Step SDS test Name Adjustment

1 73 SWDL
2 22-6-001 Initialize non volatile data printer
3 05-1-002 Adjust the sensivity of the developer
sensor (DEVCONSE 05B1)
4 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
5 54 Print the printhead check print
6 49 Testprint process
7 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity normal
8 04-1-004 Adjust the light intensity poster
9 51 Service test print
10 04-1-005 Adjust the light intensity left printhead
11 04-1-007 Adjust trhe light intensity for the right
printhead
12 04-1-008 Horizontal alignment of the left and the
middle printhead
13 04-1-009 Horizontal alignment of the middle and
the right printhead
14 04-1-010 Vertical alignment of the left printhead
15 04-1-012 Vertical alignment of the right printhead
16 51 Service test print
17 15-1-003 Adjust the image position in the width
direction for manual feed
18 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure for new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
19 12-1-053 Enable the Installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3).
(12-7-008)
20 12-1-054 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
21 15-1-004 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position. (15-7-020)
22 91.3 Set the printer serial number

Continue with sds 70.2.2

18.06.2002 33
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.2.2 Printer installation M&L configuration ]

Continuation of sds 70.2.1
Step SDS test Name Adjustment
1 12-7-008 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the trailing edge position between the
first and the following prints in a run.
2 12-7-009 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 1
3 12-7-010 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 2
4 51 Service test print
5 15-1-001 Setting the head margin
6 51 Service test print
7 12-1-004 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 1
8 51 Service test print
9 12-1-006 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 2
10 51 Service test print
11 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 1
12 51 Service test print
13 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 2
14 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
15 12-1-053 Disable installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3)
16 12-1-054 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
17 15-1-004 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position (15-7-020)
18 51 Service test print
19 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service
counters.

18.06.2002 34
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 70.2.3 Scanner Installation M&L]

Step SDS test Description Adjustment

1 22-6-021 Initialize non volatile data scanner
2 10-6-002 Maximum exposure level
3 10-7-001 CCD allignment
4 10-7-003 CCD gain
5 10-7-002 CCD focus
6 10-7-001 CCD alignment
7 10-7-004 1:1 width and right alignment

18.06.2002 35
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 71 Backup the system data ]

R1.1

Description Backup the system data.

You can choose between: All, SDS, KOSSAS.

The following actions are performed:

l On the controller PC a new directory is created in the c:\service\visits directory
with the current date (YYYYMMDD) as directory name.
Example: C:\service\visits\20010218.

Depending of the backup choice one or more files are stored in the new
directory:
l The KOS and SAS files.
l The SDS database files.
l An OTS file is generated from the SDS log database. (OTS is a file needed
with the [ STAR ] application).
l A Dumpconfig.txt file. This is an ASCII file.

The service technician must copy the files from the controller to the laptop by
the Direct Cable connection.
Copy the files to a backup diskette which stays with the machine.
(If the files are too large, compress the files with e.g. WinZip).

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test backups the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:

l Standard:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Actual customer settings (current.sas, curent.kos, current.sm,
oce9450dumpconfig.txt, adt.cfg)
l All:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,
Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)
l Settings Editor:
Backup of

18.06.2002 36
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,

Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l SDS:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Accounting:
Backup of
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)

Target:

l Controller only:
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Default dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l The default STAR directory on the service laptop
l Other dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Any directory you can browse on the service laptop

Remarks Execute a Standard backup to Other dir.

Zip this directory on your service laptop to the logfloppy for your system.
Leave this floppy at the system.

18.06.2002 37
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 71/72 Backup / Restore ] of the system software: When to do

it?
General
l The parameters of all the SDS adjustments and settings of the system are stored in the
EEPROM on the CPU pba of the printer engine.
This EEPROM is fixed on the pba with solder.

l The parameters of all the client settings (key operator and system administrator) are stored in
the xxx.kos & xxx.sas files in the controller. E.g. connectivity, passwords and the settings by
the [ Remote Logic ].

l Changes made by the SDS or the operator panel (e.g. installation menu) are stored in the
EEPROM of the printer and then copied to the SDS application in the controller.

l When the system is switched ON, the data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied to
the SDS application in the controller.

l A complete backup on a diskette contains all the system and the client settings.

When to restore the data:

After replacement of the printer CPU pba
The new EEPROM on the CPU pba has the default data.
Restore the system data from the backup diskette.
(Client settings (xxx.kos and xxx.sas) are still on the controller)

After replacement of the printhead assy (PHD + I/O pba)

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
assy.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead assy.
Then all the settings from the printhead I/O pba are stored in the EEPROM of the CPU pba in the
printer.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!
Make the service test print with the SDS 51 to check the light intensity.

After replacement if the prinhead I/O pba

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
I/O pba.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead I/O pba.
Then all the printhead settings in the printer EEPROM are stored in the EEPROM of the printhead
I/O pba.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!

18.06.2002 38
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

After replacement of only the printhead or only the printhead I/O pba from another system.
The flag setting of the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates no new hardware. So, It is not
possible to store new information in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba!
This means that the production adjustments of the printhead quality differs from the existing
printhead.
Only SDS settings, as e.g. light intensity, horizontal and vertical position can be changed.
So: NO copy / print quality guarantee.

After replacement or upgrade of the [ Power Logic Controller ]

After power on, the system data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied (restored) to the
SDS application in the controller.
Restore the client settings: xxx.kos and xxx.sas from the backup diskette

After download of the system software

The system software is downloaded in an other EEPROM.
This EEPROM is placed in a socket.
So there is no need to restore any data!

18.06.2002 39
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 72 Restore the system data ]

R1.1

Description Restore the system data.

You can do it from the diskette / harddrive of your laptop.
1. Activate the SDS test 72.
2. Select [ Subset & Target ].
3. Press the [ Start ] button.
4. In the window: Browse for folder, select the drive and / or folder where the
backup files are stored.
5. The restore function starts automatically. The files are stored in the
c:\service\restore directory of the controller. Then:
- the logdatabase is copied to c:\oce\apps\sds directory.
- the KOS/SAS settings file is copied to the KOS/SAS application directory.
- the parameters logged in the parameters table and the consumables logged
in the Consumables table (in the log database) are sent to the specific targets.

6. Wait till the [ Status ] window indicates: Completed. It take some minutes.
7. If applicable: Restore the xxx.kos and xxx.sas settings in the [ Settings Editor ]
- The [ current.kos ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as K.O, set the view to KO settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as K.O. and save the settings.
- The [ current.sas ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as S.A., set the view to SA settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as S.A. and save the settings.
8. Restart the controller.

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test restores the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:
Target:

Remarks The files for the settings editor (current.kos/sas) and scan manager (current.sm)
have to be opened, applied and saved in these applications before the settings
are loaded by the system.
Open the corresponding application and login as Service Operator.

REBOOT THE CONTROLLER AND SWITCH OFF / ON ALL THE

COMPONENTS.

18.06.2002 40
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

18.06.2002 41
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 73 Download DESCRIPTION of the system software ]

The next list gives you a step by step description how to download the system software by SDS test 73.
The data is written in an EEPROM that is put in a socket.

Warning for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

1. Make a Direct Cable Connection between the laptop and the controller.
- Click on <Cancel> in the window: Direct Cable Connection Host.
- Minimize the window: Direct Cable Connection, when you see the text: Connected via Direct
Cable on COM1.
2. Start Lotus Notes and open the TDS400 TSM.
3. Start the SDS session.
4. Select the SDS test 20-1-010 (Select the next NT start method).
Set the test to: [ diagnostic ].
5. Close the SDS session.
6. Restart the [ Oc· Power Logic ] controller.
This disconnects your Direct Cable connection!
7. Wait approximately 3 minutes to make sure that the controller is in the Diagnosis mode,
because there is no monitor.
The printer and scanner display shows: awaking controller.
8. Have the system software on site (R1.0 to R1.1 : only on diskette, see also the warning on the
top).
9. Put the CD-ROM / diskette with the new software in the laptop.
10. Activate the Direct Cable Connection (see the point 1).
11. Start the SDS session.
12. Select the SDS test 73 (Download the system software).
Check on the printer display if the printer is in the download mode. If not, than do it manually
(the three fingers trick)
13. Start the download. You can browse to the directory with the new software xxxxxxx.ofp.
Note 1: if you must download the boot and the application software, then do it one by one.
Never together!
Note 2: if the download of the boot software fails, you have to replace the EPROM / CPU pba..
14. Restart the controller when the download is finished.
15. When the controller is restarted, the printer and the scanner display shows: ready.
16. There is no need to restore any data.

The whole action takes approximately 15 minutes.

18.06.2002 42
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 73 Download the system software (Diagnosis mode only) ]

Only for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

Description For a step by step description, see .

The download of the system software is only possible in the [ Diagnosis mode ] ,
by SDS test 20-1-010 .

Downloading of several kinds of software applications:

These are:
l Printer embedded software upgrades (normal releases and patches)

The following upgrades are not possible with this test:

l Scanner software
l Oc· Power Logic controller Windows NT upgrades
l Oc· Power Logic controller Oc· TDS400 upgrades (normal releases and
patches)

Value

Remarks There is no need to restore any data.

18.06.2002 43
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 90 Set the system configuration (overview) ]

Test Name Remark

90 [ SYStem Configuration ] Each system component has his own configuration settings.
These settings can be pre-set in the sub-system NOVRAM or are
automatically determined by the component.
Activating of test 90 initialise each sub-system to find the
configuration settings that are automatically determined.
Before executing this test all components must be switched on.
The configuration of each sub-system can be
viewed/changed/overruled in the following tests:

90.1 Set the printer configuration

90.2 Set the scanner configuration

90.3 Set the controller configuration

18.06.2002 44
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 90.1 Set the printer configuration ]

Name Automatically detected

1 Printer yes
2 Number of PRD rolls yes
3 Dew preventor no
4 Copy output stacker yes
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no

18.06.2002 45
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 90.2 Set the scanner configuration ]

Name Automatically detected Opt

1 Printer yes present / n
2 Number of PRD rolls yes 1
3 Dew preventor no present / n
4 Copy output stacker yes present / n
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no present / n

18.06.2002 46
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 90.3 Set the controller configuration ]

Name Automatically detected by test 90 Opt

- -
1 Set memory size yes ....
2 Centronics PBA no present / n
3 Token ring PBA no present / n
4 Ethernet combo PBA no present / n
5 User Interface present no present / n
6 Controller type yes Oc· Power Logic c

18.06.2002 47
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 91 Set the configuration identification and serial numbers

(overview) ]

Test Name Remark

91 [ Configuration identification The system as whole has a certain configurtation identification number dependi
and serial numbers ] installed system components.
The system has a serial number total system which depends on the configuratio
system.
Each system component has his own serial number. These numbers can be pre
sub-system NOVRAM via activating test 91. All numbers are checked for possib
The configuration identification and serial numbers can be viewed / changed / o
the following tests:

91.1 Set the system configuration identification

91.2 System serial numbers

91.3 Printer serial numbers

91.4 Scanner serial numbers

91.5 Controller serial numbers

18.06.2002 48
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 91.1 Set the system configuration identification ]

18.06.2002 49
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 91.2 Set the system serial number ]

18.06.2002 50
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 91.3 Set the printer serial number ]

18.06.2002 51
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 91.4 Set the scanner serial number ]

18.06.2002 52
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 91.5 Set the controller serial number ]

Picture

The following item is available:

Item name Options
1 Controller serial number 0398XXXXX

18.06.2002 53
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 93 Set the international paper standards ]

18.06.2002 54
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 94 Display the passwords ]

18.06.2002 55
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 95 Display / set the modification records (overview) ]

Each system component has his own modification record.

95.1 Controller modifications

95.2 Printer modifications
95.3 Scanner modifications
95.4 Paper roll drawer modifications
95.5 Compact output Stacker (COS)

18.06.2002 56
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 95.1 Display / set the controller modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the controller.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the controller.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04

18.06.2002 57
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 58
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 95.2 Display / set the printer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the printer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the printer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

18.06.2002 59
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 60
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 95.3 Display / set the scanner modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the scanner.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the scanner.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

18.06.2002 61
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 62
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 95.4 Display / set the paper roll drawer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the paper roll drawer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the paper roll drawer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

18.06.2002 63
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 64
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 95.5 Display / set the COS modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the Compact Output Stacker (COS).

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the COS.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03

18.06.2002 65
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 66
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 97 Preset the copy counter and set the counting method ]

18.06.2002 67
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 98 Set the first installation date ]

18.06.2002 68
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 69
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-1-001 Enable / disable, Level 1 or Level 2 trace of the

TDS400 process into log-file ]

Description Enable / disable, Level 1 or Level 2 trace of the TDS400 process into log-file
Location of the log file: C:\oce\ngc\log\diagnostic\module.trc

Value l Level 1: Internal process communication relevant for service are logged
l Level 2: Level 1 information and insight process information relevant to R&D
support.

Remarks Reboot the controller after changing the value.

18.06.2002 70
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-1-002 The maximum size to trace the Oc· TDS400 log-file (in
byte) ]

Description The maximum size to trace the Oc· TDS400 log-file (in byte)

Value Range: 4,000 ... 1,280,000 byte

Default: 30,000

Remarks If the maximum is reached the log file will be copied to a file ... / module.old

18.06.2002 71
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-1-006 Enable / disable to trace the input data from the host
into log file ]

Description Enable / disable to trace the input data from the host into log file
(Disable logging or Enable logging)

If multiple print files are sent to the TDS400, these print files are all stored on the
Oc· Power Logic controller, using the name convention inputfile.number

This logfile can be used to check the input data including the received controll
commands (jobticket, rcf).

Value

Remarks Reboot the controller after changing the value.

18.06.2002 72
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-1-009 Set the maximum size of Windows NT log-file(s) (in

kB) ]

Description Set the maximum size of Windows NT log-file(s) (in kB)

If the maximum size id reached, the new information is added while the oldest
information is removed.

Value Range: 64 ... 4,194,240 Kbyte

Default: 512

Remarks Step sixe 64 Kbyte

18.06.2002 73
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-010 Enable / disable to trace of the WINNT events / errors

into log file(s) ]

Purpose Enable / disable to trace of the WINNT events / errors into log file(s)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 74
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-013 Disable all the tracing / logging tests of the TDS400

controller ]

Purpose Disable all the tracing / logging tests of the TDS400 controller

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 75
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-020 Save the TDS400 configuration into the configuration

log file ]

Purpose Save the TDS400 configuration into the configuration log file
The total TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations,...) os
is stored in a log file.

Check

Remarks The DumpOce9450Config.txt file is stored in ... /OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 76
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-023 Clear the diagnostic area ]

Purpose Clear the Oc· Power Logic controller diagnostic area .

All HW logfiles, Oce9450dumpconfig and functional tracing files.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 77
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-025 Clear the error and the warning log files ]

Purpose Clear the error and the warning log files

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 78
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-031 Clear the set memory and the spool areas

(only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Purpose Clear the set memory and the spool areas

(only in the Diagnosis Mode)
All temporary files, locks and directories are removed from the system.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 79
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-032 Save the total system status of WINNT and TDS400

into the status log file ]

Purpose Save the total system status of WINNT and TDS400 into the status log file .

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 80
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-039 Disable the tests: 20-6-013; 20-6-023; 20-6-025 and

remove all images and temporary files ]

Purpose Disable tests the tests: 20-6-013; 20-6-023; 20-6-025 remove all images and
temporary files.
The system is "clean".

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 81
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-9-001 Display the progress of the job within the controller ]

18.06.2002 82
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-001 Test of the SPICE PBA, image link and control link
(Only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Only in Diagnosis Mode

Use SDS test 20-1-010 (set next NT start method)

Purpose Test of the SPICE PBA, image link and control link

Check Connect the scan input and the printer output of the SPICE PBA (loop back)
together with one of the spice cables.

Result message:
OK: test OK
Failed: Indication of the failed part.

Remarks Information is logged in a logfile spiceHWTest.log under

c:\oce\ngc\log\diagnostic.

18.06.2002 83
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-002 Test of the hard disks of the Set memory ]

SDS test only for R1.1

Purpose Test of the hard disks and the adapters of the Set memory.

Check Adapter: the status of the adapter (OK/Failed) and the number of the failed
adapter is displayed.
Hard disk: the status of the hard disk (OK/Failed) and the disk number of the failed
hard disk is displayed.

Remarks The information is logged in the setMemHwTest.log file in

...../OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 84
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-6-003 Test of the parallel port of the centronics PBA

(Only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Purpose Test of the parallel port of the centronics PBA

(Only in the Diagnosis Mode)

Check Connect a Centronics cable (IEEE 1284) between the input of the Centronics PBA
(Oc· 100) and the Centronics output of the Mother board of the controller.

Remarks TEST OK
Test Failed: dirver error, cable error, unexpected error.

Information logged in the MemHwTest.log file in .../OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 85
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 20-1-010 Set the next NT start method, normal or diagnosis

mode ]

Description Set the next NT start method, normal mode or diagnosis mode

Value "normal mode",

"diagnosis mode"

Remarks The next restart after the "diagnosis mode" is set automatically to "normal mode".

Note 1: (not in R1.1)

Faster method to enter the Diagnosis mode:
On the operator panel of the printer:
off line / system / enter the password / diagnostic mode / yes and confirm the selection.
Restart the controller.

Note 2:
How to check if the controller is started in the Diagnosis mode:
- Message in printer and scanner display: waiting for controller
and no Direct Cable conection
- Start SDS session: session starts direct in the SDS mode and not in the NURS mode

18.06.2002 86
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-0-001 Error Counters ]

18.06.2002 87
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction (in
0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 88
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-1-002 Adjust the leading edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 89
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-1-003 Adjust the trailing edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the trailing edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 90
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-2-001 Check of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE

09B1) ]

Condition No original: Original not present.

Original available: Original present

Action Feed original or sheet

Check

18.06.2002 91
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-6-001 Activate the original motor (ORGMO 09M1) ]

Purpose Activate the original motor (ORGMO 09M1)

Check Transport: transport the original

Rewind: rewind the original

Remarks

18.06.2002 92
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-6-002 Activate the movement of the original ]

Purpose Check of the orignal transport in the scanner

Check Insert an original.

Activate the SDS test: The original is transported into the scanner and rewind.
The cycle will be repeated till the test is stopped.

Remarks

18.06.2002 93
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 09-9-001 Display the length of the last original (in 0.1 mm) ]

Purpose Display the length of the last original (in 0.1 mm)

Check Feed an original.

Original length: ..... in 0.1 mm

Remarks

18.06.2002 94
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 95
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-1-001 Set the lamp time out after the last original (in
seconds) ]

Description Set the lamp time out after the last original (in seconds)

Value Range: 60 ... 600

Default: 60 (seconds)

Remarks

18.06.2002 96
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position original - copy (in 0.1 mm)
]

Description Adjust the "0"-line position original - copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -150 ... 300

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustsment procedure: 1:! width and right alignment

18.06.2002 97
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy in the width direction (1:1)

(in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the image accuracy in the width direction (1:1) (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure: 1:1 width and right allignment

18.06.2002 98
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-1-004 Adjust the light level of the exposure lamp (in steps of
5 %) ]

Description Adjust the light level of the exposure lamp (in steps of 5 %)

Value Range: 50 ... 60

Default: 55

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 99
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-2-001 Check of the exposure sensor (SCAEXPOSE

10PBA04) ]

Condition Check the function of the exposure sensor (SCAEXPOSE 10PBA04)

Action

Check Check the function of the sensor with a flash light.

18.06.2002 100
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-6-002 Check the functioning of the exposure lamp (SCALA

10E1) ]

Purpose Check the functioning of the exposure lamp (SCALA 10E1)

Check Lamp on: light output is placed at 100%

Remarks

18.06.2002 101
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-7-001 Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment

Value Allignment right: 100 ... 1100 (pixels)

Normal value: 600
Allignment left: 6400 - 7400 (pixels)
Normal value: 6900

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD alignment

18.06.2002 102
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-7-002 Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus

Value Search area right: between 580 - 620 CCD's

Search area left: between 6880 ... 6920 CCD's

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD focus

18.06.2002 103
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-7-003 Adjustment procedure of the CCD maximum exposure

level ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD maximum exposure level

Value

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD gain

18.06.2002 104
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 10-7-004 Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right

alignment ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right alignment

Value

Remarks Adjustment procedure: 1:1 and right alignment

18.06.2002 105
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 11-6-001 Check of the control bus between CPU-IO and the

IMAGE- PROC PBA ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Check of the control bus between CPU-IO and the IMAGE- PROC PBA of the
scanner

Check Image PROC OK

Image PROC NOT OK

Remarks

18.06.2002 106
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-0-001 Error counters of the scanner ]

18.06.2002 107
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-1-002 Display the software release number of the scanner ]

Description Display the software release number of the scanner firmpack.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 108
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-6-021 Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the scanner ]

Purpose Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the scanner.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 109
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-6-024 Turn ON the scanner into sleep mode ]

Purpose Turn ON the scanner into sleep mode

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 110
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 01-8-001 Display / set the life time of the photoconductor (in

linear meters)]

Description Display / Reset the life time of the photoconductor in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 111
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 02-6-001 Activate the charge unit HV-power supply (CHSUPEN

22PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developing unit to prevent system polution.

Purpose To check the correct function of the charging (22PBA04 - CHGHV).

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP5

CHGSUP ON: 0,9 to 1,1V DC

Remarks Active functions during this test:

DRIMORL ON
CHGSUPEN ON
CHGERA ON
CONFAN ON
CONBIAS ON

18.06.2002 112
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 02-8-001 Display / set the life time of the charge corona wire (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the charge corona wire in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 113
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 02-8-002 Display / set the life time of the charge corona unit (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the charge corona unit in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks Grid wires are not replaced by the technician. Only the compleet unit.

18.06.2002 114
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 115
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints ]

Description Light intensity setting of the printhead LEDs for line / text prints.
Display / Set

Value Range: 10 ... 168

Default: 36

Remarks Adjustment description

18.06.2002 116
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-004 Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints

(poster mode) ]

Description Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints (poster mode)

Value Range: 4 ... 40

Default: 12

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 117
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-005 Adjust the light intensity of the left print head unit ]

Description Adjust the light intensity of the left print head unit

Value Range: 50 ... 200

Default: 100

Remarks Adjustment description

18.06.2002 118
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-007 Adjust the light intensity of the right print head unit ]

Description Adjust the light intensity of the right print head unit

Value Range: 50 ... 200

Default: 100

Remarks Adjustment description

18.06.2002 119
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-008 Adjust the horizontal alignment of the left and middle

print head ]

Description Adjust the alignment between the left and middle print head.
The left print head (PHD1) is shifted.

Value Range: 1 ... 510

Default: 1
30 points is about 1mm shift

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 120
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-009 Adjust the horizontal alignment of the right and

middle print head ]

Description Adjust the horizontal alignment between the right and middle print head.
The right side print head is shifted.

Value Range: 1 ... 123

Default: 1
30 points is about 1mm shift

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 121
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-010 Adjust the vertical alignment of the left print head ]

Description Adjust the vertical alignment of the print head

Value Range; 0 ... 126

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 122
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-011 Adjust the vertical alignment of the middle print head ]

Description Adjust the vertical alignment of the middle print head

Value Range: 0 ... 510

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 123
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-012 Adjust the vertical alignment of the right print head ]

Description Adjust the vertical alignment of the right print head

Value Range: 0 ... 126

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 124
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-016 Enable / disable the encoder in combination with test

54 ]

Description Enable / disable the encoder in combination with test print 54

Value 0 = disable
1 = enable

Remarks The settings are not stored in the eeprom.

18.06.2002 125
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-017 Enable / disable Pico ]

Description Enable / disable the Pico

Value disable
enable
Default: enable

Remarks Compensation light output for every LED.

18.06.2002 126
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-1-018 Display the firmpack version of the Printhead interface

]

Description Display the current software version of the Printhead interface

Value as a version number e.g. 1,2,3

Remarks

18.06.2002 127
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-9-001 Display the temperatuur of the print head NTC

(PHDNTC 04R1) in 0.1 ·C ]

Description Display the temperature and elapsed time of the print head NTC (PHDNTC 04R1) in 0.1 ·C

Value Cold printer: e.g 210 in 0.1 ·C

In RUN mode:

Remarks Test active during a run of 3 (test) prints. Result is displayed.

18.06.2002 128
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-9-002 Display the print head assembly status ]

Description Display the print head assembly status

Value LVL_ PHD_ASSEMBLY_INSTALLED : Correct installed printhead interface.

LVL_PHD_BLANK: Print head interface PBA installed without adjustment.
LVL_PHD_ADJUSTMENT_SUCCESFUL: Print head successfull passed the print head tool
LVL_PHD_ADJUSTMENT_FAILED: Print head failed to pass the print head tool
LVL_PHD_ADJUSTMENT_STARTED: Print head enters the tool but the adjustment procedure is n
finished.

Remarks

18.06.2002 129
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 04-9-003 Display the contents of the print head FPGA status

register of the last print ]

Description Display the contents of the print head FPGA status register of the last print.

Value LVL_PRINTHEAD_OK:
LVL_PRINTHEAD_ERROR:

Remarks In case no print is made after switching on the printer the FPGA status word
should be 83.
In casea print is made the FPGA status word should be 87.

18.06.2002 130
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 131
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-1-001 Adjust the set-point of the developer mixture (in mV) ]

Description Show the reference value (in Volt) for the developer mixture.

Value Range: 0 ... 15.000

Default: 8.000

Remarks 1. The set-point value of the sensor is adjusted by the factory.

2. The value is adjusted in service by SDS test 05-7-001: adjustment new developer

18.06.2002 132
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-1-002 Adjust the sensivity of the developer sensor

(DEVCONSE 05B1) (in mV) ]

Description Shows the sensitivity value (mV) of the toner sensor.

Value Range: 100 ... 1000

Default: 300

Remarks 1. The sensitivity value of the sensor is adjusted by the factory.

2. The value is adjusted in service by SDS test 05-7-001: adjustment new developer

18.06.2002 133
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-1-004 Enable / disable in the Installation test: Adjustment

procedure new developer ]

Description Enable / disable the Installation test: Adjustment procedure new developer.
If enabled the test 05-7-001 is activated during the installation.

Value Disable
Enable

Remarks The parameter is set automatically to 'disabled' after the installation test is
activated.

18.06.2002 134
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-2-001 Check the toner level switch of the supply unit

(DEVTONSUPSW 05S1) ]

Warning: Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developer unit to prevent the system for
pollution.

Condition Toner unit is full.

SDS message: toner present

Action Place a (strong) magnet against the outside of the [ reed ] switch

Check Check the SDS message: toner not present

18.06.2002 135
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-4-001 Activate the HV-power supply for the bias and the
clean unit (DEVSUPEN 22PBA04) ]

Purpose To check the correct function of the: (22PBA04)

l bias high voltage BIASHV
l cleaning high voltage CLEANHV

Check On 22PBA04:
DEVBIASHV TP2 to TP1: -600V DC
DEVCLEHV TP2 to TB2: -460V DC

Remarks Check DEVBIASHV on the developer roller.

Check DEVCLEHV on the developer unit.

18.06.2002 136
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-6-001 Recover the too low toner level of the developer ]

Caution
During the test, the following functions are active: charge, developer, drive, ozone exhaust fan .

Purpose Recover the toner concentration while no prints are made.

The toner is supplied when it is necessary. This is measured by the [ Toner
concentration sensor ] (DEVCONSE 05B1).

Check Check the toner concentration by the print quality. Use the test print 51.

Remarks The control timing is the same like a normal print run.
The test automatically stops after 10 minutes.
After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

18.06.2002 137
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-6-002 Recover the developer layer equal in the developer

unit ]

Warning
Before you start the test, check first the correct function of the charging supply (CHGSUPEN)
and the bias supply (DEVSUPEN).
During the test, the toner concentration limits are not checked.
There are no errors / warnings reported.

Caution
During the test, the following functions are activated:
charge, drive, developer unit, ozone fan.

Purpose Divide the developer equal in the developer unit while no prints are made and no
toner is supplied.

Check Open the top cover of the developer unit and check if the developer is divided
equal in the whole unit.

Remarks The control timing is the same like a normal print run.
The test automatically stops after 10 minutes.
After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

18.06.2002 138
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-6-003 Activate the toner supply motor (DEVTONSUPMO

05M1) ]

Purpose Check in the toner reservoir the operating of:

- the toner supply motor DEVTONSUPMO (05M1) and
- the toner supply switch DEVSUPSW (05S1)

Check Check:
- if the supply motor runs
- if the supply switch indicates information
- [ toner present ]
- [ toner not present ]

Remarks The test automatically stops after 10 seconds.

18.06.2002 139
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer ]

Warning
Only run the test with new developer.

Caution
During the test, the following functions are active: charge, drive, developer, ozone exhaust
fan.

Purpose To set the concentration set-point for the concentration sensor (DEVCONSE
05B1) for new developer.

Check No check

Action Conform the description: adjustment new developer

Remarks The test takes about 4 minutes.

After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

This test is also part of the installation test.

18.06.2002 140
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-8-001 Display / set the life time of the developer (in linear
meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the developer in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks The developer installation will automatically set this value to 0.

18.06.2002 141
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 05-9-001 Display the values of the toner sensor (DEVCONSE

05B1) ]

Description
Display the values of:
the set-point of the developer concentration sensor DEVCONSE 05B1.
the sensitivity value of the toner concentration sensor DEVTONSE 05B1

Display
DEVCONSP
DEVCONSE (in mV)
Elapsed time

Remark
The test automatically stops after 10 minutes.
After the test is stopped, the ozone exhaust fan remains active during 6 seconds.

18.06.2002 142
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 06-6-001 Activate the HV-power supply of the transfer unit

(TRASUPEN 22PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the magnet roller gear of the developer unit to prevent toner polution.
Turn it also a 3/4 revolution clockwise.

Purpose To check the correct function of the transfer (22PBA04 - TRAHV)

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP4

TRASUP ON: -0,65 to -0,4V DC

Remarks Active functions during this test:

TRASUPEN ON (after 3 sec. and beeper on)
PTRSEPSUPEN ON (after 3.3 sec.)
CHGERA ON
DRIMORL ON
CONFAN ON

18.06.2002 143
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 06-8-001 Display / set the life time of the transfer corona wire
(in linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the lifetime of the transfer corona wire in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 144
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 07-4-001 Activate the led's of the discharge unit (DCH

07PBA02) ]

Purpose To check the led's of the discharge function (DCH 07PBA02)

Condition -

Check Visual check

18.06.2002 145
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 07-8-001 Display / set the life time of the cleaning blade (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the lifetime of the cleaning blade in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 146
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 08-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 147
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 08-4-001 Activate the left and right fuser fans (FUSFANL/R

08M1/2) ]

Purpose To check the left and right fuser fan (FUSFANL/R)

FIXFANL/R ON/OFF

Condition -

Check Visual check

18.06.2002 148
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 08-6-001 Activate the front and rear fuser heaters (FUSHEF/R

08E1/2) ]

Purpose To check the front and rear fuser heater (FUSHEF/R).

Check Indication of the NTC1 ... 5 and NTCREFL in ·C

Remarks The test stops after 1 min.

18.06.2002 149
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 08-9-001 Display the values of the fuser NTC 1-5,

absorber NTC 6 (FUSNTC1-6 08R1-6) (in 0.1 ·C) ]

Purpose Display the value of the fuser NTC 1... 5 and NTCREFL in in 0.1 ·C

Check Indication of the NTC1 ... 5 and NTCREFL in 0.1 ·C

Remarks Make a run of copies.

18.06.2002 150
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-0-002 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 151
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-001 Installation test: Adjust the leading edge position of

roll 1 and roll 2
(in 0.1 mm)]

Description Adjust the leading edge position of roll 1 and 2 (in 0.1 mm) during the installation
of the TDS400.

Value Range: -100 ... 0

Default: 0

Remarks This test is part of the installation test.

Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 152
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1 (in 0.1
mm) ]

Description Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Increased value: the image moves to the left.

Decreased value: the image moves to the right.

Remarks Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 153
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-004 Adjust the cutting length for a new (approx. 175mtr.)

roll 1 (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 1(in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -1000 ... +1000

Default: -120 (in 0.1 mm)
Increase value: paper length shorter
Decease value: paper length longer

Remarks Start with a new roll. The tolerances for a used roll are always decreasing.

18.06.2002 154
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-006 Adjust the cutting length for a new (approx. 175mtr.)

roll 2 (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 2 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -1000 ... +1000

Default: -120
Increase value: paper length shorter
Decease value: paper length longer

Remarks Start with a new roll. The tolerances for a used roll are always decreasing.

18.06.2002 155
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2 (in 0.1
mm) ]

Description Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 156
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-050 Adjust the cutting length for prints longer than A0 (in
0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the cutting length for prints longer than A0 (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: 0 ... 38

Default: 19

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 157
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 1

(on request customer) (in mm)

Description Adjust the cutting length for prints longer than A0 (in mm)

Value Range: -10 ... + 10

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 158
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 2

(on request customer) (in mm) ]

Description Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 2 (on request customer) (in
mm)

Value Range: -10 ... + 10

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 159
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-053 Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment

procedure leading edge position for the roll 1 and roll 2
(PRDLEADSE 12B3) ]

Description Enable / disable in the Installation test: Adjustment procedure leading edge
position for the roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3).

Value

Remarks The test 12-7-008 is also part of the installation test.

18.06.2002 160
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-1-054 Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment

procedure of the paper cut length roll 1 ]

Description Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment procedure of the paper cut
length roll 1

Value

Remarks Test 12-7-009 is also part of the installation test.

18.06.2002 161
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-003 Check of the knife sensor at the right hand side

(PRDKNIPOSSER 12B3) ]

Description Check of the knife sensor at the right hand side (PRDKNIPOSSER 12B3)

Value Active: knife stopped at the right hand side.

Not active: knife stopped at the left hand side.

Remarks

18.06.2002 162
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-004 Check of the knife sensor at the left hand side

PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1) ]

Description Check of the knife sensor at the left hand side (PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1)

Value Active: knife stopped at the left hand side.

Not active: knife stopped at the right hand side.

Remarks

18.06.2002 163
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-005 Check of the lead sensor (PRDLEADSE 12B3) ]

Description Check of the lead sensor (PRDLEADSE 12B3)

Value Paper present: sensor activated.

Paper not present: sensor not activated.

Remarks

18.06.2002 164
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-006 Check of the door switch of the roll unit

(PRDDOORSW1 12S1) ]

Description Check of the door switch of the (upper) roll unit (PRDDOORSW1 12S1)

Value Door closed

Door open

Remarks

18.06.2002 165
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-009 Check of the paper roll 1 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE1

12B4) ]

Description Check of the paper roll 1 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE1 12B4)

Value Pulsdisk in the upper roll unit.

Active: upper roll not empty

Not active: upper roll empty

Remarks

18.06.2002 166
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-010 Check of the lower door switch of the roll unit

(PRDDOORSW2 12S2) ]

Description Check of the door switch of the (lower) roll unit (PRDDOORSW2 12S2)

Value Door closed

Door open

Remarks

18.06.2002 167
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-2-011 Check of the paper roll 2 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE2

12B5) ]

Description Check of the paper roll 2 empty sensor (PRDRUNSE2 12B5)

Value Pulsdisk in the lower roll unit.

Active: lower roll not empty

Not active: lower roll empty

Remarks

18.06.2002 168
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-6-001 Activate the knife motor (PRDKNIMO 12M3) ]

Purpose Activate the knife motor (PRDKNIMO 12M3)

Check Test active: knife transported to the other side of the roll unit.
As the knife sensor is activated the test is stopped.

Remarks

18.06.2002 169
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-6-002 Activate the paper feed motor of roll 1 (PRDFEDMO1

12M1)]

Purpose Activate the paper feed motor of roll 1 (PRDFEDMO1 12M1)

Check Functional test of the upper feed motor.

Options:
- Forward normal mode
- Backward normal mode

Remarks

18.06.2002 170
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-6-042 Activate the paper feed motor of roll 2 (PRDFEDMO2

12M2) ]

Purpose Activate the paper feed motor of roll 2 (PRDFEDMO2 12M2)

Check Functional test of the lower feed motor.

Options:
- Forward normal mode
- Backward normal mode

Remarks

18.06.2002 171
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-6-043 Cut a 841 mm sheet of roll 1 ]

Purpose Cut a 841 mm sheet of roll 1

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 172
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-7-008 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of the trailing

edge position between the first and the following prints in a run

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between the first and the
following prints in a run.
Only when the paper is started and PDRLEADSE 12B3 is free.

Value The value is stored in the SDS test 12-1-001

Remarks This test is also part of the installation test.

Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 173
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1 ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1

Value

Remarks This test is part of the Transporter installation test.

18.06.2002 174
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-7-010 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 2 ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 2

Value

Remarks Also used for the transporter

18.06.2002 175
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-9-001 Display the length of the last print (in 0.1 mm) ]

Purpose Display the length of the last print (in 0.1 mm)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 176
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 12-9-003 Display the measured time to cut the last print

material (in msec) ]

Purpose Display the measured time to cut the last print material (in msec)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 177
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-0-002 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 178
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-1-001 Adjust the leading edge position (PTRSYNSE 15B2)

for the roll1, roll 2 and manual feed (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge position (PTRSYNSE 15B2) for the roll 1, roll 2 and
manual feed (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -340 ... 260

Default: 0 ( x 0.1 mm)

Remarks Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 179
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction, for the manual
feed (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the image in the width direction, for the manual feed (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0 ( x 0.1 mm)

Remarks

18.06.2002 180
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-1-004 Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment of

the leading edge position (PTRSYNSE 15B2)]

Description Enable / disable in the installation test: Adjustment of the leading edge position.

Value The calculated value is stored in the SDS test 15-1-001

Remarks This test is set to "disable" after the installation test is activated.
This test is part of the installation test.
Description adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 181
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-1-005 Adjust the leading edge position (on request

customer) (in mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge position (on request customer) (in mm)

Value Range: 0 ... 10

Default: 0

Remarks This adjustment has no influence on the test prints made by SDS.

18.06.2002 182
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-2-001 Check the paper input sensor (PTRINSE 15B1) ]

Condition Paper present: sensor activated.

Paper not present: sensor not activated

Action Feed copy material

Check

18.06.2002 183
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-2-003 Check the switch of the manual feed table

(PTRDEFSW 15S1) ]

Condition Check the switch of the manual feed table (PTRDEFSW 15S1)

Active: manual feed table in the lower position.

Not active: manual feed table not in the lower position.

Action Lower the manual feed table.

Check

18.06.2002 184
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-2-004 Check the synchronisation sensor (PTRSYNSE 15B2) ]

Condition Check the synchronisation sensor (PTRSYNSE 15B2)

Paper present: sensor detects copy material.

Paper not present: sensor detects no copy material.

Action

Check

18.06.2002 185
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-2-005 Check the paper output sensor of the fuser

(PTROUTSE 15B3) ]

Condition Check the paper output sensor of the fuser (PTROUTSE 15B3)

Paper present: sensor detects copy material.

Paper not present: sensor detects no copy material.

Action

Check

18.06.2002 186
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-4-001 Check the clutch of the syncronisation roller

(PTRSYNCL 15Y1) ]

Purpose Check the clutch of the syncronisation roller (PTRSYNCL 15Y1)

Condition l -

Check l -

18.06.2002 187
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-6-001 Activate the HV power supply of the separation unit

(PTRSEPSUPEN 12PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developing unit to prevent system polution.
Turn it a 1/2 revolution counter clockwise.

Purpose To check the correct function of the separation (22PBA04 - PTRSEPHV).

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP3

PTRSEPSUPEN ON: 0,65 to 0,9V rms

Remarks Active functions during this test:

PTRSEPSUPEN ON
DRIMORL ON
CHGERA ON
CONFAN ON

18.06.2002 188
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 15-8-001 Display / set the life time of the separation corona wire
(in linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the lifetime of the separation corona wire in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 9,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 189
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 19-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 190
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 19-2-001 Check the flap sensor of the compact output stacker

(DELFLAPPOSSE 19B1) ]

Condition Check the flap sensor of the compact output stacker (DELFLAPPOSSE 19B1)

Active: No original: Flap in the home position.

Not active: Flap no in the home position

Action

Check

18.06.2002 191
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 19-4-001 Activate the flap motor of the compact output stacker

(DELFLAPMO 19M1) ]

Purpose To check the flap motor of the Copy Output Stacker (DELFLAPMO 19M1)
l DELFLAPMO ON/OFF

Condition l -

Check l Visual check if motor is active / not active

18.06.2002 192
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-0-001 Error counters of the printer ]

18.06.2002 193
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-1-001 Display the software release number of the printer ]

Description Display the software release number of the printer firmpack.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 194
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-1-006 Display the release number of the boot software of the

printer ]

Description Display the release number of the boot software of the printer
Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 195
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-1-046 Display the release number of the controller software ]

Description Display the release number of the controller software.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 999999

Remarks

18.06.2002 196
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-1-050 Display / set the printer display for languages with a

special character set ]

From R1.2
Set the SDS test to '1' to display the Polish and de Czech language on the operator display.

Description Display / set the printer display to include the special character set for the Polish
and the Czech language.

Value Range: 0 or 1
Default: 0
0 = universal font
1 = universal font with the special character set for the Polish and the Czech
language.

Remarks For R1.1: no SDS test is available and the old panel display can not present the
special character set.
For R1.2: only the new display in the operator panel can display the special
character set. See the partslist.

18.06.2002 197
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-1-051 Display / set the scanner display for languages with a

special character set ]

From R1.2
Set the SDS test to '1' to display the Polish and de Czech language on the operator display.

Description Display / set the scanner display to include the special character set for the
Polish and the Czech language.

Value Range: 0 or 1
Default: 0
0 = universal font or Japanese language
1 = universal font with the special character set for the Polish and the Czech
language.

Remarks For R1.1: no SDS test is available and the old panel display can not present the
special character set.
For R1.2: only the new display in the operator panel can display the special
character set. See the partslist.

18.06.2002 198
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-4-001 Activate the ozone fan (OZFAN 22M1) ]

Purpose To check the ozone fan (OZFAN 22M1)

l CONFAN ON/OFF

Condition l -

Check l Visual check if fan is active / not active

18.06.2002 199
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-4-002 Activate the safety releay (MAINSYNC 22PBA02) ]

Purpose To check the safety releay (MAINSYNC 22PBA02)

l CONSARL ON/OFF

Condition l -

Check l Visual check if relay active / not active

18.06.2002 200
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-6-001 Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the printer ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the printer.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 201
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-6-006 Activate the copy counter ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Activate the copy counter (22Y1)

Check The counter makes one pulse.

Visual check of the counter.

Remarks The test uses an input line on the board to check if the counter is connected.

18.06.2002 202
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-6-007 Switch ON the low voltage supply (22PBA02) ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Switch ON the low voltage power supply (22PBA02)

Check Measue the output voltages:

Remarks

18.06.2002 203
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-8-001 Display / set the total amount of material processed by

the printer (in linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the total amount of material processed by the printer in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Remarks Activated in SDS test 97

18.06.2002 204
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 22-9-002 Display the power supply frequency (in 0,1 Hz) ]

Purpose Display the power supply frequency (in 0,1 Hz)

The frequency is measured on the CPU IO PBA of the printer by the CONMAINSII
interupt.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 205
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 23-6-001 Activate the drive motor (DRIMO 23M1) ]

Warning
Activating the Main Drive Motor too long can cause OPC pollution.

Purpose Activate the drive motor (DRIMO 23M1)

(Test stops after 1 minute)

Check Visual check of the motor

Remarks

18.06.2002 206
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS

[ 25-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 207
[ 30 Reset PE ]
Reset permanent error.

You can see a permanent error only in the [ SDS SESSION ] test.
The reset button for a permanent error is also available in [ SDS SESSION ] test.
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service counters ]

Description Log and Reset the fault and the service counters .
Also the counters in the fault history will be updated.

Value

Remarks On of the last steps, before ending SDS session.

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 32 Display the last errors (overview) ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

32.1 Display the last errors

32.2 Display the last system errors

32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode (SDS session active)

32.4 Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active)

Remarks

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 32.1 Display the last errors ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 32.2 Display the last system errors ]

Description Display the last system errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last errors in system mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 32.4 Display the last system errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 34 Display the top 10 error (overview) ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

34.1 Display the top 10 errors

34.2 Display the complete system top 10 errors

34.3 Relative error top 10 (not available yet)

34.4 Releative system error top 10 (not avalable yet)

Remarks

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 34.1 Display the top 10 error ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 34.2 Display the complete system top 10 error ]

Description Display the complete system top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 35 Display the recorded errors in CAS-group ]

Description Display the recorded errors in the CAS-group

All logged errors are displayed in CAS-group order, with the items:
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 36 Display the counters of the consumables ]

Description Display the counters of the consumables

Information presented for each consumable counter:

l Consumable counter number
l Consumable counter name
l The current value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 37 Display the settings of the parameters ]

Description Display the settings of the parameters

Information presented for each parameter:

l Parameter name
l The current value
l The minimum range value
l The maximum range value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 30-39 Analysis

[ 38 Display the Service / Marketing counters ]

Description Display the amount of prints, copies and scans made on the system.

Information presented for each parameter:

l Absolute
l Since last visit

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 14
[ 45 Print the system settings ]

Description Print the system settings.

The following items are selected and printed:

l The Oc· TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations).

l All BIOS settings
l The hardware configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The software configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The status report of the total system (W NT and Oc· TDS400)

Value

Remarks
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 40-69 System

[ 49 Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and the
resolution ]

Description Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and resolution.

The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value

Remarks Selection: roll 1, 2 or manual feed.

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 40-69 System

[ 51 Print the service test print 51 ]

Description Print the service test print 51.

A test print is made to check the print process.
The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value Selection:
l Roll 1
l Roll 2
l Manual feed

Remarks

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 40-69 System

[ 52 Print the Demo Print ]

Description Print the Demo print.

This print contains a drawing of the Oc· TDS400 and an image of the Quick
Referece Card.

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 40-69 System

[ 54 Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the

print head ]

Description Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the print head

Value This test will disable the connection from Oc· Power Logic controller to the
printhead interface PBA.
The image is generated by the printhead interface PBA.

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 5
[ 70 Installation Transport employee (or technician) ]
The Oc· TDS400 system (Oc· Power Logic controller, printer and scanner) is complete
adjusted in the production department. All Oc· Power Logic controller optionals are installed. If
some adjustments must be repeated during the installation, than they are enabled in the
installation menu.
The print engine can be delivered:
l With or without developer.
l With or without Compact Output Stacker.
l With adjustments enabled in the installation menu.

The tables shows the adjustments that can be enabled. You can access them by the
installation menu on the operator panel of the Printer (Menu Installation, if the tests are
enabled !!!!!).
Note: the SDS session must be stopped during the Installation test by the transporter.
Or error code "67"appears in the printer display. Solution: .

Print engine is NOT filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
2 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
3 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
4 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

Print engine is filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
2 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
3 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.1 Installation technician (Overview Printer / Scanner / Oc·

Power Logic controller) ]
The configuration is complete adjusted in the production line.

Do the next test only if:

- you want to check the performance of the configuration
- you want to tune the quality to the customer's demand
- the configuration is not the same as received from the production line (e.g. other scanner or controller or ...)

Remarks:
Next actions must be executed before you start the SDS 70 tests:
1. The developer unit is filled and adjusted (Adjustment procedure new developer) .
2. The adjustment: Trailing edge position between the first and the following prints in a run
3. The adjustment: Paper cut length of the roll 1
4. The adjustment: Leading edge position for the roll 1, 2 and manual feed

Step SDS test Description

1 70.1.1 Printer installation
2 70.1.2 Scanner installation
3 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller installation

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.1.1 Printer Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step SDS test Name Adj

1 51 Print the test print
2 15-1-001 Adjust the leading edge position (PTRINSE
15B1)
3 51 Print the test print
4 12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 1 (on request customer)
5 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1
6 51 Print the test print
7 12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 2 (on request customer)
8 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2
9 12-6-43 Print a 841 mm blank print of roll1
10 51 Print the test print manual feed
11 15-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction for
manual feed
12 49 Print the test print for the optical density
13 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity for average line / text
prints
14 04-1-004 Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.1.2 Scanner Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician
Step SDS test Description Adjustment
1 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 accuracy in
the feed direction
2 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy
in width direction (1:1)
3 09-1-002 Adjust the start timer of
the scanning
4 09-1-003 Adjust the stop timer of
the scanning
5 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position
original (in 0.1 mm)

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step Test number Name Adjustment

1 90 System configuration
2 91 Serial number
3 93 Set the international paper
standards
4 95 Modification records (Not in
R1)
5 97 Preset the copy counter
6 98 Set the first installation
date

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.2 Installation M&L (Overview) ]

The installation procedure for M&L is divided into 3 blocks:

l Printer installation M&L assembling: SDS test 70.2.1

l Printer installation M&L configuration: SDS test 70.2.2

l Scanner installation M&L: SDS test 70.2.3

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.2.1 Printer Installation M&L assembling ]

Step SDS test Name Adjustment

1 73 SWDL
2 22-6-001 Initialize non volatile data printer
3 05-1-002 Adjust the sensivity of the developer
sensor (DEVCONSE 05B1)
4 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
5 54 Print the printhead check print
6 49 Testprint process
7 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity normal
8 04-1-004 Adjust the light intensity poster
9 51 Service test print
10 04-1-005 Adjust the light intensity left printhead
11 04-1-007 Adjust trhe light intensity for the right
printhead
12 04-1-008 Horizontal alignment of the left and the
middle printhead
13 04-1-009 Horizontal alignment of the middle and
the right printhead
14 04-1-010 Vertical alignment of the left printhead
15 04-1-012 Vertical alignment of the right printhead
16 51 Service test print
17 15-1-003 Adjust the image position in the width
direction for manual feed
18 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure for new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
19 12-1-053 Enable the Installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3).
(12-7-008)
20 12-1-054 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
21 15-1-004 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position. (15-7-020)
22 91.3 Set the printer serial number

Continue with sds 70.2.2

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.2.2 Printer installation M&L configuration ]

Continuation of sds 70.2.1
Step SDS test Name Adjustment
1 12-7-008 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the trailing edge position between the
first and the following prints in a run.
2 12-7-009 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 1
3 12-7-010 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 2
4 51 Service test print
5 15-1-001 Setting the head margin
6 51 Service test print
7 12-1-004 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 1
8 51 Service test print
9 12-1-006 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 2
10 51 Service test print
11 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 1
12 51 Service test print
13 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 2
14 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
15 12-1-053 Disable installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3)
16 12-1-054 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
17 15-1-004 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position (15-7-020)
18 51 Service test print
19 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service
counters.

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 70.2.3 Scanner Installation M&L]

Step SDS test Description Adjustment

1 22-6-021 Initialize non volatile data scanner
2 10-6-002 Maximum exposure level
3 10-7-001 CCD allignment
4 10-7-003 CCD gain
5 10-7-002 CCD focus
6 10-7-001 CCD alignment
7 10-7-004 1:1 width and right alignment

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 71 Backup the system data ]

R1.1

Description Backup the system data.

You can choose between: All, SDS, KOSSAS.

The following actions are performed:

l On the controller PC a new directory is created in the c:\service\visits directory
with the current date (YYYYMMDD) as directory name.
Example: C:\service\visits\20010218.

Depending of the backup choice one or more files are stored in the new
directory:
l The KOS and SAS files.
l The SDS database files.
l An OTS file is generated from the SDS log database. (OTS is a file needed
with the [ STAR ] application).
l A Dumpconfig.txt file. This is an ASCII file.

The service technician must copy the files from the controller to the laptop by
the Direct Cable connection.
Copy the files to a backup diskette which stays with the machine.
(If the files are too large, compress the files with e.g. WinZip).

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test backups the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:

l Standard:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Actual customer settings (current.sas, curent.kos, current.sm,
oce9450dumpconfig.txt, adt.cfg)
l All:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,
Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)
l Settings Editor:
Backup of

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,

Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l SDS:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Accounting:
Backup of
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)

Target:

l Controller only:
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Default dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l The default STAR directory on the service laptop
l Other dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Any directory you can browse on the service laptop

Remarks Execute a Standard backup to Other dir.

Zip this directory on your service laptop to the logfloppy for your system.
Leave this floppy at the system.

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 71/72 Backup / Restore ] of the system software: When to do

it?
General
l The parameters of all the SDS adjustments and settings of the system are stored in the
EEPROM on the CPU pba of the printer engine.
This EEPROM is fixed on the pba with solder.

l The parameters of all the client settings (key operator and system administrator) are stored in
the xxx.kos & xxx.sas files in the controller. E.g. connectivity, passwords and the settings by
the [ Remote Logic ].

l Changes made by the SDS or the operator panel (e.g. installation menu) are stored in the
EEPROM of the printer and then copied to the SDS application in the controller.

l When the system is switched ON, the data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied to
the SDS application in the controller.

l A complete backup on a diskette contains all the system and the client settings.

When to restore the data:

After replacement of the printer CPU pba
The new EEPROM on the CPU pba has the default data.
Restore the system data from the backup diskette.
(Client settings (xxx.kos and xxx.sas) are still on the controller)

After replacement of the printhead assy (PHD + I/O pba)

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
assy.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead assy.
Then all the settings from the printhead I/O pba are stored in the EEPROM of the CPU pba in the
printer.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!
Make the service test print with the SDS 51 to check the light intensity.

After replacement if the prinhead I/O pba

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
I/O pba.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead I/O pba.
Then all the printhead settings in the printer EEPROM are stored in the EEPROM of the printhead
I/O pba.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

After replacement of only the printhead or only the printhead I/O pba from another system.
The flag setting of the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates no new hardware. So, It is not
possible to store new information in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba!
This means that the production adjustments of the printhead quality differs from the existing
printhead.
Only SDS settings, as e.g. light intensity, horizontal and vertical position can be changed.
So: NO copy / print quality guarantee.

After replacement or upgrade of the [ Power Logic Controller ]

After power on, the system data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied (restored) to the
SDS application in the controller.
Restore the client settings: xxx.kos and xxx.sas from the backup diskette

After download of the system software

The system software is downloaded in an other EEPROM.
This EEPROM is placed in a socket.
So there is no need to restore any data!

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 72 Restore the system data ]

R1.1

Description Restore the system data.

You can do it from the diskette / harddrive of your laptop.
1. Activate the SDS test 72.
2. Select [ Subset & Target ].
3. Press the [ Start ] button.
4. In the window: Browse for folder, select the drive and / or folder where the
backup files are stored.
5. The restore function starts automatically. The files are stored in the
c:\service\restore directory of the controller. Then:
- the logdatabase is copied to c:\oce\apps\sds directory.
- the KOS/SAS settings file is copied to the KOS/SAS application directory.
- the parameters logged in the parameters table and the consumables logged
in the Consumables table (in the log database) are sent to the specific targets.

6. Wait till the [ Status ] window indicates: Completed. It take some minutes.
7. If applicable: Restore the xxx.kos and xxx.sas settings in the [ Settings Editor ]
- The [ current.kos ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as K.O, set the view to KO settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as K.O. and save the settings.
- The [ current.sas ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as S.A., set the view to SA settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as S.A. and save the settings.
8. Restart the controller.

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test restores the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:
Target:

Remarks The files for the settings editor (current.kos/sas) and scan manager (current.sm)
have to be opened, applied and saved in these applications before the settings
are loaded by the system.
Open the corresponding application and login as Service Operator.

REBOOT THE CONTROLLER AND SWITCH OFF / ON ALL THE

COMPONENTS.

18.06.2002 14
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

18.06.2002 15
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 73 Download DESCRIPTION of the system software ]

The next list gives you a step by step description how to download the system software by SDS test 73.
The data is written in an EEPROM that is put in a socket.

Warning for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

1. Make a Direct Cable Connection between the laptop and the controller.
- Click on <Cancel> in the window: Direct Cable Connection Host.
- Minimize the window: Direct Cable Connection, when you see the text: Connected via Direct
Cable on COM1.
2. Start Lotus Notes and open the TDS400 TSM.
3. Start the SDS session.
4. Select the SDS test 20-1-010 (Select the next NT start method).
Set the test to: [ diagnostic ].
5. Close the SDS session.
6. Restart the [ Oc· Power Logic ] controller.
This disconnects your Direct Cable connection!
7. Wait approximately 3 minutes to make sure that the controller is in the Diagnosis mode,
because there is no monitor.
The printer and scanner display shows: awaking controller.
8. Have the system software on site (R1.0 to R1.1 : only on diskette, see also the warning on the
top).
9. Put the CD-ROM / diskette with the new software in the laptop.
10. Activate the Direct Cable Connection (see the point 1).
11. Start the SDS session.
12. Select the SDS test 73 (Download the system software).
Check on the printer display if the printer is in the download mode. If not, than do it manually
(the three fingers trick)
13. Start the download. You can browse to the directory with the new software xxxxxxx.ofp.
Note 1: if you must download the boot and the application software, then do it one by one.
Never together!
Note 2: if the download of the boot software fails, you have to replace the EPROM / CPU pba..
14. Restart the controller when the download is finished.
15. When the controller is restarted, the printer and the scanner display shows: ready.
16. There is no need to restore any data.

The whole action takes approximately 15 minutes.

18.06.2002 16
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 70-79 Installation

[ 73 Download the system software (Diagnosis mode only) ]

Only for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

Description For a step by step description, see .

The download of the system software is only possible in the [ Diagnosis mode ] ,
by SDS test 20-1-010 .

Downloading of several kinds of software applications:

These are:
l Printer embedded software upgrades (normal releases and patches)

The following upgrades are not possible with this test:

l Scanner software
l Oc· Power Logic controller Windows NT upgrades
l Oc· Power Logic controller Oc· TDS400 upgrades (normal releases and
patches)

Value

Remarks There is no need to restore any data.

18.06.2002 17
 [ 90 Set the system configuration (overview) ]

Test Name Remark

90 [ SYStem Configuration ] Each system component has his own configuration settings.
These settings can be pre-set in the sub-system NOVRAM or are
automatically determined by the component.
Activating of test 90 initialise each sub-system to find the
configuration settings that are automatically determined.
Before executing this test all components must be switched on.
The configuration of each sub-system can be
viewed/changed/overruled in the following tests:

90.1 Set the printer configuration

90.2 Set the scanner configuration

90.3 Set the controller configuration

TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 90.1 Set the printer configuration ]

Name Automatically detected

1 Printer yes
2 Number of PRD rolls yes
3 Dew preventor no
4 Copy output stacker yes
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 90.2 Set the scanner configuration ]

Name Automatically detected Opt

1 Printer yes present / n
2 Number of PRD rolls yes 1
3 Dew preventor no present / n
4 Copy output stacker yes present / n
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no present / n

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 90.3 Set the controller configuration ]

Name Automatically detected by test 90 Opt

- -
1 Set memory size yes ....
2 Centronics PBA no present / n
3 Token ring PBA no present / n
4 Ethernet combo PBA no present / n
5 User Interface present no present / n
6 Controller type yes Oc· Power Logic c

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 91 Set the configuration identification and serial numbers

(overview) ]

Test Name Remark

91 [ Configuration identification The system as whole has a certain configurtation identification number dependi
and serial numbers ] installed system components.
The system has a serial number total system which depends on the configuratio
system.
Each system component has his own serial number. These numbers can be pre
sub-system NOVRAM via activating test 91. All numbers are checked for possib
The configuration identification and serial numbers can be viewed / changed / o
the following tests:

91.1 Set the system configuration identification

91.2 System serial numbers

91.3 Printer serial numbers

91.4 Scanner serial numbers

91.5 Controller serial numbers

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 91.1 Set the system configuration identification ]

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 91.2 Set the system serial number ]

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 91.3 Set the printer serial number ]

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 91.4 Set the scanner serial number ]

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 91.5 Set the controller serial number ]

Picture

The following item is available:

Item name Options
1 Controller serial number 0398XXXXX

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 93 Set the international paper standards ]

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 94 Display the passwords ]

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 95 Display / set the modification records (overview) ]

Each system component has his own modification record.

95.1 Controller modifications

95.2 Printer modifications
95.3 Scanner modifications
95.4 Paper roll drawer modifications
95.5 Compact output Stacker (COS)

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 95.1 Display / set the controller modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the controller.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the controller.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04

18.06.2002 14
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 15
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 95.2 Display / set the printer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the printer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the printer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

18.06.2002 16
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 17
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 95.3 Display / set the scanner modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the scanner.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the scanner.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

18.06.2002 18
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 19
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 95.4 Display / set the paper roll drawer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the paper roll drawer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the paper roll drawer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

18.06.2002 20
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 21
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 95.5 Display / set the COS modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the Compact Output Stacker (COS).

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the COS.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03

18.06.2002 22
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 23
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 97 Preset the copy counter and set the counting method ]

18.06.2002 24
TSM Oce TDS400 - SDS 90-99 Service Info

[ 98 Set the first installation date ]

18.06.2002 25
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad Fuse and Transfer quality.

Description
Without a dewpreventer under very moistures conditions (17·C/80%RH and 28·C/80%RH) the
fuse quality and the transfer quality are not OK:

With a dewpreventer for roll 1 the fuse quality and the transfer are good.
For roll 2 the moisture content of the paper is higher.
It is recommended to load roll 1 with the most sensitive paper, and roll 2 with specialities or
small sizes.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2402-001 Dew preventer (Optional) 971

18.06.2002 1
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad fusing on leading edge.

Description
When the engine in not used for a long period and the customer environment is cold
and humid,
the first 20 or 30 prints are not fused at the leading edge.

The criteria for the print quality are valid under the following conditions:
The adjustments of the machines are carried out accordingly the procedures in the
documentation.
The condition of the environment is:
Temperature between 20 - 27 degrees Celsius
Relative humidity between 30 - 60 % RH
The print material is according to the Oc· norm.

In the user documentation in Appendix A summary and tables, section Material

sizes there is a note
Attention: Avoid storing paper in rooms where temperature and humidity
are high. Also, avoid dust and direct sunlight. Wrap unused paper in plastic
to prevent it absorbing moisture.

18.06.2002 2
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black stripes in feed direction

Description
Undefined black stripes / spots in feed direction

Tests / Checks:
Too many moisture at the photoconductor
Check if the cover plate assy Z0206-13 is mounted in a correct way.

18.06.2002 3
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Light/dark stripes in paper feed direction (zebra-stripes)

Description
light/dark stripes in the feed direction occur (like zebra-stripes).
A disturbtion of the bitmap occurs.

Tests / Checks:
Check the contacts of the spice-STP cable.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

posibly a distortion in the spice-STP cable, an interruption of the bitmap occurs.

Part Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1302.566 Spice-STP Cable Check 159

18.06.2002 4
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No contrast with copy / digital background with copy photo

mode
Description

Example normal copy: no contrast is

visible.

Example bleuprint copy: no contrast is

visible.

18.06.2002 5
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Example copy Photo mode: digital

background over full copy.

Print quality is normal!

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1102-015 SPU PBA 10PBA03 replace 390

18.06.2002 6
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printed image (partly) out of focus / density difference between

heads.
Description
This problem is visible with high resolution prints, it could be possible that it is not visible with
test print 51, postscript and CAD prints, but that it occurs with RTL prints.

examples:

One or more print heads can be out of focus due to torsion of the print head assembly

Cause:
1) cover of the print head to tight mounted *).
2) print head not well positioned (caused by stiff turning-points).
3) print head blocked by transport security bolt.
4) Engine not in level; torsion in frame.

solutions:

18.06.2002 7
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

1) mount the cover of the print head with some tolerance.

2) take care that the turning-points of the print head run smoothly.
3) take care that the print head is not obstructed by the transport security bolt of the print head.

4) take care that the engine is placed on a leveled floor.

*)
at this moment, the cover of the print head is mounted with shouldered bolts, so the cover has
some tolerance.

Tests / Checks:
Set SDS test 04-1-003 to 11, make test print 51, and examine the K1 Image.
If the print head is a little out of focus, the effect will be most visible with a low light intensity
setting.

Examples

04-1-003=20 14-1-003=11

18.06.2002 8
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scrambled print
Description
Prints are scrambled after powering on the TDS400 and the Power Logic Controller.

After turning on the TDS400 and Power Logic Controller, it could occur that the prints are
scrambled due to wrong initialization of the communication between the TDS400, and the
Power Logic Controller.

Method:
First Switch ON the Power Logic Controller, and when it is awake, switch ON the TDS400.

Workarround:
If the TDS400 was turned on before the Power Logic Controller was awake, and the prints are
scramled, turn the TDS400 OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 9
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Background
Description
The image is printed correctly. However, the print shows background over the entire width and
length.

Tests / Checks:
Make a test print with SDS test 51

l Clean Charging unit

If background is still present, check the lifetime of PM parts

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-19 02PBA01 Grid PBA Check 080

0502-90 Developer Check 167
lifetime
0202-01 Charging Assy Check Clean/Repla 049
ce
0502-11 05B1 Sensor DEVTONCONSE Check 189
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001

2202-02 22PBA01 CPU Check Replace 855

18.06.2002 10
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Background on copy
Description
The copy of the scanned original exhibit background.

Tests / Checks:
Make a copy of the test original.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-65 Original glass Clean 321

1002-03 Mirror Clean 363
1002-02 10PBA02 CCD Interface Adj. 390

18.06.2002 11
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black / white stripes (absorber stripes)

Description

Black lines in white areas and white stripes in black areas (scratched image).

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0802-01 Absorber wire Check 291

18.06.2002 12
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black dots
Description
There are black dots on the image of the print.
These dots appear with every rotation of the photoconductor (25 cm).

Note:
Use the Photoconductor Quality Chart (2550-20 ) to determine if the spots are within the
specifications.

Remark:
Small black dots can occur after a new photoconductor is installed.
These small black dots disappear after 50 to 100 A0 prints.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001

18.06.2002 13
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black lines/stripes
Description
There are unwanted black lines and/or stripes on the image of the print in the feed direction.

Grid wires are polluted at one point.

There is more charge on the photoconductor at this point of pollution.
Weak lines and/or stripes of approximately 3mm occur in the feed direction.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-06 Corona wire assy Check 041

18.06.2002 14
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black print
Description
The print engine produces a print which is completely black.
There is no image on the print material.
There is only toner on the print material.
The photoconductor surface is not charged.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-06 Corona wire [ cpl ] Check 041

2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043

18.06.2002 15
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black stripe(s) in feed direction (copy only)

Description
The copy of the scanned original exhibit black stripes in feed direction.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0904-12 White plate Check 324

18.06.2002 16
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Difference in density in grey areas

Description
Some grey areas of the print show a left right difference.
The area (K1) of the SDS test 51shows a difference at the place of the LED Print head
overlaps.
The light output is not the same for each of the LED Print head.

Tests / Checks:
SDS test 51

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 17
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Dirty print
Description
The print image shows dirts (unwanted toner parts).
Reprinting can be seen.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0702-02 Cleaning blade assy Replace 241

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001
0602-07 Transfer Corona wire assy Check 201
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Replace 043
Toner Check 983
Print material Check 981

18.06.2002 18
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Horizontal and vertical alignment are not correct

Description
The horizontal and/or vertical alignment are not correct

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 19
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image out of focus on copy

Description
The copy of the scanned original is not sharp.
The specification 3 lp/mm cannot be seen clearly visible.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0904-12 White original plate Check 324

1002-02 10PBA02 CCD Interface Adj. 390
1002-01 Camera Adj. 361

18.06.2002 20
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image too dark

Description
The image of the print is too dark.
Background can be seen.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-11 05B1 Sensor DEVTONCONSE Check 189

2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

2202-02 22PBA01 CPU Check Replace 855

18.06.2002 21
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Leading edge first print different than the next prints

Description
1. When a new roll is loaded or the roll is changed, the leading edge of the first print is
shorter or longer than the next prints.
2. During multicopy the leading edge at the first print is ca. 5 mm longer and trailing edge is
ca. 3 mm longer.
The rest of the prints are okay. This will happens again after starting a new job.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-57 12B3 PRULEADSE Check 452

2302-04 15Y1 PTRINPCL Replace 574

18.06.2002 22
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Light copy
Description
Ligth copy of the scanned original.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1002-02 10PBA02 CCD Interface Adj. 390

18.06.2002 23
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Light print
Description
The print engine produces a print,but this print shows a (very) light image.
Black image areas are not filled equally.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

0502-11 05B1 Sensor Check 189
0602-07 Corona wire assy Check 201
0602-02 Right block Check 238
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
Toner Check 983
Print material Check 981

18.06.2002 24
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Magnification not 100%

Description
The copy of the scanned original in not exactly reproduced (100% or 1:1), (out of specifications
)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Feed direction SDS

09-1-001
Width and right alignment. SDS
10-7-004

18.06.2002 25
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Optical density too low

Description
The print image has an optical density " OD " which is too low.
Black areas and lines are not filled completely.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-06 Charge corona wire assy Check 041

0602-07 Transfer corona wire assy Check 201
2202-01 22PBA04 High Voltage Check Replace 043

18.06.2002 26
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Poster mode prints have light, dark and black trails.

Description
The quality for prints and copies in normal mode is good.
The quality of prints and copies is poor, if the poster mode is selected.
In poster mode, the light output of each LED Print head differs.
Consequently the prints and copies shows a light, dark or white trail in feed direction.
The LED Print head crossing is clearly visible between the trails.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 27
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Re-printing
Description
The print shows 6 mm tracks. In black areas these black tracks are glossy.
These 6 mm tracks are in the feed direction and always in the same place.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0804-21 Roll Check 318

18.06.2002 28
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scrambled print after test 54 (R1.1)

Description
After running SDS test 54, the next (normal) print is scrambled.

Workaround R1.1:

Switch off and on the printer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 29
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Toner polution at one side

Description
Toner pollutes the right hand-side of the print.
The print shows dirt of toner. The developer unit loses toner.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0202-12 07PBA02 Eraser PBA Check 080

18.06.2002 30
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White dots
Description
There are white dots on black areas of the print.
These dots occur with every rotation of the photoconductor (25 cm)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001

18.06.2002 31
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White line
Description
The Line(s) occurs in the feed direction due to a fault in the horizontal alignment of the print
head, pollution of the brush in the developing unit or pollution of the print head
The line occurs due to the horizontal alignment of the print head. The line can be seen in the
change from print head 1/2 or 2/3.
The LED print head is polluted at one point. The photoconductor is not (totally) discharged at
this point. A white line can be seen in images.
The brush of the developing unit is polluted. No toner can be transfered to the photoconductor
at this point.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-01 Developing unit Check 163

0402-01 Printhead assy Check Replace 121

18.06.2002 32
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White print
Description
The print engine produces a print which is completely white.
No image (toner) is transfered to the print material.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-01 Developing unit Check 169
2302-15 Timing belt Check 881
0102-01 Photoconductor Check 001
0402-01 Print head assy Check Replace 121
0102-10 Encoder assy Check Replace 160
SDS
04-1-016

Print 54

18.06.2002 33
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

White stripe(s) in feed direction

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0904-12 Original plate Check 324

0902-65 Original glass plate Check 321
2204-01 22 PBA01 CPU Scanner Check Replace 350

18.06.2002 34
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The image is shifted outside the sheet by manual feed and

landscape orientation
Description
When a drawing of "landscape" orientation is printed to manual feed, the image is shifted out of the sheet.
In case of an A1 "landscape" print, the image is shifted out of the print area of the drum.

Work around: Print the drawing with a portrait orientation.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 35
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Frayed cut
Description
The leading and trailing edge of the print material is not cut straight and/or completely.
The edge is frayed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1220-05 Linear knife Check 441

18.06.2002 36
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Manual feed copies missing after error situation. (R1.1)

Description
After solving an error with a manual feed job, the printer does not ask to feed a sheet again at the job recovery.
When the timeout expires the job is deleted.

Workaround R1.1:

Feed the sheet anyway.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 37
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No original feed
Description
The original can not be fed in.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09B1 09-2-001 348
0902-030 Motor assy 09M1 09-6-001 351

0902-034 Step motor control PBA 09-6-001 350

2204-004 22PBA02 Power Supply Check 390
2204-001 22PBA01 CPU PBA Check 390

18.06.2002 38
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original skew
Description
Skew of the original during the scan.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-60 Profile assy Check
0902-65 Original glass plate Check Clean 321

18.06.2002 39
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Roll x empty" message directly followed by "Load roll"

message
Description
The printer displays a "Roll x empty" message directly followed by "Load roll" message.

Signal name: PRFRUNSEx

Fault condition:

Tests / Checks:
l Check for any obstructions an the paper path, if the paper is obstructed between the knife
and the input sensor "15B1" , the paper will be retracted followed by a "Roll x empty"
message directly followed by "Load roll" message.
l Check if the roll is not unwind.
l Check if the paper is not too loose on the core.
l Check if the support bearing on the left backside is blocked.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-121 PRURUNSEx 12-2-009 452

12-2-011

1204-030 Support Bearing Check Replace 480

Roll is unwind Check 990
Paper loose on core Check 990

18.06.2002 40
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Alert! Cover was previously removed (system with monitor)

Description
When the left side cover was removed, the "Alert! Cover was previously removed" appears on
the openings screen when the controller starts.
To remove this message:
1. Restart the controller
"F2 setup" appears on the right top corner of the screen
2. Press F2
3. Type the password to enter the BIOS
4. Scroll to: [System Security / Chassis Intrusion]
5. Set [Chassis Intrusion] to: [enable]
6. Press <Esc>
7. Select [save Changes and Exit]

The controller starts without the alert message on the screen.

18.06.2002 41
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Input too late (error code 12706)

Description
Signal name: PTRSYNSE
Fault condition: The sensor is active too late after the paper is feed from the roll unit.

Error code: 12706 See SDS test 32.1

Tests / Checks:
Check if the paperpath is not blocked

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-079 Paper synchronisation 15-2-003 Replace
sensor, 15B2
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 42
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction Error types (handling)

Description
Error-types do not define the consequence of the error, but the way the error is handled.

The following types can be distinguished:

Abbreviation Name Error-code extension

FE Fatal Error 0
PE Permanent Error 1/2
MRE Machine Recoverable Error 5/6
ORE Operator Recoverable Error 7
OWAR Operator WARning 8
SWAR Service WARning 9

Fatal error (FE)

Permanent error (PE)
Machine recoverable error (MRE)
Operator recoverable error (ORE)
Operator Warnings (OWAR)
Service Warnings (SWAR)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 43
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Is waiting for the controller message (in combination with a

GX150 controller)
Description
The Printer/Scanner shows a "waiting for controller message" .

Tests / Checks:
Open the GX150 controller and check if the SPICE board is well installed.
It is possible that the green plastic bracket is unlocked during transport and that the SPICE
board PCI connector is (partly) unplugged.
Lock the green bracket with a tie-rap.

In new delivered controllers the green bracket is secured with a tie-rap until the real cause is
solved.

18.06.2002 44
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Optimising print quality

Description
Signal name: DEVCONSE
Fault condition: Toner concentration above 3.5% (equals sensor reading of 125).
The tonerconcentration declines at a too steep angle, > 2% / minute.
Norm value: The toner concentration drops below 3.5%.

Toner concentration too low

The moment the toner concentration level is above 3.5% again, printing is not resumed at once.
There is a 30 seconds delay, during which the toner concentration must stay above 3.5%.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0502-017 Toner concentration sensor 05-9-001 Replace
05B1
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 45
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong characters in Polish and Czech language

Description
Some characters in the Polish and Czech language are displayed (engine and scanner) in the
English language

Tests / Checks:
Check if the SDS setting for the special characters is enabled. See step 7 in installation

18.06.2002 46
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Cutter error ] (error code's 12707, 12708)

Description
Signalname: PRDKNIPOSSER, PRDKNIPOSSEL
Fault condition: Not active within 1250 msec.
Norm value: Active within 1250 msec.

Description:
The display message "Cutter error" occurs:
When the knife sensor at the left hand side (PRDKNIPOSSEL 12B1) or the knife sensor at the
right hand side (PRDKNIPOSSER 12B2) is not active within 1250 msec. after the knife motor
(PRDKNIMO 12M3) is started

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSEL, 12B1 12-2-004

1220-008 PRDKNIPOSSER, 12B2 12-2-005

1218-032 Cord assy Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 47
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Paper jam roll ] (at the leading edge sensor)

Description
Signalname: PRDLEADSE, PRDRUNSE1 or PRDRUNSE2
Fault condition: PRDLEADSE is active, but no pulses from PRDRUNSE1 or PRDRUNSE2.
PRDLEADSE is not active in time and pulses from PRDRUNSE1 or
PRDRUNSE2
Norm value: PRDLEADSE is active and pulses from PRDRUNSE1 or PRDRUNSE2.

Description:
The error "Paper jam roll" occurs when the print material is detected by the "Leading edge
sensor" 12B3 and the print material is not transported to the engine.
The roll is not running, consequently no pulses from the "Run sensor roll 1 or run sensor roll 2"
12B4 or 12B5.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-057 Leading edge sensor, 12B3 12-2-005 Replace

1206-121 Run sensor roll 1, 12B4 12-2-009 Replace

1206-121 Run sensor roll 2, 12B5 12-2-011 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 48
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Roll retract err ] (error code 12705)

Description
Signal name: PRDLEADSE
Fault condition: The sensor is always active, during switching of the paper roll.

The moment an other roll is neccessarry, the previous one is retracted. The "Leading edge
sensor" 12B3 must detect that the roll is retracted, before the other roll is fed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1204-057 Leading edge sensor, 12B3 12-2-005 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor upper roll 12M1 12-6-002 Replace

1202-046 Drive motor lower roll 12M2 12-6-003 Replace

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 49
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Sheet too short ] (error code 15703)

Description
Signal name: PTRINPSE
Fault condition: Paper Input Sensor (15B1) is switched OFF too early (< 420 mm length)
Norm value: Print material length > 420 mm

Description:
Manual feed is used.
The Paper Input Sensor (15B1) is released too early by the trailing edge of the sheet.
The print material fed in manual is shorter then 420 mm.

A warning "Sheet too short" is displayed for 5 seconds.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1502-017 Paper Input Sensor 1 15-2-001
(15B1)
2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 50
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Awaking controller (R1.1)]

Description
The message "Awaking controller" occurs, in case of no communication between the controller and the printer.
The printer sends an awake command to the Oc· Power Logic controller, during 10 seconds.
If the Oc· Power Logic controller does not react within 10 seconds, then the printer remains waiting for an awake
command from the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Tests / Checks:
l Check the connectors of the Harddisk in the controller.
l Interchange the cable controller / printer and controller / scanner if present.
l Remove the network connector, and check if the message disappears, if this solves the problem, a network
(IP) conflict could be the cause.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2560-017/01 Datacable
8
2002-011 Spice PBA Check Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 51
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

["Connecting" stays in display (R1.2, R1.3) ]

Description
The message "Connecting" occurs, in case of no communication between the controller and the printer.
The printer sends an awake command to the Oc· Power Logic controller, during 10 seconds.
If the Oc· Power Logic controller does not react within 10 seconds, then the printer remains waiting for an awake
command from the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Tests / Checks:
l Check the connectors of the Harddisk in the controller.
l Interchange the cable controller / printer and controller / scanner if present.
l Remove the network connector, and check if the message disappears, if this solves the problem, a network
(IP) conflict could be the cause.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2560-017/01 Datacable
8
2002-011 Spice PBA Check Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 52
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Refill toner ]
Description
Signal name: DEVTONSUPSW = puls of 40 msec during one rotation of the rotor assy.
Fault condition: 2 pulses or less, during 2 successive rotations of the rotor.
Norm value: A minimum of 3 pulses, during 3 successive rotations of the rotor.

Toner supply unit is empty.

The warning "Refill toner" is displayed.
The current job is finished.
No new print jobs are accepted.

Operator action:
Refill the toner supply unit.
Push the correction button on the printer.
The toner supply unit starts to check the toner supply unit is refilled (a minimum of 3 pulses
during 3 successive rotations). The warning "Refill toner" remains if the 3 pulses are not
measured.

Tests / Checks:
Check the function of the toner supply unit.
SDS test: 05-6-003.
The Toner supply motor is active during 10 seconds (3 successive rotations).
A minimum of 3 pulses must be measured or displayed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0504-036 Toner Supply switch 05S1 05-6-003

0504-032 Toner Supply motor 05M1 05-6-003

0504-030 Toner dosage unit Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 53
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Close roll unit ]

Description
The message "Close roll unit" stays even if the roll unit is closed.

Signal name: PRDDOORSW1,2

Fault condition: Open
Norm value: Closed

The error "Roll unit open" occurs when the door or drawer of the roll unit is opened.
12S1(upper) or 12S2 (lower) is open.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1208-022 Door switch roll 1, 12S1 12-2-006

1208-022 Door switch roll 2, 12S2 12-2-010

1208-051 Power I/O PBA 12PBA01 Replace

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 54
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Please wait ]
Description
The message [Please wait] is always displayed after the printer/scanner is turned on.
The printer/scanner get the correct language file from the controller according to the selected
language.
In case of UK English no language file is downloaded. In that case the message stays for only
a few seconds.
It takes about one minute to download the language file to the scanner and 25 seconds for the
printer.

Tests / Checks:
l restart the scanner.
l restart the printer.
l restart the controller.
l If the problem remains, check the controller hardware and install again the software (if
needed).

18.06.2002 55
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong material request in case of manual feed (R1.1)

Description
In case of manual feed with e.g. polyester selected, the printer requests a manual sheet of paper.

Workaround R1.1:

Feed a sheet of the material selected instead of the material asked by the printer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 56
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Org. too long. ]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active longer than 10 minutes (equals 30 mtr.)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 57
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Prepare for run ] message stays in display (R1.1)

Description
In case of feeding an original into the scanner an prepare for run message is send from the scanner to the
controller and from the controller to the printer.
If you remove the original without making a copy the "prepare for run" message stays on the display of the
printer.

Workaround R1.1:

Switch off, and on the printer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 58
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Ready to copy ] in scanner display (R1.1)

Description
If the scanner is switched on while the set memory is full, then the scanner displays wrongly "Ready to copy".
Scanning will not be possible until some set memory has become available.

Workaround R1.1:

Free up some set memory.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 59
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Remove original ]
Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active during scanner setup

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 60
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Install error overview

Description

Installation error Corresponding Message Error Number

4 (ORE) Paper retracted 15702
5 (ORE) Copy too short 15703
6 (ORE) Copy too late 15704
7 (ORE) Speed failure 15705
8 (ORE) Close input flap 15706
9 (ORE) Input flap open 15707
35 (ORE) Knife 1 error 12706
36 (ORE) Knife 2 error 12707
38 (ORE) Input flap open 15701
40 (ORE) Roll x empty 12701
41 (ORE) Roll retract error 12702
42 (ORE) Door open 12703
43 (ORE) Roll init error 12704
44 (ORE) PTRINPSE late 12705
67 (MRE) Installation procedure aborted 22521

18.06.2002 61
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

ORE (Operator Recoverable Error) during installation

Description
In case of an ORE the operator is notified by displaying the "install error" message followed by
a number.
The number correspondents to an ORE according the below mentioned table.

Installation Corresponding ORE Error number

error message
4 Paper retracted 15702
5 Copy too short 15703
6 Copy too late 15704
7 Speed failure 15705
8 Close input flap
9 Input flap open 15707
35 Knife 1 error
36 Knife 2 error
38 Input flap open 15701
40 Roll x empty 12701/12702
41 Roll retract error
42 Door open
43 Roll init error
44 PTRINPSE late

18.06.2002 62
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Incorrect error recovery in case of 2 errors. (R1.1)

Description
In case of more than one error only the second error message is displayed on the LCD.
The moment the second error is solved the error message of the first error appears on the LCD again.

Workaround R1.1:

Switch the printer off and on to clear the error message.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

If the second error is solved, the first will appear in the LCD.

18.06.2002 63
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

No Printer display
Description
Switch ON the printer. The display shows nothing.

Tests / Checks:
Check the output voltages of the Low Voltage PBA

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-12 22PBA02 Low voltage PBA Check 856
2202-01 22PBA04 High-Voltage PBA Check Replace 043
2202-01 22PBA01 CPU PBA Check 855
Wiring Check 879

18.06.2002 64
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

B1 is not part of the automate behavior. (R1.2, R1.3)

Description
Autoroll selection to a B1 roll is not possible.

Workaround:

Print to a specified roll.

18.06.2002 65
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)

Description
The AutoRoll selection mechanism works only for rolls of a width that is part of a specified paper series.
So, if mixed rolls are used only the roll within the selected paperseries is used with AutoRoll.

Workaround:

Print to a specified roll

18.06.2002 66
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Threw an exception error" on the laptop (SDS-Client 4.6.3.0)

Description
The laptop gets an pop up "threw an exception error", this error only occurs if STAR is not
installed.

Solution: Install "mdac" from the R1.3 CD "D:\upgrade\MsDAC\MsDAC.BAT"

18.06.2002 67
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Japanese/Chinese Keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool

Description
The Japanese/Chinese keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool.

Work around: The US international keyboard has to be selected in the CFT tool.

18.06.2002 68
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Notes SDS test 54 fails

Description
For a correct working of the SDS test 54 in Notes, "54 Print the test print 54 to check the
correct working of the print head", the SDS_UI.MDB file should be replaced on the Controller
and the service laptop.

SDS54P.EXE
Create a floppy disk with the needed files:

l Put an empty floppy disk in the laptop disk drive (1.44Mb).

l Right click the SDS54P.EXE icon, and select "launch"
l Type "a:" on the unzip to folder field, and click "unzip"
l The files are extracted to the a: drive.

Upgrade of the SDS_UI.MDB file

l Make a Direct Cable Connection between the laptop and the controller.
l Laptop: Login [Windows] as [service] to have permission's on the harddisk of the
controller.
l Fill in the Host Computer Name to make a connection to the shared folders of the
Host (PLC).
l Activate in the "run" window: [a:\exchange.bat a: <controller name>] to upgrade the
SDS_UI.MDB file on the controller
l Use the explorer to copy the SDS_UI.MDB from the a: drive to <c:\oce\apps\sds\OCE
TDS400 1.2\SDS_UI.MDB> to upgrade the file on the laptop.

This problem is solved in R1.3

18.06.2002 69
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Power management monitor GX100 / GX150

Description
The Bios of the GX100 / GX150 system does not support power management of the monitor.
In order to modify the power management of the monitor within a GX100 / GX150 system, a dos utility has to be
activated.

Procedure:

l Login as service user in the NT logon window on the controller

l Open a DOS Window
l Enter cd c:\tools\gx100\pwrmgnt or cd c:\tools\gx150\pwrmgnt

l Switch off power management of the monitor : enter pwrmgmt 0

l Switch on power management of the monitor : enter pwrmgmt 2

l Reboot the controller to activate the power management setting

18.06.2002 70
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Selfregistration of the Active X components and the SDS server

fails
Description
During an installShield set up of the SDS-Cli·nt, when a Microsoft DLL is not present, Selfregistration of the
Active X components and the SDS server fails.

Workaround:

Select reboot at the end of the set up, and perform set up once again.

18.06.2002 71
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The connection to the controller WEB pages is bad

Description
When the controllers IP address is used in the internet browser, then there is no contact to the
controller created.

The IP address in the web browser is changed between release 1.1 and release 1.2

IP- address
SDS R1.1 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
SDS R1.2 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:8080
PELT WEB XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

To prevent that cached content is displayed (content of previously loaded with the same
IP-address)
the Internet explorer cache should be configured as below:

1) select Tools/Internet Options

2) Select Settings

18.06.2002 72
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3) Select Every visit to the page.

4) OK

18.06.2002 73
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The previous backup.zip file is included in the new backup of

the same day
Description
When a backup is made, a zip file is created in c:\service\visits, when a new backup is made
on the same day, the previous created zip file will be included in the new backup.zip file.
The new zip file will be nested one level deeper each time a new backup is made.
This will not harm the restore, but the transportation time of the backup.zip file to the laptop
will increase.

18.06.2002 74
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Web SDS will not start when [Oc· ViewStation] is active.

Description
Web SDS will not start when Oc· ViewStation is running.

Work around: Close ViewStation before launching SDS on the PLC.

18.06.2002 75
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad connecting SPICE-III cables

Description

Investigation has shown that the problems with the bad connecting cables are due to a not correct
assembled SPICE-III-PBA.
It turned out that the supplier of the SPICE-III PBA's didn't mount the washers between the jackposts
and the plate.
As a result of this the height of the jackpost is not at the same level as the height of the D-sub
connector.
This means that in some cases, it is impossible to lock the fastening screws correctly on to the
jackposts.

Solution:

Place a washer (flat-A 3.2 partnumber 2231007) between the jackpost and the plate. see (RED
arrow).
You have to do this four times!!

Plate

Jackposts

18.06.2002 76
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
What is new in Release 1.3

Answer:
Job Submission

Windows Raster Driver 2

l The driver supports the Czech, Hungarian, Polish and the Japanese language.
See also: Information Bulletin 1009 and 10011.

Windows PostScript Driver

See also: Information Bulletin 1007 and 1008.

Print Exec LT Web

l Advanced job submission, e.g.:
- max. 100 documents
- job and document level setting
l If PELT WEB is activated, but is not installed, a demo page is opened.
The demo page gives information how to order the PELT WEB application.

Job Control
Remote Logic

Queue Manager
l You can change the size the dialog box of the column options and the job properties.

Settings Editor
l Added: Sleep mode timer enable. Default = ON.
See: Key Op. settings / System / Timers
l Added: Rasterisation optimalisation. Default = Quality.
See: Key Op. settings / Jobs / Print / Defaults / Image
This setting defines the sequence of zoom and rasterisation when the colour or
greyscale bitmap images are processed.
Select between: speed and quality.
Speed: The output of bitmap files can be degraded by a coarse halftone screen.
Quality: The output of bitmap files are not degraded. The process time can be longer.
l Removed: Controller panel time out.
See: Key Op. settings / Timers /

Communication
Novell
l Novell 6 is supported.

Controller
Operating System
l NT4 Service Pack 6a is added.

SDS Applications.
l You can use the short-cut keys in the Lotus Notes SDS application.
The pointer must be on the AxtiveX window.
Short-cut keys are e.g.: <Enter>, <Tab>, <Shift-Tab>, <Space bar>, <Arrow keys>.

l Only for the [STAR] application:

Support to backup the SDS_log database in the NUSR mode.
You can backup the SDS_log database and the STAR SDS_log dump in normal user mode.
There is no need to set the controller to the service mode.

l The default value is shown in the value field.

The value range is shown in the information field.

l The SDS test stops when the [Stop] button is pressed in the dialog box.
(The previous name of the [Cancel] button is changed to [Stop] button.)

18.06.2002 77
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l The beep sound is only enabled for the input and the output tests.

TDS400 sytem
l Chinese language.
The simplified Chinese language (MSSONG) is supported in the software applications on the
controller and in the [ Remote Logic ] client applications.
Attention: the displays of the printer and the scanner are in the English language.

18.06.2002 78
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
What is solved in Release 1.2

Answer:

Job submission
Postscript is not plotted in a particular set (only in combination with plot director)

Job control
Scan-to-file
Scan-to-file standard size is not correct
Remote logic
Bad connection from service laptop to applications (QM, SCP, SE, SM)

Job processing
Transformations are cancelled for partial frame
PS 3
Postscript level 3 interpreter crash when printing files containing some Postscript level 2 commands
Raster data format
Uncompressed TIFF files.
Vector data format
Wrong Calcomp parameter detection.

Applications QM, SCP, SE, SM, and viewer.

Queue Manager
Blocked Queue when deleting multiple files at once from the Queue Manager
Scan Manager
Crash with duplicate destinations in Scan Manager
Wrong languages in the Scan Manager.
Destinations missing.
Settings Editor
Printhead Duty Cycle setting not working
Viewer
AutoView sometimes does not work

Power Logic Controller

Queue blocks when a print file contains an error and the error page is switched on.
Configuration set to previous values.
Windows returns the highest IP-address to the adapters as default, if more than one adapter is present.
Internal error on PLC if scan is default

Controller
Controller reboots immediately after starting a Copy job. (no GUI present)
Internal error immediately after starting a Copy or Scan job.
Internal Error in case of standard setting set to default scan to file

Scanner
Unexpected length in case of Scan to File, 200% and standard size A2
Destinations missing
Menu card in wrong language.
Scanner displays wrongly "ready to copy"

Printer
Manual feed copies missing after error situation.
Wrong material request in case of manual feed
Incorrect error recovery in case of 2 errors.
Prepare for run message stays in display
Menu card in wrong language
Scrambled print after test 54

18.06.2002 79
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

SDS Applications.
SDS hangs when switching online/offline mode.

18.06.2002 80
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
What is solved in Release 1.3

Answer:

Job Submission

Autocad
l Partial plot when printed by WRD

Print Exec LT Web

l Scale to media size was disappeared. Scale to media size appears now in Basic and
Advanced mode jobs.
l The PELT client showed the wrong information of the media weight.
Now the paper 64 gr, paper 110 gr, trans 90 gr. are reported correctly in the PELT Web.
l The PELT-client printer status was wrong displayed in case of a paper jam in the printer.

WRD
All operating systems
l Second tab is renamed to "Finishing".
l Graphics tab is moved to the third tab.
This tab contains the accounting.
l The default half toning algorithm is now error diffusion instead of coarse.

Windows NT and 2000

l For Italian, French, Portuguese languages:
Width and length labels are correct displayed in "User defined paper size" and "Custom paper
format".
l The "Greyscale type" and the "Image Settings" controls are moved to the "Graphics" tab.
l All "version" strings (in the About Box from the driver and in the Properties) are correct
translated.
l All setup strings (Danish and German) are displayed correct during the installation steps.

Windows 9x and ME
l The cutting method options are corrected.
The RCF header commands are correct applied.
l All recourses and strings in "User defined paper format" are translated.
l The "Image Settings" tab is removed and the controls are moved to the "Graphics" tab.
l The driver generates now a correct page size instruction (PS) for a landscape print.
l The user defined paper dialog box is now functional when the OS uses the metric
measurement system.
l Japanese font size has been changed to match the Japanese Dialog box sizes.
l The A1 paper format is added in the paper format control, so there is only one B2 format
available in the list.
l Roll selection in the "Paper" tab and the User Id in the "Graphic" tab are now dependent on
the RCF.

PS3
l The given fold length was not accepted.

Job Control
Remote Logic
Queue Manager
l The job names were not cleared when the print process is finished.

Settings Editor
l The PLC blocks when the KOS settings were restored.
l Zoom method 1:1 was disappeared (KO view / Jobs)

System Control Panel

l There was a wrong message in the Dutch language, when the controller was in the "service"
mode.

18.06.2002 81
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Controller application
l Hang up because of increasing memory usage server.exe

Scan Manager
l S2F files were not delivered when the PDF format was selected.
l Scan to file on Novell 5.1 SP2.
l STF files was not fully TIFF 6.0 compliant (for 'Date format' and 'Tags order')
l Default setting of the destinations.
l FTP destination.
The application stopped when "c:" was used in the destination path.
Solution: use the browse button.
l Refresh of the SM was very slow, especially after pressing refresh more than once.
l Change of the default destination stopped the scan manager.

Viewer
l The viewer displayed sometimes the PDF files not correct or gave a wrong resolution
information.
l In GUIless + GUI configurations, the installation was not finished when the CD-ROM drive
opens. After the automatic restart, installation of the viewer is started.
In R1.3 the viewer is installed before the CD-ROM drive opens.

Job processing
Tiff
l Internal error with TIFF files.
l TIFF file: only one line was printed.

Communication
SMB
l It was possible to delete the copy jobs in the QM by SMB.
l SMB could not be disabled.

RAS
l The RAS connection (DCC) with the service laptop supports [ 'oceservice' ] as user name.

FTP
l The welcome page is redirected from user to FTP server.
LPD/LPR
l LPD could not be disabled.

Controller
Hardware
l Some characters were wrong by the Japanese keyboard.

Operating System
l Message: [ PELT is running ] during the start of the controller.
l The Postscript printer was not shared after the installation.
l Short cuts names on the desktop are changed from NGC to PLC .
l The application blocked because of increased memory use by server.exe.
l Memory leak: out of virtual memory appeared.
l Some characters were not correct when the Japanese keyboard was used.
l SMB/LPD could not be disabled

System Software
l Logd.exe blocked due to SDS extensive logging.
White pages, jobs stay in the queue, lost of the scanner-controller communication.
l The given scan length was ignored by the controller.

Printer
Media
l Invalid media request
Question: wenn, roll, manual ??????????????????????????????????? ???
l Wrong media request with best fit & media format available, but not as plain paper.

Scanner

18.06.2002 82
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PDF
l A PDF scan increased the size.
(When an A1 was scanned in the landscape direction, the size of the scanned data is greater
than the values set by the operator).

Folder
l Long plots were not correctly folded.

SDS application
ActiveX component
l The <Enter> key works correct inside an ActiveX box.
l Problems with backup and restore are solved.
When you restore the data, a logfile is generated: c:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt
l SDS 90.3: Optional boards (Centronics, Ethernet board) could not be enabled.
l Dump config (scan length method parameter) were not in accordance with the current
settings.
l The passwords are saved in the backup of the system.

18.06.2002 83
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
I have a different presentation (view) of the Lotus Notes TSM ?

Answer:
l Difference in replication of the TSM: replicate with the server.
l Updat the local view of the TSM: Open the local TSM and push Ctrl-Shift-F9 and the view index
is updated.

18.06.2002 84
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
Restart Lotus Notes after a crash

Answer:
When Lotus Notes crashes, you can not restart Lotus Notes.
You must restart also your laptop.

Faster solution:
1. <ctr-alt-del>
2. Close program window opens
3. Choose Nhldeamn
4. Click on the End Task button
5. Restart Lotus Notes

18.06.2002 85
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Branding issues and TDS range

This page describes the general branding issues around the Oc· TDS range.
Instead of products we will be talking about Systems.

The Oc· TDS400 is the name for the total system consisting of:

l The Oc· TDS400 Scanner including Oc· Image Logic® as image processing technology,
l The Oc· TDS400 Printer,
l The Oc· Power Logic® controller, supporting also Adobe® PostScript® 3™/PDF
l Oc· Remote Logic® application suite for system management and control,
including: Settings Editor, System Control Panel and Queue Manager,
l Oc· Scan Logic® as the premium Scan to file solution.
It includes Oc· Scan Manager and Oc· View Station LT.
l Oc· Print Exec LT and Oc· Print Exec LT Web as job submission solution

Furthermore we have Oc· Adobe® PostScript® 3™/PDF printer drivers to print PostScript 3.

18.06.2002 86
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Codenumbers of additional Service documentation of the Oc·

TDS400 system.
LN Service Manual on CD-ROM

Language Code number

GB 0910420
DE 0910422 (not available yet)
FR 0910423 (not available yet)
IT 0910425 (not available yet)

This CD-ROM contains also the Oc· TDS400 Lotus Notes TSM for the service technician.
Use this CD-ROM to do the initial installation.

Note:
After installation you need to replicate with the local server.
Reader permissions should be organised by the local Lotus Notes administrator.

Oc· TDS400 Installation Manual on CD-ROM

Language Code number

GB only 0912511

The Oc· TDS400 Installation Manual is intended to use by the transporter.

The CD-ROM contains a PDF file with the Installation Manual and the original Word document.
The Word document can be used to locally adapt the Installation Manual to the local requirements.

Ordering CD-ROM: Order the service documentation with the Document Order Form at ITC.

18.06.2002 87
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Codenumbers of additional User documentation of the Oc·

TDS400 system (R1.0).

User Manual ed. 1.0

Language Code number

GB / DE /FR / 7137101
............

This CD-ROM contains also the Oc· TDS400 Remote applications for the Customer.
Note: Do not use this version for the service technician.

QRG Manual ed. 1.0

Connectivity Manual ed.1.0

GB version (only) on User Manual CD-ROM.

Order: Order the additional User documentation in the same way as you order spare parts.

18.06.2002 88
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General overview Oc· Settings Editor (Key Operator mode) R1

This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the Key Operator in
the Oc· Settings editor (KO settings) window on the Oc· Power Logic controller or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the Key Operator can change the settings.

Activate the Oc· Settings editor.

l To view: select View and click on KO settings.
l To change : File, Log in, select Key operator, enter the password and click OK.
(Password: )
For detailed information see Oc· TDS400 User Manual

KO setting menu structure:

Jobs Copy & File

Defaults
Output mode
Checkplot
Number of prints / sets
Custom zoom
Mirror
Original
Feeding
Input mode
Sheet
Remove leading strip
Remove trailing strip
Image
Original type
Background compensation
Exposure
Copy
Layout
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift
Sheet
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Cut length method
Custom cut length
Strips
Add leading strip
Add trailing strip
Image
Mirror
File
Destination
File format
File extension TIFF
File extension CALS
TIFF compression
TIFF organisation
Image
File resolution
Optimization
Original
Scan width method
Custom scan width
Scan length method
Custom scan length method

Jobs Print
Print error page
Defaults
Number of prints / sets
Collate
Default print mode

18.06.2002 89
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Sheet
Auto format
Fit method
Default paper source
Default paper source number
Print cut method
Custom print length
Strips
Remove leading strip
Remove trailing strip
Add leading strip
Add trailing strip
Image
Zoom method
Custom zoom
Rotate
Rotate value
Lay-out
Auto shift
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift

Printer
Automatic roll switch

System
Scan to file password
Telephone number
Localization
Display languages
Date & Time
Measurement unit
Job priorities
Copy priorities
Media
Paper series
Timers
Sleep mode timer
Manual feed time-out
Controller panel time-out
Disk cleanup
Local storage cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time
Unsent folder cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time
Scan spool cleanup
Frequency
File age
Next time

Scanner
Settings
Rewind originals
Zoom steps
Reduction step 1-4
Enlargement 1-4
Timers
Panel time-out
Automatic feed time-out

18.06.2002 90
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 91
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General overview Oc· Settings Editor (System Administrator

mode) R1

This overview gives information where to find and change the settings for the System
Administrator (SA settings) in the Oc· Settings editor window on the Oc· Power Logic controller
or remote.
The settings can be viewed by all operators but only the System Administrator can change the
settings.

Activate the Oc· Settings editor.

To view: select View and click on SA settings.
To change : File, Log in, select System administrator, enter the password and click OK.
(Password: ).
For detailed information see Oc· TDS400 User Manual.

SA setting menu structure:

Printer PLDs
Dithering matrix
Poker PDL heap size
Poker min number of vertices in polygons
Poker max number of vertices in polygons
Scale down algorithm
HPGL
Enable
Origin
Select pen
Color merge control
Pen width scaling
HPGL2
Enable HPGL-2
Origin
Select pen 0
Color merge control
Pen priority
PS no clip
Emulation type
Line attributes
Pen width scaling
Calcomp
Enable Calcomp
Step size
Origin
Synchro code
Double synchro
Checksum
End of message
Pen priority
Color merge control
Pen width scaling
Postscript
Enable Postscript
PS level 2 password
Default paper size
PS level 2 heap size
NIRS
Enable NIRS
C4
Enable C4
TIFF
Enable TIFF
Photometry
CALS
Enable CALS
ASCII
Enable ASCII

18.06.2002 92
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

End of line
Line overflow
Font size
Tab size
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Pen width
Page type
Custom page width
Custom page height
Standard page format
Standard page orientation
Pen width scaling
Printer
Pens
Pen width
Pen pattern

System
Scan memory reservation
Controller identification
Host name
Description
Location
Administrator
Set memory reservation
Orange zone threshold
Red zone limit
Connectivity
FTP
Enable FTP
Time-out
Communication mode
PDL selection
LPD
Enable LPD
Communication mode
PDL selection
SMB
Enable SMB
Workgroup name
Communication mode
PDL selection
Novell
Enable Novell
Pserver name
Pserver password
Access mode
File server name
NDS context
Queue poll interval
Connection retry interval
Communication mode
PDL selection
TCP/IP
Domain
DNS
Adapter 1
Enable
Enable DHCP
IP adress
IP mask
Default gateway
Primary WINS Server
Secudary WINS Server
IPX/SPX

18.06.2002 93
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapter 1
Enable
Netbeui
Adapter 1
Enable

18.06.2002 94
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· TDS400 SAC structure

Hereby the Oc· TDS400 SAC structure:

New SAC (implemented with LN TSM version 3.0.2)

1st version SAC structure

18.06.2002 95
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

OPRS structure for the Oc· TDS400

WFPS TDS Product Structure

Modelgroup TDS400

System number xxx

Modelserie Modelserie
Scanner Printer

TD410 TD420

Config type Config type Config type Config type

TDS410 TDS420R1 TDS420R2 TDS420R2S

M-type M-type M-type

M-type
4420 4420 4420
4410
Base printer Base printer Base printer
Scanner
P-Type P-Type P-Type
1 Roll unit 2 Roll Unit 2 Roll unit with
L-Type Q-Type compact stacker
Q-Type
cable Base Controller
Base Controller Q-Type
Option set Base Controller
Option set
L-Types:
L-Types: Option set
Monitor 17”
Monitor 17” L-Types:
Monitor 21”
Monitor 21” Monitor 17”
Centronics
Centronics Monitor 21”
Token Ring
Token Ring Centronics
BNC
BNC Token Ring
Keyboard
Keyboard BNC
Keyboard
L-Type L-Type L-Type
Copy Del. Tray Copy Del. Tray Copy Del. Tray

18.06.2002 96
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the Rx.x installation Oc· TDS400 system

This page gives you a guide how to install the Oc· TDS400 Rx.x system. The system will be
delivered with a:

Print engine:
100% pre-adjusted

Scanner (option):
100% pre-adjusted Scanner

Controller:
100% pre-adjusted

This indicates that the amount of the work during installation at the customer is decreased.

Step 1: Installation of the Oc· Power Logic controller

Installation description of the hardware and the software:

Step 2: Installation of the print engine

Installation description:

Step 3a: Installation of the Copy Output Stacker (optional)

If necessary: how to separate the engine from the stand
Installation description COS:

Step 3b: Installation of the Scanner (optional)

Installation description Scanner:

Step 4: Preparing the print engine

Enable the print system to make prints.
This is done by activating the installation test on the printer panel

Step 5: System software check / upgrade / download

It is possible that by stock reasons, the firmware is not upgraded to the latest version.
Check / upgrade and or download:

Step 6: Configure the TDS 400 system

Gui-less
1. Configure the Network settings via the Printer control panel.
2. Reboot the controller and the printer.

3. Install the Remote Logic aplications on the laptop.

(From the controller CD-ROM or from a separate CD-ROM).
4. Make a Direct Cable connection between the laptop and the Oc· Power Logic controller.
If not excist, install the connection on your laptop .
5. Check date and time. (The time zone is set by M&L Venlo and this setting is NOT possible
with the Settings Editor.)
- Login as Key Operator
- Select the map: Localization
- Select: Date & Time (WINNT takes over the new settings after the restart of the controller.)
6. - Configure the Network settings with the Settings Editor (SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. the network settings (enable/disable protocols, hostname)
(If the TCP/IP addresses are not available, use temporary: 192.168.100 or 101 or
102).
- Configure the TDS400 system with the Setting Editor (KO and SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. queue management, scan destinations

7. REBOOT the controller.

18.06.2002 97
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

With Gui
1. Start the controller in the <service> mode.
2. Check the time zone, the date and the time in the NT Date/Time proprties box.
If you have te change them, then activate the NGC_Down.bat icon, change the settings and
activate the NGC_Up.bat icon.
3. - Configure the Network settings with the Settings Editor (SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. the network settings (enable/disable protocols, hostname)
(If the TCP/IP addresses are not available, use temporary: 192.168.100 or 101 or
102).
- Configure the TDS400 system with the Setting Editor (KO and SA mode, Passwords )
E.g. queue management, scan destinations

4. REBOOT the controller.

Step 7: Configure the installation

At this point you are able to run the NotesSDS from the service laptop or the WebSDS
directly on the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
1. Set the controller in the SDS mode
2. - New installation: do the SDS test 70.1: Installation technician
- Hardware is not pre-adjusted: do the SDS test 70.2: Installation M&L
3. Only for installation in Poland and the Czech Republic
- set the special character set for the Polish and the Czech language for the engine and
the scanner

Step 8: Check / set the print quality for the print engine and the scanner
1. Make a service test print with SDS test 51 to test the print engine
Check the print quality according
2. Make a print from the transparant service test original to test the scanner.
Check the print quality according
3. On customer request:
12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 1
12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length of roll 2
15-1-005 Adjust a longer or shorter leading edge length of roll 1,2 and manual

Step 9: Installation of a driver or Oc· application on a customer workstation

Depending on the agreement between the customer and Oc·, software must be installed on the
customer workstation.
Make sure that you do not give away this type of services to the customer for free.
The information how to install the network integration are described in the;

Installing Remote Logic : User manual TDS400

Installing Print Exec Light: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual
Installing Postscript Driver: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual
Installing Raster Driver: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual
Installing AUTOCAD Driver: CD-ROM / Connectivity manual

Step 10: End of the visit

Check the system according the description in maintenance

Close the installation / visit

1. Log and reset all the fault and service counters with SDS test 31
2. Fill out the service report or STAR application.
3. Backup the System data, select [ Standard] with SDS test 71
4. Restart the controller and set the system in normal user mode (anonymous).

18.06.2002 98
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.0 to

R 1.1

The new software consist of:

l Oc· Power Logic controller CD-ROM with R1.1
l CD-ROM with the new drivers
l Diskette with the password for Scan Logic and /or Postscript 3 (optional).
l Scanner Eprom R1.1

Step 1: Backup the system data

Before you start the upgrade, you must backup the parameters of the system.
This saves time during the installation of the new system software.
1. Print the Print Settings on paper.
2. Backup the System data
l Connect your NotesSDS.
l Do the SDS test 71 [ Backup System data ]
l Copy the created directory (c:\service\visits\sub directory with the current date) to a diskette in
the laptop.
l Remove the diskette from the laptop, label it and keep it on a save place.
You need these files later on.

Step 2: Upgrade the NGC controller

Note 1:
If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

Notes 2:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
- The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.1, in the CD-ROM drive
3. Insert the existing installation diskette, Oc· Power Logic R1.0, in the diskette drive.
l Note: Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.
Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor), type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software, see step 3

7. The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
8. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
9. The controller restarts as "anonymous" user.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 3: Upgrade the scanner software

1. Open the right site cover.
2. Replace the EPROM R1.0 by the EPROM R1.1
3. Close the cover.

Step 4: Upgrade the printer engine software

1. Set temperary the next IP ADDRESS: 193.168.100.100 by the operating panel on the printer.
2. Connect your NotesSDS.
3. Do the SDS test 20-1-010 and set the next start of the controller in [ Diagnosis mode ].
(Switch off the controller with the Power ON/OFF button) (never press 2 times!)
4. After the green led is off, switch on the Controller.
5. Download the new software for the print engine:
l Copy the printer software from the controller CD-ROM
?:\upgrade\cventura\oce\apps\sds\swdl\vent_eng_r_1_1.ofp to a diskette on the laptop.

18.06.2002 99
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Download the printer software by the SDS test 73 .

Note:
Read carefully the SDS test description.
Check if the Printer boot version is 1.5.0, otherwise you have to download the printer boot
software wit SDS test 73. Do this seperate from the printer application software

Step 5: Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

1. Restart the controller by the Power ON button (never press 2 times!)

2. Make a Direct Cable connection with the controller.
3. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.
Be shure that the correct xxxx.cfg files are installed in the Remote Logic
4. Restore the correct customer settings:
(The right IP adresses, hostname, passwords are restored.)

l log in as KeyOperator
l load the [ current.kos ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 1.
File \ Open \ current.kos
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

l Check / change Date and Time: by System/Localisation.

Do not restart the controller.

l If scan to file exists:

Change in System the old R1.0 password by the new R1.1 password.

l log in as System Administrator

l load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 1.
File \ Open \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

l If PostScript exists:
Change in Printer/PostScript the old R1.0 password by the new R1.1 password.

5. Close all applications.

6. Connect the controller to the network.
7. Restart the controller by the Power ON button (never press 2 times!)
8. Enable the Postscript option in the System Administrators settings (if applicable).
9. Disconnect the laptop.
10. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare these with the previous one.
11. Rename the password file on the R1.1 password diskette to: [ password.oce ] and copy it to the
installation diskette.

Step 6: End of the visit

l Do the standard check / test according the maintenance procedure

18.06.2002 100
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.1 to

R 1.2.

To upgrade the Oc· TDS400 R1.1 system to the Oc· TDS400 R1.2 system you need the following items
depending of the system configuration:

CDROM NGC CDROM User TDS400 XX Firmpack R1.2 PBA, CPU Extra 128 MB RAM
TDS400 R1.2 Manual Quick Ref. scanner scanner
Manual
Part number 7208990 7137313 7137330 (GB) 7095421 5584710 7078563
Printer only V1.1 o o o
Hybrid system * o o o o o 256 MB RAM is needed
in case of :
V1.1
-Oc· Scan Logic
Hybrid system o o o o or
V1.1 -Print Exec Lt Web
(MOD 02) to be installed.
* : Hybrid system (Printer + scanner)
o : Order these parts to perform the upgrade.

Step 1: Preparation before you can start the upgrade

Step 2: Backup the system data / scan destinations

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic controller hardware / software

Note:
l Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.2, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the upgraded installation diskette, Oc· Power Logic R1.2, in the diskette drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor), type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked
by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software/hardware. (step 4)

The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
8. Reboot the controller.
9. The controller restarts as "anonymous" user and the viewer will be installed.
This takes about 4 minutes. Wait until the disk activity stops.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the scanner software

The scanner software / hardware must be upgraded depending of the system configuration. See the
above table.
1. Open the right site cover.

18.06.2002 101
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

2. Replace the Firmpack R1.1.1 with Firmpack R1.2 and / or scanner PBA, CPU
3. Close the cover.

Step 5: Upgrade the printer engine software

Step 6 : Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

Before you can restore the correct settings:

1. Enter a non-routable IP adress e.g. : 192.168.100.100 via the printer operating panel display.
2. Reboot the controller.

Restore Machine settings

Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.

1. Restore the settings via SDS-test 72

2. Select: Subset <All> / Target <Total>
3. Restore path A:\ 'current date' (back-up diskette in Laptop)
The scan destinations are automatically restored. (if applicable).

If a warning screen appears click <OK>

Restore Customer settings. (The right IP adresses, hostname, passwords are restored.)
1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.

Log in as Service Operator:

l View Key Operator settings
l load the [ current.kos ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ current.kos
Note:
Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

l View System Administrator settings

l load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the button "Apply".
Do not restart the controller.

2. Close all applications.

3. Shut down the controller by the Power On button and wait until the controller is completely shut
down.
4. Restart the controller by pressing the Power On button again.
5. In case postscript is installed then disable the postscript option, press apply in the settings editor,
enable
postscript option and press apply.
6. Disconnect the laptop.
7. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare these with the previous one.
8. Reboot the system and connect the controller to the network.

Step 7: End of the visit

Make sure that the Internet Explorer 'cache ' is cleared during the log off procedure.
This to be independent of the last visit situation.

l By enabling "Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when browser is closed"

Do this via: Start / Settings / Control Panel / Internet Properties / Advanced / Security

l Do the standard check / test according the maintenance procedure

18.06.2002 102
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 103
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.1 to

R1.3.

To upgrade the Oc· TDS400 R1.1 system to the Oc· TDS400 R1.3 system you need the following items
depending of the system configuration:

CDROM PLC CDROM User CDROM (5.0) Firmpack R1.3 PBA, CPU Extra 128 MB RAM
TDS400 R1.3 Manual Remote Logic scanner scanner
Part number 7209354 7218726 7225649 7095712 5584710 7078563
Printer only V1.1 o o o
Hybrid system * o o o o o 256 MB RAM is needed
in case of :
V1.1
-Oc· Scan Logic
Hybrid system o o o o or
V1.1 -Print Exec Lt Web
(MOD 02) to be installed.
* : Hybrid system (Printer + scanner)
o : Order these parts to perform the upgrade.

Step 1: Preparation before you can start the upgrade

Step 2: Backup the system data / scan destinations

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic controller hardware / software

Note:
l Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.3, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the upgraded installation diskette, Oc· Power Logic R1.3, in the diskette drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor), type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked
by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software/hardware. (step 4)

The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CD-ROM drive opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
8. Reboot the controller.
9. The controller restarts as "anonymous" user.
This takes about 2 minutes. Wait until the disk activity stops.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the scanner software

The scanner software / hardware must be upgraded depending of the system configuration. See the
above table.
1. Open the right site cover.
2. Replace the Firmpack R1.1.1 with Firmpack R1.3 and / or scanner PBA, CPU
3. Close the cover.

18.06.2002 104
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Step 5: Upgrade the printer engine software

Step 6 : Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

Before you can restore the correct settings:

1. Enter a non-routable IP adress e.g. : 192.168.100.100 via the printer operating panel display.
2. Reboot the controller.

Restore Machine settings

Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.

1. Restore the settings via SDS-test 72

2. Select: Subset <All> / Target <Total>
3. Restore path A:\ 'current date' (back-up diskette in Laptop)
The scan destinations are automatically restored. (if applicable).

If a 'warning' screen appears click <OK>

l Close SDS- and DCC connection.

Restore Customer settings. (The right IP adresses, hostname, passwords are restored.)
1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.

l Log in as Service Operator:

l View Key Operator settings

l load the [ current.kos ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.kos
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the apply an 'Information'-window pops up. This window shows the contradictions
between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log-file which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

Click <OK>
Do not restart the controller.

l View System Administrator settings

l load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
l When loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the apply an 'Information'-window pops up. This window shows the contradictions
between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log-file which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

Click <OK>
Do not restart the controller.

2. Close all applications.

3. Shut down the controller by the Power On button and wait until the controller is completely shut
down.
4. Restart the controller by pressing the Power On button again.
5. Disconnect the laptop.
6. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare these with the previous one.
7. Reboot the system.
8. Connect the controller to the network.

18.06.2002 105
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Step 7: End of the visit

Make sure that the Internet Explorer 'cache ' is cleared during the log off procedure.
This to be independent of the last visit situation.

l By enabling "Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when browser is closed"

Do this via: Start / Settings / Control Panel / Internet Properties / Advanced / Security

l Do the standard check / test according the maintenance procedure

18.06.2002 106
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Workflow of the upgrade procedure Oc· TDS400 system R1.2 to

R1.3.
You need the following items, depends on the system configuration, to upgrade the Oc· TDS400 R1.2 system to
the Oc· TDS400 R1.3 system:

CD-ROM NGC CD-ROM User CD-ROM (5.0) Firmpack R1.3 Extra 128 MB RAM
TDS400 R1.3 Manual Remote Logic Scanner
Part number 7209354 7218726 7225649 7095712 7078563
Printer only V1.2 yes yes yes
Hybrid system * yes yes yes yes 256 MB RAM is needed
in case of :
V1.2
-Oc· Scan Logic
or
-Print Exec Lt Web
to be installed.
yes : Order these parts to perform the upgrade.

Step 1: Preparation before you can start the upgrade

1. Make sure that the laptop date and controller date are the same, or the backup test will 71 fail.

GUIless
l Print the system settings on paper by the operator panel.
l Check on the print if the date & time is the same as on the laptop.
If needed, adjust the date & time with the [Settings Editor] on the laptop or a remote computer.

With GUI
l Double click on the clock in the right down corner of the screen.
Check and or adjust the date & time.

2. Check the version of the SDS-client and the Remote Logic on the Laptop

To use the R1.3 Notes SDS, you must have installed the latest versions of Remote Logic and
SDS-client on the laptop.
If this is not the case then:

1. Uninstall the SDS-client and / or Remote Logic.

l Remove through: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· TDS400
SDS Client 4.5.7.0 ].
l Remove through: Start, Settings, Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs the [ Oc· TDS400
Remote Logic 3.1].

2. Restart the Laptop!

3. Install the new SDS-client and / or Remote Logic (CD-ROM R1.3)

l SDS-client (4.6.4.0): CD-Drive:\sds_client_setup\sdcclnt.exe
l Remote Logic (5.0): CD-Drive Remote Logic\i386\setup.exe

How to setup the service laptop for NotesSDS is described in the following document:
Communication set up between Laptop and Controller.

At this point you can run the R1.3 Notes-SDS from the Service Laptop or the Web-SDS directly on
the controller.

Note:
Test the SDS before you do the uograde of the system release.

Step 2: Backup the system data

Before you start the upgrade, you must backup the parameters of the system.
This saves time during the installation of the new system software.

l Connect your Notes-SDS.

18.06.2002 107
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Do the SDS test 71 [ Backup System data ]

l Insert backup diskette in your laptop
l Subset: [ALL]
l Target: [Other dir (SL)]
l Press [Start] and select the path A:\
l Remove the diskette from the laptop, label it and keep it on a save place.
You need these files later.

Step 3: Upgrade the Oc· Power Logic controller software

Note:
l Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
If yes, ask the clients network administrator for permission to disconnect.
l The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed.
l The software installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
l If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. If the controller is OFF, switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the installation CD-ROM, Oc· Power Logic R1.3, in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Insert the installation diskette R1.2 in the diskette drive.
Note:
Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write protected.
Do not remove the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button on the controller.
5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: systems with a monitor, type: [ setup ] and press any key, when asked by the
messages on the screen !!

6. In the meantime you can upgrade the scanner software/hardware. (step 4)

The installation is unattended, until the controller sounds beeps and the CD-ROM drive
opens.
The CD-ROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CD-ROM and the installation diskette.
8. Restart the controller.
9. The controller restarts as an "anonymous" user.
This will take some time. Wait until the disk activity stops.
10. The installation is completed.

Step 4: Upgrade the scanner software

If there is a scanner in the configuration, then upgrade the scanner. See the above table.
1. Open the right site cover.
2. Replace the Firmpack R1.2 EPROM with the Firmpack R1.3 EPROM.
3. Close the cover.

Step 5: Upgrade the printer engine software

1. Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.

2. Do the SDS test 20-1-010 to set the next start of the controller in [ Diagnosis mode ].
3. Close the SDS session and the DCC connection. (Switch off the controller with the Power
ON/OFF button, never press 2 times!)
4. After the green led is turned off, switch on the controller.
5. Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.
6. Download the new software for the print engine:
l Download the printer software by the SDS test 73
l Select: [Select an already on the machine available download file]
l Select: [Preinstalled version Oc· 9450 ref]
l Select [Printer boot 1.7.0] and download the boot software.
(It is advised to do the download one by one).

After the download of the [Printer Boot] software, you must download the [Printer Application]
software.

18.06.2002 108
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select: [Select an already on the machine available download file].

l Select: [Preinstalled version Oc· 9450 ref].
l Select [Printer application 1.3.0] and download the print engine software.
l Close the SDS- and the DCC connection.
l Restart the controller.

Step 6 : Restore the settings

For more information about backup and restore, see:

Before you can restore the correct settings:

1. Enter a non-routable IP address e.g. : 192.168.100.100 by the printer operator panel
display.
2. Restart the controller.

Restore the machine settings

1. Connect your Lotus Notes SDS.
2. Restore the settings by the SDS-test 72
3. Select: Subset [All] / Target [Total]
4. Restore path A:\ 'current date' (on the backup diskette in the laptop)
The scan destinations are automatically restored. (if applicable).
If a 'warning' screen appears, click <OK>
5. Close the SDS session and the DCC connection.

Restore the Customer settings. (The right IP ADDRESS, host name and passwords are
restored.)
1. Activate the [ Settings Editor ] on the laptop.
2. Log in as Service Operator:
3. View the Key Operator settings.
4. Load the [ current.kos ] file from the backup diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.kos
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
5. When the file is loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the "Apply"button is pressed, an 'Information'-window appears. This window shows

the differences between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log file, which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

6. Click <OK>
Do not restart the controller.

7. View the System Administrator settings.

8. Load the [ current.sas ] file from the back-up diskette, created in step 2.
File \ Open \ A-Drive:(current date) \ current.sas
Note: Do not take the file in c:\Program files\Remote Logic
9. When loaded: press the " Apply" button.

After the "Apply"button is pressed, an 'Information'-window appears. This window shows

the differences between the settings of R1.2 and R1.3.
This information is stored in a Log file, which can be found in:
'C:\oce\apps\applications\SEerror.txt'

10. Click <OK>

Do not restart the controller.

Finish the restore action

1. Close all the applications.
2. Shut down the controller by the Power on/off button and wait until the controller is
completely shut down.
3. Restart the controller by pressing the Power On button.
4. Disconnect the laptop.
5. Print the [ Print Settings ] on paper and compare the settings with the previous one.
6. Restart the system.
7. Connect the controller to the network.

18.06.2002 109
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Step 7: End of the visit

Make sure that the Internet Explorer 'cache ' is cleared during the log off procedure.
This to be independent of the last visit situation.

1. Enable the "Empty Temporary Internet Files folder when the browser is closed".
Do this by: Start / Settings / Control Panel / Internet Options / tap Advanced / Security.

2. Do the standard check / test according to the maintenance procedure .

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

SAC Structure:

No SAC levels defined

SAC level 1
SAC level 2
SAC level 3
SAC level 4
Document type installation

Annotation info

Created on: 18-03-2002

By: Wim van Helden/HQ/Oce

Language of TSM database GB

Access level: Published to OpCo & HQ
3500

Published to Opco by
Published to HQ by
Annotation ID Annotation not published to HQ
Annotation ID HQ-GB-2002-0018

ITC Status Annotation not published to HQ

ITC Status: In progress

18.06.2002 110
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Limitations/Known problems release 1.1

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:
Symptom Classification
Printing
AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct

Area Classification
Job submission
Customer cannot update PS/WRD on the NGC
Printing from Macintosh Os 8.5 and 8.6

Job control
Scan-to-file
Scan-to-file standard size is not correct
Incomplete info when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm lengths

Job processing
Transformations are cancelled for partial frame
PS 3
PostScript level 3 interpreter crash when printing files containing some PostScript level 2 commands

Raster data format

Uncompressed TIFF files.
Vector data format
Wrong Calcomp parameter detection.

Applications QM, SCP, SE, SM, and viewer.

Queue Manager
Blocked Queue when deleting multiple files at once from the Queue Manager
Scan Manager
Crash with duplicate destinations in Scan Manager
Wrong languages in the Scan Manager.
Settings Editor
Printhead Duty Cycle setting not working
Viewer
AutoView sometimes does not work

Power Logic Controller

Configuration set to previous values.
Windows returns the highest IP-address to the adapters as default, if more than one adapter is present.

Scanner
Unexpected length in case of Scan to File, 200% and standard size A2
Destinations missing
Menu card in wrong language.
Scanner displays wrongly "ready to copy"

Printer
No reboot info on Printer panel
Manual feed copies missing after error situation.
Wrong material request in case of manual feed
Incorrect error recovery in case of 2 errors.

18.06.2002 111
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Prepare for run message stays in display

Menu card in wrong language
Scrambled print after test 54

18.06.2002 112
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Limitations/Known problems release 1.2

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:

Symptom classification
Image quality
Registration
Paper path
Finishing
Document handling
Display messages
Error messages
Power & Control
Printing
B1 is not part of the automate behavior. (R1.2)
AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct. (R1.1, R1.2)
Scanning
Accounting
Noise
Other

Area Classification

Job submission
Autocad ADI
Autocas HDI
Autocad LT
Autocad LT HDI
Win raster driver
Roll info not updated in WRD driver. (R1.2)
Customer can not update PS/WRD on the NGC. (R1.1, R1.2)
Win PostScript driver
Customer can not update PS/WRD on the NGC. (R1.1, R1.2)
Mac PostScript driver
Print Exec LT Web
Other
Printer sharename changed after upgrade R1.1 to R1.2
Job control
Remote Control Format
Oc· Job Ticker
Controller applications
System control panel
Settings editor
Queue Manager
Scan manager
Applications crash in case the scan destination path is filled with "c:" for a FTP
destination (R1.2)
Incomplete info when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm lengths. (R1.1, R1.2)

Oc· View LT
Viewer does not work after installation (R1.2)
Remote Logic
System control panel
Settings editor
Queue Manager
Job processing
HPGL

18.06.2002 113
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

HPGL/2
ASCII
Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII not full proof. (R1.2)
Calcomp
Tiff
Cals
Nirs
PostScript level 2
PostScript III
PDF
Communication
LPR/LPD
FTP
SMB
Netware PServer
Centronics
Controller
Interface
Hardware
Operating system
System software
Controller software
Postscript driver is not shared after installation (R1.2) Interpretor is however working.
Engine
01 Photoconductor
02 Charging
04 Print Head
05 Developing
06 Transfer
07 Cleaning/Discharging
08 Fusing
12 Paper Roll Drawers
15 Paper Transport
19 Delivery
22 Power & Control
Print is cutted when switching to SDS mode. (R1.2)
Wrong printer software version shown after downloading the printer software. (R1.2)
No reboot info on Printer panel. (R1.1, R1.2)
23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

Scanner
09 Originals
10 Scanning
11 Image Processing
22 Power & Control
23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

SDS
Win2000 not supported for RAS connection with a WinNT PLC controller (R1.2). Work around:

SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails. (R1.2)

18.06.2002 114
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Limitations/Known problems release 1.3

Description:

Problem cause:

Resolution:

Limitation / Known problem not followed with a link, do not have corrections available.
Symptom classification
Image quality
Registration
The image is shifted outside the sheet by manual feed and landscape orientation
Paper path
Finishing
Document handling
Display messages
Transparent and Translucent changed in simplified Chinese translation.
Error messages
Power & Control
Printing
B1 is not part of the automatic selection.
AutoRoll selection mechanism not correct.
Scanning
Accounting
Noise
Other
Japanese/Chinese Keyboard can not be selected in the CFT tool.

Area Classification

Job submission
Autocad ADI
Autocas HDI
Autocad LT
Autocad LT HDI
Win raster driver
The roll information is not updated in WRD driver.
The customer can not update the PS/WRD driver on the PLC.
Win PostScript driver
The customer can not update the PS/WRD driver on the PLC.
Mac PostScript driver
Print Exec LT Web
PELTWEB R1.2 requires IE 4.0.2 SP2 or above.
Large files can not be submitted in advanced job submition.
The advanced job submission does not operate on Mac and Unix OS.
There is no warning message when PELTWEB is not started on a PLC with less than 256 MB.

The file format is not identified automatically.

PELTWEB only displays the correct Czech, Polish, Hungarian and Japanese if the OS is
configured with the correct fonts.
A job is cancelled when the job composition window is closed or a new job is activated, before
the submission acknowledge message is disappeared.
The job is cancelled when the Submit button (Netscape) is activated two times.
PDF/PS is displayed as supported, but is not available on the controller.
PDF/PS documents are not discarded while they are disabled in the SE.
A wrong message is displayed when at the same time the number of submission sessions are
exceeded.
A wrong message when the spool is full.
The user name not saved if the name includes spaces.
The user name is not recovered in the Japanese language.

18.06.2002 115
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PELTWEB needs a restart of the PLC when the language is changed on the PLC.
Other
The share name of the printer is changed after the upgrade from R1.1 to R1.2 or R1.3
Job control
Remote Control Format
Oc· Job Ticket
Controller applications
System control panel
Settings editor
Not possible to fill the location in the SE with Japanese characters.
Queue Manager
Plots generated by SDS are not printed after a change to NUSR and back to
SDS mode.
Scan manager
Not complete information when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm lengths.
(R1.1, R1.2)
Default NIC addresses (0.0.0.0) causes Scan to File errors.
Not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a change from
English to Japanese in the IME.
File destinations not checked before the delivery of a file.
Files on remote destinations are written over without a message to confirm.

Oc· View LT
Remote Logic
A connection is not possible from Remote Logic if <options-hostname> is ["localhost"]
on the controller.
The [Application launcher] disappears from the screens smaller than 1024x768.
System control panel
Settings editor
Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor.
Not possible to fill the location in the SE with Japanese characters..
Queue Manager
Job processing
Not supported file types sometimes crashes the controller
HPGL
HPGL/2
ASCII
The Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII is not full proof.
Calcomp
Tiff
Cals
Nirs
PostScript level 2
PostScript III
PDF
Communication
LPR/LPD
FTP
SMB
The transmission is lost after a stop of a transmission.
The length of the hostname is limited to 14 characters.
Netware PServer
Centronics
Controller
Interface
Hardware
Operating system
System software
Controller software
Engine
01 Photoconductor
02 Charging
04 Print Head

18.06.2002 116
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

05 Developing
06 Transfer
07 Cleaning/Discharging
08 Fusing
12 Paper Roll Drawers
15 Paper Transport
19 Delivery
22 Power & Control
The print is cut by a change to the SDS mode.
The wrong software version of the printer is shown after the download of the printer software.

No restart information on the printer panel.

23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

Scanner
09 Originals
10 Scanning
11 Image Processing
22 Power & Control
23 Drive
24 Accessories
25 Environment/Customer

SDS
Win2000 does not support the RAS connection with a WinNT PLC controller. Work around:

The SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails.

SDS cli·nt 4.6.3.0 needs MsDAC installed if the laptop does not run STAR.
WEB-SDS will not start if [Oc· Viewstation] is active.
The previous backup.zip file is included in the new backup of the same day.

18.06.2002 117
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Cleaning liquids

Cleaner A
Application: Antistatic cleaning and maintenance fluid for glass surfaces.
Code numbers: USA: 1068117 and EUR. 1068116
Contents: also silicone oil
Disadvantage: softened toner contaminates originals, rots, belts and pinch rollers
If glass surface is coated, use cleaner O

Cleaner O
Application: Cleaning optical parts, mirrors, lenses and glass platen
Code number: 7991470
Contents: Solution of alcohol and moistening agent (soap)
Finish: Leaves no stripes and no film
Disadvantages: When used on glass platen: surface is dry and original transport problems occur

Cleaner K
Application: General purpose cleaning, rubber belts, rollers
Code numbers: USA 1929023 and EUR. 1929022
Contents:
Disadvantages: Flammable, harmful

Cleaner T
Application: Cleaning fluid for removing toner caked on hot/cold machine parts.
Code numbers: USA 1989750 and EUR. 1989916
Contents: Diethyleneglycol monoethylether acetate
Disadvantages: Never clean the OPC! It affects the surface!
Usage: Apply cleaning fluid on a cloth and polish the parts to be cleaned.
After cleaning, the surface must be polished with a moth moistened with water and
after that with a dry cloth so to be sure that the cleaned surface is dry.
Caution:
Safety: Cleaner T is irritating to the eyes and defats the skin. Wear protection gloves.

Cleaner P
Application: Cleaner for OPC's
Code numbers: USA 1987798 and EUR. 1987994
Contents:

Caution:
Safety: Cleaner P is irritating to the eyes and defats the skin. Wear protection gloves.

Cleaner R
Application: Cleaner for corona wires
Code number: 7991469
Contents: Phosphates (extremely mild Acid)
Disadvantage: Residue from Alkali salts corrodes rubber on silicone belts

18.06.2002 118
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Maintenance procedure Oc· TDS400

Introduction
The maintenance process is necessary to satisfy the customer.
Do this to:
Keep the best print and copy quality;
Decrease the number of repeat calls.

General description of the cleanning liquids

Do the following maintenance procedure every visit.

Tools and materials

The materials to start the maintenance:
Description Codenumber EUR Codenumber USA
Cleaner T 1989.916 1989.750
Cleaner K 1929.022 1929.023
Cleaner O 7991.470 7991.470
Maslin cloth 5630.211 5630.211

The life time of PM parts

The life time of the preventive maintenance parts must pass the life time as indicated in the
table.
Replace the preventive maintenance parts if the print and the copy quality is not best.

Code No Description Estimated lifetime (meters)

7069.008 Photoconductor 20.000
2912.651 Cleaning blade 20.000
2999.818 The charge corona wire assy, or 20.000
the charge corona unit assy
2999.821
2999.802 Transfer and separation corona wire 20.000
assy
7045.011 Developer (= 1bottle) 20.000

Maintenance procedure printer

Check Action Procedure

The print quality Make the service test print 51. How to check the print quality
Check the print quality is in the
specification.
The waste toner bag Replace the waste toner bag when it
is full.
Check if the waste toner bag is
placed correctly.
If toner has leaked, clean the area.
Instruct to the customer about how
to put the bag correctly and when to
replace the bag
The fuser unit Check the absorber wires are free
from toner. Remove the toner.
Use the cleaner T.
Check the output rollers are free
from toner. Remove toner, using
cleaner K

18.06.2002 119
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The charge corona Clean the charge wires and unit. How to clean the charge wires
unit Replace the wire when cleaning has and unit
no result.
Clean the unit.
In case of extreme corrosion of the
frame, replace the unit
The transfer Clean the transfer and sepa-ration How to clean the transfer and
separation unit wire. separation wires, and unit.
Replace the wire when clean-ing
has no effect.
Clean the transfer and separation
unit.
In case of extreme corrosion of the
frame, replace the unit
The LED print heads Clean the LED Print Heads with a
lint-free cloth
The developing unit Replace the developer when print
quality problems are caused by the
developer.
End of life developer
Check the Check the quality of the service test How to clean and polish the
photoconductor print 51 made. photoconductor.
Clean or polish the photoconductor
when print and copy quality
problems are caused by the
photoconductor
The cleaning unit Check the surface of the clean blade
is not damaged

Maintenance procedure scanner

Check Action Procedure

The copy quality Make a copy of the transparent test How to check the copy quality.
original.
Check the copy quality is in
specification
The original table Clean the glass plate and white
plate.
Use cleaner A.
Advice the customer, why to clean
the glass and white plate regularly.
The procedure is described in the
Operator Manual: "Cleaning the
glass platen".
Advise the customer to use the
"Cleaner kit"
Optical path Clean the mirror.
Use a dry maslin cloth.
Check and clean if the lens and
CCD-unit necessary

18.06.2002 120
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Power Logic controller: User Names & Passwords

Note:
If you want to have the login window pop-up, hold down the <shift> key during booting of the
controller.

Users login SDS/Setting QM/SCP Password

Windows NT Editor
Service engineer service Service 675756
Normal user anonymous Anonymous Anonymous [ anonymous ]
Key operator - Key operator Key operator KeyOp
System - System System administrator SysAdm
administrator administrator
Repro operator - - Repro operator ReproOp
For the BIOS 6869767*
System menu on [Arrow left ] [stop] [Arrow right] [stop
printer

* Note:
Use numeric part of the keyboard (right side) to
enter the number

For security reason the customer can change the following passwords:
l Key Operator Password
l System Administrator password
l Repro Operator password.

Use SDS test 94 to view the modified passwords.

18.06.2002 121
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Notes SDS session

Explanation SDS session

The SDS session starts and controls the SDS Session for WebSDS (on the Service Laptop or
Controller) or NotesSDS (on Service laptop).
Within the Notes SDS also a sds_log.mdb file (showing all system SDS settings) can be
viewed.

Note:
A Direct Cable Connection from the laptop to controller can take some time. Please wait.

Settings in SDS session:

Host
The following entries are possible:

l NotesSDS on the service laptop: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. Replace the
address by service to run the NotesSDS.
l WebSDS on the service laptop: The default of the Controller TCP/IP address is shown.
Replace the address by service to run the WebSDS.
l WebSDS on the controller: The default controller TCP/IP address is shown. This address is
OK to run the Web SDS. In case the controller is not connected to a network use: localhost.
l In case a sds_log.mdb file must be viewed via NotesSDS, use local as an entry.

Password
The service password is required to access the SDS

Start / Stop
Start / Stop button to start / stop the SDS session.

Note:
Make sure that you always STOP the SDS session before leaving the NotesSDS or WebSDS.

Message
Actual status message of the SDS session.

System information
System type: indication of the used system (in this case Oc· TDS400).

Controller status

NURS mode: while printing / plotting the technician is able to read out machine information e.g.
counters.
It is not possible to change parameters or activate outputs while online.
SDS mode: technician has full access to the system.

Permanent error
Iindication of a permanent error

Remove / test 30
Activate test 30 to reset the permanent error.

18.06.2002 122
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 123
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· TDS400 SDS passwords

Passwords of the Oc· TDS400 system.

18.06.2002 124
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

SDS test 71 (Backup the system data) fails. (R1.2)

Description
Check if the Laptop date and the controller date are equal, otherwise SDS test 71 fails.

18.06.2002 125
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Tips and (connection) problems laptop LN SDS

Problems
Message in SDS session screen: [ CreateDispatch() failed ].
Message in SDS session screen: [ CreateDispatch() failed ].
Activate the OK button, message: [ SDS server not found ].

Problem:
The SDS on your laptop is not or wrong registered.

Solution:
1. Make a Direct Cable Connection with the controller.
2. Start the Windows Explorer and open the c:\oce\apps\sds map.
3. Activate REG.BAT by double clicking it.
4. Make sure that the file OceSds.ini is in your windows directory ( C:\windows ).
If it is not copy it from c:\oce\apps\sds to c:\windows.
5. Activate SDSserver.exe by double clicking it.
6. Now run Lotus Notes and activate the SDS session. This should now work properly.
7. If you stop Lotus Notes the SDS server can still be active (this time only) and you must stop it
manually.
You can do this by double clicking the icon in the taskbar and then you select shutdown server
in the pop-up window.
8. When this is done once, the next connection will work properly

Solving connection problems

In cases the connection between the Controller and the Service Laptop fails the following items
can be checked successively to check for the cause.

l Check that your hosts file on your Laptop is correctly adapted.

Open the hosts file within your Windows95 directory with Notepad and check that the following
lines are added;
134.188.254.101 laptop
134.188.254.100 service

l Ping to the controller IP address: 134.188.254.100

Ping to the laptop IP address: 134.188.254.101

l Check within the Network Properties of your Laptop that in the Client for Microsoft Networks no
connection is made to a Windows NT Domain and no name is filled in within this field.

l Check the hostname of the controller, no more than 12 characters

l Open a HyperTerminal session with the same settings as defined in the previous chapter
correct settings.
Connect a loop back plug to the COM1 port of the laptop. The plug is available as tool.
(7991.531)
Characters you type should appear on the screen.
If not; your problem is the within the hardware of your Laptop.

l The same action can be done on the Controller.

Before doing this the RAS services should be stopped within the Remote Access Admin
application of the Controller.
Characters you type should appear on the screen.
If not; your problem is the within the hardware of your Controller.

l Connect the cable between the Controller and the Laptop and open the HyperTerminal session
on both sides.
Characters you type on the Laptop should appear on the Controller screen and visa versa.
If not, the problem is within the cable.

l Open the Remote Access Admin application of the Controller.

Open the Port Status window and try to make a connection as described in the previous
chapter.
This window can give you details why the connection failed.

18.06.2002 126
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 127
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

01-29 Function tests overview

Indentification
Every test has its unique number. This number is composed in the following way:

test number = SAC-group + function group + reference

Function tests can be divided into the next groups:

Function group Number

[ Counters ] 0
[ Parameters ] 1
[ Inputs ] 2
[ Outputs ] 4
[ Specials ] 6
[ Adjustments ] 7
[ Consumables ] 8
[ Information ] 9

Definition
[ Counters ]
[ Parameters ]
[ Inputs ]
[ Outputs ]
[ Specials ]
[ Adjustments ]
[ Consumables ]
[ Information ]

All tests are described in corresponding chapters.

18.06.2002 128
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 30 Reset PE ]
Reset permanent error.

You can see a permanent error only in the [ SDS SESSION ] test.
The reset button for a permanent error is also available in [ SDS SESSION ] test.

18.06.2002 129
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service counters ]

Description Log and Reset the fault and the service counters .
Also the counters in the fault history will be updated.

Value

Remarks On of the last steps, before ending SDS session.

18.06.2002 130
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32 Display the last errors (overview) ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

32.1 Display the last errors

32.2 Display the last system errors

32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode (SDS session active)

32.4 Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active)

Remarks

18.06.2002 131
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.1 Display the last errors ]

Description Display the last errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 132
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.2 Display the last system errors ]

Description Display the last system errors.

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 133
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.3 Display the last errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last errors in system mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 134
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 32.4 Display the last system errors in the service mode ]

Description Display the last system errors in service mode (SDS session active).

The last 15 faults are displayed.

Information presented for each fault:
l History, after which visit the error was generated
e.g 0 = between the last vist and now
e.g. 1 = the visit before...
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Date; at the fault moment
l Time; at the fault moment

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 135
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 34 Display the top 10 error (overview) ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value The information is displayed in 4 SDS tests:

34.1 Display the top 10 errors

34.2 Display the complete system top 10 errors

34.3 Relative error top 10 (not available yet)

34.4 Releative system error top 10 (not avalable yet)

Remarks

18.06.2002 136
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 34.1 Display the top 10 error ]

Description Display the top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 137
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 34.2 Display the complete system top 10 error ]

Description Display the complete system top 10 error

Information presented for each fault:

l Item number
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 138
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 35 Display the recorded errors in CAS-group ]

Description Display the recorded errors in the CAS-group

All logged errors are displayed in CAS-group order, with the items:
l Fault number
l Name; description of the fault.
l Counter; number of times the fault has occured
l Usage;
l Relative;

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 139
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 36 Display the counters of the consumables ]

Description Display the counters of the consumables

Information presented for each consumable counter:

l Consumable counter number
l Consumable counter name
l The current value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 140
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 37 Display the settings of the parameters ]

Description Display the settings of the parameters

Information presented for each parameter:

l Parameter name
l The current value
l The minimum range value
l The maximum range value

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 141
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 38 Display the Service / Marketing counters ]

Description Display the amount of prints, copies and scans made on the system.

Information presented for each parameter:

l Absolute
l Since last visit

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 142
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 45 Print the system settings ]

Description Print the system settings.

The following items are selected and printed:

l The Oc· TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations).

l All BIOS settings
l The hardware configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The software configuration of the Oc· Power Logic controller
l The status report of the total system (W NT and Oc· TDS400)

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 143
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 49 Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and the
resolution ]

Description Print the test print 49 to check the optical density and resolution.

The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value

Remarks Selection: roll 1, 2 or manual feed.

18.06.2002 144
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 51 Print the service test print 51 ]

Description Print the service test print 51.

A test print is made to check the print process.
The print file is stored on the Oc· Power Logic controller.

Value Selection:
l Roll 1
l Roll 2
l Manual feed

Remarks

18.06.2002 145
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 52 Print the Demo Print ]

Description Print the Demo print.

This print contains a drawing of the Oc· TDS400 and an image of the Quick
Referece Card.

Value

Remarks

18.06.2002 146
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 54 Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the

print head ]

Description Print the test print 54 to check the correct working of the print head

Value This test will disable the connection from Oc· Power Logic controller to the
printhead interface PBA.
The image is generated by the printhead interface PBA.

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 147
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70 Installation Transport employee (or technician) ]

The Oc· TDS400 system (Oc· Power Logic controller, printer and scanner) is complete
adjusted in the production department. All Oc· Power Logic controller optionals are installed. If
some adjustments must be repeated during the installation, than they are enabled in the
installation menu.
The print engine can be delivered:
l With or without developer.
l With or without Compact Output Stacker.
l With adjustments enabled in the installation menu.

The tables shows the adjustments that can be enabled. You can access them by the
installation menu on the operator panel of the Printer (Menu Installation, if the tests are
enabled !!!!!).
Note: the SDS session must be stopped during the Installation test by the transporter.
Or error code "67"appears in the printer display. Solution: .

Print engine is NOT filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
2 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
3 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
4 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

Print engine is filled with developer

Step SDS test Description
1 12-7-008 Adjustment procedure of the trailing edge position between
the first and the following prints in a run
2 12-7-009 Adjustment procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
3 15-7-001 Installation test "Head margin

18.06.2002 148
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1 Installation technician (Overview Printer / Scanner / Oc·

Power Logic controller) ]
The configuration is complete adjusted in the production line.

Do the next test only if:

- you want to check the performance of the configuration
- you want to tune the quality to the customer's demand
- the configuration is not the same as received from the production line (e.g. other scanner or controller or ...)

Remarks:
Next actions must be executed before you start the SDS 70 tests:
1. The developer unit is filled and adjusted (Adjustment procedure new developer) .
2. The adjustment: Trailing edge position between the first and the following prints in a run
3. The adjustment: Paper cut length of the roll 1
4. The adjustment: Leading edge position for the roll 1, 2 and manual feed

Step SDS test Description

1 70.1.1 Printer installation
2 70.1.2 Scanner installation
3 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller installation

18.06.2002 149
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1.1 Printer Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step SDS test Name Adj

1 51 Print the test print
2 15-1-001 Adjust the leading edge position (PTRINSE
15B1)
3 51 Print the test print
4 12-1-051 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 1 (on request customer)
5 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 1
6 51 Print the test print
7 12-1-052 Adjust a longer or shorter trailing edge length
of roll 2 (on request customer)
8 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of roll 2
9 12-6-43 Print a 841 mm blank print of roll1
10 51 Print the test print manual feed
11 15-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction for
manual feed
12 49 Print the test print for the optical density
13 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity for average line / text
prints
14 04-1-004 Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints

18.06.2002 150
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1.2 Scanner Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician
Step SDS test Description Adjustment
1 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 accuracy in
the feed direction
2 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy
in width direction (1:1)
3 09-1-002 Adjust the start timer of
the scanning
4 09-1-003 Adjust the stop timer of
the scanning
5 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position
original (in 0.1 mm)

18.06.2002 151
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.1.3 Oc· Power Logic controller Installation ]

For information about the next adjustments or SDS tests, see: Installation technician

Step Test number Name Adjustment

1 90 System configuration
2 91 Serial number
3 93 Set the international paper
standards
4 95 Modification records (Not in
R1)
5 97 Preset the copy counter
6 98 Set the first installation
date

18.06.2002 152
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2 Installation M&L (Overview) ]

The installation procedure for M&L is divided into 3 blocks:

l Printer installation M&L assembling: SDS test 70.2.1

l Printer installation M&L configuration: SDS test 70.2.2

l Scanner installation M&L: SDS test 70.2.3

18.06.2002 153
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2.1 Printer Installation M&L assembling ]

Step SDS test Name Adjustment

1 73 SWDL
2 22-6-001 Initialize non volatile data printer
3 05-1-002 Adjust the sensivity of the developer
sensor (DEVCONSE 05B1)
4 05-7-001 Adjustment procedure new developer
5 54 Print the printhead check print
6 49 Testprint process
7 04-1-003 Adjust the light intensity normal
8 04-1-004 Adjust the light intensity poster
9 51 Service test print
10 04-1-005 Adjust the light intensity left printhead
11 04-1-007 Adjust trhe light intensity for the right
printhead
12 04-1-008 Horizontal alignment of the left and the
middle printhead
13 04-1-009 Horizontal alignment of the middle and
the right printhead
14 04-1-010 Vertical alignment of the left printhead
15 04-1-012 Vertical alignment of the right printhead
16 51 Service test print
17 15-1-003 Adjust the image position in the width
direction for manual feed
18 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure for new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
19 12-1-053 Enable the Installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3).
(12-7-008)
20 12-1-054 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
21 15-1-004 Enable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position. (15-7-020)
22 91.3 Set the printer serial number

Continue with sds 70.2.2

18.06.2002 154
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2.2 Printer installation M&L configuration ]

Continuation of sds 70.2.1
Step SDS test Name Adjustment
1 12-7-008 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the trailing edge position between the
first and the following prints in a run.
2 12-7-009 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 1
3 12-7-010 Installation test: Adjustment procedure of
the paper cut length roll 2
4 51 Service test print
5 15-1-001 Setting the head margin
6 51 Service test print
7 12-1-004 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 1
8 51 Service test print
9 12-1-006 Adjust the cutting length for a new roll 2
10 51 Service test print
11 12-1-003 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 1
12 51 Service test print
13 12-1-041 Adjust the image in the width direction of
roll 2
14 05-1-004 Enable / disable the adjustment Enable: transport wi
procedure new developer (05-7-001) Disable: transport w
15 12-1-053 Disable installation test: Adjustment
procedure leading edge position for the
roll 1 and roll 2 (PRDLEADSE 12B3)
16 12-1-054 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
procedure of the paper cut length roll 1
(12-7-009)
17 15-1-004 Disable the installation test: Adjustment
of the leading edge position (15-7-020)
18 51 Service test print
19 31 Log and Reset the fault and the service
counters.

18.06.2002 155
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 70.2.3 Scanner Installation M&L]

Step SDS test Description Adjustment

1 22-6-021 Initialize non volatile data scanner
2 10-6-002 Maximum exposure level
3 10-7-001 CCD allignment
4 10-7-003 CCD gain
5 10-7-002 CCD focus
6 10-7-001 CCD alignment
7 10-7-004 1:1 width and right alignment

18.06.2002 156
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 71 Backup the system data ]

R1.1

Description Backup the system data.

You can choose between: All, SDS, KOSSAS.

The following actions are performed:

l On the controller PC a new directory is created in the c:\service\visits directory
with the current date (YYYYMMDD) as directory name.
Example: C:\service\visits\20010218.

Depending of the backup choice one or more files are stored in the new
directory:
l The KOS and SAS files.
l The SDS database files.
l An OTS file is generated from the SDS log database. (OTS is a file needed
with the [ STAR ] application).
l A Dumpconfig.txt file. This is an ASCII file.

The service technician must copy the files from the controller to the laptop by
the Direct Cable connection.
Copy the files to a backup diskette which stays with the machine.
(If the files are too large, compress the files with e.g. WinZip).

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test backups the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:

l Standard:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Actual customer settings (current.sas, curent.kos, current.sm,
oce9450dumpconfig.txt, adt.cfg)
l All:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,
Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)
l Settings Editor:
Backup of

18.06.2002 157
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l All customer settings files on the PLC (*.sas, *.kos, *.sm,

Dumpoce9450Config.txt, adt.cfg)
l SDS:
Backup of
l SDS settings (sds_log.mdb, sds_info.mdb)
l Accounting:
Backup of
l All accounting files on the PLC (*.csv)

Target:

l Controller only:
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Default dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l The default STAR directory on the service laptop
l Other dir (sl)
Places the backup files in
l C:\service\visits\YYYYMMDD on the PLC
l Any directory you can browse on the service laptop

Remarks Execute a Standard backup to Other dir.

Zip this directory on your service laptop to the logfloppy for your system.
Leave this floppy at the system.

18.06.2002 158
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 71/72 Backup / Restore ] of the system software: When to do

it?
General
l The parameters of all the SDS adjustments and settings of the system are stored in the
EEPROM on the CPU pba of the printer engine.
This EEPROM is fixed on the pba with solder.

l The parameters of all the client settings (key operator and system administrator) are stored in
the xxx.kos & xxx.sas files in the controller. E.g. connectivity, passwords and the settings by
the [ Remote Logic ].

l Changes made by the SDS or the operator panel (e.g. installation menu) are stored in the
EEPROM of the printer and then copied to the SDS application in the controller.

l When the system is switched ON, the data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied to
the SDS application in the controller.

l A complete backup on a diskette contains all the system and the client settings.

When to restore the data:

After replacement of the printer CPU pba
The new EEPROM on the CPU pba has the default data.
Restore the system data from the backup diskette.
(Client settings (xxx.kos and xxx.sas) are still on the controller)

After replacement of the printhead assy (PHD + I/O pba)

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
assy.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead assy.
Then all the settings from the printhead I/O pba are stored in the EEPROM of the CPU pba in the
printer.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!
Make the service test print with the SDS 51 to check the light intensity.

After replacement if the prinhead I/O pba

The setting of the memory flag in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates a new printhead
I/O pba.
At power on, the CPU of the printer detects the setting of the flag: new printhead I/O pba.
Then all the printhead settings in the printer EEPROM are stored in the EEPROM of the printhead
I/O pba.
The flag in the printhead I/O pba is toggled.
No restore action by service!

18.06.2002 159
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

After replacement of only the printhead or only the printhead I/O pba from another system.
The flag setting of the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba indicates no new hardware. So, It is not
possible to store new information in the EEPROM of the printhead I/O pba!
This means that the production adjustments of the printhead quality differs from the existing
printhead.
Only SDS settings, as e.g. light intensity, horizontal and vertical position can be changed.
So: NO copy / print quality guarantee.

After replacement or upgrade of the [ Power Logic Controller ]

After power on, the system data in the EEPROM of the printer is always copied (restored) to the
SDS application in the controller.
Restore the client settings: xxx.kos and xxx.sas from the backup diskette

After download of the system software

The system software is downloaded in an other EEPROM.
This EEPROM is placed in a socket.
So there is no need to restore any data!

18.06.2002 160
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 72 Restore the system data ]

R1.1

Description Restore the system data.

You can do it from the diskette / harddrive of your laptop.
1. Activate the SDS test 72.
2. Select [ Subset & Target ].
3. Press the [ Start ] button.
4. In the window: Browse for folder, select the drive and / or folder where the
backup files are stored.
5. The restore function starts automatically. The files are stored in the
c:\service\restore directory of the controller. Then:
- the logdatabase is copied to c:\oce\apps\sds directory.
- the KOS/SAS settings file is copied to the KOS/SAS application directory.
- the parameters logged in the parameters table and the consumables logged
in the Consumables table (in the log database) are sent to the specific targets.

6. Wait till the [ Status ] window indicates: Completed. It take some minutes.
7. If applicable: Restore the xxx.kos and xxx.sas settings in the [ Settings Editor ]
- The [ current.kos ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as K.O, set the view to KO settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as K.O. and save the settings.
- The [ current.sas ] file must be opened and applied in the Settings Editor.
(log in as S.A., set the view to SA settings, open the file, select apply, log out
as S.A. and save the settings.
8. Restart the controller.

Value

Remarks

R1.2

Description This test restores the SDS and Customer system settings.

Value The following options are possible;

Subset:
Target:

Remarks The files for the settings editor (current.kos/sas) and scan manager (current.sm)
have to be opened, applied and saved in these applications before the settings
are loaded by the system.
Open the corresponding application and login as Service Operator.

REBOOT THE CONTROLLER AND SWITCH OFF / ON ALL THE

COMPONENTS.

18.06.2002 161
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 162
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 73 Download DESCRIPTION of the system software ]

The next list gives you a step by step description how to download the system software by SDS test 73.
The data is written in an EEPROM that is put in a socket.

Warning for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

1. Make a Direct Cable Connection between the laptop and the controller.
- Click on <Cancel> in the window: Direct Cable Connection Host.
- Minimize the window: Direct Cable Connection, when you see the text: Connected via Direct
Cable on COM1.
2. Start Lotus Notes and open the TDS400 TSM.
3. Start the SDS session.
4. Select the SDS test 20-1-010 (Select the next NT start method).
Set the test to: [ diagnostic ].
5. Close the SDS session.
6. Restart the [ Oc· Power Logic ] controller.
This disconnects your Direct Cable connection!
7. Wait approximately 3 minutes to make sure that the controller is in the Diagnosis mode,
because there is no monitor.
The printer and scanner display shows: awaking controller.
8. Have the system software on site (R1.0 to R1.1 : only on diskette, see also the warning on the
top).
9. Put the CD-ROM / diskette with the new software in the laptop.
10. Activate the Direct Cable Connection (see the point 1).
11. Start the SDS session.
12. Select the SDS test 73 (Download the system software).
Check on the printer display if the printer is in the download mode. If not, than do it manually
(the three fingers trick)
13. Start the download. You can browse to the directory with the new software xxxxxxx.ofp.
Note 1: if you must download the boot and the application software, then do it one by one.
Never together!
Note 2: if the download of the boot software fails, you have to replace the EPROM / CPU pba..
14. Restart the controller when the download is finished.
15. When the controller is restarted, the printer and the scanner display shows: ready.
16. There is no need to restore any data.

The whole action takes approximately 15 minutes.

18.06.2002 163
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 73 Download the system software (Diagnosis mode only) ]

Only for upgrade R1.0 to R1.1

Description For a step by step description, see .

The download of the system software is only possible in the [ Diagnosis mode ] ,
by SDS test 20-1-010 .

Downloading of several kinds of software applications:

These are:
l Printer embedded software upgrades (normal releases and patches)

The following upgrades are not possible with this test:

l Scanner software
l Oc· Power Logic controller Windows NT upgrades
l Oc· Power Logic controller Oc· TDS400 upgrades (normal releases and
patches)

Value

Remarks There is no need to restore any data.

18.06.2002 164
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90 Set the system configuration (overview) ]

Test Name Remark

90 [ SYStem Configuration ] Each system component has his own configuration settings.
These settings can be pre-set in the sub-system NOVRAM or are
automatically determined by the component.
Activating of test 90 initialise each sub-system to find the
configuration settings that are automatically determined.
Before executing this test all components must be switched on.
The configuration of each sub-system can be
viewed/changed/overruled in the following tests:

90.1 Set the printer configuration

90.2 Set the scanner configuration

90.3 Set the controller configuration

18.06.2002 165
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90.1 Set the printer configuration ]

Name Automatically detected

1 Printer yes
2 Number of PRD rolls yes
3 Dew preventor no
4 Copy output stacker yes
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no

18.06.2002 166
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90.2 Set the scanner configuration ]

Name Automatically detected Opt

1 Printer yes present / n
2 Number of PRD rolls yes 1
3 Dew preventor no present / n
4 Copy output stacker yes present / n
5 -
6 Copy Delivery Tray no present / n

18.06.2002 167
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 90.3 Set the controller configuration ]

Name Automatically detected by test 90 Opt

- -
1 Set memory size yes ....
2 Centronics PBA no present / n
3 Token ring PBA no present / n
4 Ethernet combo PBA no present / n
5 User Interface present no present / n
6 Controller type yes Oc· Power Logic c

18.06.2002 168
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91 Set the configuration identification and serial numbers

(overview) ]

Test Name Remark

91 [ Configuration identification The system as whole has a certain configurtation identification number dependi
and serial numbers ] installed system components.
The system has a serial number total system which depends on the configuratio
system.
Each system component has his own serial number. These numbers can be pre
sub-system NOVRAM via activating test 91. All numbers are checked for possib
The configuration identification and serial numbers can be viewed / changed / o
the following tests:

91.1 Set the system configuration identification

91.2 System serial numbers

91.3 Printer serial numbers

91.4 Scanner serial numbers

91.5 Controller serial numbers

18.06.2002 169
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.1 Set the system configuration identification ]

18.06.2002 170
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.2 Set the system serial number ]

18.06.2002 171
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.3 Set the printer serial number ]

18.06.2002 172
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.4 Set the scanner serial number ]

18.06.2002 173
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 91.5 Set the controller serial number ]

Picture

The following item is available:

Item name Options
1 Controller serial number 0398XXXXX

18.06.2002 174
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 93 Set the international paper standards ]

18.06.2002 175
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 94 Display the passwords ]

18.06.2002 176
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95 Display / set the modification records (overview) ]

Each system component has his own modification record.

95.1 Controller modifications

95.2 Printer modifications
95.3 Scanner modifications
95.4 Paper roll drawer modifications
95.5 Compact output Stacker (COS)

18.06.2002 177
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.1 Display / set the controller modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the controller.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the controller.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04

18.06.2002 178
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 179
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.2 Display / set the printer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the printer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the printer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

18.06.2002 180
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 181
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.3 Display / set the scanner modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the scanner.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the scanner.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

18.06.2002 182
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 183
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.4 Display / set the paper roll drawer modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the paper roll drawer.

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the paper roll drawer.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

18.06.2002 184
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 185
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 95.5 Display / set the COS modification records ]

Function
Displays and sets the modifications for the Compact Output Stacker (COS).

Description
The purpose of the test is to set/display the modification history of the COS.
The modification level must be identical on both the yellow modification sticker and within this
test.
Adapt both if necessary.

Location of the modification sticker

The following modification can be appropriate:

Modification Subject Note

Number
01
02
03

18.06.2002 186
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

18.06.2002 187
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 97 Preset the copy counter and set the counting method ]

18.06.2002 188
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 98 Set the first installation date ]

18.06.2002 189
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Drivers and application software

Oc· ADI driver For AutoCAD 14 Windows 95/98 and NT 3.51/4.0

Oc· HDI driver For AutoCAD 2000 Windows 95/98/2000 and NT 4.0
Oc· Windows driver Windows 95/98/2000 and NT 4.0
PostScript Level 3 drivers For Windows 95/98/2000, NT 4.0 and Macintosh
Oc· Plot Director Job submission software for Windows 95/98 and NT 4.0
(customer trial only)

Note:
Check Oc· in the internet at www.oce.com for the latest drivers.

18.06.2002 190
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PostScript is not plotted in a particular set (only in combination

with Plot Director) (R1.1)
Description
A number of PostScript files in one set , sometimes one of the files is not printed.

Remark:

Plot Director is only for service use.

Resolution:

This problem is solved with R1.2.

18.06.2002 191
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printer sharename changed after upgrade R1.1 to R1.2 or R1.3

Description
After upgrading from R1.1 to R1.2 or R1.3 the printer sharename does not contain a " " (space character)
anymore.

Workarround:

Reinstall all clients or change the portname.

18.06.2002 192
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printing from Macintosh Os 8.5 and 8.6 (R1.1)

Description
When sending several files from Mac to TDS400, Mac may hang up, and a reboot is required.

Workaround:

Print with the driver 8.7 and PrintLib 9.0.

18.06.2002 193
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Print Exec LT 1.0 release notes.

For detailed information regarding Oc· Print Exec LT 1.0 see:

SPS-ES bulletins / Application software / Print Exec LT / Pelt 1.0 / IB 1001: Print Exec LT
1.0.

IB content:

Summary
Introduction of Print Exec LT 1.0 (PELT 1.0 )

Reason

Print Exec LT 1.0 is the first version of the entry level product of the Print Exec Suite.
It offers document submission functionality and is targeted at small sized user groups, up to 15 users,
who want to submit documents to Oce Wide Format Printers.

Description

Print Exec LT 1.0 is a Windows application allowing users of Oce WFPS printers to print archived
files in a very efficient way.
PELT 1.0 provides the following features:
l Job composition
l Full settings editing at job and document level
l Definition of destinations (i.e. virtual printers) with default values for jobs
l Ability to work with up to 30 jobs, allowing for reprint
l Easy to learn and productive user interface
l Support of following Oc· devices (incl. job on hold and accounting attributes):
9600 NGC 2.1/2.2
TDS400
TDS600
TDS800
l Support of following plateforms:
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Millenium
l Support of following languages:
English
French
German
Italian
Portuguese
Spanish
Dutch
l Information on printer status and jobs in printer queue (via the integration of SCP and QM Remote
Logic applications).
l Reverse order of documents in a job
l Customization of the settings displayed in the document table of the main view
l End-user installable software
l Evaluation mode by default
l Licensed mode protection based on the Mac address of the workstation.
l On-Line Help.

Parts & Tools

l PE LT 1.0 is distributed on a dedicated CD-ROM to be shipped with the 9600, TDS400, TDS600 &
TDS800.

18.06.2002 194
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l PE LT 1.0 will be available on the Oc· WEB on week 106

Instruction

1. Installation instructions

2. Software Activation instructions

3. Access to the Printer Status & the Printer Queue functionnality

Known Problems

Known Problems

Appendices

Appendix 1 : Activation Key Requets Form

Appendix 2 : Example of Request

Appendix 3 : Tips and Tricks

Appendix 4 : Debugging Tools

Appendix 5 : Product & Getting Started Manuals

18.06.2002 195
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Communication with server could not be established" message

Description
In the WEB browser a message "Communication with server could not be established" is
displayed, instaed of the message "Maximum number of print sessions, please try later again".

Work around: Ignore the message and try later again

18.06.2002 196
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

"Communication with the server was interrupted" message.

Description
The WEB browser shows a message "Communication with the server was interrupted", in case
of a controller spool full condition.

Work around: Try later again.

18.06.2002 197
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Large files can not be submitted in advanced job submition

Description
With the Microsoft Internet explorer the maximum file size which can be submitted is 30 MB
with 256 MB of RAM and 40 MB with 512 MB of RAM due to the memory management of the
Internet Explorer.

Netscape test were successful with job up to 70 MB on a PC with 256 MB of RAM.

18.06.2002 198
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PELTWEB R1.2 requires IE 4.0.2 SP2 or above (R1.3)

Description
If PELTweb R1.2 is used in combination with IE4.0.2 up to SP1, some errors can occur.

On remote PC's PELTweb with IE4.0.2 SP2 or higher should be used.

18.06.2002 199
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The file format is not identified automatically

Description
The file format is not automatically recognized.
Language settings and Pen settings can not be done.

Work around: In order to access language and pen settings the language must be set
manually.

18.06.2002 200
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The user name not saved if the name includes spaces

Description
To prevent that the user has to enter his name, Account ID, and User ID for each job, the
system saves the name (via cookies).
If the first name has a space, only the first word (before the space) is restored.

These cookies are also associated to a specific printer, so if a user connects to a different
printer, the info has to be reentered.

Work around: avoid spaces.

18.06.2002 201
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

There is no warning message when PELTWEB is not started on

a PLC with less than 256 MB
Description
PETLweb requires 256Mb of RAM.

the reason for not starting PELTweb is stored in the file log.txt in the PELTW directory on the
PLC.

18.06.2002 202
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Customer can not update PS/WRD on the PLC. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)
Description
New versions of the PS and WRD driver can only be updated on the PLC in the service account.

Workaround:

Install the driver directly on the client PC of the customer.

So the feature driver downloading is not used.

18.06.2002 203
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Roll info not updated in WRD driver. (R1.2, R1.3)

Description
A change of roll information is not updated automatically in the client part of the WRD driver.

Workaround:

None.

18.06.2002 204
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Customer can not update PS/WRD on the PLC. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)
Description
New versions of the PS and WRD driver can only be updated on the PLC in the service account.

Workaround:

Install the driver directly on the client PC of the customer.

So the feature driver downloading is not used.

18.06.2002 205
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Viewer does not work after installation (R1.2)

Description
The viewer installation is done after the controller installation is ready.
The beep and the CD eject is the message to the service engineer that the installation is ready, however, when
the viewer is part of the system this will be installed after the reboot.
The installation of the viewer is started after 90 seconds, and needs another 90 seconds to complete.
In GUI-less situation this means that after the beep and controller reboot needs a second reboot after 3 minutes.

When the second reboot is done shorter in time, the controller works, but not the viewer.

18.06.2002 206
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Blocked Queue when deleting multiple files at once from the

Queue Manager. (R1.1)
Description
When selecting multiple non-consecutive jobs in Queue Manager an deleting them, sometimes the queue is
blocked.

Workaround R1.1:

Delete files one by one.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 207
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Applications crash in case the scan destination path is filled

with "c:" for a FTP destination (R1.2)
Description
Applications crash in case the scan destination path is filled with "c:" for a FTP destination.

Workaround:

Use a correct naming, or the dropdown button, and select one of the available directories.

18.06.2002 208
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Default NIC addresses (0.0.0.0) causes Scan to File errors

Description
If after a PLC installation no IP-adress is nonfigured all IP adresses are 0.0.0.0, this will cause
delivery errors, even if a local destination is used.

Work Around: configure at least one Network Interface Card with a valid IP-adress (provided
by customer) or use 192.168.100.100 or 192.168.100.101 or 192.100.102

18.06.2002 209
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Delivery errors with Scan Manager / File destinations not

checked before the delivery of a file
Description
The Scan Manager generates "delivery errors" when inaccessible destinations are used.

Cause: File destinations are not checked prior to the delivery of a file.

Work Around: Use existing destinations.

Remark: Never use drive letters and colons in a destination

18.06.2002 210
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Files on remote destinations are written over without a message

to confirm
Description
If the Scan Manager writes a file to a remote destination, it will not ask for confirmation.

Work around: Check for the existing of the file before scanning.

18.06.2002 211
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a

change from English to Japanese in the IME
Description
It is not possible to fill the SM with Japanese characters after a switch from English to
Japanese in the IME.

Work Around: close the Scan Manager, and start it again.

18.06.2002 212
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

AutoView sometimes does not work. (R1.1)

Description
Sometimes in the AutoView mode the scanned files are not shown in the viewer.

Workaround R1.1:

Close the viewer.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 213
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Crash with duplicate destinations in Scan Manager (R1.1)

Description
When a duplicate destination is made in Scan Manager, the Scan Manager crashes.

Workaround R1.1:

None. Don't use duplicate destinations.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 214
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Destinations missing. (R1.1)

Description
When the 2nd destination is deleted from a row of 6 destinations, only the first destination is shown.

Workaround R1.1:

Do not create a gap in the destination list.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 215
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Incomplete info when scanning (STF-only) smaller than 420mm

lengths. (R1.1, R1.2, R1.3)
Description
The scanner allows scanning of a minimum size of 210x210mm.
If a scan is made with setting custom size and the specified size is smaller than an A3 standard format however,
there are some limitations:
l The length is always 420mm.
l The file is only shown in the ScanManager after clicking the "refresh" button.
l The other file information (size, resolution, etc.) is not filled in ScanManager.

Workaround:

None

18.06.2002 216
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scan-to-file standard size is not correct (R1.1)

Description
When making a scan to file with setting standard size, the resulting length is the length of the nearest standard
format corresponding to the related paperseries. (related to PR00-0822)

Workaround R1.1:

Only use formats out of the selected paperserie.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 217
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Unexpected length in case of Scan to File, 200% and standard

size A2. (R1.1)
Description
When making a Scan to File with settings 200% zoom, standard width A2 and standard length A2, the resulting
image is indeed 200% zoomed, but the physical copy is of an A2 lenght while you've expected an A0 lenght.

Workaround R1.1:

Use synchro cut.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 218
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong languages in the Scan Manager. (R1.1)

Description
When the Scan-to-File password is entered (+rebooted) after changing the first and/or second display language
setting in the Settings Editor,
then the Scan Manager will appear in the factory default language.

Workaround 1 R1.1:

First enter the Scan-toFile password and reboot. Then change the display language.

Workaround 2 R1.1:

Change the display language again. Now the Scan Manager will get in sync with the other applications.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 219
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to configure a FTP server on Windows NT 4.0 PC of the

customer

With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
After the installation of the FTP server it has to be configured.

Lets assume on the Power Logic Controller the following (Oc· TDS800) example destination is generated in the
scan manager.

l A user Theo wants to put files on a PC named pc1-tds800.

l His user name to have access to this pc is theo and his password is 1234.
l The scanned files should be named theo001, theo002 etc.

The corresponding destination properties windows in scan manager should be.

In this example the standard Windows NT Internet Service Manager software is used to create the FTP server.

The customer PC has to be set-up in the following way

l Create a directory c:\scans

A user theo has to be added as a valid user for this PC.

l Select User Manager from the Administrative Tools (Common)

18.06.2002 220
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select New User

l Create the new user theo and select OK

18.06.2002 221
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Close the User Manager

The FTP server on the customer PC has to be set-up in the following way;

l Select Internet Service Manager within the Microsoft Peer Web Services (Common)

18.06.2002 222
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Double click your computer name

l Adapt the settings as shown

18.06.2002 223
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Yes after you disabled the Allow only anonymous connections

l Remove the default FTP directory

18.06.2002 224
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Adapt the Home Directory as shown

l Select OK

18.06.2002 225
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Close the Internet Service Manager

l This completes the configuration of the FTP server.

l Do a scan to file to theo to verify the correct setup.

l You should see the file within the scans directory

18.06.2002 226
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 227
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to install a FTP server on a Windows NT 4.0 PC of the

customer
With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
Within Windows NT the FTP server is part of the Internet Service Manager services that is part of the Windows
NT package.

To install the FTP server on a Windows NT environment you have to do the following steps.

l Activate the properties of the Network Neighborhood.

l Select the Services tab.

l Check if Microsoft Peer web server is loaded.
l If this service is not loaded, press the add button.

l Select the Microsoft Peer web server, and click OK

18.06.2002 228
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l As prompted specify the location of the Windows NT source files.

l The Microsoft Peer Web Services Setup is started and activate the OK button.

l Select only the Internet Service Manager and the FTP Service and activate the OK button.

18.06.2002 229
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select OK

l Select Yes

l Select Yes

l The Microsoft Peer Web Services is installed. Press OK.

18.06.2002 230
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Press close

18.06.2002 231
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to configure a FTP server on Windows 2000 PC of the

customer

With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
After the installation of the FTP server it has to be configured.

Lets assume on the Power Logic Controller the following (Oc· TDS800) example destination is generated in the
scan manager.

l A user Theo wants to put files on a PC named pc1-tds800.

l His user name to have access to this pc is theo and his password is 1234.
l The scanned files should be named theo001, theo002 etc.

The corresponding destination properties windows in scan manager should be.

In this example the standard Windows2000 Internet Information Services software is used to configure the FTP
server.

The customer PC has to be set-up in the following way

l Create a directory c:\scans

The user theo has to be added as a valid user for this PC.

l Select Administrative Tools in the Control Panel

18.06.2002 232
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Computer Management

l Select Users of the Local Users and Groups part

18.06.2002 233
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Right-click to add a New user

l Add a user theo

l Select Close

18.06.2002 234
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The FTP server on the customer PC has to be set-up in the following way;

l Select Internet information Manager within the Administrative Tools of the Control Panel

l Right click the Default FTP site and select properties

18.06.2002 235
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Adapt the Security Accounts tab as shown

l Adapt the Home Directory as shown

18.06.2002 236
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select OK

l This completes the configuration of the FTP server.

l Do a scan to file to theo to verify the correct setup.

l You should see the file within the scans directory

18.06.2002 237
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to install a FTP server on a Windows 2000 PC of the

customer

With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
Within Windows 2000 the FTP server is part of the Internet Information Services that is part of the Windows
2000 package.

To install the FTP server on a Windows NT environment you have to do the following steps.

l Select Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel

l Select Add/Remove Windows Components

18.06.2002 238
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Internet Information Services

l Select Next

l As prompted specify the location of the Windows2000 source files.

18.06.2002 239
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Finish

18.06.2002 240
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to configure a FTP server on Windows 9X/ME PC of the

customer
With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
After the installation of the FTP server it has to be configured.

Lets assume on the Power Logic Controller the following (Oc· TDS800) example destination is generated in the
scan manager.

l A user Theo wants to put files on a PC named pc1-tds800.

l His user name to have access to this pc is theo and his password is 1234.
l The scanned files should be named theo001, theo002 etc.

The corresponding destination properties windows in scan manager should be.

In this example TYPSoft software is used to create the FTP server.

The customer PC has to be set-up in the following way

l Create a directory c:\scans

The FTP server on the customer PC has to be set-up in the following way;

l Start the FTP Server.

l Select the Setup FTP tab.
l Adapt the settings as shown.

18.06.2002 241
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select the User Setup tab.

l Adapt the settings as shown.

l This completes the configuration of the FTP server.

l Do a scan to file to theo to verify the correct setup.

l You should see the file within the scans directory

18.06.2002 242
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 243
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to install a FTP server on a Windows 9X/ME PC of the

customer
With Scan to File on the Power Logic Controller the user can scan files directly to a client PC via FTP.
On the client PC a FTP server has to be installed in order to execute this task.
This software is not available within the standard Windows9X/ME package.
For this functionality you have to use a third party supplier.
In this case we use TYPSoft FTP Server software to create a FTP server.
You can download the latest version at www.multimania.com./typsoft/eng/download.htm.

To install the TYPSoft FTP Server on a Windows 9X/ME environment you have to do the following steps.

l Activate the ftpserver.exe file.

l Select Next

l Select Next

l Select Next

18.06.2002 244
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Select Install

l Select Finish

18.06.2002 245
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 246
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Scan Logic (optional)

Application Oc· Scan Manager, integrated scanning solution, including Oc· View
Station (LT)
Scan destinations 6 programmable destinations
Scan to controller
Scan to network directory
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Resolution 200, 300, 400 dpi
Data formats Tiff (G3, G4, uncompressed)
CALS type 1
Scan modes Single scan, stream feed productive batch scans
File naming Automatically generate unique file names for each scan
File size extra file compression with FSR (File Scan Reduction) mode on
scanner panel
Check plot To check your scanned file
Viewing View the scans at point of scanning
Oc· Image Logic Optimum scan quality for bad quality originals
Ease of use STF from scanner panel, scan direct to the destination
Requirements 256 Mb on controller and a graphical user interface
Options Oc· View Station, editing software. For use at remote locations

18.06.2002 247
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor

Description
The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor. It is not clear which number is
which adapter.

Work around: Make a print of the settings to see which adapter has which number.

18.06.2002 248
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printhead Duty Cycle setting not working. (R1.1)

Description
When changing the value to adjust the Printhead Duty Cycle from within the Settings Editor it doesn't change the
Duty Cycle at all.

Workaround R1.1:

Adjust from within SDS.

Resolution:

Duty Cycle setting is removed from the Settings Editor in R1.2.

18.06.2002 249
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

A connection is not possible from Remote Logic if

<options-hostname> is ["localhost"] on the controller
Description
If in the <options-hostname> field of the applications on the controller "localhost" is filled in, it is
not possible to connect to the controller from the Remote Applications.

Work Around: Use the correct system name or nothing.

18.06.2002 250
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Bad connection from service laptop to applications (QM, SCP,

SE, SM) (R1.1)
Description
The service laptop has 2 connectors, the serial port and the ethernet card.
Therefore, the applications have problems connecting to the controller.

Solution

In the applications on the service laptop in the tab "edit/options" the hostname should be set to 134.188.254.101

18.06.2002 251
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The [Application launcher] disappears from the screens smaller

than 1024x768
Description
Description: The application manager is difficult to use on screens smaller than 1024 X
768 (appears outside the screen)

Work around: edit the adt.cfg file (C:\oce\apps\applications\settings\adt.cfg). under section

"[AL]" and replace WindowX and WindowY values by suitable ones. (e.g. X=650 Y=400 for
800 X 600 lower right), Also for Remote Logic, by selecting various Taskbar options windows
can be re-arranged (taskbar - right mouse buttom)

18.06.2002 252
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Hosts table
Overview Hosts table of the laptop

134.188.254.101 laptop
134.188.254.100 service

18.06.2002 253
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation and configuring of Oc· Remote Logic on the laptop

for R1.0 to 1.1
Attention: this description is only valid for the upgrade of R1.0 to 1.1

General

Switch on the laptop.

Logon as [ Service ].
Install the Oc· Remote Logic applications on the laptop from the Oc· TDS400 system CD-ROM
.
Only this version is configured for Direct Cable with serial connection (laptop).

Note:
Do not install the Oc· Remote Logic application form the User Manual CD.
Is configured for remote network connection with TCP/IP (client).

To configure Remote Logic for the laptop, copy the next 3 xxxxx.cfg files to C:/Program
Files/Remote Logic.
(The existing xxx.cfg must be overwritten by the new ones.)
l Right mouse click on icon
l Detach
l Save Attachtment to: C:/Program Files/Remote Logic.

SEDC.cfg SCPDC.cfg QMDC.cfg

Note:
Only the direct cable connection is allowed (make e.g. no other connection to the local
network).

Establish a Direct Cable connection to the Controller. (Setup ).

Start the Oc· Settings Editor (or if needed Queue Manager and System Control Panel).
Log on to the controller (TCP/IP 134.188.254.100).

Passwords: Key Operator / System Administrator / Repro Operator (default)

or SDS test 94 .

18.06.2002 254
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Remote Logic software

Functionality
Queue Manager view status for each job and cancel, hold and restart the
entire job
System Control Panel view status and settings of system components
application
Settings Editor change system settings

18.06.2002 255
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapters shown in a list by a number in the Settings Editor

Description
The adapters are listed by a number in the Settings Editor. It is not clear which number is
which adapter.

Work around: Make a print of the settings to see which adapter has which number.

18.06.2002 256
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Large plots (complex files / large bitmaps) can not be

transformed.
Description
Large plots (complex files / large bitmaps) can not be transformed.

Solution:

Increase the PDL heap size of PK in the Key Operator Settings (optionally increase the hardware memory)

18.06.2002 257
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Not supported file types sometimes crashes the controller

Description
unsupported filetypes sometimes crashes the controller

Work around: avoid sending unsupported filetypes

18.06.2002 258
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Transformations are cancelled for partial frame. (R1.1)

Description
If plots are processed in partial frame mode (with complex files or raster bigger than 32 MB), transformations can
not be performed.
Partial frame mode will be logged inside the syslog file.

Workaround:

Increase PDL heap size. (PK heap size in the Key Operator Settings).
The system will get slower however.

18.06.2002 259
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Automatic Language Sensing for ASCII not full proof. (R1.2,

R1.3)
Description
ASCII is not well recognized by the Automatic Language Sensing.

Workaround:

Combine the RCF header which contains the "LG" parameter in the ASCII plot in order to print in ASCII mode.

18.06.2002 260
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Wrong Calcomp parameter detection. (R1.1)

Description
Some Calcomp parameters are badly detected (in combination with Plot Director).

Workaround R1.1:

Sent job unmodified.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 261
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PostScript level 3 interpreter crash when printing files

containing some PostScript level 2 commands (R1.1)
Description
When printing PostScript level 2 files containing specific PostScript level 2 commands (e.g. rotation commands)
the PostScript level 3 interpreter crashes.

Workaround R1.1:

none.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 262
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Uncompressed TIFF files. (R1.1)

Description
Large uncompressed TIFF files are not always printed out.

Workaround R1.1:

None. When possible use only compressed TIFF files.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 263
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The transmission is lost after a stop of a transmission

Description
Transmission lost after abort of a transmis sion.

Work around: establish the connection again.

18.06.2002 264
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 265
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Backup / Restore does not work.

Tests / Checks:
Check if the date/time are equal between the laptop and the Power Logic Controller.

The time is visible in the (remote) settings editor and printed on a "print settings".

The setting can be changed logged in as Key Operator in the KO settings, in the System section.

After the setting is changed, the controller has to be rebooted.

18.06.2002 266
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic LEDs on the Oc· Power Logic controller)

Description
The power indicator LED on the front of the controller sends the diagnostic codes.
That can help you to find and correct a system problem.

Message power LED code Definition Probable Causes

Flash yellow System power supply failure Check Power supply connectors to
CD-ROM drive, Harddisk ....in the
controller
Solid yellow A device on the system board can
be fault or is not correct installed
Solid green and a tone code A problem was detected while the See description tone codes
during POST BIOS was activated
Solid green and no tone code The monitor or the graphics card
and no video during POST can be fault
Solid green and no tone code but An integrated system board device
the system locks up during POST can be fault

18.06.2002 267
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Error codes System Diagnostic Diskette

Description
Below, a list of possible diagnostic error messages is given.
These errors generated by the diagnostic test tool on the System Diagnostic Diskette .
Code Message Action

Diskette Drive Tests

FD641 Read failure Check / replace the diskette

Replace the diskette drive

FD644 Seek failure Replace the diskette drive

FD647 Write failure Check / replace the diskette

Replace the diskette drive

FD648 Change line failure Replace the diskette drive

Hard Disk Drive Tests

HD642 Seek failure Replace the hard disk

HD643 Read failure Replace the hard disk

HD645 Write failure Replace the hard disk

HD655 Controller failure Replace the hard disk

Replace system board

HD659 ECC failure Replace the hard disk

Replace system board

Coprocessor Tests

IC355 Calculation failure Replace the system board

IC356 Duty cycle failure Replace the system board

IC357 Exception failure Replace the system board

Serial Port Tests

IO570 Baute rate failure Replace the system board

IO571 Interrupt failure Replace the system board

IO572 Internal failure Replace the system board

IO573 External failure Replace the system board

Parallel Port Tests

IO574 Data port failure Replace the system board

IO575 External loopback failure If is occurred with loopback then replace

the system board

IO576 External interrupt failure Replace the system board

IO577 Printer test pattern failure Replace the system board

Keyboard Tests

KB727 Keyboard failure Replace the keyboard

Replace the system board

Mouse Tests

MS750 Mouse test failure Replace the mouse

Replace the system board

18.06.2002 268
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

MS752 Mouse buttons (for invoking EDIAG on Replace the mouse

portables) failure Replace the system board

Cache Tests

MY540 Cache controller failure Replace the system board

MY542 Cache memory failure Replace the system board

Memory Tests

MY557 Quick memory test failure Check the memory connections

Replace the memory

MY558 Comprehensive memory test failure Check the memory connections

Replace the memory

System Set Tests

SY543 DMA failure Replace the system board

SY563 Interrupt controller failure Replace the system board

SY565 Speaker failure Check cable, connection

Replace the speaker
Replace the system board

SY556 Real-time clock (RTC) failure Replace the system board

Video Tests

VX615 Video memory failure Replace the system board

VX619 Video controller failure Replace the system board

NIC tests

NI701 Controller failure Replace the system board

NI702 Transmit/receive (loopback) failure If is occurred with loopback then replace

the system board

Miscellaneous Tests

XX999 Reset button, SmartVu, PC-MCIA, Check connections, interface cables.

system timers or thermal control failure Replace the system board

18.06.2002 269
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Error Messages on monitor (configuration with Scan to File)

Description
This section lists (in alphabetical order) system error messages that can appear on the monitor screen. These
messages can help you find the source of a problem. Some of these error messages indicate fatal errors. When
a fatal error occurs, the system cannot restart until an correct hardware change is made.

Message Definition Probable Causes

Address mark not found The BIOS found a fault disk sector Fault diskette / tape drive subsystem
or can not find a special disk sector
or hard disk drive subsystem
(defective system board)
Attachment failed to reply The diskette drive or hard-disk drive Fault interface cable or connector
controller cannot send data to the
connected drive
Bad command or file name The command you entered does not Bad command
exist or is not in the pathname you
indicated
Bad error correction code (ECC) on The diskette drive or hard disk drive Fault diskette / tape drive subsystem
disk read controller detected an uncorrectable or hard disk drive subsystem
read error (defective system board)
Controller has failed The hard disk drive or the connected Fault diskette / tape drive subsystem
controller is defective or hard disk drive subsystem
(defective system board)
Data error The system received unrecoverable Fault diskette, diskette drive, or hard
data-read error from the diskette or disk drive
the hard disk drive
Decreasing available memory Read / write failure during POST One or more fault DIMMs or not
prevents the system to use the correct installed
available memory
Diskette drive 0 seek failure. The diskette / tape drive controller Fault or not correct inserted diskette,
Diskette drive 1 seek failure. can not find defined sector or track wrong configuration settings in the
System Setup program, loose
diskette / tape drive interface cable,
or loose power cable
Diskette read failure The failure occurred while system Fault diskette, fault or not correct
tried to read the diskette connected diskette / tape drive
interface cable, or loose power
cable
Diskette subsystem reset failed The system could not sent the reset Fault diskette / tape drive controller
command to the diskette controller (defective system board)
Diskette write protected Diskette write protect feature Diskette write protected.
activated.
Drive not ready No diskette in the drive. Defective, not formatted, or not
The operation requires a diskette in correct inserted diskette.
the drive before it can continue.
Gate A20 failure The gate A20 of the keyboard Fault keyboard controller (defective
controller does not function correct system board).
One or more DIMMs can be loose.
General failure The operating system cannot run The operating system is damaged or
the command. not correct installed
Hard disk controller failure The hard disk drive does not Incorrect configuration settings in
Hard disk drive read failure initialize. the System Setup program,
Hard disk failure not correct connected hard disk
Hard disk configuration error drive cable,
fault hard disk drive controller
subsystem (defective system
board),
or loose power cable.
Invalid configuration information - The system Setup program contains Wrong configuration settings in the
please run SETUP program wrong system configuration settings. system setup program or fault
battery.
Keyboard clock line failure The system cannot communicate Keyboard cable connector loose or
Keyboard data line failure with the keyboard. not correct connected, defective
Keyboard failure keyboard, or defective keyboard /
Keyboard stuck key failure mouse controller (defective system

18.06.2002 270
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

board).
Keyboard controller failure Keyboard / mouse controller failed. Defective keyboard / mouse
controller (defective system board).
Memory address line failure at During memory test, value read at Fault or not correct installed DIMMs
address, read value expecting value. the address was wrong or defective system board.
Memory data line failure at address,
read value expecting value
Memory double word logic failure at
address, read value expecting value
Memory odd/even logic failure at
address, read value expecting value
Memory write/ read failure at
address, read value expecting value
Memory size in CMOS invalid The amount of memory recorded in Add or remove the memory.
the system configuration information
does not match the memory
installed.
Memory tests terminated by The memory test did not complete. The POST memory test stopped by
keystroke pressing the <Spacebar>.
Run again the test.
No boot device available The computer can not find the Fault diskette, diskette / tape drive
diskette or hard disk drive. subsystem, hard disk drive, hard
disk drive subsystem, or no start
disk in the drive A.
No boot sector on hard-disk drive The configuration settings in the Wrong configuration settings in the
System Setup program wrong, or System Setup program, or no
operating system damaged. operating system on the hard disk
drive.
No timer tick interrupt The timer on system board has a Defective system board.
malfunction
Non-system disk or disk error Diskette in the drive A or hard disk Fault diskette, diskette / tape drive
drive does not have bootable subsystem, or hard disk drive
operating system installed on it. subsystem.
Use an other diskette with the
system information.
Not a boot diskette There is no operating system on Use an other diskette with the
diskette. system information.
Plug and Play Configuration Error The system found a problem in A system resource conflict.
trying to configure one or more Remove the cards and install them
expansion cards. one by one.
Read fault The operating system can not read Fault diskette, diskette / tape drive
Requested sector not found from the diskette or the hard disk subsystem, or hard disk drive
drive. subsystem (defective system
The system can not find a special board).
sector on the disk, or the requested
sector is defective.
Reset failed The operation of the disk reset Not correct connected diskette /
failed. tape drive, hard disk drive interface
cable, or power cable.
Sector not found The operating system cannot find a Defective sectors on diskette or hard
sector on the diskette or hard disk disk drive.
drive.
Seek error The operating system cannot find a Defective diskette or hard disk drive.
special track on the diskette or hard
disk drive.
Shutdown failure System board chip fault Defective system board
Time-of-day clock stopped System battery low. Defective battery or fault chip
(defective system board).
Time-of-day not set The setting of the time or date in the Enter the correct time or date
system configuration information settings, or defective system battery.
does not match the system clock.
Timer chip counter 2 failed The timer circuit on the system Defective system board.
board has a malfunction
Unexpected interrupt in protected The keyboard / mouse controller has Not correct installed DIMMs or fault
mode a malfunction, or one or more keyboard / mouse controller chip
DIMMs are not correct installed (defective system board).

18.06.2002 271
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

WARNING: Dell's Disk Monitoring POST query the EIDE drive for the Wrong or defective drive.
System has detected that drive [0/1] status information. The drive
on the primary/secondary] EIDE detected possible error conditions.
controller is operating outside of
normal specifications. It is advisable
to immediately back up your data
and replace your hard disk drive.
Write fault The operating system can not write Fault diskette or hard disk drive.
Write fault on selected drive to the diskette or hard disk drive.

18.06.2002 272
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scanner default output "File" causes "internal error" on Power

Logic Controller
Description
This problem occurs in Release 1.1.

If "File" is the default output destination in the Oc· Settings Editor, after boot
the zoom ratio of the scanner is 0%.
This will cause an "internal error" in the Power Logic Controller as soon as
the first "Copy Job" is started.

Work around: Before making the first "copy job" adjust the zoom ratio to an allowed value.

18.06.2002 273
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20802 (CTR) INT (DUS) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistant / Missing or corrupted file / Internal error.
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Missing or corrupted file Re-install
controller
software
Installation no more Re-install
consistent controller
software
Controller cannot be started Re-install
- Process creation error controller
software
Password given by the user No action
is not correct

18.06.2002 274
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20803 (CTR) INT (DUS) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Internal error / Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Controller protocol not Automatic
respected - Internal error reboot -
(bug) Report
error to
R&D
Bad process state - Internal Automatic
error (bug) reboot -
Report
error to
R&D
Character string longer than Automatic
expected - Internal error reboot -
(bug) Report
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 275
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20804 [CTR] INT (DUS) cat. 4 failure ]

Description
Internal error / System call failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Automatic re-boot of [ NGC Clear
] controller spool
area in
diagnosti
c mode.
OS mechanism failed - Automatic
System call failure -Internal reboot
error
A process died - Internal Automatic
error reboot
Wrong connected position
from connector during
assembly paper roll drawer
/ sheetfeeder

18.06.2002 276
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20805 [CTR] INT (DUS) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running / Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

No more space available in Automatic
RAM to keep the OS reboot of
running the
(Memory allocation failure) system
Memory management Automatic
failure. reboot
(internal error)

18.06.2002 277
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20806 [CTR] INT (DUS) set memory disk failure ]

Description
[ EDI Disk ] failure / Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Set memory disk problem or 20-6-002 Check set
disk not found memory
Cannot use correctly the Automatic
Set Memory reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 278
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20807 [CTR] INT (DUS) spool area failure ]

Description
System call failure / Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

- OS mechanism failed Automatic
- System call failure reboot of
- Spool area failure the
system.
If needed,
re-install
the
controller
software
Problem handling the spool Automatic
on disk reboot.
If
necessary
, check or
change
the spool
disk

18.06.2002 279
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20809 [CTR] INT (FH) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Fatal error: Wrong Re-install
controller set-up the
controller
software

18.06.2002 280
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20810 [CTR] INT (FH) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Controller protocol not Automatic
respected. reboot of
Fatal error (bug) the
system.
Report the
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 281
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20811[CTR] INT (IH) connection channel failure ]

Description
Connection failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Job error: problem with the Check
connection channel. connectio
(Connection failure) n

18.06.2002 282
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20813 [CTR] INT (JH) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Software bug / Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Postscript PDL not Automatic
reachable. reboot of
Fatal error (bug) the
system.
Report the
error to
R&D
Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Wrong the
controller set-up controller
(Fatal error) software

18.06.2002 283
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20814 [CTR] INT (JH) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Software bug : Bad process Automatic
state. reboot of
Fatal error (bug) the
system.
Report the
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 284
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20816 [CTR] INT (JH) plot processing failure ]

Description
Plot analysis required
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Job error: the data was not No action
successfully processed or plot file
analysis
required

18.06.2002 285
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20818 [CTR] INT (JS) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : General the
configuration problem controller
software

18.06.2002 286
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20820 [CTR] INT (JS) cat. 4 failure ]

Description
Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

OS mechanism failed. Automatic
(Internal error) reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 287
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20821 [CTR] INT (JS) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

- Memory allocation failure. Automatic
- No more space available reboot of
in RAM to keep the OS the
running system
(Fatal error)

18.06.2002 288
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20822 [CTR] INT (JS) set memory full failure ]

Description
Set memory full
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Warning: Set memory full in Wait for
the pipeline print
delivery

18.06.2002 289
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20824 [CTR] INT (PDL) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: the
wrong controller set-up controller
software
Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: font the
files cannot be reached controller
software

18.06.2002 290
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20827 [CTR] INT (PK) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Memory allocation failure : Automatic
Fatal error: No more space reboot of
available in RAM to keep the
the OS running system

18.06.2002 291
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20829 [CTR] INT (SIM) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: the
wrong controller set-up controller
software

18.06.2002 292
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20830 [CTR] INT (SIM) memory allocation failure ]

Description
No more space available in [ RAM ] to keep [ OS ] running
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Memory allocation failure : Automatic
Fatal error: No more space reboot of
available in RAM to keep the
the OS running system

18.06.2002 293
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20832 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 2 failure ]

Description
Installation no more consistance
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Installation no more Re-install
consistent : Fatal error: the
wrong controller set-up controller
software

18.06.2002 294
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20833 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 3 failure ]

Description
Software bug
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Software Bug (Fatal error) Automatic
reboot of
the
controller.
Report the
error to
R&D

18.06.2002 295
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20834 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 4 failure ]

Description
Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

OS mechanism failed Automatic
(Internal error) reboot of
the
controller

18.06.2002 296
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20835 [CTR] INT (DUS) SPICE failure ]

Description
[ Spice PBA ] reports an error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2002-011 SPICE board problem : 20-6-001 Reboot
Spice board reports an error the
conttroller
OR
if
necessary
check the
Spice
board

18.06.2002 297
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20836 [CTR] INT (DUS) IDE hard disk failure ]

Description
[ IDE Disk ] failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

IDE Disk failure : Cannot 2-6-002 Check set
start IDE HD drive memory
disk

18.06.2002 298
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20901 [CTR] INT (DUS) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
System call failure (file access) / File system full / [ NGC ] Recource file
failure /
Internal error / Unexpected command from printer to controller (debug)
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Warning: OS mechanism If reboot
failed - System call failure doesn’t
(file access) : File system solve the
full - NGC Resource file problem,
failure. re-install
the
controller
software
Warning (bug): protocol Automatic
error between JS and PH reboot of
the
system
Report
error to
R&D
Warning (bug): protocol None.
error in OCI - Application Report
bug - error to
R&D
warning: problem in No action
generating dump config -
Bug -
Warning: printer console No action
problem - OS calls failed. or Reboot
This is not fatal if
behaviour
becomes
weird

18.06.2002 299
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20902 [CTR] INT (JS) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
Internal error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Internal error Automatic
reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 300
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20903 [CTR] INT (PK) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
Internal warning
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Internal warning : Poker No action
processing problem or manual
restart if
needed
(persisten
t error)
Internal warning : problem No action
on a data file or Check
plot file

18.06.2002 301
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20904 [CTR] INT (SW) cat. 5 failure ]

Description
[ OS ] problem
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Unclassified problem Automatic
(Mainly OS problems) reboot of
the
system

18.06.2002 302
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25001 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR - PRT ]

Description
[ 25001 [SYS] control bus failure: CTR - PRT ]
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Printer is switched off Instruct
during run. customer
Electrical problem in Printer Solve
problem
0402-001 [ + 5VPHD ] short circuit to 159
frame during RUN
2202-002 [ CPU IO PBA ] defect 850

Printhead 140

18.06.2002 303
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25821 [CTR] Plot action failure ]

Description
Job error
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-6-001 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 304
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25822 [CTR] Plot too large failure ]

Description
Plot too large
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 305
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25824 [CTR] Plot file receiving failure ]

Description
Plot failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 306
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25825 [CTR] Plot language inconsistency failure ]

Description
Emulation different between [ ALS ] and [ OJT ] command
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 307
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25826 [CTR] Plot language not enabled failure ]

Description
Plot language not enabled failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Enable postscript option
(has to be bought by the
customer)

18.06.2002 308
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25827 [CTR] Plot language not recognized failure ]

Description
Emulation not recognized
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 309
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25828 [CTR] Plot multi OJT failure ]

Description
[ OJT ] command problem
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (Job 20-1-006 Check
Ticket) as received on
controller
Analyse the Job (Job Check
Ticket) as send on
workstation

18.06.2002 310
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25829 [CTR] Plot split failure ]

Description
[ OJT ] command problem
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job as received 20-1-006 Check
on controller
Analyse the Job as send on Check
workstation

18.06.2002 311
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25830 [CTR] Plot too complex failure ]

Description
Plot failure
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (OJT) as 20-1-006 Check
received on controller
Analyse the Job (OJT) as Check
send on workstation

18.06.2002 312
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25831 [CTR] Plot RCF syntax failure ]

Description
[ RCF ] not supported / remote commands not consistent
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (RCF) as 20-1-006 Check
received on controller
Analyse the Job (RCF) as Check
send on workstation

18.06.2002 313
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25832 [CTR] Plot OJT syntax failure ]

Description
[ OJT ] syntax error / invalid value
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Analyse the Job (OJT) as 20-1-006 Check
received on controller
Analyse the Job (OJT) as Check
send on workstation

18.06.2002 314
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 25833 [CTR] Option not enabled failure ]

Description
Self test not OK / Option not available
Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Correct the problem
indication detected during
the self-test or enable
option

18.06.2002 315
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ POST Beep Codes for Oc· Power Logic controller ]

Description
If the monitor cannot display the error messages during the POST, the system can transmit a group of tones.
These tones help you to identify the problem or can help you identify a fault component or assembly.
The following table lists the tone codes that can be generated during the POST.
Most tone codes indicate a fatal error to prevent the system to complete the start routine until the indicated
condition is corrected.

Beep Error Probable Causes

Code

1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure Defective system board

1-1-3 NVRAM write/read failure Defective system board
1-1-4 BIOS checksum failure Faulty BIOS or defective system board
1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure Defective system board
1-2-2 DMA initialization failure Defective system board
1-2-3 DMA page register write/read failure Defective system board
1-3 Video memory test failure Fault or not correct installed memory
1-3-1 till Main memory not correct identified or Fault or not correct installed DIMM or defective system
2-4-4 used board
1-3-2 There is no Memory installed There is no memory installed, not correct installed or fault
1-3-3 Chip or data line failure in the first 64 KB Fault or not correct installed DIMM
of main memory
1-3-4 Odd/even logic failure in the first 64 KB Fault or not correct installed DIMM
of the main memory
1-4-1 Address line failure in the first 64 KB of Fault or not correct installed DIMM
the main memory
1-4-2 Parity failure in the first 64 KB of the Fault or not correct installed DIMM
main memory
2-1-1 Bit failure in the first 64 KB of the main Fault or not correct installed DIMM
memory
3-1-1 Slave DMA-register failure Defective system board
3-1-2 Master DMA-register failure Defective system board
3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure Defective system board
3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure Defective system board
3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure Defective system board
3-2-4 Keyboard controller test failure Fault keyboard controller (defective system board)
3-3-1 NVRAM power loss Defective system board
3-3-2 NVRAM configuration
3-3-4 Video memory test failure Fault or not correct installed memory
3-4-1 Screen initialization failure Fault video subsystem (defective system board)
3-4-2 Screen retrace failure Fault video subsystem (defective system board)
3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure Fault video subsystem (defective system board)
4-2-1 There is no timer click Defective system board
4-2-2 Shut down failure Defective system board
4-2-3 Gate A20 failure Defective system board
4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in the protected Defective system board
mode
4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh Faulty or improperly seated DIMM
4-3-3 Counter 2 failure in the timer chip Defective system board
4-3-4 The time/day clock is stopped Bad battery or defective system board
4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure Faulty I/O chip (defective system board)
4-4-2 Failure to decompress the code to Defective system board
shadow memory
4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure Fault microprocessor chip or system board
4-4-4 Cache test failure Defective microprocessor or system board

18.06.2002 316
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PCI bus ISA/EIO Floppy drive

HOST bus Primary bus USB
PC87307 I/O
controller UART (RS232)
L2 cach 82371AB
PIIX4 ECP (Par. port)

Key board
µP
430 TX Audio
PCI
ISA slot 1
ISA slot 2
ISA slot 3
128 Mb ISA slot 4
EDO
DIMM Hard disc
BMI IDE
Ultra DMA/33
Hard disc

CD drive

S3 trio 64V2
Display
ROM 2Mb
PCI card connector 1

Spice board
TO PRINTER
TO SCANNE
PCI card connector 2
PCI card connector 3
PCI card connector 4
PCI card connector 5
20-Interface / Controller NGC

18.06.2002 317
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Handling and location of Microsoft Certificate Of Authenticity

(COA).
Since a few months, the Microsoft Certificate Of Authenticity for Windows NT, has been replaced by a sticker.
On normal Personal Computers, this COA sticker has to be affixed to the PC on a visible location.

On a TDS system, the Windows operating system is part of the complete system.
The complete system is registered under the number of the main component (printer on a hybrid system,
scanner on a scanner only system).
Therefore, we need to affix the Microsoft License to the frame of the main component.

The controller itself is not the correct place, since this can be exchanged (spare part) while the total system (and
the license) stays in place.

1. Two types of "Certificate of Authenticity" (COA)

The left certificate was sent during the last few years, and has to stay in the software box that came with the
printer engine.

The right certificate is a small sticker. It comes with the complete system and is included in the software box.
It has to be affixed to the main component of the system at installation time.
The locations are given below.

2. Printer only system / Copier system

The main component in this case is the printer engine (the system serial number is the same as the printer
engine serial number)

In this case the COA-sticker is affixed to the printer engine on the location below

18.06.2002 318
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3. Existing systems with COA on controller.

Some systems were shipped with the COA sticker affixed to the controller.
Since these stickers are hard to remove, we advise you to leave them on the controller, unless this controller
needs to be replaced.

In that case, please remove the sticker carefully (they tear up easily)

18.06.2002 319
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to check / view the images on the set memory disk(s)

You can view the bitmap files as they are present on the set memory disk(s).
The procedure to follow is:

1. Select the command prompt program on the Power Logic Controller service desktop
(Start - Programs - Accessories).
2. Type: cd c:\oce\ngc\tools
3. Type: sm_ls
You see a list of numbers. The highest number is the last made print or copy.
4. To view e.g. print 5:
Type: sm2ras 5
The bitmap file smbitmap5.ras is generated in the directory: c:\oce\ngc\tools.
5. How to view the file:
If the scan to file option is enabled, than use the Oc· View Station viewer on the Power
Logic Controller (double click on the xxx.ras file)
In other cases put the file on your service laptop and view it with another viewer who can
import xxx.ras files.

18.06.2002 320
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to activate a monitor in the configuration.

The TDS400 system is standard without a monitor.
If a system is installed with a monitor, then the monitor is already activated in the
configuration.

If a monitor is installed after the installation of the system, then you must set the User
interface (= the monitor) PRESENT in the sds test 90.3 .
Switch the controller off and on to apply the new settings.

18.06.2002 321
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to create an installation start diskette

An installation diskette is provided with every delivered system. This diskette is used to
install automatically the Oc· Power Logic Controller software.
This installation diskette contains the hardware and the software options of this particular
Oc· Power Logic Controller.
Some of the examples of hardware options are the type of monitor, optional boards.
An example of a software option is the 'Scan To File' option.
Every installation diskette is therefore unique.

1 - Install the diskette configuration tool on your laptop

1. Put the controller CDROM in your laptop.
2. Go with the Explorer to the directory: [ Flop_tools \ Runtime ].
3. Run the program [ setup.exe ]. (Double click on it).
(If the application is a [ zip ] file, unzip it to a temporary directory on the laptop.
Fill in the password 675756 to start the unzip.
4. Go to the temporary directory and indtall the application: run [ setup.exe ]).
5. Agree to the default installation directory
6. Choose the standard / typical installation type when asked.
7. Restart the laptop before you use the diskette configuration tool.

2 - Create a basic installation diskette on your laptop

1. Put an empty diskette in the laptop .
2. Go with the Explorer on the controller CDROM to the directory: [ Flop_tools \ Floppy_image ].
3. Run the program REF_XX_.exe. The XX stands for the current release number of this software.
4. This program formats the destination diskette if it is not completely empty. (Even system files are
not allowed).
5. If the program is finished you get a start diskette.

3- Configure the installation diskette on your laptop with the diskette configuration tool
1. Start the CFT ([ Oc· Configuration Floppy Tools Selector ] via the windows start menu:
Start / Program Files / OceCFT / OceCFT.
2. Select [ "New Floppy" ].
3. Select the tab [ Hardware Options ]:
select the required options and enable them, e.g.:

4. Select the tab [ OS parameters ]:

ProductID: Microsoft NT license numbers (xxxxx-OEM-xxxxx-xxxxx)
KeyBoardLayout: The correct type like US international
TimeZOne: Select your time zone
e.g.:

18.06.2002 322
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

5. Select the tab [ Miscellaneous ]:

the SAP number is left empty.

6. Select [ "Create floppy" ].

7. Label the diskette:
"Installation Disk TDS400 version X.x"
"System serial number tds400xxxxx"

18.06.2002 323
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the Oc· Power Logic controller

Hardware installation of the Oc· Power Logic controller

1. Unpack the controller from the cardboard box.

2. The controller is set according to specifications of the customers order.
Check that the correct option boards are installed according to specifications of the site analysis
form.
1. Find the following items:
- INSTALLATION CD [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] Rx.x
- INSTALLATION DISKETTE [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] Rx..x ????? (The diskette is
special prepared for this system installation)
- [ System Diagnostic Diskette ]
- NEW OCE SPICE CARD + NIC DIAGNOSTIC DISKETTE
3. Find and attach the main supply cable.

Software installation:

First installation:
All software is already installed and set by M&L. The controller is ready!

Next installations:
If by any reason, the controller software must be installed again, do as follow:

Notes:
- Make sure that the controller is not connected to the network.
- The software (Operating system and Oc· application) is automatically installed. The software
installation takes approximately 30 minutes.
- If the installation diskette is used before, then it is not bootable any more.
To make it bootable, run on a '95/'98/NT computer the file a:/boot/boot.bat on the diskette.

1. Switch ON the Oc· Power Logic Controller.

2. Insert the Installation CDROM, Rx..x in the CDROM drive
3. Insert the Installation diskette, Rx..x in the diskette drive.
1. Note: Make sure that the Installation diskette is not write-protected. Do not remove
the diskette during the installation sequence.
4. Press the RESET button.

5. From this point, the installation is unattended for approximately 30 minutes.

Note: with scan to file (this includes a monitor) type [ setup ] when asked by the
messages on the screen !!
You can use this time to unpack the other devices.
6. The installation is unattended until the controller plays a tune and the CDROM drive
opens.
The CDROM drive retracts the drawer after approximately 2 minutes.
7. Remove the CDROM and the installation diskette.
8. Restart the controller. The controller starts as "anonymous" user.
9. The installation is completed.

Warning:
After every installation of the controller software, the controller receives a new identification name.
This is: TDS400-xxxxx where the xxxxx is a random number.
Also when you install again the software after a crash.
To see / read the identification name:
1. print the system settings on paper
2. use the Settings Editor to check (change) the identification name.

18.06.2002 324
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Upgrade software download driver SwdlDriver.dll v2.0.0.8 for

R1.1

For a correct download (especially the boot software) on the TDS400 R1.1 (also for upgrade R1.0 to
R1.1) , you must upgrade the software download application on the harddisk of the controller to the
new 2.0.0.8 version.

Create the software download application files on a diskette

SwdlDriver 2.0.0.8.ex
1. Put a empty diskette in the laptop disk drive.
2. Activate the icon to open the [ Attachment ] window.
3. Activate the [ Launch ] button to open the [ Self-Extractor ] window.
4. Set the [ Unzip to folder ] path to:
a:\
5. Activate the [ Unzip ] button.
The files are extracted to the diskette.

The upgrade of the download driver:

1. Print the configuration settings by the operator panel.
2. Make a Direct Cable connection between the laptop and the controller.
3. Laptop: logon in [ Windows ] as [ service ] to have permission's on the harddisk of the controller.

4. Do SDS test 71 to make a backup of the system data .

5. Close the SDS session.
6. Put the diskette with the software download application files in the diskette drive of the laptop.
7. Activate on the laptop the 'run' window: <Start / Run>.
8. Enter in the 'run' window: [ a:rename.bat a: xxxxxx ] (xxxxxx = the hostname of the controller, see the
print of the configuration settings).

See note 1

9. Restart the controller.

10. Make a new Direct Cable connection.
11. Activate on the laptop the 'run' window: <Start / Run>
12. Enter in the 'run' window: [ a:remove.bat xxxxxx ].
13. Finnish.

Note 1: If the next action is the download of the system software, then:
l Select the SDS test 20-1-010 (Select the next NT start method)
Set the test to: [ diagnosis ]
l Close the SDS session
l Restart the [ Oc· Power Logic ] controller
l Make a new Direct Cable connection.
l Activate on the laptop the 'run' window: <Start / Run>
l Enter in the 'run' window: [ a:remove.bat xxxxxx ].
l Download the system software
1.
Note 2: Screen messages are diplayed on the laptop screen

18.06.2002 325
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER NGC GX100
1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7095.496 --CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7175.972 --HARD DISK, IDE 2
10 1202.274 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 1
11 7095.236 --SPICE-III PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7175.428 - " -JA 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7208.990 -R1.2 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7209.354 -R1.3 REPLACEMENT CD 1
70 7166.872 -BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1

18.06.2002 326
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 327
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CONTROLLER PLC GX150
1 -CONTROLLER ASSY 1
7209.122 --CONTROLLER ASSY, STRIPPED 1
4 7176.292 --HARD DISK, IDE 2
10 7225.630 --DIMM, DRAM 1X128MB 133 MHz -
11 7095.236 --SPICE-III PBA 1
20 7101.266 --TOKENRING PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
21 7101.434 --ETHERNET PBA (OPTIONAL) 1
22 5584.487 --DPP DUAL PARALELL PORT (OPTIONAL) 1
25 2977.812 -MONITOR 17 INCH 1
2977.813 -MONITOR 21 INCH 1
26 2977.814 -MOUSE 1
31 7045.158 -KEYBOARD-NL 1
7045.159 - " -DE 1
7045.160 - " -FR 1
7045.161 - " -GB 1
7045.162 - " -SE 1
7045.163 - " -DK 1
7045.164 - " -NO 1
7045.165 - " -IT 1
7045.166 - " -US 1
7045.167 - " -ES 1
7045.168 - " -PT 1
7175.428 - " -JA 1
7045.171 - " -HU 1
7045.172 - " -PL 1
7045.173 - " -CZ 1
51 7208.990 -R1.2 REPLACEMENT CD 1
7209.354 -R1.3 REPLACEMENT CD 1
71 7166.872 -BOOT FLOPPY DISK (CLIENT SPECIFIC) 1
72 7095.290 -SPICE III TESTDISK 1

18.06.2002 328
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System BIOS Setup Oc· Power Logic controller (Dell GX100)

While booting, on the first screen and top right corner [ F2=Setup ] is visible. Press F2 to enter the set-up menu
of the DELL BIOS.
For detailed information on setup categories and options, see "Using the System Setup Program" in the online
System User's Guide.
Shown settings are the Oce settings for the PLC R1.2
To remove the Cover openend message: [ Alert! Cover was previously removed ] (if exist during the start up of
the controller), change under: [ System Security / Chassis Intrusion: Detected ] to enable.

Dell Computer Corporation (www.dell.com) - OptiPlex GX100

Intel Celeron : 433 MHz BIOS Version: A04

Level 2 Cach: 128 KB Integrated Service Tag: IRTEK

System Time .................................................................................

System Date ..................................................................................

Diskette A: ...................................................................................... 3.5 inch, 1.44 MB

Diskette B: ...................................................................................... Not Installed
Zip Floppy Support ........................................................................ Disabled

Primary Drive 0 .............................................................................. Hard Drive

Primary Drive 1 .............................................................................. Hard Drive
Secondary Drive 0 ......................................................................... CD-ROM Reader
Secondary Drive 1 ......................................................................... Off

Boot Sequence .............................................................................. <ENTER>

v 1 Diskette Drive A
v 2 Hard Disk Drive C
v 3 IDE CDROM Device

Installed System Memory ........................................................... 256 - MB SDRAM

Reserved Memory ....................................................................... None Reserved
CPU Information ........................................................................... <ENTER>
CPU Speed ................................... Normal
Bus Speed ................................... 66 MHz
Processor ID ............................... 665
Clock Speed ................................. 433 MHz
Cache Size ................................... 128 KB

Integrated Devices ....................................................................... <ENTER>

Network Interface Controller.........On
Mouse Port...................................... On
USB Emulation ............................. Off
Serial Port 1.................................... Auto
Serial Port 2.................................... Auto
Parallel Port.................................... 378h
Parallel Port Mode......................... PS/2

IDE Drive Interface......................... Auto

Diskette Interface........................... Auto
PC speaker..................................... On
Primary Video Controller ............. Auto
Video DAC Snoop...........................Off
PCI IRQ Assignment <ENTER>
System Security ............................................................................ <ENTER>
Password Status.............................Unlocked
System Password...........................Not enabled
Setup Password..............................Enabled (6869767, use num
key-board)
Chassis Intrusion............................Detected / Enabled

Keyboard NumLock ..................................................................... ON

Report Keyboard Errors .............................................................. Report

Auto Power On .............................................................................. Disabled

Remote Wake up ......................................................................... ON

18.06.2002 329
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

AC Power Recovery ..................................................................... Last

ASSET TAG

18.06.2002 330
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ Oc· Power Logic controller ] (Dell GX100)

Product specifications
Platform [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] (566 Mhz, Celeron Processor)
with embedded Windows NT
Memory 128 MByte RAM standard, 256 MByte RAM is an upgrade
Disk space High-speed hard disk dedicated to file spooling, and a
high-speed hard disk dedicated to set memory offering 135
A0 storage capacity
File formats HPGL, HPGL2, HPRTL, TIFF 6.0, CALS type 1, NIRS,
EDMICS (C4), CalComp 906/907/951, ASCII
Interfaces Standard: Ethernet 10/100 Mbits/s with RJ45
Optional: Ethernet 10 Mbits/s with BNC and SubD
TokenRing 4/16 Mbits/s
Centronics
Network protocols TCP/IP
NetBEUI (SMB)
IPX/SPX
FTP
Cabinet An option to store the controller
GUI (Optional) A monitor, a keyboard and a mouse to use the applications
on the controller with Scan Logic
Postscript level 3 / PDF Enables you to print the Postscript level 3 files and Portable
(Optional) Document Files (PDF), optional
Functionality Multiple prints: up to 999
Automatic Language Sensing (ALS)
Auto roll selection and switching
Plot manipulation: rotation, autoscaling
File spooling on the controller
Set memory (10,6 Gb) : send once, process once, print
many; capacity to store up to 135 A0s and create identical
sets sorted by page or by set
Concurrent receiving / processing / printing of digital jobs
Screen No
Yes with scan to file

Note:
Switch off the controller once a week (for example at the end of the week).
Otherwise the performance will decrease.

18.06.2002 331
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 332
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-001 Enable / disable, Level 1 or Level 2 trace of the

TDS400 process into log-file ]

Description Enable / disable, Level 1 or Level 2 trace of the TDS400 process into log-file
Location of the log file: C:\oce\ngc\log\diagnostic\module.trc

Value l Level 1: Internal process communication relevant for service are logged
l Level 2: Level 1 information and insight process information relevant to R&D
support.

Remarks Reboot the controller after changing the value.

18.06.2002 333
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-002 The maximum size to trace the Oc· TDS400 log-file (in
byte) ]

Description The maximum size to trace the Oc· TDS400 log-file (in byte)

Value Range: 4,000 ... 1,280,000 byte

Default: 30,000

Remarks If the maximum is reached the log file will be copied to a file ... / module.old

18.06.2002 334
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-006 Enable / disable to trace the input data from the host
into log file ]

Description Enable / disable to trace the input data from the host into log file
(Disable logging or Enable logging)

If multiple print files are sent to the TDS400, these print files are all stored on the
Oc· Power Logic controller, using the name convention inputfile.number

This logfile can be used to check the input data including the received controll
commands (jobticket, rcf).

Value

Remarks Reboot the controller after changing the value.

18.06.2002 335
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-009 Set the maximum size of Windows NT log-file(s) (in

kB) ]

Description Set the maximum size of Windows NT log-file(s) (in kB)

If the maximum size id reached, the new information is added while the oldest
information is removed.

Value Range: 64 ... 4,194,240 Kbyte

Default: 512

Remarks Step sixe 64 Kbyte

18.06.2002 336
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-010 Enable / disable to trace of the WINNT events / errors

into log file(s) ]

Purpose Enable / disable to trace of the WINNT events / errors into log file(s)

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 337
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-013 Disable all the tracing / logging tests of the TDS400

controller ]

Purpose Disable all the tracing / logging tests of the TDS400 controller

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 338
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-020 Save the TDS400 configuration into the configuration

log file ]

Purpose Save the TDS400 configuration into the configuration log file
The total TDS400 configuration (options, settings, versions, configurations,...) os
is stored in a log file.

Check

Remarks The DumpOce9450Config.txt file is stored in ... /OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 339
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-023 Clear the diagnostic area ]

Purpose Clear the Oc· Power Logic controller diagnostic area .

All HW logfiles, Oce9450dumpconfig and functional tracing files.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 340
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-025 Clear the error and the warning log files ]

Purpose Clear the error and the warning log files

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 341
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-031 Clear the set memory and the spool areas

(only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Purpose Clear the set memory and the spool areas

(only in the Diagnosis Mode)
All temporary files, locks and directories are removed from the system.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 342
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-032 Save the total system status of WINNT and TDS400

into the status log file ]

Purpose Save the total system status of WINNT and TDS400 into the status log file .

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 343
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-039 Disable the tests: 20-6-013; 20-6-023; 20-6-025 and

remove all images and temporary files ]

Purpose Disable tests the tests: 20-6-013; 20-6-023; 20-6-025 remove all images and
temporary files.
The system is "clean".

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 344
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-9-001 Display the progress of the job within the controller ]

18.06.2002 345
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Controller reboots immediately after starting a Copy job. (no GUI

present) (R1.1)
Description
When a Copy job is started and Error pages are enabled, the controller starts rebooting (in a continuous loop).

Workaround:

Re-install the controller, and use the error pages only for analyses (never use the scanner if Error Pages is
enabled).

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 346
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Internal error immediately after starting a Copy or Scan job.

(R1.1)
Description
When a Copy or Scan job is started and Error pages are enabled, the controller immediately displays an internal
error.

Workaround:

Disable the error pages.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 347
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Internal Error in case of standard setting set to default scan to

file (1.1)
Description
Standard setting to scan to file causes an internal error on the controller.
The default zoom ratio (on turn on the scanner if scan to file is the default) is defined as 0%, which is causing an
internal error if this zoom ratio is not set to a valid value.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 348
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Postscript driver is not shared after installation (R1.2)

Interpretor is however working.
Description
The Postscript driver is not shared after installation (R1.2) Interpretor is however working.

Workaround:

Change in the Settings Editor the PS3 password and press apply, then change it back to the correct password
and press apply, then reboot the system.

18.06.2002 349
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Queue Manager, Settings Editor, and System Control Panel do

not start automatic on the Power Logic Controller.
Tests / Checks:
Check if the GUI is enabled in SDS test 90.3 , and correct if needed. (reboot is required)

18.06.2002 350
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Question:
How to decrease the sds_log.mdb if the size is too large.

Answer:
Activate the SDS test 31 eight times.
This action clears all the error record history!
(The memory is a shift register with eight positions.)

Note:
The backup action can be done direct to the laptop and zipped.
But still the sds_log. mdb file can be too large.

18.06.2002 351
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 352
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Riser board
How to identify the Riser Board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

1 Auxiliary power indicator

(AUX_LED)
2 PCI expansion slot 5
(PCI5)
3
Wake On LAN (WOL)
4 connector
PCI expansion slot 1
5 (PCI1)
Auxiliary power
connector

Ri s e r b o a rd l o c a t o r. g i f

18.06.2002 353
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board
How to identify the Spice Board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

Engine

Scanner

20 s pi c e Loc ator.c dr

18.06.2002 354
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System board (GX100)

How to identify the System Board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

1 NIC connector
2 Video connector
3 Fan power connector
4 Serial port 2 connector
5 USB connectors (2)
6 Keyboard (upper) and mouse (lower)
connectors
7 Parallel port (upper) and serial port 1
(lower) connectors
8
System board jumper
9
Riser board connector
10
EIDE1 connector
11
EIDE2 connector
12
Diskette/tape-drive connector
13
Auxiliary power indicator
14
DIMM connectors (2)
15
3.3 VDC power connector
16
Control panel connector
17
DC power connector

S ys t e m b o a r d l o c a t o r 1 . g i f
System Board PSWD (Password) Jumper

S ys t e m b o a r d l o c a t o r 2 . g i f
Note: Make sure your system is turned off before you change a jumper setting. Otherwise, damage to your
system or unpredictable results may occur.

The Oc· Power Logic controller is shipped with a PSWD jumper installed, meaning that password features for
this computer system are enabled.
When you remove the jumper, or when you install the jumper on only one of the two pins, the password
features for this computer system are disabled.
Which in practise means that anyone can enter the bios setup without having to enter a password.

System Board Labels

This table lists the labels for connectors and sockets on your system board and gives a brief description of
their functions.

18.06.2002 355
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Connector or socket Description Connector or socket Description

AUX_LED Auxiliary power indicator MONITOR Video connector
B1 Battery socket MOUSE Mouse connector
DIMM_x DIMM socket PANEL Control panel connector
DSKT Diskette/tape drive interface connector PARALLEL Parallel port connector; sometimes
referred to as LPT1
ENET Integrated NIC connector POWER_1 Main power input connector
FAN Microprocessor fan connector POWER_2 3.3-volt V power input connector
IDEn EIDE interface connector RISER Riser board connector
KYBD Keyboard connector SERIALn Serial port connectors
MICROPROCESSOR Microprocessor connector USB USB connectors

18.06.2002 356
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

DIMM's (GX100)
How to identify the DIMM's

Look at the drawing below for the identification

.

DIMM.cdr

18.06.2002 357
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Oc· Power Logic controller Main cabinet (GX100)

How to identify the different parts of the Oc· Power Logic controller

1 System Board
2 Power supply
3 5.25 Inch drive slots
(CD-ROM Drive)
4 -Hard disk drive bracket for
SCSI drives (not available)
5 System hard disk (IDE)
6 Expansion card cage
7 Bottom of housing

Inside view without covers M ain cabinet locator 1.gif

1 5.25 Inch drive slots

(CD-ROM drive)
2 -

3 Chassis intrusion switch

4 SCSI Hard disk cable
5 Expansion-card cage
6 Mother board
7 Riser board
8 Padlock ring
9 Security cable slot
10 I/O port and connectors
AC-power input
11
Power supply
12

The tower inside M ain cabinet locator 2.gif

18.06.2002 358
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The tower front M ain cabinet locator 3.gif

Power button Push-button that turns computer on and off.

Power indicator Lights up when the computer is on.
Reset button Initiates a hardware reset. To avoid possible data or file structure corruption, use the reset b
when the system cannot be rebooted with the <Ctrl><Alt><Del> key combination, and close
applications or files if possible.
Hard-disk drive access Lights up when the hard-disk drive is being accessed.
indicator
Diskette-drive access indicator Lights up when the diskette drive is being accessed.

18.06.2002 359
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Back view Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the back view of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

1. AC power connector
2. AC voltage switch
3. Parallel port connector
4. Mouse connector
5. Link integrity indicator
6. Integrated NIC connector
7. Activity indicator
8. Padlock ring
9. Video connector
10. PCI expansion-card slots
11. AGP slot
12. Line-out jack, line-in jack, and microphone jack
13. USB connectors
14. Keyboard connector
15. Diagnostic LEDs
16. Serial port 2 connector
17. Serial port 1 connector

18.06.2002 360
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Front view Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the front view of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

1. Hard drive access indicator

2. Power indicator
3. Power button
4. Front panel door
5. Floppy drive access indicator
6. Removable 3.5-inch drive front panel
7. Removable 5.25-inch drive front panel

View with front panel open

1. Front panel door, with two breakaway hinges

2. Headphone connector
3. USB connectors (2)

Note:
do not use these front connectors for USB keyboards or mice

18.06.2002 361
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 362
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Main Parts Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

The picture below shows the inside of the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

.. 1. 5.25-inch drive Hard drive

2. 3.5-inch floppy drive
3. Hard drive
4. Internal speaker
5. Chassis intrusion switch
6. System board
7. Expansion card slots
8. I/O ports and connectors
9. AC power connector
10. Power supply
11. Padlock ring
12. Microprocessor and heat sink shroud

18.06.2002 363
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Jumpersettings Disk Drive IDE Maxtor 51536H2 (15 GB)

Maxtor
model 51536H2 (15GB)
model 5T010H1 (10GB)
model 5T020H2 (20GB)

Only jumper J48 (cable select) to be installed

IBM
Model Deskstar IC 35L020AVER07 (20GB)

Place the jumpers on: pin A+b and E+F

Western Digital

18.06.2002 364
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Precautions
Take these Precautionary Measures

Caution:
THIS IS FOR YOUR PERSONAL SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF THE EQUIPMENT

Before you start to work on the system, perform the following steps in the sequence listed:

1. Turn off the computer and all peripherals.

2. Disconnect the computer and peripherals from their AC power sources.
3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
4. Wear a wrist grounding strap, and clip it to an unpainted metal surface.
If a wrist grounding strap is not available, touch any unpainted metal surface on the back of the
computer or on the computer chassis.
Warning:
Make sure the computer and peripherals are disconected from their AC power sources.

18.06.2002 365
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Riser board
How to remove the Riser Board

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove the Riser Board

1 Auxiliary power indicator

(AUX_LED)
2 PCI expansion slot 5
(PCI5)
3
Wake On LAN (WOL)
4 connector
PCI expansion slot 1
5 (PCI1)
Auxiliary power
connector

R i s e r b o a r d r e m o va l . g i f
1. Remove the expansion-card cage.
2. Remove the expansion cards installed in the slots.
3. Remove the screws securing the riser board to the expansion-card cage.

18.06.2002 366
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board
How to remove the Spice Board

For this removal please consult the general Expansion board removal .

18.06.2002 367
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board replacement / upgrade

The TDS400 uses 3 types of SPICE III boards:
- SPICE III V0 board (Oc· code 7095097)
- SPICE III V1 board (Oc· code 7095236)
- SPICE III V2 board (Oc· code 7095401)
The code numbers are printed on the board.

The driver for SPICE III V0/V1 is different from the driver for SPICE III V2:
- TDS400 1.1 supports only the driver for SPICE III V0/V1
- TDS400 1.2 supports the drivers for SPICE III V0/V1 and for SPICE III V2

When you replace the board and the version changes between a V0/V1 or V2, you must update the driver.

Release TDS400 v1.1 TDS400 v1.2

Action
Replace V0/V1 with V2 Install the TDS400 v1.2 PLC Update the SPICE driver to V2.
software With GUI: SP3V2up.bat on a diskette
Without GUI: LSP3V2up.bat on the laptop.
Replace V2 with V0/V1 Impossible Update the SPICE driver to V0/V1.
With GUI: SP3V1up.bat on a diskette
Without GUI: LSP3V1up.bat on the laptop.
Replace V2 with V2 Impossible No action
Replace V1 with V0 No action No action
Replace V0 with V1 No action No action

Upgrade instructions
TDS400 with GUI: (Graphical User Interface, that is a Display).

Replace a SPICE III V0 or V1 board by a SPICE III V2 board:

1. Copy the following file (SP3V2up.bat) to a diskette.

2. Switch On the controller with the new SPICE III V2 board.
3. Log in the Controller as [ service / password ].
4. Ignore any internal error, and do not click on any button in the
Internal Error Window.
5. Insert the diskette into the Controller.
6. Open a DOS Command prompt. SP3V2up.bat
7. Type:
A:
SP3V2up.bat
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

Replace a SPICE III V2 board by a SPICE III V0 or V1board:

1. Copy the following file (SP3V1up.bat) to a diskette.

2. Switch On the controller with the new SPICE III V0 or V1board.
3. Log in the Controller as [ service / password ].
4. Ignore any internal error, and do not click on any button in the
Internal Error Window.
5. Insert the diskette into the Controller.
6. Open a DOS Command prompt. SP3V1up.bat
7. Type:
A:
SP3V1up.bat
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

18.06.2002 368
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

TDS400 without GUI (no display)

(The controller must have a hostname, or a new installation of the complete controller software is
needed).
Remark: you can use this method also for a TDS400 with GUI.

Replace a SPICE III V0 or V1 board by a SPICE III V2 board:

1. Connect your laptop with the serial cable to the Power Logic
Controller.
2. Logon under WIN9X on your Laptop as "service / password".
3. Copy the following file LSP3V2up.bat on a diskette or on the local
disk of your laptop.
4. Switch on your controller with the new SPICE III V2 board.
5. Make the connection between your laptop and the Power Logic
LSP3V2up.bat
Controller (Direct Cable connection).
6. Open a MS-DOS prompt window and go to the directory where the
previous file has been copied.
7. Type the following command (the hostname of your controller is
required).
LSP3V2up <hostname_of_your_controller>
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

Replace a SPICE III V2 board by a SPICE III V0 or V1board:

1. Connect your laptop with the serial cable to the Power Logic
Controller.
2. Logon under WIN9X on your Laptop as "service / password".
3. Copy the following file LSP3V1up.bat on a diskette or on the local
disk of your laptop.
4. Switch on your controller with the new SPICE III V0 or V1board.
5. Make the connection between your laptop and the Power Logic
Controller (Direct Cable connection). LSP3V1up.bat
6. Open a MS-DOS prompt window and go to the directory where the
previous file has been copied.
7. Type the following command (the hostname of your controller is
required).
LSP3V1up <hostname_of_your_controller>
8. Follow the messages on the screen.
9. Restart the controller.

Tip
If the above described procedure does not work, install completely the controller software (see appropriate
procedure for that)

18.06.2002 369
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Tools short list

This is a short list of the tools you will probably need to carry out the disassemblies:

l Small flat-blade screwdriver

l Wide flat-blade screwdriver
l 1 and 2 mm Phillips screwdriver
l 1/4 Inch nut driver
l Anti-static wristband and mat.

18.06.2002 370
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Control Panel (GX100)

How to remove the Control Panel

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side and the front covers.

How to remove the Control Panel

1 Control panel
2 Control panel connector
3 Intrusion cable
4 connector
Chassis intrusion switch

C o n t r o l p a n e l r e m o va l . g i f
1. Disconnect the control panel cable from the control panel connector on the system board (see "System
Board Labels" for the location of the PANEL connector).
Note the routing of the control panel cable as you remove it from the chassis.
2. Disconnect the the chassis intrusion switch cable connector from the control panel.
3. Remove the mounting screw that secures the control panel to the chassis.
4. Remove the control panel cable.
5. Pull the control panel cable through the opening in the front wall, and carefully remove the cable from the
routing tab in the chassis.
6. Pull out on the control panel to detach it from the chassis.

18.06.2002 371
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

DIMM (GX100)
How to remove/install DIMMs

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove Dimms

How to Install Dimms

18.06.2002 372
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to remove the front cover (GX100)

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove the Front cover

How to install the Front cover

1. Fit the two retaining hooks on the cover into their corresponding slots at the bottom of the mini
tower chassis.
2. Rotate the cover toward the chassis until the tabs on the top of the chassis snap into their slots
on the cover.

Translation Control: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 373
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PCI expansion boards (GX100)

How to remove/install PCI Expansion boards

This is a general procedure to remove and install PCI expansion boards whatever type they are.

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.
4. Remove the expansion card cage

Generic layout of PCI

expansion boards

Expansion card removal 1.gif

How to remove PCI Expansion boards

1. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the board.

2. Remove the screw from the mounting bracket of the board you want to remove.
3. Grasp the board by its outside corners, and ease it out of its connector.
4. If you are removing the board permanently, install a metal filler bracket over the empty board-slot
opening.
5. Replace the computer cover, and reconnect your computer and peripherals to their power sources and
turn them on.

Note: After you remove and replace the cover, the chassis intrusion detector will cause the following
message to be displayed at the next system start-up:
ALERT! Cover was previously removed.

7. To reset the chassis intrusion detector, enter the System Setup program and reset Chassis Intrusion to
Not Detected.

1 Expansion-card cage
2 Card-edge connector
3 Expansion board
4 Riser board
5 Expansion-board
connector

18.06.2002 374
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Expansion card removal 2.gif

How to install PCI Expansion boards

1. Prepare the expansion board for installation, and remove the computer cover.
See the appropriate locators in this TSM for information on configuration of the eventual jumpers.
2. Remove the screw and remove the metal filler bracket that covers the board-slot opening for the
expansion slot you intend to use (see Figure below).
Save the screw to use when installing the expansion board later in this procedure.
3. Insert the expansion board into the expansion-card connector.
If the expansion board is full-length, insert the front end of the board into the corresponding board guide
on the inside front of the chassis as you insert the board into its connector. Insert the board's edge
connector firmly into the expansion-card slot.
4. When the board is firmly seated in the connector, secure the board's mounting bracket to the chassis
with the screw you removed in step 2.
5. Connect any cables that should be attached to the board.
6. Replace the computer cover, and reconnect your computer and peripherals to their power sources and
turn them on.

Note: After you remove and replace the cover, the chassis intrusion detector will cause the following
message to be displayed at the next system start-up:
ALERT! Cover was previously removed.

7. To reset the chassis intrusion detector, enter the System Setup program and reset Chassis
Intrusion to Not Detected.

1 Filler bracket

Expansion card removal 3.gif

18.06.2002 375
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Side cover (GX100)

How to remove/install the Side cover

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.

How to remove the Side cover

1 Release button

C o ve r r e m o va l . g i f

1. Face the left side cover and press the release button, located at the bottom-left corner of the
front bezel (see Figure above).
2. Lift the bottom of the cover, allowing it to pivot up toward you.
3. Disengage the tabs that secure the cover to the top of the chassis, and lift the cover away.

How to install the Side cover

1 Hook
2 Recessed slot

18.06.2002 376
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

C o ve r r e p l a c e m e n t . g i f
1. Face the left side of the computer and hold the cover at a slight angle, as shown in Figure 4.
2. Align the top of the cover with the top of the chassis and insert the hooks on the cover into the
recessed slots on the computer chassis so that the tabs catch the hooks inside the slots.
3. Pivot the cover down toward the bottom of the chassis and into position.
Make sure that the securing hooks at the bottom of the cover click into place.
4. If you are using a padlock to secure your system, reinstall the padlock.

18.06.2002 377
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

System board (GX100)

How to remove/install the System board

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the side cover.

How to remove the System board

S ys t e m b o a r d r e m o va l . g i f
1. Place the computer on its side on a flat surface.
2. Disconnect all cables from their connectors at the back of the computer.
3. Remove the expansion-card cage.
4. Unlatch and rotate the power supply until it locks.
5. Disconnect all cables from the system board.
6. Remove the screw that secures the system board to the bottom of the chassis.
7. Slide the system board toward the front of the chassis until it stops.
8. Carefully lift the system board out of the chassis (be sure to lift evenly and not twist the system board).

How to /install the System board

This procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure but keep the following items in mind:
l If you are replacing a system board:
- Remove the DIMMs and the microprocessor/heat sink assembly
- Install them on the replacement board
- Set the jumpers on the new system board so that they are identical to those on the old board
l When you reinstall the system board, before you slide the system board back to lock it in position, push
down near each slot to engage the grounding clip onto its corresponding tab. Push evenly on both sides
of the system board as you slide it into position (do not twist the system board).

18.06.2002 378
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to open and close the Oc· Power Logic controller (GX150).

Before you begin

1. You must shut down the Oc· Power Logic Controller properly.
2. Unplug the power cord.

Note:
Do not open the cover if the system is on the edge of a desk or table.
Doing so may cause the system to tip over and fall.
Make sure that the system is situated so that there is at least 30 cm (12 ") of desk- or
table-top for the cover to rest on.
How to open the controller.
How to close the controller.

18.06.2002 379
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Intrusion switch
How the intrusion switch works

The Intrusion switch allows you to detect if someone opened the covers of the Oc· Power Logic
controller.

If the covers where opened you will get an informational message when the Oc· Power Logic
controller is booting telling you that the covers have been open.
The system will display this message untill you go into BIOS SETUP where you can reset the
intrusion switch.
This is a simple precaution to enable you to detect if somebody has actually opened the Oc·
Power Logic controller.

18.06.2002 380
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Power supply
How the Power Supply works

The power supply is used to power all items present in the Oc· Power Logic controller.
It is suited to also power all of the optional parts that can be build into the Oc· Power Logic
controller

It provides 5V, 12V, -12V and -5V DC supply voltages.

18.06.2002 381
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Spice Board
How the Spice Board works

The Spice board is a dedicated board created by Oc· for interfacing.

The Spice board has two interfaces incorporated which interface with the scanner and the print engine.

Note: These interfaces should never ever be used for different purposes since this will damage the board.

18.06.2002 382
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-001 Test of the SPICE PBA, image link and control link
(Only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Only in Diagnosis Mode

Use SDS test 20-1-010 (set next NT start method)

Purpose Test of the SPICE PBA, image link and control link

Check Connect the scan input and the printer output of the SPICE PBA (loop back)
together with one of the spice cables.

Result message:
OK: test OK
Failed: Indication of the failed part.

Remarks Information is logged in a logfile spiceHWTest.log under

c:\oce\ngc\log\diagnostic.

18.06.2002 383
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-002 Test of the hard disks of the Set memory ]

SDS test only for R1.1

Purpose Test of the hard disks and the adapters of the Set memory.

Check Adapter: the status of the adapter (OK/Failed) and the number of the failed
adapter is displayed.
Hard disk: the status of the hard disk (OK/Failed) and the disk number of the failed
hard disk is displayed.

Remarks The information is logged in the setMemHwTest.log file in

...../OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 384
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 385
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3Com 3C900 Combo board

How to identify the 3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL PBA

Look at the drawing below for the identification

UTP (RJ45)
Connector

AUI Thick
ethernet
Connector

Coax Thin
ethernet
Connector

3 c o m 3 C9 0 0 L o c a t o r. g i f

18.06.2002 386
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adapter number(s) of additional network I/O PBA's

In case additional network I/O PBA's are installed on the Oc· Power Logic controller the adapter numbers
change as follows:

Combination(s) Adapter numbers

of the PBA as
indicated in
Settings editor:

Tip:
System PBA only 1 Only with a monitor
connected to the
controller:
System PBA + 2
3Com 3C900 Combo PBA 1 - Login as [ service ]
- select: Network
Neighborhood
System PBA + 1 - select Properties
Token Ring PBA 2 - select the tab Adapters.
The adapters are
indicated with the same
System PBA + 2 adapter numbers.
3Com 3C900 Combo PBA+ 1
Token Ring PBA 3

18.06.2002 387
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Board locations of the I/O PBA's

Board locations of the PCI boards in the Power Logic Controllers.

Dell Optiplex GX100

Mandatory locations: Slot number
Tokenring IBM 1

Ethernet 3Com Combo 3

Centronics DPP 4
Spice-III 5

Dell Optiplex GX150

Mandatory locations: Slot number
Spice-III 1
Tokenring IBM 2
Ethernet 3Com Combo 3
Centronics DPP 4

18.06.2002 388
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IBM Token-Ring board

How to identify the IBM Token-Ring board

Look at the drawing below for the identification

To k e n r i n g l o c a t o r . g i f

The Leds on the Token-Ring board

18.06.2002 389
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Centronics board can't be enabled in SDS test 90.3 (R1.2)

Description
In R1.2 the centronics board can't be enabled in SDS test 90.3

Work around:

Log in on the Controller as "service".

Make a backup of oce\ngc\etc\pcf\controller.gsm
Open c:\oce\ngc\etc\pcf\controller.gsm
find the section

Centronics board present (disable : 0 enable : 1)

GSM_CENTRONICS_PRESENT 0
and change the "0" in a "1".

Save the file, and restart the controller.

The Centronics board should be installed in slot #4, and the upper connector should be used.

18.06.2002 390
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IBM Token-Ring board

Suspected Parts & Settings:
Diagnostics for the IBM Token-Ring board

Below you'll find the location of the function Leds on the Token-Ring board

To k e n r i n g l e d s . g i f

Explanation of the behaviour of the LEDS.

Amber LED Green LED Description

Slow blink Slow blink The adapter is waiting for initialization
OFF OFF The power is switched off or the adapter is initializing
OFF Blinking The power-on diagnostics finished properly.
The adapter is waiting to be opened by the software.
OFF ON The adaptor is in use and operating properly.
ON OFF The power-on diagnostics failed or there is a problem with the adapter.
Blinking OFF The adapter is closed due to one of the following:
l The adapter open failed
l The adapter detected a wiring error
l The adapter failed the auto-removal test

Blinking ON The adapter has detected beaconning or a hard error

ON ON The adapter failed even before power-on diagnositcs

18.06.2002 391
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 392
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Windows returns the highest IP-address to the adapters as

default, if more than one adapter is present. (R1.1)
Description
If a system contains more than one adapter Windows returns the highest IP address of the adapters as the
default.
To get the different subnets some changes have to be made.

If the controller itself has more than one adapter the following changes have to be made.
l Add in each configuration file the line "HostName=<hostname>" under the [Gen] section.
Use for the <hostname> the machine name (e.g. pc4-mine) or the IP address (e.g. 192.100.100.1)
l Modify the "Server.cfg" file by adding a [Gen] section and the line "HostName=<hostname>. For example

[Gen]
HostName=pc4-mine

For a remote system with more then one adapter the config files for the clients (SEDC.cfg, SCPDC.cfg and
QMDC.cfg) have to be changed as described above.

18.06.2002 393
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3Com 3C900 Combo PBA

How to remove/install the 3com 3c900 Combo card

For this removal please consult the general Expansion board removal section.

Adapter number information in the Settings editor depends on the installed PBA's: see

18.06.2002 394
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Token Ring PBA

How to remove/install the (IBM) Token Ring PBA

For this removal / installation please consult the general Expansion board removal section: see

Adapter number information in the Settings editor depends on the installed PBA's: see

18.06.2002 395
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

3Com 3C900 Combo board

Functional description of the 3Com 3C900-COMBO EtherLink XL PBA

The 3com combo board is an ethernet based communication board.

The board provides you with extra hardware interface types to be able to connect to the ethernet networks.

This board has interfaces for 10BaseT, 10Base5 and 10Base2 while the main Oc· Power Logic controller
only has 10BaseT.
Its sole purpose therefore is to add electrical interfaces.

18.06.2002 396
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IBM Token-Ring board

Functional description of the IBM Token-Ring board

The IBM Tokenring board is a Token-Ring based communication board.

The board provides you with an extra interface to connect to Token-Ring types of networking.

This board has interfaces for UTP and STP types of Token-Ring networks.
Its sole purpose therefore is to add a different type of networking interface.

18.06.2002 397
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Centronics PBA (Optional)

The Centronics option can be installed on the Oc· TDS400 system.
Code number of the PBA: 5584.487 DPP Dual Parallel Port.

Before you start installing, make sure that you have a correct working system.

1. Install the Centronics interface board in the PCI slot #4 :

1. Turn off the controller.
2. Remove the power cable of the controller
3. Remove the controller cover.
4. Locate the PCI slot #4.
5. Remove the slot's card-mounting bracket.
6. Insert the Centronics PBA in the slot #4 and secure it with the screw.
7. Close the computer cover and reconnect all previously connected cables
8. Connect the Centronics cable into the upper Centronics connector of the board
9. Switch on the controller

2. Configure the controller with Centronics PBA:

1. Enter SDS mode
2. Execute test 90.3 : "Set the Controller Configuration" :
Declare the presence of the Centronics PBA by setting the "Centronics board" field to: "present".
3. Reboot the controller.
4. Enable the Centronics connection within the Settings Editor
Log in as System Administrator within the Settings Editor and view the SA settings.
Set "System" Settings / Connectivity / Centronics / Enable Centronics = Enabled
5. Click on "apply" button to validate the changes.
6. Reboot the controller.

Once the Centronics board is installed and declared, the drivers will be automatically installed and
started.

18.06.2002 398
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-6-003 Test of the parallel port of the centronics PBA

(Only in the Diagnosis Mode) ]

Purpose Test of the parallel port of the centronics PBA

(Only in the Diagnosis Mode)

Check Connect a Centronics cable (IEEE 1284) between the input of the Centronics PBA
(Oc· 100) and the Centronics output of the Mother board of the controller.

Remarks TEST OK
Test Failed: dirver error, cable error, unexpected error.

Information logged in the MemHwTest.log file in .../OCEROOT/log/diagnostic area.

18.06.2002 399
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 400
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

help
Description
Error Pages which are printed after an unsuccesfull print job:
If a print job cannot be made succesfully because of memory restrictions and/or buffer overflow
situations, an error page will be printed at the end of the job.
The following messages can be printed and will be stored in the Error Log File (printed on
Dump Config):

Error messages
C0000 Autotest: error DMA external
C0001 Autotest: error DMA internal
C0002 Autotest: error interrupt OO-BUS
C0003 Autotest: error OO-BUS
C0004 Autotest: error RAM
C0005 Autotest: warning RAM
C0006 Autotest: Disk error
C0007 Autotest: Ethernet error
C0008 Autotest: Task suspended during Ready
C0010 Zero Power RAM config READ error
C0011 Zero Power RAM config WRITE error
C0012 Error Log manager error
C0200 Not enough memory
C0201 Full Display List (Decrease percentage of bitmap area)
C0202 Almost Full Display List (Decrease percentage of bitmap area)
C0203 Function not implemented
C0204 Wrong Number of parameters
C0205 Syntax error
C0206 Out of range value
C0207 Semantic error
C0208 Instruction not implemented
C0209 Information not available
C0220 Interpreter creation Failure
C0221 Display list creation Failure

Error Page Contents

[ C0300 initRaster Allocation Failure on normal processing ]
[ initRaster Allocation Failure on the fly mode ]
[ C0301 Not enough me

Suspected Parts & Settings:

18.06.2002 401
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 20-1-010 Set the next NT start method, normal or diagnosis

mode ]

Description Set the next NT start method, normal mode or diagnosis mode

Value "normal mode",

"diagnosis mode"

Remarks The next restart after the "diagnosis mode" is set automatically to "normal mode".

Note 1: (not in R1.1)

Faster method to enter the Diagnosis mode:
On the operator panel of the printer:
off line / system / enter the password / diagnostic mode / yes and confirm the selection.
Restart the controller.

Note 2:
How to check if the controller is started in the Diagnosis mode:
- Message in printer and scanner display: waiting for controller
and no Direct Cable conection
- Start SDS session: session starts direct in the SDS mode and not in the NURS mode

18.06.2002 402
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C Controller

Fill in instructions

Software
761 Customer SW / Applications
762 Oc· Driver SW
763 Oc· Printroom Application SW
764 Oce Job editor SW

Connection Cables
769 Data cable between modules (Scanner-Controller, Controller-Printer)
770 Data cable to customer environment (ethernet, centronics,..)
771 Data cable

Hardware
765 Host Interface Hardware
772 Protocol converter (Ethernet combi and token ring, centronics)

Data emulation
776 Incorrect data
777 Unsupported command / file format

Interfacing
781 Memory
782 Disk
783 Fan(s)
784 PBA's
785 Software / Firmware
790 Switches
791 Interface settings
798 Mechanical connections
799 Electrical connections
780 Others Interfacing

18.06.2002 403
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 1: Do the Basic Checks

Description
Before you do all types of diagnostic tests, you must do some basic checks.
Depending on the current state of the controller, first make a backup.
If the controller is still running, you can backup the system data and copy the files to a diskette.
Next print the system settings on paper.

The Basic Checks are:

l Make data-dump / print-settings

If the controller is running, first make a backup of the system data with the SDS test 71 .
Copy the files from the c:\service\visits\"current date" directory to your laptop or a diskette.
Next print the system settings on paper.
With this information, you can restore the settings.
l Check outside of the controller
If the controller is wet or damaged, you must disconnect immediately the power.
Open the controller and check the internal parts.
l Check the connections and switches
Check if all external cables are correctly connected. Same for the external switch.
l Look and listen
When you switch on the controller, check the start of the hard-disk / fan / poweron LED.
If one of these parts are not function, check the power.
l Check for the error messages / beep codes
During power on, several system tests are activated.
The errors detected during these tests are reported as system error messages or as system
beep codes.
See for the error messages: / for the beep codes: .

If there are no errors detected during these basic checks, you can continue with step 2: do the
hardware diagnostic with the System Diagnostic Diskette .

18.06.2002 404
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 2: System Diagnostic Diskette

Create the [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] System Diagnostic Diskette

If you do the [ Power Logic controller ] tests for the first time, you have to create the diagnostic
diskette.

Diagnostic disc Power Logic Controller (GX100

1. Put a empty diskette in the disk drive.
2. Activate the icon to open the [ Attachment ] window.
3. Activate the [ Launch ] button to open the [ Self-Extractor ] window.
4. Set the [ Unzip to folder ] path to:
a:\
5. Activate the [ Unzip ] button.
The files are extracted to the diskette.
6. Make the diskette bootable:
- right click in the Windows Explorer on the [A] drive, select: / format / copy system files
only (WIN'95 '98)

Diagnostic Procedure
Use the "System Diagnostic Diskette" to check the hardware components of the [ Power Logic
controller ].

Configure the tests

1. Check the diagnostic diskette is write enabled.
2. Insert the diagnostic diskette into the disk drive of the service laptop.
3. Select the file "Config.bat" on the diagnostic diskette with the Windows Explorer:
Right mouse click on the "Config.bat" file and select: Edit.
4. Edit the line in the Config.bat file to select a component of the [ Power Logic controller ]
5. To enable the test: set the value = '1'
To disable the test: set the value = '0'.
6. Check that the correct test are enabled

Indication of the test time

Component check The expected time Necessary tools
set ethernet=0 ( 20 seconds)
set memory=0 ( 3 minutes)
set floppy=0 ( 90 seconds)
set cdrom=0 ( 9 minutes) CD-Rom
set sysdisk_fast=0 ( 3 minutes)
set sysdisk_deep=0 ( 8 minutes)
set setmem_fast=0 ( 3 minutes)
set setmem_deep=0 ( 12 minutes)
set system=0 ( 30 seconds)
set parallel=0 ( 10 seconds)
set serial=0 ( 40 seconds) Loop-back connector (P/N 7991.531)

Procedure to check the Power Logic controller components

1. Insert the diagnostic diskette into the diskette disk drive of the [ Power Logic controller ].
2. Switch ON or restart the controller.
The diagnosis of the selected components starts.
The [ Power Logic controller ] gives a beep after each passed test.
3. Wait until the [ Power Logic controller ] makes a continuous stream of beeps.
4. Remove the diagnostic diskette.
5. Insert the diagnostic diskette into the diskette disk drive of the service laptop.
6. Open the file "result.txt" on the diagnostic diskette to check which tests are passed or
failed.
If the failed test gives a code, see the error code list

Test overview (detailed information):

Ethernet

18.06.2002 405
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Description: The ethernet test uses a standard 3COM DOS-based test diagnostic
to do a group of tests on the internal network interface card (NIC).
Set (config.bat file) set ethernet=1
Time to complete (approx.): 20 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Ethernet: Passed"

Floppy disk drive

Description: The diskette test will run:

1. The seek test
During the seek test, the magnetic head is moved back and
forward between the most exterior cylinders. The moving back to
the middle is slowly (e.g. 1 - 80, 2 -79 ....).
2. The read test
Is limited to the first 10 (or 80) cylinders.
3. The write test
Is limited to the first 10 (or 80) cylinders.
During the write test, the contents of the diskette is not
damaged.
Set (config.bat file) set floppy=1
Time to complete (approx.): 90 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Floppy (Seeking): Passed"
"Floppy (Reading): Passed"
"Floppy (Writing): Passed"

Memory

Description: The memory test does a full test on both the first and second level
cache of the CPU, and the complete true memory address space
available.
Set (config.bat file) set memory=1
Time to complete (approx.): 3 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "Memory: Passed"
"Cache Memory: Passed"

System disk

Description: To check the system disk, you can do two tests:

1. The fast surface scan (basic)
2. The thorough (complete) surface scan
Both tests only do read operations, to prevent that the contents of
the system disk are damaged.
The fast surface scan is limited to the first and last 10% of the
system disk.
In most cases, a fast surface scan is enough to make sure that you
can read at least the partition information.
Normally, the hardware controller of the disk map out each error.
Set (config.bat file) set sysdisk_fast=1
set sysdisk_deep=1
Time to complete (approx.): Fast surface scan, 3 minutes
Thorough surface scan, 8 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "System Disk (Fast Scan): Passed"
"System Disk (Thorough Scan): Passed"

18.06.2002 406
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Set memory disk

Description: This test is equivalent to the system disk test, except that the hard
disk functions as a memory.
Set (config.bat file) set setmem_fast=1
set setmem_deep=1
Time to complete (approx.): Fast scan, 3 minutes.
Thorough scan, 12 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "Set Memory Disk (Fast Scan): Passed"
"Set Memory Disk (Thorough Scan): Passed"

CD-ROM drive

Description: To analyze the internal CD-ROM drive, you need a CD-ROM with at
least 10% data on it.
Except doing an internal diagnostic test, it reads the first 10% of the
CD-ROM in the bay.
Tools: Insert a CD-Rom into the CD-Rom drive.
Set (config.bat file) set cdrom=1
Time to complete (approx.): 9 minutes
Result (result.txt file): "CD-ROM: Passed"

Parallel port

Description: This test includes only an internal diagnostic test.

Set (config.bat file) set parallel=1
Time to complete (approx.): 10 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Parallel: Passed"

Serial port

Description: During the serial test, the diagnostic software will do the:
1. Interrupt test
2. Baud rate test
3. Internal transmission test
4. External transmission test
Tool: Put the loop back connector at the port 1 and / or 2
Set (config.bat file) set serial=1
Time to complete (approx.): 40 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "Serial: Passed"

System

Description: The system diagnostic test includes of the following sessions:

1. Co-Processor test
2. CMOS confidence test
3. DMA controller test
4. Timer test
5. Real time clock test

18.06.2002 407
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

6. Interrupt controller test

7. Loudspeaker test
8. PCI bridge test
9. Floating point unit test
Set (config.bat file) set system=1
Time to complete (approx.): 30 seconds
Result (result.txt file): "System: Passed"

18.06.2002 408
 TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 4: Controller SDS tests in Diagnosis mode

Description
After turned on the power, the [ Oc· Power Logic controller ] automatically starts .
In case of start-up problems (a damaged configuration, problems in the spool area, problems with the
print engine communication), you can start the controller in the Diagnosis Mode.
This mode contains only tests which can not be started during normal mode or which are required to
restore the system settings.

To enter the Diagnosis Mode, do SDS test: Set the next NT start method and restart the controller.
The controller starts only the operating system without a connection with the print engine.

In this Diagnosis Mode you can do the next SDS tests:

l 20-6-031 Clear the set memory and the spool areas

Clears the spool areas. All plotfiles are removed.
Do this if you have damaged plot files or problems with the spool area.

l 20-6-001 Test of the SPICE PBA

Test to check the correct function of the SPICE board.
Yoy cannot do this test in normal mode, because than there is communication between the controller
and the print engine. For that reason is this test only available in the Diagnosis Mode.
The test results are stored in a log file in the diagnostic area of the hard disk.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\spiceHwTest.log ?????

l 20-6-003 Test of the parallel port of the Centronics PBA

Test to check the correct function of the Centronics board.
You cannot start this test on normal mode. For that reason, this test is only available in the Diagnosis
Mode.
The test results are stored in a log file in the diagnostic area of the hard disk.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\centroHwTest.log ?????

If no errors detected during the SDS DIAGNOSIS MODE TESTS, you can continue with step 5: SDS
tests in NORMAL MODE.

18.06.2002 409
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 5: Controller SDS tests in normal mode

Description
Before doing any test, first make a backup of the SYSTEM DATA.
This backup contains all the special customer settings .

With the normal SDS mode, you can do the following controller tests / actions:

l (20-1-001) Enable / disable to trace the TDS400 process into a log file
Enable this option if additional information is needed of the processes inside the controller.
Restart the controller.
You can enable:
1. Level 1: The internal process communication, important for the service.
2. Level 2: Level 1 information and insight process information, important for R&D support.
After the restart, the controller writes additional information into log files (*.trc), they are
stored in the diagnostic area.
If the maximum size is reached, the ‘*.trc’ file is renamed to ‘*.old’.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\*.trc and
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\*.old
l (20-1-002) Set the maximum size to trace in the log files
Set the maximum size of the tracing log files.
The size depends on the problem occurrence and the method used to remove the log files
from the controller.
l (20-1-006) Enable / disable to trace the input data
To get all the bytes at the input channel of the controller, enable this option and restart the
controller.
The input data is stored in the diagnostic area.
The input files are stored with the name: inputfileX.Y, where X = the job number and Y = the
file number inside the job.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\inputfileX.Y
l (20-6-002) Test the hard disk of the set memory and the adapter
The hardware test tests the set memory controller and set memory disks.
The output of this test is written into a log file stored in the diagnostic area.
File: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\setMemHwTest.log
l (20-6-020) Save the configuration into the a log file
To write the system configuration into a log file, select this option.
The contents of the saved configuration is exactly the same as printed on paper with
print-settings.
This log file is stored in the diagnostic area.
Files: C:\Oce\NGC\log\diagnostic\DumpOce9450Config.txt
l (20-6-023) Clear the diagnostic area
To clean the diagnostic area, select this option.
All the log files, stored in the diagnostic area are removed from the controller.
l (20-6-025) Clear the error and the warning log files
To clean the system log files, select this option.
The so-called syslog files are cleaned.

If no errors detected during the SDS NORMAL MODE TESTS, you can continue with step 6:
re-installing the software.

18.06.2002 410
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Diagnostic, Step 6: Install again the software of the Power Logic

controller

Description

Preparation
Install again the software if the problem still exist after done all the described diagnostic tests
This will be the last possible action what you must do before before you replace the controller or
controller parts.

To install again the controller software, you need the following parts:

l Oc· TDS400 CDROM

l Oc· TDS400 start diskette
l Data dump diskette, with a backup of the system data
l Print-settings

If the controller still runs, first make a backup of the system data with the SDS test 71 and copy
the files in the c:\service\visits\"current date" directory to a diskette. Print the print setting with the
system parameters on paper. With this information, you can restore the customer settings.

Install again the software

See the installation chapter of the controller how to install again the software.

Restore the backup system data

l Restore the controller backup system data with the SDS test 72
l Restart the controller. After restart, all Key operator / SYstem administrator settings of the
controller should be correct.
l Check the TCP/IP network settings.
l Check that the system operates correctly and finish the installation chapter of the controller.

If the problem still exists, than replace the compleet controlle.

18.06.2002 411
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Configuration set to previous values. (R1.1)

Description
If configuration files (GSM files) get corrupted the backup of the previous correct configuration files will be
copied.
This is mainly visible when PostScript is disappeared out of the configuration, It is also logged inside the syslog
files.

Workaround R1.1:

This problem mainly occurs due to a reboot.

Therefore it is recommended to shut-down from System Control Panel after changing settings in Settings Editor
which need a reboot.

Improvement R1.2:

In R1.1 if the configuration files were corrupted, the default factory files were copied, in R1.2 the settings of the
last good configuration will be used.

18.06.2002 412
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to use the special icons on the Oc· Power Logic Controller
desktop

If you switch on the Oc· Power Logic Controller and you log in as user [ service ].
l You see a normal MicroSoft windows NT desktop
l You see the Oc· applications
l You see the normal NT icons
l Together with the NT icons there are several special Oc· icons.

These special Oc· icons are described below.

Note: An error window opens when you use these icons. Select Yes and continue.

Ngc_down.bat:
l Stops the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller. The Oc· applications disappear
from the screen.
l The SDS will not function in this state.
l After this operation, the system is a "clean" NT workstation.

Ngc_up.bat:
l Starts the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
l The Oc· Power Logic Controller operates again in normal mode.

Note: When you activate the [ "Ngc_down" ] and [ "Ngc_up" ] icons in following sequence, it
has the same result as a restart of the Controller.

Simulate Printer.bat:
l Stops the software rtelated to the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
l It restarts the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller in a speciala state.
l It simulates the real printer as if it where actually attached to the controller.
The files printed to the Oc· Power Logic Controller appear in the QUEUE-manager and then
disappear after a few seconds.
l The System Control Panel shows that the printer is turned off.

Real Printer.bat:
l Stops the software related to the Oc· Power Logic Controller.
l It restarts the software related tio the Oc· Power Logic Controller in the normal printer mode
state.
l The System Control Panel shows now the correct printer state.

NGC Diag Mode.bat

l Is used to put the system in the special diagnostic mode.
l In this mode you download the printer software.
l Wait untill the message indicate: [ Start OCI in minimal ModeController Started ].

NGC Normal Mode.bat

l Is used to put the system back from the previous diagnostic mode to the normal operating
mode.

SYSLOG:
l Displays the contents of the C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\SYSLOG directory.
l These files contain detailed log information of the Controller processes.
l You can check the contents of the log file.
Double-click the file when you are asked which application to use with this file, select Notepad
or Wordpad

DIAGNOSTIC:
l Displays the contents of the C:\OCE\NGC\LOG\DIAGNOSTIC directory.
l These files contain detailed log information of several SDS tests.
l You can check the contents of the log file.
Double-click on the file when you are sked which application to use with this file, select
Notepad or Wordpad.

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 413
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

18.06.2002 414
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The installation start diskette

What this installation diskette is used for.

The installation diskette is used to start the (re-)installation of the the software on the Oc·
Power Logic Controller.
Please keep in mind that the installation diskette is different between any number of machines
with the same version of software.
There are differences because of different software and or hardware options that are used by
this specific customer.

Please check the document how to create an installation start diskette in the section
installation .

What is on the installation diskette

l Microsoft NT license number.

l The drivers to have access to the CR-ROM drive.
l A batch file that enables again the installation diskette when it was used before.
l When ordered, the passwords for PostScript and Scan to File

18.06.2002 415
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The Oc· Power Logic controller internal processes

Process steps Oc· Power Logic controller

The process steps of the Oc· Power Logic controller controller can be split into 3 layers:
l Job Handling layer
l Machine handling layer
l Interface layer

The job handling layer

The Input Handler [IH]

The Input Handler [IH] takes care of the following actions:

l Connection Management
- ftp
- smb
- Novell
- Centronics
l Split data into Jobs (data and Job tickets)
- hard boundaries of network
- RCF / OJT
l Burster
- Decode headers (RCF / OJT)
- Add default ticket if no (or not all) information is available
l Spooling data into the spool area
l Inform the Job Server about new jobs

Spool area

The spool area is de IDE System Disk.

Print Pipeline

The Print Pipeline task care of the following actions:

l Creates data from the spooler

l Processes the data
Poker DLL (HPGL, HPGL2, NIRS TIFF, CALLS, CALCOMP)
l Transformation
Scaling
Rotation
l Interpretation
Display list (internal representation of the file
Rasterization (generating a bitmap)
Bitmap into set memory

Set Memory

The Set Memory uses the the IDE disk. It uses its own Oc· file system

18.06.2002 416
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Job Server [JS]

Engine Handler [EH]

Page Handler [PH]

The functions of the Page Handler [PH] are :

18.06.2002 417
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

l Get bitmaps out of the set memory

l Scheduling of delivering (which bitmap)
l Size of the bitmap
- To decide which roll to use (automatic roll selection)
l Attribute for delivering
- folding
- types of folding
- leading edge
- trailing edge
l Send data to the engine (Speed 2.5 MB/s)

User Interaction handler

l Display
l Feedback to the user
l Replaced by OCI in R2

System Control Handler

l SDS test management

- printer, scanner, controller
l System state handling
- Start-up, On-line, Off-line, Shut-down and Restart
l Act as an Input Handler for internal jobs
- Demo plot, dump configuration, printer test pages ....
l Setting editing
- For service [SDS] and Key Operator [KOS]

Settings Database

l Stores the settings in ASCII files

OCI (Oc· Controller Interface)

Goal of this interface:

l Standard public programmers interface for the outside world
l 2 way communication

Main functionality
l Inquiry: configuration and status
l Management: Configuration Update
l Feedback: System notification

Clients
l Queue Manager
l System Control Panel
l KOS/SAS applications
l Local / remote 3 rd party applications

18.06.2002 418
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Menu card in wrong language. (R1.1)

Description
When changing the display language for the scanner, the menu card is still printed in the original language.

Workaround:

Change the localisation setting for language in the Settings Editor accordingly.

Resolution:

This problem is solved in R1.2.

18.06.2002 419
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the scanner

Note: If the scanner is installed to an already existing configuration, then all the units must have the same
firmware version.
See: system software check / upgrade / download

Remove the scanner from the pallet

1. Cut the transport bands and remove the cardboard box (if applicable).
Note: Cardboard box is not for all countries.
2. Remove the plastic bag.
3. Cut and remove the 4 strips.
Remember the 2 strip hooks at the front cover.
4. Remove the 2 boxes and the quality check print of M&L.
5. Turn the wheels in the rolling direction.
6. Remove the 8 transport nuts (key 17) and bolts.
7. Remove the 4 square blocks from the transverse planks.
8. Put the two removed transverse planks on one side of the pallet. Connect the self-adhesive material.
9. Move the scanner careful from the pallet.

Installation of the scanner

1. Remove the transport security screws at both sides of the top section (see label).
2. Open the top section.
3. Remove the foam from the scan window.
4. Remove the left and right hand side cover of the stand (Loosen 2 x 2 screws).
5. Remove the cartboard protection at both sides of the scan lamp.
6. Connect the connectors to the scan lamp. (check the position of the notch !!).
7. Install the side covers.
8. Remove the front assembly screw inside the Operator panel.
9. Connect the cable bundle to the Operator Panel PBA.
10. Install the right side Operator panel (2 screws).
11. Remove the front assembly screw inside the left side panel.
12. Install the left side cover (2 screws).
13. Close the top section.
14. Place the feet covers over the wheel supports.
15. Connect the main supply power cable.
16. Connect the data cable to the Controller.

18.06.2002 420
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Conversion 220 / 110V Scanner

The only difference is a connector positioning on a PBA.

All the software settings can be made either in US or European settings.

For conversion between 220 and 110 V:

Connector W1 on 22PBA02:
220V = W1 - TB1
110V = W1 - TB2
Drawing: see the drawing of the Mixed power supply 22PBA02 in adjustment

18.06.2002 421
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scanner
Product specifications
Model Free-standing console
Technology CCD, Oc· Image Logic real-time image processing
hardware
Speed 3 linear metres per minute or approximately 2 A0s per
minute
Original feed Face down, right aligned
Automatic feed off/on
Rewind original to front off/on
Originals 210 - 914 mm
Original width: 210 - 1020 mm
Original length:150 mm - 15 m
Maximum thickness 1 mm
Exposure control Automatic, manual fine adjustment
Special modes Lines & Text, Photo, Blueprint
Media selection Manual selection of roll 1 or 2 or manual feed
Reproduction scale Zoom: 25 % - 400 % (adjustable in 1 % programmed fixed
steps)
Scan to file zoom: 50 % - 200 %
Input mode Single sheet
Set (sets processing/set collation)
Other operating Concurrent scanning and printing
Functions Multi-copy mode: 1-99 copies (scan once print many)
Pre-programming of next job
Programmable default settings
Standard cut, synchro cut
Scan to file (option)
Leading and trailing strip adjustment (remove 400 mm, add
400 mm)
Image editing Image mirroring
Dimensions 1330 mm (W) x 1103 mm (H) x 613 mm (D)
Weight 63 Kg

18.06.2002 422
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scan to file quality specifications of the Oc· TDS400 scanner.

Criteria

Scan to file specifications for 1:1.

Tools

l Test original DE transparent code number 0831.381

Summery of the specifications:

Weak / thin line reproduction

Resolution
1:1 accuracy

Parameter Unit Target Minimu Maximu Area Tools Adjust

m m ment
1:1
accuracy
250 x 250 mm +/- 2 test
mm mm original
DE
transpar
ent
< A0 / E % +/- 0.2 test
size % original
DE
transpar
ent
< 3 meters % +/- 1 % test
original
DE
transpar
ent

Image position (registration)

Parameter Unit Target Minimu Maximu Area Tools Adjust

m m ment
Position of
the image
- Leading mm +/- 2 test
edge mm original
DE
transpar
ent
- Trailing mm +/- 2 test
edge mm original
DE
transpar
ent
- Side edge mm +/- 2 test
mm original
DE

18.06.2002 423
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

transpar
ent

Skewing of the copy

Parameter Unit Target Minimu Maximu Area Tools Adjust

m m ment
Skewing of mm 2 mm test
the copy original
(up to E DE
size) transpar
ent

18.06.2002 424
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction in 0.1 mm

Purpose
To adjust the image length on the copy to 1:1 with the image length on the original

Before you begin

l Set the zoom to 100%
l Set the leading and trailing edge to 0 mm.

Drawing

1.0

0 Max.
+/- 3,5 mm

Check
1. The pint quality of the printer must be OK
2. Select the A0 (36") roll width.
3. Feed the transparent test original in portrait direction and make a copy.
4. Wait approximately 15 minutes.
5. Match the original with the copy along the line Xe of the original and Xh of the copy. (Xe - Xh =
700 mm.)
6. Measure the difference in the length in mm.
7. Specification: The maximum average difference must be between +/- 0.5 %.
(is +/- 3.5 mm.)

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 09-1-001
2. If the image length on the copy is too long: Decrease the indicated value, maximum = -100
If the image length on the copy is too short: Increase the indicated value, maximum = +100
10 points is about 1,5 mm

Attention: the paper length varies with the changed image length

18.06.2002 425
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the leading edge on the copy in 0.1 mm

Purpose
To adjust the leading edge on the copy to 1:1 with the leading edge on the original.

Before you begin

l Set the zoom to 100%
l Set the leading and trailing edge to 0 mm

Check
1. The print quality of the printer must be OK.
2. Make a copy of the transparent test original (landscape).
3. Put the test original on the copy. Match the leading edge of the original with the copy.
4. Measure the difference between the leading edge of the original and the leading edge of the
copy.
5. Specification: +/- 4 mm

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 09-1-002
2. Add the measured difference to the value which is already set.
Leading edge too long: Increase the value, maximum = +100
Leading edge too short: Decrease the value, maximum = -100
10 points is about 1 mm

18.06.2002 426
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the trailing edge on the copy in 0.1 mm

Purpose
To adjust the trailing edge on the copy to 1:1 with the trailing edge on the original.

Before you begin

l Set the zoom to 100%
l Set the leading and trailing edge to 0 mm

Check
1. The print quality of the printer must be OK
2. Make a copy of the transparent test original (landscape).
3. Put the test original on the copy. Match the trailing edge of the original with the copy.
4. Measure the difference between the trailing edge of the original and the trailing edge of the
copy.
5. Specification: +/- 4 mm

Correction
1. Do the SDS test 09-1-003
2. Add the measured difference to the value which is already set.
Trailing edge too long: Increase the value, maximum = +100
Trailing edge too short: Decrease the value, maximum = -100
10 points ia about 1mm

18.06.2002 427
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 09 Originals
Fill in instructions

321 Glass plate

322 Feed rollers
323 Scanner lamp
324 White original plate

348 Switch (ORGSE)

349 Sensor (EXPSE)
350 PBA's
351 Motor

358 Mechanical connections

359 Electrical connections
360 Others original handling

18.06.2002 428
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[9701 Remove original]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active during scanner setup

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 429
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[9702 Original too long]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: ORGSE is active longer than 10 minutes (equals 30 mtr.)

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0902-006 ORGSE 09-2-001 348

0904 top cover Check 360

18.06.2002 430
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[9703 Stop key pressed]

Description
Signal name: ORGSE
Fault condition: stop key pressed while ORGSE is activated
Operator message: [remove original]

18.06.2002 431
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Top section of the original handling

Procedure to remove
1. Remove the top covers from the scanner stand at the left and right side (loosen 2 screws and
remove 2 screws).
2. Remove at one side the screw and turning point from the top section.
3. Remove the top section, by moving it simultaneously to the front and upwards.
4. Place it always on a flat table.

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 432
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original present sensor (09B1)

1. Remove the glass plate.
2. Remove at the right side one screw from the front original guide plate.
3. Remove at the left side one screw and the bush from the front original guide plate.
4. Remove carefully the front original guide plate by moving to the rear and upwards.
Note: Do not damage the mirror.
5. Remove the present sensor.

18.06.2002 433
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Glass plate
1. Remove the top section of the original handling.
2. Loosen at the left and right side 2 screws from the side covers from the stand.
3. Remove the side covers from the stand.
4. Loosen at the left and right side 2 screws from the original output guide plate.
5. Push the original output guide plate to the rear.
6. Remove the glass plate.

Note: during assembling:

Place the glass plate with the slant side upwards.

18.06.2002 434
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original Motor (09M1)

1. Remove the left cover from the

scanner stand (2 screws).
2. Unhook the spring.
3. Loosen the gear belt tensioner
plate (3 screws).
4. Remove the drive belt from the
motor.
5. Disconnect connector 0901X2 Spring
from the motor PBA.
6. Loosen the 3 taptites from the
motor frame plate.
7. Remove the motor frame plate
with the motor.

Tensioner
plate

Motor
plate

Note: during assembling:

1. Check if both belts are correct guided around the wheels.
2. Both belts are tighted by the same tensioner plate.

18.06.2002 435
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01
X2
+5V_STB
1 1
GND 09B
2 2 Orig
ORGSE
3 3 Sen

Step Motor Control

09PBA01
X1 X2
ORGSMCLK OA
9 4 1
ORGSMENA NOA 09M
10 5 2
ORGSMDIR OB M Orig
11 6 3 Moto
NOB
4
+24V
1
GND
3
+5V
2

IPU
10PBA03
+5V
X4
+5V
3 X7

X4
22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (scanner)

09-Original handling

18.06.2002 436
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Original handling

The original present sensor 09B1 (ORGPRESE) detects if an original is present.

After a certain time delay to ensure proper alignment against the first pinch, the original feed
motor 09M1 (ORGMO) starts turning and the original is fed for a short time. When the
scanning process starts, the original is transported to the rear and is exposed, until the original
sensor 09B1 is released.
The necessary time to transport the original to the front is now calculated and the original
moves again to the front.

09B1 scan direction

original feed
motor control
09M1
ORGSE

09PBA01

scanner controller

When the original arrives at the front, the rear is still in the pinch and the original sensor 09B1
is still activated. When more copies have to be made, this cycle is repeated.

ORGPRESE
The timing of the original present sensor is used for:
l to start / stop the moment of the scanning
l original length measurement
l to start and stop the original transport motor
l measurement delay on leading and trailing edge to detect holes in a filing strip.

ORGMO
The original transport motor is used for:
l start and stop the original transport
l magnfication and reduction of the image in length direction.
The motor drives slower or faster

18.06.2002 437
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 438
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 1
1 2945.213 -SUPPORT BEARING 2
4 7048.560 -ROLLER 2
5 2954.996 -PLAIN BEARING 4
6 2912.357 -ACTUATOR ASSY 1
ORGSE, 09B1
10 2954.985 -SENSOR BRACKET 1
27 2912.685 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 72T 2
30 2912.693 -MOTOR ASSY 1
09M1
32 2954.947 -MOTOR PLATE 1
34 5583.901 -MOTOR CONTROL PBA 1
09PBA01
35 2668.036 -GROMMET 3
36 2912.699 -BUSH 2
42 2912.717 -WAVE WASHER 2
43 1006.269 -RING 2
50 2954.988 -TENSIONER ASSY 1
53 2954.950 -TIMING BELT PULLEY 69T 1
55 2333.097 -TIMING BELT 1680 1
56 2333.057 -TIMING BELT 880 1
58 3851.105 -TENSION SPRING 1
60 2977.120 -PROFILE ASSY 1
61 2926.733 -BUSH 2
63 2954.981 -PROFILE 1
64 2999.842 -BUSH 2
65 2954.987 -GLASS PLATE 1

18.06.2002 439
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

ORIGINAL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, SECTION 2
2 7083.721 -PROFILE 1
7 2912.387 -PIN 2
8 2912.383 -PIN 2
12 2954.949 -ORIGINAL PLATE 1
13 2955.000 -SUPPORT 7
18 2912.363 -PRESSURE ROLL 14
19 2912.338 -LEAF SPRING 7
20 2912.337 -SHAFT 14

18.06.2002 440
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-0-001 Error Counters ]

18.06.2002 441
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-1-001 Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction (in
0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the 1:1 image accuracy in the feed direction (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 442
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-1-002 Adjust the leading edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the leading edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 443
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-1-003 Adjust the trailing edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the trailing edge on the copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 444
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-2-001 Check of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE

09B1) ]

Condition No original: Original not present.

Original available: Original present

Action Feed original or sheet

Check

18.06.2002 445
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-6-001 Activate the original motor (ORGMO 09M1) ]

Purpose Activate the original motor (ORGMO 09M1)

Check Transport: transport the original

Rewind: rewind the original

Remarks

18.06.2002 446
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-6-002 Activate the movement of the original ]

Purpose Check of the orignal transport in the scanner

Check Insert an original.

Activate the SDS test: The original is transported into the scanner and rewind.
The cycle will be repeated till the test is stopped.

Remarks

18.06.2002 447
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 09-9-001 Display the length of the last original (in 0.1 mm) ]

Purpose Display the length of the last original (in 0.1 mm)

Check Feed an original.

Original length: ..... in 0.1 mm

Remarks

18.06.2002 448
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

1 Adjustment procedure scanner

Do the following adjustments on a stand alone scanner.

Adjustment tools needed are:

l Diabolo's, placed under the left top panel of the scanner
l Focus test tool 2x, code number 2999.738

Adjustment procedure:
Note: Most of the scanner adjustments will influence each other.
So complete all the adjustments from where you start and carry them out in order.

1. Maximum exposure level

2. CCD alignment (position CCD with the scan line, diabolo)
3. CCD Gain (exposure level)
4. CCD focus
5. 1:1 width and right alignment
6. Make a test copy from the transparent service original, to check the copy quality.

18.06.2002 449
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the maximum exposure level

Purpose

To adjust the lamp supply to the correct light output of the exposure lamp.

Light output too high: decreases the life time of the lamp
Light output too low: bad copy quality / higher background

Note:
The adjustment is done at the time that the exposure lamp generates the maximum light output
(see the figure) and is measured by the EXPOSE sensor.

When to do
After replacement of the exposure lamp, [ Mixed Power Supply ] and or sensor.

Drawing

Correction
Start the adjustment with a cold lamp (SCALA).
1. Keep the top cover in closed position.
2. Connect a voltmeter (DC range) between the test points EXPSE (TB5) and GND
(TB7) on the
[ Mixed power supply ] 22PBA02.
3. Put the jumper J6 into the [ adjustment position ] (= lowest position).
4. Switch on the scanner.
5. Switch on the exposure lamp (SDS test 10-6-002)

18.06.2002 450
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

6. Measure the voltage and adjust the potentiometer R133 to keep the voltage
continuous at
9.0 V ± 0.1 V during the increase.
7. Stop the adjustment when the voltage decreases!!
8. Switch off the scanner.
9. Remove the voltmeter and put the jumper on the [ Mixed Power Supply ] 22PBA02
back into its normal position.

18.06.2002 451
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment (Position of the

CCD with the scan line)

Purpose
This adjustment puts the CCD in the position:
l parallel and
l on the scan line, in the horizontal plane.

Problem on pixel level: (1 pixel in the width direction (200 DPI) = 0.127mm)
l Slant position: a square will be a parallelogram
l Displaced: shadows next to thick lines with the transparent originals,
over exposed with the shiny opaque originals.

Drawing

diabolo scan line scan line diabolo

(correct) (wrong)

Check

1. Place the 2 diabolo test tools over the exposure glass.

2. Close the original cover.
3. Do SDS test 10-7-001.
4. Specification: The measured value (in pixels) for the left and right diabolo must be:
MINIMAL (is between 75 - 85 pixels.)

Correction
1. Open the covers of the CCD unit at the rear side.
2. Do the SDS test 10-7-001.
Note: If the camera assy is replaced, measure if the plate -C- is parallel to the frame.
Adjust with the bolts A and B until there is any value on the screen.
Do not adjust 1 side completely, but adjust both sides with small moves.
3. Adjust the position of the CCD with the screw A and / or B, until the screen indicates
that the value for both sides is within the specifications.
4. Deactivate the SDS test.
5. Remove the 2 diabolo test tools.
6. Do the next adjustment of the procedure list: the CCD gain

A C B

18.06.2002 452
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the CCD Gain (Exposure level)

Purpose
To adjust the amplification factor of the analogue electronics of both (even / uneven)
CCD channels to the same greystep value of 225, after the reflected light from the
white original guide plate is measured.
l Setting too low: every grey step above the setting will be blank
l Setting too high: the circuit will be overloaded if the measurement of an original,
more white than the white original guide plate, is higher than 256.

Check
1. Close the original cover.
2. Do the SDS test 10-7-003.
3. Specification: the Greystep value for the odd and even CCD channels is 225 +/-2.
Difference between odd and even: maximum 4.

Correction
1. Remove the rear cover over the CCD unit.
2. Adjust with the potentiometer R35 on the CCD PBA, until the LED [ ODD ]
flashes.
3. Adjust with the potentiometer R35 on the CCD PBA, until 225 (+2 or -2) is
indicated on the screen.
4. Adjust with the potentiometer R48 on the CCD PBA, until the LED [ EVEN ]
flashes.
5. Adjust with the potentiometer R48 on the CCD PBA, until 225 (+2 or -2) is
indicated on the screen.
6. Do the next adjustment of the procedure list: the CCD focus

R48 R35

EVEN ODD

Translation Control: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 453
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus

Purpose
To adjust the focus on the left and right side.
The CCD unit is set to the same and correct distance to the lens at the left and right
side.

Check
1. Make a copy from the service test original.
2. Specification: The 2.6 line pattern must be clearly visible.

Correction
1. Open the original cover.
2. Put the focus test tool (code no. 2999.738) on the exposure glass and against the
left and right side frame.
3. Close the original cover.
4. Remove the covers of the CCD assy.
5. Do the SDS test 10-7-002
Note: (The CCD reads the contrast between the black and white lines.)
The adjustment screw -C- is for the right hand side focus! (see the figure)
The adjustment screw -D- is for the left hand side focus! (see the figure)

6. Rotate the adjustment screws until the value on the screen indicates the highest
value
(empirical value is approximately 40, see also the graphic figure).
Warning:
Value <5 indicates: white section is measured (wrong position test chart)
Value >50 indicates: no reflection of test chart.
7. Leave the SDS test and remove the focus test tools.
8. Do the next adjustment of the procedure list: 1:1 width and right alignment

Adjustment figure

Graphic figure

18.06.2002 454
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right alignment

Note1: This adjustment changes both:
the adjustment parameters: 1:1 width and the right alignment!
Note 2: Check in the key operator mode if the calibration factor is on 100 %.

Purpose
1. To adjust the correct 1:1 in the width direction.
2. To adjust the optical ‘0’-line for the left side of the original (right alignment).

Check 1: 1:1 width adjustment

1. Make a 1:1 copy of the service test original in the arrow direction.
2. Put the original over the copy with the width measure line Xe and Xh on top of each
other.
3. Specification: the width difference must be between + / - 3.5 mm (<0.5%).

Check 2: Right alignment (correct ‘0’ line)

1. Measure the distance from the original and from the previous made copy between the
left hand side image and the left hand side border.
2. Specification: the difference must be within + / - 4mm.

Correction: 1:1 width and right alignment

1. Open the original cover
2. Put the 2 diabolo's over the exposure glass.
3. Close the original cover.
4. Do the SDS test 10-7-004.
5. The software calculates the correction factor for the correct width (1:1) and for the
correct right alignment ('0'-line). These values are stored automatically in the memory .
6. Stop the SDS test.
7. Remove the two diabolo's.

Manual fine tuning

You can read and change both parameters.

1:1 width: SDS test 10-1-003

Image width is too small: increase the value, maximum = +100
Image width is too wide: decrease the value, maxumum = -100
10 points is about 1 mm.

Right alignment: SDS test 10-1-002

To shift the image position to the left side: increase the value, maximum = +300
To shift the image position to the right side: decrease the value, maximum = -150
10 points is about 1 mm

Translation Control: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 455
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 10 Scanning
Fill in instructions

361 Camera
362 Cable scanner-printer
363 Mirror

390 PBA's

398 Mechanical connections

399 Electrical connections
400 Others scanner

18.06.2002 456
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[10501 Error (Scanner lamp not active after switching on)]

Description
Signalname: EXPACT
Fault condition: EXPACT signals Lamp not on
Norm value: EXPACT must detect Lamp on in 2 seconds
Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1002-018 Lamp 10E1 Check replace 323

2202-004 POWER SUPPLY PBA 1 Check replace 350

22PBA02
electrical connections Check 359

18.06.2002 457
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[10502 Error (Scaner lamp is active before switching on)]

Description
Signalname: EXPACT
Fault condition: EXPACT signals lamp on before it is switched on.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

1002-018 Lamp 10E1 Check replace 323

2202-004 POWER SUPPLY PBA 1 Check replace 350

22PBA02
electrical connections Check 359

18.06.2002 458
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CCD / lens cleaning

For CCD and / or lens cleaning, following disassemblies are necessary:

1. Remove the rear cover over the CCD assy, 2 screws.

2. Loosen 14 screws from the protection plate, and remove the plate.
3. Disconnect all 3 connectors from the CCD PBA.
4. Remove the PBA, 2 screws
5. Remove the black block over the lens (2 taptites).

Cleaning is now possible, use an airbrush.

If necessary, remove the diaphragm from the lens.

Caution: Do not change the position of the lens!

18.06.2002 459
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CCD unit

Disassembling
Assembling
l When placing a new CCD Interface PBA, first check if the
jumper X4 is placed between pin 2 and 3 (see figure below)

l Make copies from the service test original and check the copy
quality.

18.06.2002 460
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the exposure lamp

Procedure to remove
1. Remove both side covers from the stand, loosen 2x 2 screws.
2. Push the plastic position fingers aside.
3. Loosen the lamp connectors on both sides.
4. Slide the lamp out the scanner, left or right side.

Procedure to install

When you install the exposure lamp make sure that:

l the exposure window points upward.
l the plastic position fingers fits in the notch of the lamp connectors.

The identification mark can be at the left or right-hand side

identification
mark

exposure window front

18.06.2002 461
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O Low Voltage Supply (scanner) Exposure Sensor

22PBA01 22PBA02 10PBA04
X1 X1 X3 X1
EXPACT EXPSEIN
1 1 5 1
EXPPWM GND
2 2 6 2
EXPFIL +12V
3 3 7 3 +12V

X4
L2
1
L1
2
L4
3 10E1
L3 Scan Lamp
4

10-Scanner / Exposure control

18.06.2002 462
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General
The aim of the scanner function is to convert the information of the
original into a digital form.

The following different functions are in the scanner:

l the original transport (see function 09 original handling)

l the light path
l scanning
l the one line CCD.
l data processing

The power supply 10PBA07 combines a low voltage power supply and an exposure control.

Original path SCALA CCD Lens

Mirror Light path

18.06.2002 463
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The light path

The light path exposes the original and transfers the light to the CCD
units.
The light path consists of:

l exposure lamp SCALA

l reflector (also by the gauge roller when using transparent originals)
l exposure glass
l mirror
l lens
l light sensor EXPSE

Figure

Gauge roller CCD Lens

914.4 m m (36")

Detail A

EXPSE Reflector Light path Exposure

lamp

Exposure lamp
The exposure lamp (SCALA) is a fluorescent lamp of 50W.
The lamp has an exposure window, which must be positioned to the
reflector and gauge roller.
The glow spiral of the lamp is switched on by the SCAFIL signal to
extend the life time of the exposure lamp.
The exposure lamp is switched on when the original has activated the
original present sensor (ORGPRESE).
When the scanner is switched to 'sleep mode', the exposure lamp is
switched off.

Light from the exposure lamp is projected directly and by one reflector
against the original. The original is transported between the turning
gauge roller and the exposure glass and is exposed. The amount of
reflected light depends on the kind of information on the original.
White areas on the original will reflect light, dark areas will reflect no
light. Grey areas will reflect less light than white areas.
The reflected light is transported via the mirror on the bottom of the
scanner, through the lens to the CCD unit.

18.06.2002 464
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Exposure sensor (EXPSE)

The exposure sensor (EXPSE) checks the lamp on / off switching and
the value of the light output. The value of the amount of light drops about
20 % of the maximum value when the lamp is warm. This 80 % light
output level is stable.

18.06.2002 465
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The scanner lamp

The exposure lamp is a 50 W fluorescent lamp. The light output of the
lamp is regulated. The EXPSE sensor detects the light output of the
scanner lamp.

Block diagram:

Lamp
Ballast

EXPFIL

EXPPWM
22PBA02
+ 12 V / GND
EXPACT
EXPSEIN EXPSE

Mixed Power
Supply

l The EXPFIL signals starts the pre-heaters of the lamp. The

pre-heaters are on until the scanner lamp is switched off.
l The EXPPWM switches the lamp on and off. The SCALAPWM
signal is also the demanded light level and is set on 80%. It is a
puls width modulation signal.
l The EXPSEIN signal is the analog output signal of the EXPSE
sensor. The value of this signal is related to the actual amount of
light of the scanner lamp.
l The EXPACT signal is a feedback signal that indicates the control
if the scanner lamp is switched on or off.

Timing diagram:
EXPOSURE
LEVEL
80 %

EXPFIL

EXPPWM
time

Scanner lamp adjustment

The scanner lamp must have a certain light output. This amount of light
is de-rived from its maximal light output, because this point is a limit.
To create the 100% light output during the adjustment of the scanner
lamp con-trol circuit, the feedback signal of the optical sensor
(EXPSEIN) is disabled from the control loop. This is done by means of a
jumper.

18.06.2002 466
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

EXPPWM Exp. lamp

jumper output

testpoint
EXPSE

EXPSEIN
EXPSE
10PBA4

If the jumper is in the adjust position the EXPPWM signal is held low (=
100% duty-cycle) and the power supply will supply the lamp with the
maxi-mum power.
The light level of the lamp will rise until it reaches 100% light out-put at
the optimal lamp temperature.
During the rise the signal of EXPSE (at the testpoint) must be kept at a
constant level of 9.0 V. This is done by means of the potentiometer (see
adjustment: ‘Maximum exposure level’ :
After the adjustment the jumper must be re-positioned in the original
position.

18.06.2002 467
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CCD unit
The Charged Coupled Device (CCD) converts the detected
light amount into an analogue voltage. The value of the
analogue voltage is related to the light amount.

The TDS400 uses a reduced type CCD. The actual image is

projected on 1 CCD device via an optical system with a mirror
and a lens.

The CCD has 7500 pixels. Only 7200 pixels are used to scan
the maximum original size of 914.4 mm (36”). The even and
odd pixels have separate command and data channels.
The CCD is mounted on the CCD Console PBA.

The interface is used in more scanners. To set the jumper X4

on the 10PBA02 , see assembling CCD unit.
The scanning resolution is 200 dots/inch (dpi).
One pixel is approx. 0.13 mm.
The resolution is enhanced by software to 600 dpi for the
print head.

All data of the original is directly transported via the Image

Processing PBA to the SPICE board in the PLC controller.
The figure below shows the used PBAs and the direction of
the data flow.
The Image processing PBA is described in chapter 11 Image
processing.

CCD CCD
CCD Console interface
10 PBA 1 10 PBA 2

Image
Processing To SPICE
10PBA3 board
PLC
Console
CPU
22PBA01

Scanner

18.06.2002 468
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Data processing

Block diagram data path

The data path block diagram describes the various data steps on the
CCD Console 10PBA1.
Figure data path

Offset compensation
Every CCD cell generates a DC voltage, independently of light, which is
not needed. The offset compensation compensates all pixels for this DC
level.
Note: . The offset compensation is carried out just after the machine is
switched on.

Multiplexing
To reduce the amount of electrical connections and to gain higher
performance the data of the 2 CCD channels is multiplexed.

Adjustable amplifier
The amplifier amplifies the analogue voltage to the optimum input range
for the ADC. In this way the total range of the ADC is used. The
adjustable am-plifier is needed to compensate system tolerances of the
driver on the CCD PBA. The setting of the adjustable amplifier is based
on the CCD information from the gauge roller. This is done during
scanner calibration, after switching on the machine.

A/D converter
The A/D converter (Analog Digital converter) converts the analog voltage
into an 8 bit digital signal.

CCD Interface 10PBA2

The interface function takes care of the transmission from and to the
Image Processing PBA, where the image processing takes place (see
chapter 11).

18.06.2002 469
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Scanning
The scanning function is a part of the total image data processing, which
en-sures a good copy quality for most types of originals.
Nearly independent of the quality of the original e.g. opaque or
transparent, the output quality should be at a high level.

The total image processing functions take place on the following PBAs:

Scanner
PLC Controller Engine

CCD CCD
CCD Console Interface
10PBA1 10PBA2

SPICE PLC
PBA soft- Print- Print-
ware head head
Image I/O
processing
Console CPU 10PBA4
22PBA02

This chapter describes only the scanning part, which is up to the Image
processing PBA.

Scan start moment

The scanning of the original must start on the leading edge of the
original.
This moment depends of:
l original transport moment / position
l original speed (magnification factor)
l leading edge setting

Scan stop moment

The scanning of the original must stop on the trailing edge of the
original.
This moment depends of:
l deactivating of the original present sensor (ORGPRESE)
l trailing edge setting

18.06.2002 470
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Mixed Power Supply

The mixed power supply is used for:
+ 24V / + 12 V and +5V supply (only in RUN mode)
+ 5 V in STAND-BY mode

Block diagram:

Mains filter
Mains switc h
Engine

Exp.
La mp
ON in
Stand-b y Ballast la mp
m ode + 5V
stand -by
SUPON

+ 24 V
ON Ballast c ontrol EXPSEIN
in + 5V EXPPWM
RUN EXPFIL
m ode + 12 V EXPACT

The Mixed Power Supply is supplied by the line voltage of the engine.
It generates the low voltage power supply and the high frequency lamp
ballast.
By the logic signal ~SUPON~ the scanner can be switched between the
RUN mode and the STAND-BY mode.
The input voltage of the power supply is not from the engine, but from a
socket outlet on the wall.

18.06.2002 471
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

SCANNING
1 5600.421 -CAMERA ASSY 1
10PBA01, CCD CONSOLE
2 5584.468 --CCD INTERFACE PBA 1
10PBA02
3 2954.942 -MIRROR 1
13 2944.810 -LAMP HOLDER 1
15 2912.376 -LAMP CONNECTOR 2
18 2912.379 -LAMP 1
10E1
19 5583.781 -EXPOSURE SENSOR PBA 1
10PBA04
20 2954.948 -SENSOR HOLDER 1
21 2926.714 -SNAP RIVET 4
40 1989.346 -BRACKET 3
50 2977.129 -CLAMP 3
52 2977.131 -RING 1
53 2977.130 -STUD 2
54 2977.141 -SET BALL SCREW 4

18.06.2002 472
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-0-001 Error counters ]

18.06.2002 473
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-001 Set the lamp time out after the last original (in
seconds) ]

Description Set the lamp time out after the last original (in seconds)

Value Range: 60 ... 600

Default: 60 (seconds)

Remarks

18.06.2002 474
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-002 Adjust the "0"-line position original - copy (in 0.1 mm)
]

Description Adjust the "0"-line position original - copy (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -150 ... 300

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustsment procedure: 1:! width and right alignment

18.06.2002 475
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-003 Adjust the image accuracy in the width direction (1:1)

(in 0.1 mm) ]

Description Adjust the image accuracy in the width direction (1:1) (in 0.1 mm)

Value Range: -100 ... +100

Default: 0

Remarks Adjustment procedure: 1:1 width and right allignment

18.06.2002 476
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-1-004 Adjust the light level of the exposure lamp (in steps of
5 %) ]

Description Adjust the light level of the exposure lamp (in steps of 5 %)

Value Range: 50 ... 60

Default: 55

Remarks Adjustment procedure

18.06.2002 477
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-2-001 Check of the exposure sensor (SCAEXPOSE

10PBA04) ]

Condition Check the function of the exposure sensor (SCAEXPOSE 10PBA04)

Action

Check Check the function of the sensor with a flash light.

18.06.2002 478
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-6-002 Check the functioning of the exposure lamp (SCALA

10E1) ]

Purpose Check the functioning of the exposure lamp (SCALA 10E1)

Check Lamp on: light output is placed at 100%

Remarks

18.06.2002 479
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-001 Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD alignment

Value Allignment right: 100 ... 1100 (pixels)

Normal value: 600
Allignment left: 6400 - 7400 (pixels)
Normal value: 6900

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD alignment

18.06.2002 480
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-002 Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD focus

Value Search area right: between 580 - 620 CCD's

Search area left: between 6880 ... 6920 CCD's

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD focus

18.06.2002 481
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-003 Adjustment procedure of the CCD maximum exposure

level ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the CCD maximum exposure level

Value

Remarks Adjustment procedure: CCD gain

18.06.2002 482
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 10-7-004 Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right

alignment ]

Purpose Adjustment procedure of the 1:1 width and right alignment

Value

Remarks Adjustment procedure: 1:1 and right alignment

18.06.2002 483
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O IPU CCD I/O CCD

22PBA01 10PBA03 10PBA02 10P
X4 X5 X3 X2 X3
RING MUX
INTERFACE A/D CONVERTER

X4 X1 X6
+5V +5V
19 19 1 1
+5V - CCD CONTROL GND
20 20 - NUC
4 2
X1
- ABC
- ZOOM +5V
3
- FILTER +5V_SENSE
- ERROR DIFFUSION 2
GND
X7 5
X9
X4 SPU CONTROLLER
INTERFACE NGC

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (scanner) 22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (scanner)

10-Scanner / Image processing

18.06.2002 484
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General
The aim of the image processing function is to create:
l a good copy quality
l a retention function
l an editing function.
l a zoom function
l a scan to file with Scan Station

The image processing function is a part of the total data processing,

which takes care of a good copy quality for most types of originals.
Nearly independent to the quality of the original e.g. opaque or
transparent, the output quality should be at a high level.

The total image processing functions take place on the following PBAs:
Scanner
PLC Controller Engine

CCD CCD
CCD Console Interface
10PBA1 10PBA2

SPICE PLC
PBA soft- Print- Print-
ware head head
Image I/O
processing
Console CPU 10PBA4
22PBA02

This chapter describes the image processing part, which is handled by the
Image Processing board 10PBA4.

18.06.2002 485
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image processing 10PBA04

The image processing is A PBA, containing digital hardware that
implements algorithms to transform the output of the CCD into a good
quality half-toned bitmap.
The data flow through the Image processing PBA is in serial order,
meaning that it is actually a pipeline of modules, each implementing part
of the desired functionality.

Image Processing Modules:

PLC
Controller

Zoom
Output adaptor

ABC
Half toning

Blue print
Framing
Uneveness PP_LUT
compensation

Filtering
Input adaptor Image
Processing
10PBA04
CCD 10PBA02

Input adaptor
This is the hardware that reads the CCD-output.
It controls also the CCD.

Uneveness compensation, Blue print, Framing

Unevenness compensation:
The unevenness compensation compensates for:
l differences in light output of the exposure lamp over the total width,
l tolerances in the reflected light of the gauge roller,
l variation in pixel sensitivity of the CCDs.

Note: The unevenness compensation (for each pixel) is automatically

done at every introduction of each original into the scanner.
The unevenness compensation acts as follows:
The exposure lamp is switched on, the original motor is active and the
gauge roller is turning. The light of the exposure lamp is reflected by the
white gauge roller and is detected by each pixel of the CCD. The
measured digital value for each pixel should have a grey step value of
225.
If the value is lower e.g. 200 or higher e.g. 230, a compensation value is
calculated.

The compensation value is multiplied with the actual pixel value (e.g.
150) during the scan of the original. The compensation value stays the
same until a new original is entered.

Blue print
Included in this module is also the possibility to invert pixel data. This is
needed for the blue print operation.

Framing
Included in this module is also the possibility to calculate which CCD
LED's should be switched to have a framing at the left and right side of
the copy.

18.06.2002 486
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

ABC (Automatic Background Compensation)

The ABC measures the background level of the original and will subtract
this level from the grey-level bitmap. In this way the grey-level of the
background is eliminated, thus turned to white.
The principe of the ABC is that for every scan line the background level
for that line is estimated and this value is related to the background level
from the past, in order to determine the new background level.
This means that from the beginning of the leading edge of the original,
the print background can change very fast depending the information on
the original (the leading edge can be: filing strip, diazo type original,
posters).
How more lines are scanned and measured, the value of the
background will be more stable and the background will be
compensated by the same level.
Note: If the background level compensation on the print is fluctuating too
much, switch off the ABC to receive a print with the same background
level as the original.

Zoom
The zoom module is used to reduce and enlarge (25% ... 400 %) the
input image in the width (scan) direction.
Also the resolution in scan direction is enhanced from 200dpi to 600dpi.
(Reduction and enlargement in the length direction is done by changing
the speed of the original motor.)

Filtering
Filters are used to enhance the contrast level of the bitmap. The result is
that the image quality is improved. Weak lines or areas (low contrast)
(see line A and area C) are emphasised in normal mode. The result for
area C is a visible darker border around the surface. Normal information
(B) is kept at the same level and is not affected.
Also for enlargments >200%, every other scan line is discarded to
minimise the amount of RAM memory. After the enlargment calculation ,
the 400 dots/inch is set back by interpolation.
The output after filtering is 8 bit/pixel.

input

optical
density
A B C

background level 1 scanline

output

optical
density

background level
1 scanline

PP LUT
The PP LUT is a look-up table which is only used for grey and lines mode or photomode.

Scale Y
During the filtering by enlargments >200%, every other scan line was discarded.
Scale Y tries to reconstruct the lost lines by means of interpolation.

Halftoning
This module converts the 8-bit greuscale pixels into a 1-bit black/white bitmap.
The module contains three different halftoning methods:
1. error diffusion, this is the normally used

18.06.2002 487
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

2. dithering, applied when postermode is selected

3. file size optmalisation. This mode is a combibation of error diffusion and thresholding, to be used for
scan-to-file when the scanned images will be compressed and stored.
This mode yields smaller compressed files at the expense of a little image quality.

Normal mode
If the grey value is below a certain minimum value, it is
converted into a black pixel on the copy.
If the grey value is above a certain maximum value, it is
converted into a white pixel on the copy.
If the grey value is between the minimum and maximum value,
the error dif-fusion has to decide if the pixel becomes white or
black.
In this case also the information (grey value) of the pixel in the
previous line and the pixel beside the pixel are used for the
judgement whether the pixel becomes white or black. The
judgement also results in the prevention of Moir· effects.

Lighter / Darker button (+7 / -7):

The lighter /darker button function is also incorporated in the
error diffusion function. The lighter/darker button changes only
the position (value) of the maximum value. More or less (+7/-7)
grey values are changed into white pixels.
Pixel +7 0 -7

White

Black
min. max.
255
value value
e.g 80 e.g.190

grey value

Dark mode
If the operator selects the dark mode the maximum value is
reduced from 190 to e.g. 160. The influence on the copy is that
weak information or background is changed into white pixels
and a smaller range (between min. and max. value) of grey
scales on the copy.
+7 -7
Pixel

White

Blac k
m in. m ax. 255
value value
e.g 80 e.g 160
grey value

Photo mode
If the operator selects Photo mode the minimum value is
changed from 80 to e.g. 50. The influence on the copy is a
smaller dark pixel range and a larger range for grey values on
the copy.

18.06.2002 488
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Pixel +7 -7

White

Bla ck
m in. m a x. 255
va lue va lue
e.g 50 e.g. 190
grey value

Output adapter
This module coverts the image data accordance with the SPICE-protocol and sent it to the controller.

SAC Structure Standard: Development Information (hidden)

18.06.2002 489
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

IMAGE PROCESSING
15 5584.743 -SPU PBA 1
10PBA03

18.06.2002 490
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 11-6-001 Check of the control bus between CPU-IO and the

IMAGE- PROC PBA ]

Warning

Caution

Purpose Check of the control bus between CPU-IO and the IMAGE- PROC PBA of the
scanner

Check Image PROC OK

Image PROC NOT OK

Remarks

18.06.2002 491
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 22 Power & Control

Fill in instructions

841 Operating panel

843 Line filters
845 Fuses
846 Copy counters
848 Switches
849 Sensors
855 PBA/EPROM's
856 Power supply unit
878 Mechanical connections
879 Electrical connections
880 Others Control

18.06.2002 492
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22522 Error (Printer illegal language file)]

Description
Error condition: Illegal printer language file installed on the controller.

The printer will display the error message, and use the onboard English language file.
The correct printer language files should be installed.

18.06.2002 493
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22540 Error (EEPROM settings out of range)]

Description
EEPROM settings out of range

Error occurs in case one of the variables during power up of the scanner is out of range.

Operator action:
1. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 494
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22541 Error (Too many EEPROM variables defined)]

Description
Too many EEPROM variables defined.

Error uccurs in case variables to be stored in EEPROM exeeds 64 (during power up of the
scanner).

18.06.2002 495
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22542 Error (Scanner communication broken)]

Description
Connection between scanner and NGC broken.

Error uccurs in case there is no communication between the scanner and the NGC (checked
every 10 seconds).

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2204-001 CPU PBA 22PBA01 855

1102-015 SPU PBA 10PBA03 390

electrical connections Check 359

18.06.2002 496
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22543 Error (Scanner transmit buffer too small)]

Description
Transmit buffer too small: communication with controller broken or frozen.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 497
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22544 Error (Scanner transmit buffer overshoot)]

Description
Transmit overshoot buffer too small: scanner tried to send a command which is too big.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 498
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22545 Error (Scanner recieve buffer too small)]

Description
Recieve buffer too small: scanner is not accepting data fast enough.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON

18.06.2002 499
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22546 Error (Scanner Uart parity error)]

Description
UART reported parity error: unreliable communication link.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 500
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22547 Error (Scanner Uart buffer overflow)]

Description
UART reported buffer overflow.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 501
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22548 Error (Scanner Uart framing error)]

Description
UART reported framing error.

Operator actions:
1. Clear the scanner.
2. Switch the scanner OFF and ON.

18.06.2002 502
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[22549 Error (Scanner illegal language file)]

Description
Error condition: Illegal scanner language file installed on the controller.

The scanner will display the error message, and use the onboard English language file.
The correct scanner language files should be installed.

18.06.2002 503
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

IPU CPU I/O Console

10PBA03 22PBA01 22PBA03
X5 X4 X3 X1
+5V +5V_STB
1 1 1 1
GND GND
2 2
+24V CONPANINP
3 3
GND CONPANOUT
26 26 4 4
CONPANCLK
5 5
Low Voltage Supply (scanner) CONPANENA
6 6
22PBA02 +5V
µP 7 7
X3 X1 CONPANSTB
EXPACT 8 8
1 1
EXPPWM
2 2
EXPFIL
3 3
SUPON
4 4
+5V_STB
11 5
GND
10 6

10-Scanner / CPU I/O

18.06.2002 504
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Low Voltage Supply (scanner)

22S1 22PBA02
ON/OFF Switch
X5 F3 X1
L
1 1

LOAD
F6 4AS

LINE
N
2 3
4AS
100V or 4 2
120/230V 3 X6
T1
100V 10T1
X3
115V +5V_STB
+5V 12
10F1
100V 11 22PBA
4AS
X2
+5V_SENSE
1
T2
120/230V
+5V
2 10PBA
GND
3

Control X3
PWM +24V
+24V
9 09PBA
12
8
6
+12V
+12V 7

X4
L2
1
T5
Ballast / L1
X9 2
Control Ballast
PWM L4
Control 3
L3
X2 4 EXPOS
X3 CONTR
EXPPWM
2
EXPFIL
3
EXPSEIN
5

EXPACT
1

SUPON
4 22PBA

10-Scanner / Low Voltage Supply

18.06.2002 505
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O (scanner) Console

22PBA01 22PBA03

IPU CCD I/O CCD Console

10PBA03 10PBA02 10PBA01

TO SPICE-BUS
CONTROLLER NGC

Low Voltage Supply

(scanner)
22PBA02

09B1

10E1 Exposure Sensor

10PBA04

10-Scanner / Main diagram

18.06.2002 506
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Main Diagram Oc· TDS400 Scanner (overview)

Scanner Main diagram

scanner.tif

18.06.2002 507
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

POWER & CONTROL, SCANNER
1 5584.597 -CPU PBA, UPTO MOD.02 1
22PBA01
5584.710 -CPU PBA, FROM MOD.02 1
22PBA01
2 7208.822 -FIRMPACK, UPTO MOD.02 1
7095.309 -FIRMPACK, FROM MOD.02 1
7095.421 -FIRMPACK, FROM MOD.03 1
7095.712 -FIRMPACK, FROM MOD.05 1
4 5583.786 -POWER SUPPLY PBA 1
22PBA02
7 1201.774 -MAINS INLET CONNECTOR 1
9 1202.042 -MANUAL SWITCH 1
22S1
12 1201.854 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE, 230V 1
1301.782 -MAINS CONNECTION CABLE, 115V 1
16 7128.968 -SUPPORT PLATE 1
18 1989.346 -BRACKET 1
19 7095.113 -PROTECTION PLATE 1
23 2977.111 -SHIELDING PLATE 1
25 2977.114 -SHIELDING COVER 1
40 7018.018 -TRANSFORMER ASSY 100-115V 1
22T1
40L 1300.396 --FUSE 4A, SLOW 1
42 7018.023 -BRACKET, UPPER 1
43 7018.022 -BRACKET, LOWER 1
50 7208.800 -CONSOLE, UNIVERSAL CHAR. 1
22PBA03
7128.909 -CONSOLE, KATAKANA CHAR. 1
22PBA03
51 7094.088 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, NL 1
7094.089 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, GB 1
7094.090 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, DE 1
7094.091 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, FR 1

18.06.2002 508
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

7094.092 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, IT 1

7094.093 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, SE 1
7094.094 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, DK 1
7094.095 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, NO 1
7094.096 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, ES 1
7094.097 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, US 1
7094.098 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, PT 1
7094.099 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, FI 1
7094.100 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, PL 1
7094.101 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, HU 1
7095.325 -OPERATING PANEL OVERLAY, JP 1

18.06.2002 509
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-0-001 Error counters of the scanner ]

18.06.2002 510
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-1-002 Display the software release number of the scanner ]

Description Display the software release number of the scanner firmpack.

Presentation 5 /6 digits: (a)a.bb.cc (e.g. 1.15.1 = 11501).

Value Range: 1000 .... 99.99.99

Remarks

18.06.2002 511
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-021 Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the scanner ]

Purpose Set the NVD to default in the RAM of the scanner.

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 512
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 22-6-024 Turn ON the scanner into sleep mode ]

Purpose Turn ON the scanner into sleep mode

Check

Remarks

18.06.2002 513
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 23 Drive
Fill in instructions

881 Timing belt

882 Gears
883 Tensioner
884 Bearings
910 PBA-s
911 Motors
912 Clutches
918 Mechanical connections
919 Electrical connections
920 Others Drive

18.06.2002 514
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 25 Customer / Environment

Fill in instructions

Customer
961 No fault on arrival
962 Incorrect operation
963 Original
964 Exaggerated demands
970 Others Customer

Environment
971 Humidity/temperature
972 Main power supply
980 Others Environment

Consumables
981 Paper
982 Specialties
983 Toner
990 Others Consumables

Installation
991 Packing
992 Covers
999 Machine is okay

18.06.2002 515
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

BUNDLES OVERVIEW
1 2945.204 -BUNDLE 10W01 1
2 2975.926 -BUNDLE 10W02 1
3 2975.927 -BUNDLE 10W03 1
4 2945.205 -BUNDLE 10W05 1
5 2945.206 -BUNDLE 10W06 1
6 7018.017 -BUNDLE 10W07 1
7 1302.505 -DATACABLE 4M 1
8 1302.506 -DATACABLE 8M 1

18.06.2002 516
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

FRAME & COVERING
1 7083.693 -ORIGINAL TABLE 1
2 7128.997 -RIGHT COVER 1
3 7128.996 -LEFT COVER 1
4 7083.738 -REAR COVER 2
11 7128.957 -COVER, FOOT 4
12 7128.961 -TURN WHEEL 4
14 7083.722 -COVER 1
15 2954.972 -PLATE 2
16 7070.671 -DISCHARGE BRUSH 2
18 7168.909 -NAME PLATE 1
20 7095.084 -PLATE 1
22 7083.726 -RACK 6
23 2977.117 -BRACKET 1

18.06.2002 517
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to separate the engine from the stand

Necessary tool: socket screwdriver 7 mm.

1. Open the paper roll drawer.

2. Remove the bolt and the ring between the stand and the engine at the left and right front side .
3. Remove the vertical bolt between the stand and the engine at the left and right rear side.
4. Loosen the 2 screws from the connector at the left rear side.
Remove the connector and the earth wire.

<--- earth wire

<--- connector

5. ATTENTION: the input guide plate at the front is lower then the base plate of the engine.
No weight is allowed on the guide plate when the engine is placed on a table or on the floor.
6. Lift the engine from the stand with 2 persons.
Put the engine on a table, pay attention to the guide plate (see: ATTENTION)

Assembling.
Note: fasten the bolt and the ring at the front side before you fasten the bolts at the rear side.

1.

1.

18.06.2002 518
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Installation of the printer

Note: If the printer is installed to an already existing configuration, then all the units must have the same
firmware version.
See: system software check / upgrade / download

Remove the printer from the pallet

Installation of the printer

1. Roll the printer ot the required position.

2. Remove the transport tapes and foam pieces.
3. Remove the two sets of 5 metal guides (not delivered in cas the COS is available).
4. Remove the left and right transsport security bolt (10 mm) from the inside of the stand (the middle bolt).
5. Open the paper roll drawer (PRD) and remove at the left and right side the white plastic transport security
rings.
6. Remove the rubber transport security bands from the paper roll holders.
7. Remove the test print.
8. Rear side: remove the power asupply cable and at the left and right side the locking plates.
9. Open the left engine cover (knurled screw).
10. Remove the waste toner bag.
11. Remove the black plastic cover, 2 screws.
12. Cut the long cable tie and remove it. Remove the black screw, this is the third screw for the plastic cover.
13. Open the fuser unit and remove the protection material at the left and right side.
14. Remove the transport security bolt of the print head (PHD).
15. Open the right engine cover, 3 screws.
16. Remove the transport security bolt of the print head (PHD).
17. Cut and remove the long cable tie.
18. Remove the top cover over the print head
- remove 2 screws at the front side
- loosen 2 screws at the rear side.
- open the Paper Roll drawer.
- pull the side covers towards you to unlock the top cover
- remove the top cover
19. Remove the 2 foam blocks.
20. Turn the print head upwards.
21. Open the developer unit cover and check if the unit is filled or not filled with the developer.

Engine deliverd with developer:

22. Close the developer cover and the print head.
23. Continue with action point 25.

Engine delivered without developer:

24. Shake the developer bottle well and divide the developer powder equal in the developer unit.
25. Close the developer cover and the print head.

26. Install the top cover over the print head.

27. Close the fuser unit.
28. Install at the left side the black plastic cover over the toner supply unit.
29. Put the waste toner bag.
30. Fill the toner supply pot.
31. Water level. The printer must not be installed under torsion.
Check with the water level on the frame behind the left and right door.
32. Adjust the water level with the feed at the front side.
33. Close the left engine cover.
34. Close the Paper Roll Drawer.
35. Close the right engine cover, 3 screws.
36. Place the feet covers over the wheel supports.

Engine without the compact output stacker (COS):

37. Install at the rear side the 2 long plastic copy guides, left and right side.
38. Install at the rear side the 3 short plastic copy guides, in the middle.

Engine with the compact output stacker (COS):

39. Install the compact output stacker (COS)

40. Remove the cable bundle for the laptop inside the right hand stand.

18.06.2002 519
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

41. Connect the bundle with the connector behind the printer door.
42. Install left and right the side covers of the stand.
43. Connect the main supply power cable.
44. Connect the data cable to the Controller.

18.06.2002 520
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Conversion 220 / 110V, 50 / 60Hz Printer

There are only differences in the parts, all the software settings can be made either in US or European settings.

The following differences in the parts are:

Oc· TDS400 Printer 120V 60Hz Oc· TDS400 Printer 230V 60Hz
Code No Qty Description Code No Qty Description
1201.237 1 Capacitor 5UF 400V 1201.240 1 Capacitor 10UF 400V
1201.863 1 Connection cable 1201.864 2 Connection cable
1201.955 2 Circuit breaker 20A 1201.868 1 Circuit breaker 10A
2268.002 1 Strain relief 2912.703 1 Strain relief
7094.808 1 Bundle, 22W05 7094.713 1 Bundle, 22W04
2912.698 1 Motor, 115V-AC cpl 2912.463 1 Motor, 230V-AC cpl
2926.762 1 Switch, interlock-2x2P
7094.898 1 label, Power Marking 7094.896 1 label, Power Marking

For conversion between 50Hz and 60Hz you need also the next items:
Partslist Z-2300 Qty
28 2912.676 TIMING BELT PULLEY 230V 50Hz 48T 1
28A 2912.677 TIMING BELT PULLEY 115-230V 60Hz 40T 1
31 2912.678 TIMING BELT PULLEY 230V 50Hz 30T 1
31A 2912.679 TIMING BELT PULLEY 115-230V 60Hz 25T 1

Please take also attention to the adjustment between 110V and 230V:

Tension of the main drive belt

The tension of the main drive belt is determined by a tensioner. The position of this tensioner is referred to the
configuration. (50 Hz or 60 Hz.).

60 Hz 50 Hz

18.06.2002 521
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Copy material sizes

Note:

- Avoid storing paper in rooms where temperature and humidity are high.
Also, avoid dust and direct sunlight. Wrap unused paper in plastic to prevent it absorbing
moisture.
DIN range
Width [mm] Length [mm]
A3 297 420
A2 420 594
A1 594 841
A0 841 1189

8,5 inch range

Width [inch] Length [inch]
11 inch / B 11 17
17 inch / C 17 22
22 inch / D 22 34
34 inch / E 34 44

9 inch range
Width [inch] Length [inch]
12 inch / B+ 12 18
18 Inch / C+ 18 24
24 inch / D+ 24 36
36 inch / E+ 36 48

Other formats
Width Length
30 inch 30 inch 12 inch
B1 carto 700 mm 1000 mm
B1(DIN) 707 mm 1000 mm
B2 carto 500 mm 700 mm
B2 (DIN) 500 mm 707 mm

18.06.2002 522
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Copy material types

Plain paper 75 to 110 g/m 2

Transparent paper 80 to 110 g/m 2
Translucent 60 g/m 2
Vellum 16 - 20 lbs
Polyester film 3.5 or 4.5 mil
Special Coloured paper, etc.

Width: Minimum 297 mm Maxinmum 914 mm

Length: Minimum 420 mm Maximum 15 m

18.06.2002 523
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Printer (General)
Product specifications
Technology Electrophotography (LED head) with organic
photo-conductor (OPC) drum and closed toner system
Toner B5 Toner
Developer D5 Developer
Resolution 600 dpi
Speed 3 linear meters p/min. or approx. 2A0's p/min.
Media sources 1 or 2 roll unit and manual feed
Output sizes From A3 to A0, a maximum of 15 meters long
Media types Plain, translucent, transparent, recycled, fluorescent and
coloured papers; films and vellum
Output reception Standard Integrated Receiving Tray (IRT)
Warm up time None
Dimensions 1352 mm (W) x 1250 mm (H) x 899mm (D) including
integrated receiving tray
Weight Model with 1 roll : 175 kg
Model with 2 rolls :185 kg

18.06.2002 524
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Print quality specifications of the Oc· TDS400 printer.

Criteria

Tools

Summery of the specifications:

Image density
Image quality
Image position (registration)

For detailed information see

l Image density specifications

l Image quality specifications
l Image position specifications

18.06.2002 525
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image density specifications (detailed).

Detailed image density specifications of the printer:

The maximum density

The maximum density in high blackness mode

The difference in maximum density

The difference in maximum density of small areas

18.06.2002 526
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image quality specifications (detailed).

Detailed image quality specifications of the printer

Resolution

The connection errors of the LED print head

The synchronisation

The fixation of the toner on plain paper 75 gr./m·

The 1:1 accuracy

Poor print quality

Loss of information

18.06.2002 527
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image position specifications (detailed).

Detailed image position (registration) specifications of the printer:

Position of the image

The difference of the print length in a run

Straightness of cutting

Rectangular cutting

Skewing

18.06.2002 528
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjustment procedure of the tension of the photoconductor

drive belt

Drawing
bolt A bolt D
main motor 23M1

bolt B bolt C

Correction
1. Remove the high voltage PBA
2. Loosen the bolts A, B, C, and D.
3. Release the tension from the main drive belt.
4. The tension of the photoconductor drive belt is determined by the weight of the main motor
23M1.
5. Tight the bolt A and then the bolts B, C and D.
6. Install the high voltage PBA.

18.06.2002 529
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS 01 Photoconductor
Fill in instructions

001 Photoconductor
002 Earth spring
038 Mechanical connections
039 Electrical connections
040 Others Photoconductor

18.06.2002 530
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the Photoconductor (drum)

Before you begin

Remove the developer unit .

Note: Do not expose the photoconductor (drum) too long to the environment light.

Procedure to remove
1. Open the print head.
2. Remove the photoconductor (drum) drive belt.
3. Disconnect the connector 04X01 of the encoder 04B1
4. Remove (slide) the drive pulley with the encoder from the photoconductor (drum) shaft.
5. Slide the photoconductor (drum) to the front and position it in the groove.

Procedure to install
When you install a new photoconductor (drum), do the following tests:
l Reset the consumable counter, SDS test 01-8-001, life time of the photoconductor
l the SDS test 51, the service test print to check the print quality
l Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints

18.06.2002 531
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the photoconductor

The photoconductor of the Oc· TDS400 is a photoconductor with an organic photoconductive layer.
The photoconductor is the center of the process.

The photoconductor includes:

Transport layer Generation layer Adhesion layer Aluminium drum

The photoconductor diameter is 80 mm, the circumference is 251.3 mm.

By mechanical wear the quality of the photoconductor decreases. After every 1000 length meter the wear of the
photoconductor is compensated by 2% extra light of the print head.

Photoconductor key figures and attention points:

1. lifetime min. 21,000 lm (68900 lf)

2. Stock: temperature: 10 - 35 °C (50°F - 95°F)
no condensation on the photoconductor
the environment air must be dry and clean
never expose to corrosive gasses, for example NH3
3. photoconductor (drum)
handling: expose to sunlight: never
expose to TL-tube: < 5 min., so use the protection sheet.

Attention: Hands: never touch with bare hands, clean with a dry tissue
Body: Skin particles, hair: never on the photoconductor,
it will affect the surface of the photoconductor surface.

18.06.2002 532
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The process
The process steps are:

Developing roller Photoconductor Printhead Charge Post-exposure

(drum)

Transfer Separation Cleaning

Short explanation of the process

The photoconductor is charged even and negatively up to -670 volt.
After charging the photoconductor (drum) is image exposed.
At the exposed places the photoconductor is discharged to approximately -200 volt. On the photoconductor
(drum) exists now a latent image of the original or plot.
The latent image is developed by black toner and is now visible on the photoconductor (drum).
The toner image is electrically transferred onto the copy material, which is transported against the
photoconductor (drum).
Separation of the copy material from the photoconductor (drum) is done by electrically neutralising of the copy
material.
The toner image on the copy material is fixed by heat of the fuser.
The residual toner on the photoconductor (drum) is cleaned off by a cleaning blade.
The residual charge on the photoconductor (drum) is neutralised by light of a led array.
The photoconductor (drum) is after one turn neutral and can be used for the next cycle.

Voltage Neutral Exposure voltage Bias voltage Contrast voltage

photoconductor (Optical Density)
(drum)

18.06.2002 533
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Charge on drum Toner on drum Total charge

18.06.2002 534
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to clean and polish the photoconductor

Warning:
Do not smoke during cleaning or polishing the photoconductor.
Dispose the cotton wool and gloves according to your local laws and regulations.
Wash your hands completely after the cleaning operation.

The tools and materials

Required materials to clean and polish the photoconductor.

Description Codenumber EUR Codenumber USA

Lintfree cloth (Maslin) 5630.211 5630.211
Cotton wool 9714.529 9714.529
Cleaner K 1929.022 1929.023
Cleaner P 1987.994 1987.798
Disposable gloves 2831.001 2831.001
Plastic bags (20) 9714.529 9714.529

How to clean the photoconductor

1. Put the photoconductor in the cleaning position.

2. Take a dry and clean maslin cloth.
3. Remove the loose toner from the photoconductor.
4. Apply the cleaner K to a clean maslin cloth.
5. Remove joined toner from the photoconductor.
6. Apply cleaner K to a clean maslin cloth .
7. Clean the surface of the photoconductor.
8. Wait 1 minute.
9. Make sure that the cleaner K has evaporated completely.
10. Install the photoconductor and units.
11. Make a test print.
Note:
It is possible that the spot that you clean is lighter in darker area's.
This occurrence disappears after 10 - 25 prints.

How to polish the photoconductor

1. Put the photoconductor in the cleaning position.

2. First execute the procedure "How to clean the photoconductor".
3. Apply cleaner P to a dry and clean piece cotton wool.
4. Polish the edges of the photoconductor.
5. Apply cleaner P to a new dry and clean piece cotton wool.
6. Polish the surface of the photoconductor.
7. Rotate slowly the photoconductor.
8. Make a circular polish movement at the surface.
9. Take a dry and clean piece cotton wool.
10. Rub the surface.
11. Rotate slowly the photoconductor.
12. Make a circular polish movement at the surface.
13. Take a dry and clean piece cotton wool until the new piece remains clean.
14. The surface must be clean and shiny.
15. Start the procedure "How to clean the photoconductor".

Note:
First prints have low density.
This occurrence disappears after 10 - 25 prints.

18.06.2002 535
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PHOTOCONDUCTOR
1 7069.008 -PACKED PHOTOCONDUCTOR 1
2 7045.269 -LEAF SPRING 1
3 7095.264 -GEAR 1
4 2912.554 -SPRING HOUSING 1
5 1037.688 -EARTH WIRE 1
6 2962.860 -RESISTOR ASSY, 100K 1
R1
10 7128.906 -ROTARY ENCODER 1
12 7128.913 -MOUNTING STRIP 1
14 7128.914 -SPACER 1

18.06.2002 536
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 01-8-001 Display / set the life time of the photoconductor (in

linear meters)]

Description Display / Reset the life time of the photoconductor in linear meters.

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 537
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 02 Charging
Fill in instructions

041 Corona wire

042 Grid wire
043 High voltage PBA
046 Ozone filters
047 Fan
049 Charging unit
078 Mechanical connections
079 Electrical connections
080 Others Charging

18.06.2002 538
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Black lines/stripes
Description
There are unwanted black lines and/or stripes on the image of the print in the feed direction.

Grid wires are polluted at one point. There is more charge on the photoconductor at this point
of pollution.
Weak lines and/or stripes of approximately 3mm occur in the feed direction.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

Corona wire assy Check

18.06.2002 539
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Smell of ozone
Description
During printing a strong smell of ozone can be observed.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0204-5 22M1 Fan assy 22-4-001 047

0204-7 Ozone filter Replace 046

18.06.2002 540
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove the charge corona unit

Note: When you put the protection cover in its oprating position, do not bend the 2 ridges.

Procedure to remove
Procedure to install

18.06.2002 541
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Replace the charge corona wire

Procedure
1. Remove the charge corona unit from the machine and put it on a flat table .
2. Remove at the rear side the plastic cover strip.
3. Remove the old corona wire. Check that no little piece remains in the unit.
4. Clean the corona housing with a towel moistened with water, Never use RBS or cleaner K.
5. Remove the corona wire from the cardboard packing material. Do not bend the wire.
Little sticker with arrow indicates how the wire was scrolled.
6. Left side: put the O-ring over the pin and put the bead in the space.
7. Right side: put the bead in the space and attach the spring on the hook.
8. Clean the wire. Use a Masslinn cloth and moisten it with water.
9. Dry the grid wire with a cloth.
10. Replace the plastic cover strip.

Note:
When you install a new corona wire, do the following tests:
l the SDS test 02-8-001, reset the consumable counter for the life time of the charge corona
wire .
l the SDS test 51, the service test print to check the print quality.
l Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints .

Notes:

18.06.2002 542
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O High Voltage Supply Grid Voltage

22PBA01 22PBA04 02PBA01
X2 X1 T4 X2
+24V
1 1 PRE HV 1
GND REGULATOR OUTPUT
2 2
X3 X2 X5 CHGHV
CHGSUPEN
5 1

GND
X1
CURRENT CONTROL Charge unit 1

22X01
02X6
22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

02-Charge

18.06.2002 543
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Introduction to the Charging function

Charging is the first step in the electro-photographic process.
The aim of this function is to charge the OPC drum negative till the desired level of -670 V by 3 mtr/min.
The unit consists of:

Housing Corona wire

Grid wire (15x) Post-exposure Gridvoltage PBA

PBA 02PBA01
The corona wire thickness is 80 mm and is regulated to a constant current of 1000 uA total. This will give appr.
-6kV negative.
35 uA is used to charge the photoconductor (drum).
The 15 grid wires are made from stainless steel and the thickness is 0,15 mm.
They are supplied with a constant voltage of appr. - 660 volt negative by a resistor network on pba 02PBA01
gridvoltage.
Grid and housing are kept under the same constant voltage.

Working

When the charge corona is activated, the charge current (electrons) flow through the grid to the photoconductor
(drum) and partly to the metal housing.
So long there is a potential difference between the photoconductor (drum) and the grid, charge current flows to
the photoconductor (drum) and charges the photoconductor (drum).
The current flow to the photoconductor (drum) decreases because the potential difference between grid and the
photoconductor (drum) decreases, till both are in balance.

Post-exposure

To achieve a equal and desired charged photoconductor (drum), the photoconductor (drum) must be neutral
before the charging starts.
Post-exposure is done by the light of a led bar just before the corona unit.
Mechanical neutral (rest toner of previous copy) is done by a scraper.

Ozone

Over the full width of the machine a ozone filter is build under the photoconductor (drum). The filters are placed
in a plastic box and the air is sucked from the machine inside into the box by fan CONFAN.
The lifetime of the filters is machine lifetime.

Cleaning

Clean housing and grid with water, never with RBS or cleaner K (toner dissolves in alcohol and can left behind
as pollution).
Clean the corona wire with water.
Cleaning Procedure see.....

18.06.2002 544
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

How to clean the charge wires and unit

Tools and materials

Required materials to clean the charge corona wire and unit, see

Description
Maslin cloth
Tweezers
Water
How to clean the charge wires and unit
1. If extreme corrosion of the frame, replace the charge unit.
2. Remove the covers of the end blocks.
3. Clean the unit, do not use any solvent.
4. Apply water to a small piece of clean maslin cloth.
5. Use the tweezers, clean the charge and the grid wires, and frame.
6. Take a dry and clean piece of clean maslin cloth and dry the charge and the grid wires,
and frame.
7. Put the covers on the end blocks.

Note:
Corrosion is removed easily with water.

18.06.2002 545
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

AIR SUPPLY, SECTION 1
1 7048.518 -SUCTION BOX ASSY 1
2 2926.727 --CLAMP 1
3 2926.728 --CLAMP 1
4 2944.945 --CLAMP 8
5 2926.707 --FAN ASSY 24V 1
6 2926.714 --SNAP RIVET 4
7 2926.715 --FILTER 2

18.06.2002 546
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

AIR SUPPLY, SECTION 2
8 2926.705 -GUIDE PLATE 1
9 2945.093 -GUIDE PLATE 1
13 7095.083 -COVER PLATE ASSY 1
15 2912.644 -PICK PAWL 1
18 2912.434 -BRACKET, RH 1
19 2912.435 -BRACKET, LH 1
20 2945.094 -PROFILE ASSY 1
21 2926.733 -BUSH 1
22 2926.731 -SEAL PLATE 2
23 1828.054 -SEALING STRIP 2
42 2945.073 -HOUSING, FRONT 8
43 2945.074 -HOUSING, REAR 2
44 2945.075 -GUIDE WHEEL 10

18.06.2002 547
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

CHARGING UNIT
1 2999.821 -CHARGING ASSY 1
6 2999.818 --CORONA-WIRE ASSY 1
8 2912.615 --LID 1
10 2912.620 -PRESSURE BLOCK 2
11 3861.198 -COMPRESSION SPRING 2
12 5583.883 -ERASER PBA 3
02PBA02
13 2912.622 -BUSH 9
19 5583.923 -GRID PBA 1
02PBA01
20 2999.822 -BUSH 2

18.06.2002 548
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

18.06.2002 549
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 02-6-001 Activate the charge unit HV-power supply (CHSUPEN

22PBA04) ]

Warning
Remove the gear of the magnet roller of the developing unit to prevent system polution.

Purpose To check the correct function of the charging (22PBA04 - CHGHV).

Check On 22PBA04: TP2 to TP5

CHGSUP ON: 0,9 to 1,1V DC

Remarks Active functions during this test:

DRIMORL ON
CHGSUPEN ON
CHGERA ON
CONFAN ON
CONBIAS ON

18.06.2002 550
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 02-8-001 Display / set the life time of the charge corona wire (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the charge corona wire in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks

18.06.2002 551
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[ 02-8-002 Display / set the life time of the charge corona unit (in
linear meters) ]

Description Display / set the life time of the charge corona unit in linear meters

Value Range: 0 ... 99,999,999 lm

Default: 0

Remarks Grid wires are not replaced by the technician. Only the compleet unit.

18.06.2002 552
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints

Purpose
To select the amount of light to get the correct saturation and optimal resolution for the print
head.
As result, the optical density and the resolution is correct.

Check
1. Use roll paper 75 gr/m2 with a minimum width of 841 mm (34").
2. Activate the SDS test 49: Adjust the light intensity for average line / text prints .
On the print 19 blocks are printed with increased optical density.
Every step is indicated with a number, from 4 to 76 (duty cycle step).
3. Check the blocks and the line pairs.
4. Specification, check the middle column
l The optical density must be 1.2 (Use the Agfa greyscale)
l The block must be a correct square and equal black
l The three line patterns at the side of the block must have an open structure (you
must see 6 line pairs)
5. Select the number at the side of the block with the correct specifications.
A number in between two blocks is possible.

Correction
1. Activate the SDS test 04-1-003
2. Enter the selected number in the SDS test.

Note:
To adjust the light intensity of the left and / or the right side of the print head, go to

18.06.2002 553
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the light intensity for the left and right side print head
Purpose
To select the amount of light to have the same saturation and resolution as the middle print
head.
As result, the optical density is correct.

Before you begin

1. The adjustment of the middle print head must be correct.

Check
1. Use roll paper 75 gr/m2 with a minimum width of 841 mm (34").
2. Activate the SDS test 51 (Service test print)
3. Check the optical density in the wide line K3 and
the line pattern in the wide line K1.
4. Specification: must be the same as for the middle print head.

Correction
1. Activate the SDS test: Adjust the light intensity for the left or right print head unit
04-1-005 Left print head unit
04-1-007 Right side print head unit
2. Correction:
Increase the value: higher optical density (= darker)
Decrease the value: lower optical density (= lighter)

18.06.2002 554
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the extra light intensity for darker prints (poster mode)
Purpose
To add additional toner on the prints.
Special for the prints with grey and black areas (for example posters).

Before you begin

l Make sure that the amount of light for average line / text prints mode is correct.

Warning
The operator can select for additional dark copies: Poster mode ON or OFF.
ALL the next copies (no prints) are made with these settings!!

Check
1. Select Poster mode ON.
2. Make a copy or a print with a solid black area.
3. Check with the Agfa grey scale the density of the solid black area
4. Specification:
l The optimal density for the Poster mode is 1.3.
l The block must be a correct square and equal black

Correction
1. Activate the SDS test 04-1-004
2. Enter a higher or lower value in the SDS test:
Increase the value: higher optical density (= darker)
Decrease the value: lower optical density (= lighter)
Note:
The default value of this adjustment is approximately 30% higher than the adjustment of the
normal text / line mode.

Warning:
Note: If the value of the poster mode is too high, it will result in a too low resolution, more toner
use and a very high risk of carrier development.

18.06.2002 555
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Adjust the vertical and horzontal alignment of the print head

Purpose
To align the image output of the three print heads, in horizontal and vertical direction.

Check
1. Make a print from the SDS test 51.
2. Check the horizontal and vertical lines for displacement.
3. Specification: No displacement in horizontal and vertical direction.

1
correct line

2
PHD1 line too high
PHD3 line too low

3
PHD1 line too far to the left (gap)
PHD3 line too far to the left (overlap)

Correction
Vertical adjustment, see the line 2: PHD1 too high, PHD 3 to low.
l Move the print head 1 vertical: do the SDS test 04-1-010
Move the print head 3 vertical: do the SDS test 04-1-012
(Move the print head 2 vertical: do the SDS test 04-1-011 )
l To move the line upwards: decrease the value
To move the line downwards: increase the value
Note:
Print head 1 and 3 are aligned in the factory to the standard position of print head 2.
If the adjustment of the horizontal position of the print head 1 and / or 3 is not possible, you can
adjust the print head 2).

Horizontal adjustment, see the line 3: PHD1 too far to the left (gap), PHD 3 too far to the left
(overlap).
l Move the print head 1 horizontal: do the SDS test 04-1-008
To move the line to the right side: decrease the value
To move the line to the left side: increase the value
l To move the print head 3 horizontal: do the SDS test 04-1-009
To move the line to the right side: increase the value
To move the line to the left side: decrease the value
l 30 points is about 1 mm shift

18.06.2002 556
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CAS-C 04 Print Head

Fill in instructions

121 Printhead
122 PBA 's
158 Mechanical connections
159 Electrical connections
160 Others Exposure

18.06.2002 557
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[4501 - (Print head test tool error)]

Description
Fault condition: Printhead test tool sequece went not correct.

Possible cause: Printhead not correctly adjusted in printhead tool (M&L).

Operator actions: Switch the printer Off and On for restart.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-001 PRINTHEAD ASSY, PACKED replace

121

18.06.2002 558
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[4502 - (Print head not correct)]

Description
Signal name: PHD
Fault condition: The PBA of the print head is broken.
There is no connection between the printer CPU and the print head
interface.
Print head failed to pass the print head tool (M&L).
Norm value: -
Description:

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-025 PHD inteface PBA, 04-9-002
04PBA04
0802-051 Bundle

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 Replace

18.06.2002 559
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

[4503]
Description
Error occurs in case of printhead interface is broken, or connection between printer CPU and
printhead interface is broken.

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

2202-002 CPU PBA 22PBA01 replace 122

0402-025 PHD INTERFACE PBA 1 replace
04PBA04, PHD I/O 855
electrical connections check
159

18.06.2002 560
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

4502
Description
Error occurs in case of:,
Printhead interface is broken.
Connection between CPU and printhead is broken.
Printhead testtool sequence went not correct .

Suspected Parts & Settings:

Index Description Test Action Bulletin Cas Diagram

0402-025 PHD INTERFACE PBA1 SDS replace 122

04PBA04,PHD I/O 04-9-002
2202-002 CPU PBA 1 22PBA01 replace
855
2560 Bundle Check
159

18.06.2002 561
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Remove / replace the Print Head or I/O pba

Note: Make sure that the print head unit and the cables do not touch the photoconductor.

Procedure to remove the PHD

1. Open the fuser.
2. Remove the top cover, 4 screws.
3. Remove the cover over the PBA on top of the print head unit, 3 screws.
4. Remove the 5 connectors: Cn0404X1, 2, 9, 10 and 04X1.
5. Loosen the earth wire.
6. Remove the pin at the right side, 1 clip and 1 screw.
7. Remove the print head unit.

Procedure to install the PHD

There is no description.

Note:
Make sure that after assembly, the print head is aligned to the right and cannot move in the
horizontal direction (stopped by the clip)

Procedure to remove / replace the I/O pba

There is no description

Note: The CCD data of the PHD is stored in the EPROM.

Restore of the printhead parameters, see description SDS 71/72 Backup / Restore, when to do it

I/O pba:
No restore action.

PHD:
NEVER REPLACE ONLY THE PHD, REPLACE ALWAYS THE PHD ASSY !! (PHD + I/O pba)

PHD + I/O pba:

No restore action.

18.06.2002 562
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

CPU I/O
22PBA01
X10 04X1
GND -T
13 1 04R1
PHDNTC Printhead NTC
14 2

PHD I/O
04PBA04
X6 X10 X1
PHDINTINP +5V
1 1 1 4
GND_S GND 04B1
2 2 2 1 Photoco
PHDINTOUT GND Speed E
3 3 3 3
GND_S Sensor
4 4 4
PHDINTCLK PHOSPENCSE_A
5 5 5
GND_S
6 6
PHDINTEN0
7 7 04PHD(L)01
GND_S
8 8 X3 X1
PHDINTEN1
9 9

RFI
22PBA06
X5 X1 X2 X2 X4 X2

04PHD(R)03 04PHD(M)02
X1 X8 X5 X1

X2 X7 X6 X2

22PBA02 Low Voltage Supply (printer)

04-Print Head

18.06.2002 563
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

General Printhead

The print head discharges the photoconductor with the aid of light from LEDs.
The Oc· TDS400 is a "black writing" printer.
This means that light from the LEDs is used to discharge the photoconductor (photoconductor)
where black is needed on the copy.
In general the percentage black on a copy is approximately 5%.
This means that the LEDs are ON during 5% of the copy.
The printing resolution of the TDS400 is 600 x 600 dpi.

Note:
After every 1000 length meter the wear of the photoconductor is compensated by 2% extra
light of the print head.

3 Staggerd print heads are used to cover the whole width of the maximum paper seize 36"-
914.4 mm.
To print 600 dpi, 21.600 LED's are used.

Fig. Layout
Fig. Crossview

18.06.2002 564
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Lay-out of the print heads

horizontal
vertical
alignment alignment
PH 2
PH 1

left
margin PH 1 PH 2 PH 3

18.06.2002 565
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

PICO module
From Release 1.2

Pixel Compensation (PICO).

The quality of the LED's in the print head are not the same.
The light output of each LED is compensated by the PICO module.
The compensation values are set by the manufactory of the print head and stored in a EEPROM inside
the print head assembly.
The compensation data is unique to the print head.
PICO functionality improves the copy quality of solid black areas on copies and prints.
It will not improve the copy quality of line drawings and the copy and prints with a lot of text.
PICO increases also the lifetime of the print head.

18.06.2002 566
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The operation of the encoder

Purpose:
The encoder improves the print quality when the speed of the photoconductor changes.
It prevents for the frequency patterns and vertical alignment errors.

The encoder is installed on the shaft of the photoconductor and measures the speed of the
rotation.
The encoder generates the speed signals which are passed to the print head interface pba.
The PHD interface calculates the line frequency of the print head LED's.

Result: the line frequency of the LED's follow the speed differences of the photoconductor.

18.06.2002 567
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

The print head interface 04PBA06

Interfacing
Compensation for overlapping
Compensation for vertical and horizontal print head alignment errors
Compensation for different light outputs between print heads
Compensation for a wrong 1:1 projection due to speed tolerances of the printer engine
Print head quality test

18.06.2002 568
TSM Oce TDS400 - T.S.M.

Image

Index Spp Part No Description Qty

PRINTHEAD
1 5600.437 -PRINTHEAD ASSY, PACKED 1
25 5584.714 -PHD INTERFACE PBA 1
04PBA04, PHD I/O
38 7094.677 -NTC ASSY 1
PHDNTC, 04R1

18.06.2002 569